Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
The Project Gutenberg eBook of Rules for a Dictionary
Catalogue
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
will have to check the laws of the country where you are located
before using this eBook.
Title: Rules for a Dictionary Catalogue
Author: Charles A. Cutter
Release date: April 8, 2019 [eBook #59215]
Most recently updated: June 25, 2020
Language: English
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/59215
Credits: E-text prepared by MWS, RichardW, and the Online Distributed
Proofreading Team (http://www.pgdp.net) from page images
generously made available by Internet Archive (https://archive.org)
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK RULES FOR A
DICTIONARY CATALOGUE ***
Catalogue
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
will have to check the laws of the country where you are located
before using this eBook.
Title: Rules for a Dictionary Catalogue
Author: Charles A. Cutter
Release date: April 8, 2019 [eBook #59215]
Most recently updated: June 25, 2020
Language: English
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/59215
Credits: E-text prepared by MWS, RichardW, and the Online Distributed
Proofreading Team (http://www.pgdp.net) from page images
generously made available by Internet Archive (https://archive.org)
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK RULES FOR A
DICTIONARY CATALOGUE ***
Page 4
E-text prepared by MWS, RichardW,
and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team
(http://www.pgdp.net)
from page images generously made available by
Internet Archive
(https://archive.org)
Note: Images of the original pages are available through
Internet Archive. See
https://archive.org/details/rulesfordictiona00cuttuoft
and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team
(http://www.pgdp.net)
from page images generously made available by
Internet Archive
(https://archive.org)
Note: Images of the original pages are available through
Internet Archive. See
https://archive.org/details/rulesfordictiona00cuttuoft
Page 5
U. S . BURE AU OF E DUCAT I ON S P E CI AL RE P ORT ON
P UBL I C L I BRARI E S —PART I I
RUL E S F OR A DI CT I ONARY CATAL OGUE
by Char l es A. Cut t er
P UBL I C L I BRARI E S —PART I I
RUL E S F OR A DI CT I ONARY CATAL OGUE
by Char l es A. Cut t er
Page 6
U. S. BUREAU OF EDUCATION
SPECIAL REPORT ON PUBLIC LIBRARIES—PART II
RULES
FOR A
DICTIONARY CATALOGUE
BY
CHARLES A. CUTTER
LIBRARIAN OF THE BOSTON ATHENÆUM
THIRD EDITION
WITH CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS AND AN ALPHABETICAL INDEX
WASHINGTON
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
1891
SPECIAL REPORT ON PUBLIC LIBRARIES—PART II
RULES
FOR A
DICTIONARY CATALOGUE
BY
CHARLES A. CUTTER
LIBRARIAN OF THE BOSTON ATHENÆUM
THIRD EDITION
WITH CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS AND AN ALPHABETICAL INDEX
WASHINGTON
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
1891
Page 7
Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1875, by
CHARLES A. CUTTER,
In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington.
CHARLES A. CUTTER,
In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington.
Page 8
PREFATORY NOTE.
There are plenty of treatises on classification, of which
accounts may be found in Edwards’s Memoirs of Libraries and
Petzholdt’s Bibliotheca Bibliographica. The classification of the
St. Louis Public School Library Catalogue is briefly defended by
W. T. Harris in the preface (which is reprinted, with some
additions, from the Journal of Speculative Philosophy for 1870).
Professor Abbot’s plan is explained in a pamphlet printed and in
use at Harvard College Library, also in his “Statement respecting
the New Catalogue” (part of the report of the examining
committee of the library for 1863), and in the North American
Review for January, 1869. The plan of Mr. Schwartz, librarian of
the Apprentices’ Library, New York, is partially set forth in the
preface to his catalogue; and a fuller explanation is preparing for
publication. For an author-catalogue there are the famous 91 rules
of the British Museum [1] (prefixed to the Catalogue of Printed
Books, Vol. 1, 1841, or conveniently arranged in alphabetical
order by Th. Nichols in his Handbook for Readers at the British
Museum, 1866); Professor Jewett’s modification of them
(Smithsonian Report on the Construction of Catalogues, 1852);
Mr. F. B. Perkins’s further modification (in the American
There are plenty of treatises on classification, of which
accounts may be found in Edwards’s Memoirs of Libraries and
Petzholdt’s Bibliotheca Bibliographica. The classification of the
St. Louis Public School Library Catalogue is briefly defended by
W. T. Harris in the preface (which is reprinted, with some
additions, from the Journal of Speculative Philosophy for 1870).
Professor Abbot’s plan is explained in a pamphlet printed and in
use at Harvard College Library, also in his “Statement respecting
the New Catalogue” (part of the report of the examining
committee of the library for 1863), and in the North American
Review for January, 1869. The plan of Mr. Schwartz, librarian of
the Apprentices’ Library, New York, is partially set forth in the
preface to his catalogue; and a fuller explanation is preparing for
publication. For an author-catalogue there are the famous 91 rules
of the British Museum [1] (prefixed to the Catalogue of Printed
Books, Vol. 1, 1841, or conveniently arranged in alphabetical
order by Th. Nichols in his Handbook for Readers at the British
Museum, 1866); Professor Jewett’s modification of them
(Smithsonian Report on the Construction of Catalogues, 1852);
Mr. F. B. Perkins’s further modification (in the American
Page 9
Publisher for 1869), and a chapter in the second volume of
Edwards. [2] But for a dictionary-catalogue as a whole, and for
most of its parts, there is no manual whatever. Nor have any of the
above-mentioned works attempted to set forth the rules in a
systematic way or to investigate what might be called the first
principles of cataloguing. It is to be expected that a first attempt
will be incomplete, and I shall be obliged to librarians for
criticisms, objections, or new problems, with or without solutions.
{4} With such assistance perhaps a second edition of these hints
would deserve the title—Rules. [3]
[1] Compiled by a committee of five, Panizzi, Th. Watts, J. Winter Jones, J. H. Parry, and E.
Edwards, in several months of hard labor.
[2] To these may now be added: Condensed rules for an author and title catalogue, prepared
by the co-operation committee, A. L. A. (printed in the Appendix of the present Rules); F: B.
Perkins’s San Francisco cataloguing (1884); C: Dziatzko’s Instruction für die Ordnung der
Titel im alphabetischen Zettelkatalog der Univ. Bibliothek zu Breslau (1886), of which an
adaptation by Mr. K. A: Linderfelt will shortly be published; Melvil Dewey’s Condensed rules
for a card catalogue, with 36 sample cards (published in the Library notes, v. 1, no. 2, 1886,
and reprinted as “Rules for author and classed catalogs;” with changes, additions, and a
“Bibliography of catalog rules” by Mary Salome Cutler, Boston, 1888, and again as “Library
School rules,” Boston, 1889); G. Fumagalli’s Cataloghi di biblioteche (1887); H: B.
Wheatley’s How to catalogue a library (1889); and various discussions in the Library journal,
the Neuer Anzeiger, and the Centralblatt für Bibliothekswesen.
[3] In this second edition I have retained the discussions of principles of the first edition and
added others, because it seems to me to be quite as important to teach cataloguers the theory,
so that they can catalogue independently of rules, as to accustom them to refer constantly to
hard and fast rules. The index, which will be published separately, has been enlarged so as to
form an alphabetical or “dictionary” arrangement of the rules.
Edwards. [2] But for a dictionary-catalogue as a whole, and for
most of its parts, there is no manual whatever. Nor have any of the
above-mentioned works attempted to set forth the rules in a
systematic way or to investigate what might be called the first
principles of cataloguing. It is to be expected that a first attempt
will be incomplete, and I shall be obliged to librarians for
criticisms, objections, or new problems, with or without solutions.
{4} With such assistance perhaps a second edition of these hints
would deserve the title—Rules. [3]
[1] Compiled by a committee of five, Panizzi, Th. Watts, J. Winter Jones, J. H. Parry, and E.
Edwards, in several months of hard labor.
[2] To these may now be added: Condensed rules for an author and title catalogue, prepared
by the co-operation committee, A. L. A. (printed in the Appendix of the present Rules); F: B.
Perkins’s San Francisco cataloguing (1884); C: Dziatzko’s Instruction für die Ordnung der
Titel im alphabetischen Zettelkatalog der Univ. Bibliothek zu Breslau (1886), of which an
adaptation by Mr. K. A: Linderfelt will shortly be published; Melvil Dewey’s Condensed rules
for a card catalogue, with 36 sample cards (published in the Library notes, v. 1, no. 2, 1886,
and reprinted as “Rules for author and classed catalogs;” with changes, additions, and a
“Bibliography of catalog rules” by Mary Salome Cutler, Boston, 1888, and again as “Library
School rules,” Boston, 1889); G. Fumagalli’s Cataloghi di biblioteche (1887); H: B.
Wheatley’s How to catalogue a library (1889); and various discussions in the Library journal,
the Neuer Anzeiger, and the Centralblatt für Bibliothekswesen.
[3] In this second edition I have retained the discussions of principles of the first edition and
added others, because it seems to me to be quite as important to teach cataloguers the theory,
so that they can catalogue independently of rules, as to accustom them to refer constantly to
hard and fast rules. The index, which will be published separately, has been enlarged so as to
form an alphabetical or “dictionary” arrangement of the rules.
Page 10
CONTENTS.
PREFATORY NOTE • 3
CONTENTS • 5
GENERAL REMARKS • 7
Objects • 8
Means • 8
Reasons for Choice Among Methods • 8
Definitions (with a note on classification) • 8
ENTRY (Where to enter)
I. Author-Entry • 15
Catalogue • 15
A. Authors • 16
(a.) Personal • 17
(i.) Who is to be considered author • 17
(ii.) What part of the name is to be used • 20
(iii.) What form of the name is to be used • 24
(b.) Corporate • 27
B. Substitutes for Authors • 33
C. References • 35
D. Economies • 37
II. Title-Entry • 38
Catalogue • 38
Titles • 38
III. Subject-Entry • 45
Catalogue • 45
Subjects • 46
(a.) Entries considered separately • 49
(i.) Choice between different subjects • 49
(ii.) Choice between different names • 49
PREFATORY NOTE • 3
CONTENTS • 5
GENERAL REMARKS • 7
Objects • 8
Means • 8
Reasons for Choice Among Methods • 8
Definitions (with a note on classification) • 8
ENTRY (Where to enter)
I. Author-Entry • 15
Catalogue • 15
A. Authors • 16
(a.) Personal • 17
(i.) Who is to be considered author • 17
(ii.) What part of the name is to be used • 20
(iii.) What form of the name is to be used • 24
(b.) Corporate • 27
B. Substitutes for Authors • 33
C. References • 35
D. Economies • 37
II. Title-Entry • 38
Catalogue • 38
Titles • 38
III. Subject-Entry • 45
Catalogue • 45
Subjects • 46
(a.) Entries considered separately • 49
(i.) Choice between different subjects • 49
(ii.) Choice between different names • 49
Page 11
(b.) Entries considered as parts of a whole • 57
IV. Form-Entry • 59
V. Analysis • 60
STYLE (How to enter)
Catalogue • 61
VI. Style • 62
A. Headings • 63
B. Titles (Abridgment, etc.) • 67
C. Editions • 73
D. Imprints • 74
E. Contents and Notes • 78
F. References • 79
G. Language • 80
H. Capitals • 80
I. Punctuation, etc. • 81
J. Arrangement • 83
(a.) Headings • 83
(b.) Titles • 88
(c.) Contents • 92
(d.) Subjects • 93
K. Etc. (Sets, Rare books, etc.) • 98
APPENDICES
I. Condensed Rules for an Author and Title Catalog.
A. American Library Association • 99
B. Library Association of the United Kingdom • 103
C. Bodleian • 104
D. Dewey’s Rules • 107
II. Transliteration.
A. American Library Association • 108
B. Sanskrit • 112
C. Semitic • 113
D. Russian • 114
III. Book sizes (American Library Association) • 115
IV. Alphabetical Order (Edmands) • 116
V. Abbreviations • 119
VI. Other Catalogues for Librarians • 126
IV. Form-Entry • 59
V. Analysis • 60
STYLE (How to enter)
Catalogue • 61
VI. Style • 62
A. Headings • 63
B. Titles (Abridgment, etc.) • 67
C. Editions • 73
D. Imprints • 74
E. Contents and Notes • 78
F. References • 79
G. Language • 80
H. Capitals • 80
I. Punctuation, etc. • 81
J. Arrangement • 83
(a.) Headings • 83
(b.) Titles • 88
(c.) Contents • 92
(d.) Subjects • 93
K. Etc. (Sets, Rare books, etc.) • 98
APPENDICES
I. Condensed Rules for an Author and Title Catalog.
A. American Library Association • 99
B. Library Association of the United Kingdom • 103
C. Bodleian • 104
D. Dewey’s Rules • 107
II. Transliteration.
A. American Library Association • 108
B. Sanskrit • 112
C. Semitic • 113
D. Russian • 114
III. Book sizes (American Library Association) • 115
IV. Alphabetical Order (Edmands) • 116
V. Abbreviations • 119
VI. Other Catalogues for Librarians • 126
Page 12
VII. Bibliographical aids in cataloguing • 128
INDEX • 135
INDEX • 135
Page 13
RULES
FOR A
DICTIONARY CATALOGUE.
No code of cataloguing could be adopted in all points by every
one, because the libraries for study and the libraries for reading
have different objects, and those which combine the two do so in
different proportions. Again, the preparation of a catalogue must
vary as it is to be manuscript or printed, and, if the latter, as it is to
be merely an index to the library, giving in the shortest possible
compass clues by which the public can find books, or is to attempt
to furnish more information on various points, or finally is to be
made with a certain regard to what may be called style. Without
pretending to exactness, we may divide dictionary catalogues into
short-title, medium-title, and full-title or bibliographic; typical
examples of the three being, 1º, the Boston Mercantile (1869) or
the Cincinnati Public (1871); 2º, the Boston Public (1861 and
1866), the Boston Athenæum (1874–82); 3º, the author-part of the
Congress (1869) and the Surgeon-General’s (1872–74) or least
abridged of any, the present card catalogue of the Boston Public
Library. To avoid the constant repetition of such phrases as “the
full catalogue of a large library” and “a concise finding list,” I
FOR A
DICTIONARY CATALOGUE.
No code of cataloguing could be adopted in all points by every
one, because the libraries for study and the libraries for reading
have different objects, and those which combine the two do so in
different proportions. Again, the preparation of a catalogue must
vary as it is to be manuscript or printed, and, if the latter, as it is to
be merely an index to the library, giving in the shortest possible
compass clues by which the public can find books, or is to attempt
to furnish more information on various points, or finally is to be
made with a certain regard to what may be called style. Without
pretending to exactness, we may divide dictionary catalogues into
short-title, medium-title, and full-title or bibliographic; typical
examples of the three being, 1º, the Boston Mercantile (1869) or
the Cincinnati Public (1871); 2º, the Boston Public (1861 and
1866), the Boston Athenæum (1874–82); 3º, the author-part of the
Congress (1869) and the Surgeon-General’s (1872–74) or least
abridged of any, the present card catalogue of the Boston Public
Library. To avoid the constant repetition of such phrases as “the
full catalogue of a large library” and “a concise finding list,” I
Page 14
shall use the three words Short, Medium, and Full as proper
names, with the preliminary caution that the Short family are not
all of the same size, that there is more than one Medium, and that
Full may be Fuller and Fullest. Short, if single-columned, is
generally a title-a-liner; if printed in double columns, it allows the
title occasionally to exceed one line, but not, if possible, two;
Medium does not limit itself in this way, but it seldom exceeds
four lines, and gets many titles into a single line. Full usually fills
three or four lines and often takes six or seven for a title.
The number of the following rules is not owing to any
complexity of system, but to the number of cases to which a few
simple principles have to be applied. They are especially designed
for Medium, but may easily be adapted to Short by excision and
marginal notes. The almost universal practice of printing the shelf-
numbers or the class-numbers renders some of them unnecessary
for town and city libraries.
OBJECTS. [ 4 ]
1. To enable a person to find a book of which either
(A ) the author,
(B ) the title, or
(C ) the subject is known.
2. To show what the library has
(D ) by a given author
(E ) on a given subject
names, with the preliminary caution that the Short family are not
all of the same size, that there is more than one Medium, and that
Full may be Fuller and Fullest. Short, if single-columned, is
generally a title-a-liner; if printed in double columns, it allows the
title occasionally to exceed one line, but not, if possible, two;
Medium does not limit itself in this way, but it seldom exceeds
four lines, and gets many titles into a single line. Full usually fills
three or four lines and often takes six or seven for a title.
The number of the following rules is not owing to any
complexity of system, but to the number of cases to which a few
simple principles have to be applied. They are especially designed
for Medium, but may easily be adapted to Short by excision and
marginal notes. The almost universal practice of printing the shelf-
numbers or the class-numbers renders some of them unnecessary
for town and city libraries.
OBJECTS. [ 4 ]
1. To enable a person to find a book of which either
(A ) the author,
(B ) the title, or
(C ) the subject is known.
2. To show what the library has
(D ) by a given author
(E ) on a given subject
Page 15
(F ) in a given kind of literature.
3. To assist in the choice of a book
(G ) as to its edition (bibliographically).
(H ) as to its character (literary or topical).
MEANS.
1. Author-entry with the necessary references (for A and D ).
2. Title-entry or title-reference (for B ).
3. Subject-entry, cross-references, and classed subject-table
(for C and E ).
4. Form-entry [5] (for F ).
5. Giving edition and imprint, with notes when necessary (for
G ).
6. Notes (for H ).
[4] Note to second edition. This statement of Objects and Means has been criticized; but as it
has also been frequently quoted, usually without change or credit, in the prefaces of catalogues
and elsewhere, I suppose it has on the whole been approved.
[5] Here the whole is designated by its most important member. The full name would be
form-and-language entry. Kind-entry would not suggest the right idea.
REASONS FOR CHOICE
among the several possible methods of attaining the OBJECTS.
Other things being equal, choose that entry
(1) That will probably be first looked under by the class of
people who use the library;
(2) That is consistent with other entries, so that one principle
can cover all;
3. To assist in the choice of a book
(G ) as to its edition (bibliographically).
(H ) as to its character (literary or topical).
MEANS.
1. Author-entry with the necessary references (for A and D ).
2. Title-entry or title-reference (for B ).
3. Subject-entry, cross-references, and classed subject-table
(for C and E ).
4. Form-entry [5] (for F ).
5. Giving edition and imprint, with notes when necessary (for
G ).
6. Notes (for H ).
[4] Note to second edition. This statement of Objects and Means has been criticized; but as it
has also been frequently quoted, usually without change or credit, in the prefaces of catalogues
and elsewhere, I suppose it has on the whole been approved.
[5] Here the whole is designated by its most important member. The full name would be
form-and-language entry. Kind-entry would not suggest the right idea.
REASONS FOR CHOICE
among the several possible methods of attaining the OBJECTS.
Other things being equal, choose that entry
(1) That will probably be first looked under by the class of
people who use the library;
(2) That is consistent with other entries, so that one principle
can cover all;
Page 16
(3) That will mass entries least in places where it is difficult to
so arrange them that they can be readily found, as under
names of nations and cities.
This applies very slightly to entries under first words, because it is
easy and sufficient to arrange them by the alphabet.
DEFINITIONS.
There is such confusion in the use of terms in the various prefaces to
catalogues—a confusion that at once springs from and leads to confusion
of thought and practice—that it is worth while to propose a systematic
nomenclature.
Analysis. See Reference, Analytical.
Anonymous, published without the author’s name.
Strictly a book is not anonymous if the author’s name appears
anywhere in it, but it is safest to treat it as anonymous if the author’s name
does not appear in the title.
Note that the words are “in the title,” not “on the title-page.”
Sometimes in Government publications the author’s name and the title of
his work do not appear on the title-page but on a page immediately
following. Such works are not anonymous.
Asyndetic, without cross-references. See Syndetic.
Author, in the narrower sense, is the person who writes a book; in
a wider sense it may be applied to him who is the cause of the
book’s existence by putting together the writings of several
authors (usually called the editor, more properly to be called
the collector). Bodies of men (societies, cities, legislative
so arrange them that they can be readily found, as under
names of nations and cities.
This applies very slightly to entries under first words, because it is
easy and sufficient to arrange them by the alphabet.
DEFINITIONS.
There is such confusion in the use of terms in the various prefaces to
catalogues—a confusion that at once springs from and leads to confusion
of thought and practice—that it is worth while to propose a systematic
nomenclature.
Analysis. See Reference, Analytical.
Anonymous, published without the author’s name.
Strictly a book is not anonymous if the author’s name appears
anywhere in it, but it is safest to treat it as anonymous if the author’s name
does not appear in the title.
Note that the words are “in the title,” not “on the title-page.”
Sometimes in Government publications the author’s name and the title of
his work do not appear on the title-page but on a page immediately
following. Such works are not anonymous.
Asyndetic, without cross-references. See Syndetic.
Author, in the narrower sense, is the person who writes a book; in
a wider sense it may be applied to him who is the cause of the
book’s existence by putting together the writings of several
authors (usually called the editor, more properly to be called
the collector). Bodies of men (societies, cities, legislative
Page 17
bodies, countries) are to be considered the authors of their
memoirs, transactions, journals, debates, reports, etc.
Class, a collection of objects having characteristics in common.
Books are classified by bringing together those which have the same
characteristics. [6] Of course any characteristics might be taken, as size, or
binding, or publisher. But as nobody wants to know what books there are
in the library in folio, or what quartos, or what books bound in russia or
calf, or what published by John Smith, or by Brown, Jones, and Robinson,
these bases of classification are left to the booksellers and auctioneers and
trade sales. Still, in case of certain unusual or noted bindings, as human
skin or Grolier’s, or early or famous publishers, as Aldus and Elzevir, a
partial class-list is sometimes very properly made. But books are most
commonly brought together in catalogues because they have the same
authors, or the same subjects, or the same literary form, or are written in
the same language, or were given by the same donor, or are designed for
the same class of readers. When brought together because they are by the
same author, they are not usually thought of as classified; they form the
author-catalogue, and need no further mention here except in regard to
arrangement. The classes, i. e., in this case the authors, might of course be
further classified according to their nations, or their professions (as the
subjects are in national or professional biographies), or by any other set of
common characteristics, but for library purposes an alphabetical
arrangement according to the spelling of their names is universally
acknowledged to be the best.
The classification by language is not generally used in full. There are
catalogues in which all the English books are separated from all the
foreign; in others there are separate lists of French books or German
books. The needs of each library must determine whether it is worth while
to prepare such lists. It is undeniably useful in almost any library to make
lists of the belles lettres in the different languages; which, though
nominally a classification by language, is really a classification by literary
form, the object being to bring together all the works with a certain
national flavor—the French flavor, the German flavor, or it may be a
memoirs, transactions, journals, debates, reports, etc.
Class, a collection of objects having characteristics in common.
Books are classified by bringing together those which have the same
characteristics. [6] Of course any characteristics might be taken, as size, or
binding, or publisher. But as nobody wants to know what books there are
in the library in folio, or what quartos, or what books bound in russia or
calf, or what published by John Smith, or by Brown, Jones, and Robinson,
these bases of classification are left to the booksellers and auctioneers and
trade sales. Still, in case of certain unusual or noted bindings, as human
skin or Grolier’s, or early or famous publishers, as Aldus and Elzevir, a
partial class-list is sometimes very properly made. But books are most
commonly brought together in catalogues because they have the same
authors, or the same subjects, or the same literary form, or are written in
the same language, or were given by the same donor, or are designed for
the same class of readers. When brought together because they are by the
same author, they are not usually thought of as classified; they form the
author-catalogue, and need no further mention here except in regard to
arrangement. The classes, i. e., in this case the authors, might of course be
further classified according to their nations, or their professions (as the
subjects are in national or professional biographies), or by any other set of
common characteristics, but for library purposes an alphabetical
arrangement according to the spelling of their names is universally
acknowledged to be the best.
The classification by language is not generally used in full. There are
catalogues in which all the English books are separated from all the
foreign; in others there are separate lists of French books or German
books. The needs of each library must determine whether it is worth while
to prepare such lists. It is undeniably useful in almost any library to make
lists of the belles lettres in the different languages; which, though
nominally a classification by language, is really a classification by literary
form, the object being to bring together all the works with a certain
national flavor—the French flavor, the German flavor, or it may be a
Page 18
classing by readers, the German books being catalogued together for a
German population, the French for the French, and so on. Again, it is
useful to give lists not of the belles lettres alone, but of all the works in the
rarer languages, as the Bodleian and the British Museum have published
separate lists of their Hebrew books. Here too the circumstances of each
library must determine where it shall draw the line between those
literatures which it will put by themselves and those which it will include
and hide in the mass of its general catalogue. Note, however, that some of
the difficulties of transliterating {10} names of modern Greek, Russian
authors, etc., are removed by putting their original works in a separate
catalogue, though translations still remain to puzzle us.
The catalogue by donors or original owners is usually partial (as those
of the Dowse, Barton, Prince, and Ticknor libraries). The catalogues by
classes of readers are also partial, hardly extending beyond Juvenile
literature and Sunday-school books. Of course many subject classes
amount to the same thing, the class Medicine being especially useful to
medical men, Theology to the theologians, and so on.
Classification by subject and classification by form are the most
common. An example will best show the distinction between them.
Theology, which is itself a subject, is also a class, that is, it is extensive
enough to have its parts, its chapters, so to speak (as Future Life, Holy
Spirit, Regeneration, Sin, Trinity), treated separately, each when so
treated (whether in books or only in thought) being itself a subject; all
these together, inasmuch as they possess this in common, that they have to
do with some part of the relations of God to man, form the class of
subjects Theology. Class, however, is applied to Poetry in a different
sense. It then signifies not a collection of similar subjects, but a collection
of books resembling one another in being composed in that form and with
that spirit, whatever it is, which is called poetical. In the subject-catalogue
class it is used in the first sense—collection of similar subjects; in the
form-catalogue it is used in the second—list of similar books.
Most systems of classification are mixed, as the following analysis of
one in actual use in a small library will show:
German population, the French for the French, and so on. Again, it is
useful to give lists not of the belles lettres alone, but of all the works in the
rarer languages, as the Bodleian and the British Museum have published
separate lists of their Hebrew books. Here too the circumstances of each
library must determine where it shall draw the line between those
literatures which it will put by themselves and those which it will include
and hide in the mass of its general catalogue. Note, however, that some of
the difficulties of transliterating {10} names of modern Greek, Russian
authors, etc., are removed by putting their original works in a separate
catalogue, though translations still remain to puzzle us.
The catalogue by donors or original owners is usually partial (as those
of the Dowse, Barton, Prince, and Ticknor libraries). The catalogues by
classes of readers are also partial, hardly extending beyond Juvenile
literature and Sunday-school books. Of course many subject classes
amount to the same thing, the class Medicine being especially useful to
medical men, Theology to the theologians, and so on.
Classification by subject and classification by form are the most
common. An example will best show the distinction between them.
Theology, which is itself a subject, is also a class, that is, it is extensive
enough to have its parts, its chapters, so to speak (as Future Life, Holy
Spirit, Regeneration, Sin, Trinity), treated separately, each when so
treated (whether in books or only in thought) being itself a subject; all
these together, inasmuch as they possess this in common, that they have to
do with some part of the relations of God to man, form the class of
subjects Theology. Class, however, is applied to Poetry in a different
sense. It then signifies not a collection of similar subjects, but a collection
of books resembling one another in being composed in that form and with
that spirit, whatever it is, which is called poetical. In the subject-catalogue
class it is used in the first sense—collection of similar subjects; in the
form-catalogue it is used in the second—list of similar books.
Most systems of classification are mixed, as the following analysis of
one in actual use in a small library will show:
Page 19
Art, science, and natural Subj.
history.
History and biography. Subj.
Poetry. Form (literary).
Encyclopædias and Form (practical).
books of reference.
Travels and adventures. Subj. (Has some similarity to a Form-
class.)
Railroads. Subj.
Fiction. Form. (Novels, a subdivision of
Fiction, is properly a Form-class;
but the differentia of the more
extensive class Fiction is not its
form, but its untruth; imaginary
voyages and the like of course
imitate the form of the works which
they parody.)
Relating to the Subj.
rebellion.
Magazines. Form (practical).
General literature, A mixture: 1. Hardly a class; that is to
essays, and religious say, it probably is a collection of
works. books having only this in common,
that they will not fit into any of the
other classes; 2. Form; 3. Subj.
Confining ourselves now to classification by subjects, the word can be
used in three senses:
1. Bringing books together which treat of the same subject
specifically.
That is, books which each treat of the whole of the subject and
not of a part only.
2. Bringing books together which treat of similar subjects.
Or, to express the same thing differently:
history.
History and biography. Subj.
Poetry. Form (literary).
Encyclopædias and Form (practical).
books of reference.
Travels and adventures. Subj. (Has some similarity to a Form-
class.)
Railroads. Subj.
Fiction. Form. (Novels, a subdivision of
Fiction, is properly a Form-class;
but the differentia of the more
extensive class Fiction is not its
form, but its untruth; imaginary
voyages and the like of course
imitate the form of the works which
they parody.)
Relating to the Subj.
rebellion.
Magazines. Form (practical).
General literature, A mixture: 1. Hardly a class; that is to
essays, and religious say, it probably is a collection of
works. books having only this in common,
that they will not fit into any of the
other classes; 2. Form; 3. Subj.
Confining ourselves now to classification by subjects, the word can be
used in three senses:
1. Bringing books together which treat of the same subject
specifically.
That is, books which each treat of the whole of the subject and
not of a part only.
2. Bringing books together which treat of similar subjects.
Or, to express the same thing differently:
Page 20
Bringing subjects together so as to form a class.
A catalogue so made is called a classed catalogue.
3. Bringing classes together so as to form a system.
A catalogue so made should be called a systematic catalogue.
The three steps are then
1. Classifying the books to make subject-lists.
2. Classifying the subject-lists to make classes.
3. Classifying the classes to make a systematic catalogue.
The dictionary stops in its entries at the first stage, in its cross-
references at the second.
The alphabetico-classed catalogue stops at the second stage.
The systematic alone advances to the third.
Classification in the first sense, it is plain, is the same as “entry;” in
the second {11} sense it is the same as “class-entry;” and in the third sense
it is the same as the “logical arrangement” of the table on p. 12, under
“Classed catalogue.”
It is worth while to ascertain the relation of subject and class in the
subject-catalogue. Subject is the matter on which the author is seeking to
give or the reader to obtain information; Class is, as said above, a
grouping of subjects which have characteristics in common. A little
reflection will show that the words so used partially overlap, [7] the
general subjects being classes [8] and the classes being subjects, [9] but the
individual subjects [10] never being classes.
[6] This note has little direct bearing on practice, but by its
insertion here some one interested in the theory of cataloguing may
be saved the trouble of going over the same ground.
[7]
[8] The subjects Animals, Horses, Plants are classes, a fact which
is perhaps more evident to the eye if we use the terms Zoology,
Hippology, Botany. The subdivisions of Botany and Zoology are
obvious enough; the subdivisions of Hippology may be themselves
A catalogue so made is called a classed catalogue.
3. Bringing classes together so as to form a system.
A catalogue so made should be called a systematic catalogue.
The three steps are then
1. Classifying the books to make subject-lists.
2. Classifying the subject-lists to make classes.
3. Classifying the classes to make a systematic catalogue.
The dictionary stops in its entries at the first stage, in its cross-
references at the second.
The alphabetico-classed catalogue stops at the second stage.
The systematic alone advances to the third.
Classification in the first sense, it is plain, is the same as “entry;” in
the second {11} sense it is the same as “class-entry;” and in the third sense
it is the same as the “logical arrangement” of the table on p. 12, under
“Classed catalogue.”
It is worth while to ascertain the relation of subject and class in the
subject-catalogue. Subject is the matter on which the author is seeking to
give or the reader to obtain information; Class is, as said above, a
grouping of subjects which have characteristics in common. A little
reflection will show that the words so used partially overlap, [7] the
general subjects being classes [8] and the classes being subjects, [9] but the
individual subjects [10] never being classes.
[6] This note has little direct bearing on practice, but by its
insertion here some one interested in the theory of cataloguing may
be saved the trouble of going over the same ground.
[7]
[8] The subjects Animals, Horses, Plants are classes, a fact which
is perhaps more evident to the eye if we use the terms Zoology,
Hippology, Botany. The subdivisions of Botany and Zoology are
obvious enough; the subdivisions of Hippology may be themselves
Page 21
classes, as Shetland ponies, Arabian coursers,
Barbs, or individual horses, as Lady Suffolk,
Justin Morgan.
[9] Not merely the concrete classes, Natural
history, Geography, Herpetology, History,
Ichthyology, Mineralogy, but the abstract ones,
Mathematics, Philosophy, are plainly subjects.
The fact that some books treat of the subject Philosophy and others
of philosophical subjects, and that others treat in a philosophical
manner subjects not usually considered philosophical, introduces
confusion into the matter, and single examples may be brought up in
which it seems as if the classification expressed the form
(Crestadoro’s “nature”) or something which a friend calls the
“essence” of the book and not its subject, so that we ought to speak
of an “essence catalogue” which might require some special
treatment; but the distinction can not be maintained. It might be said,
for example, that “Geology a proof of revelation” would have for its
subject-matter Geology but for its class Theology—which is true,
not because class and subject are incompatible but because this book
has two subjects, the first Geology, the second one of the evidences
of revealed religion, wherefore, as the Evidences are a subdivision
of Theology, the book belongs under that as a subject-class.
[10] It is plain enough that Mt. Jefferson, John Milton, the
Warrior Iron-clad are not classes. Countries, however, which for
most purposes it is convenient to consider as individual, are in
certain aspects classes; when by the word “England” we mean “the
English” it is the name of a class.
Class entry, registering a book under the name of its class; in the
subject-catalogue used in contradistinction to specific entry.
E. g., a book on repentance has class entry under Theology; its
specific entry would be under Repentance.
Barbs, or individual horses, as Lady Suffolk,
Justin Morgan.
[9] Not merely the concrete classes, Natural
history, Geography, Herpetology, History,
Ichthyology, Mineralogy, but the abstract ones,
Mathematics, Philosophy, are plainly subjects.
The fact that some books treat of the subject Philosophy and others
of philosophical subjects, and that others treat in a philosophical
manner subjects not usually considered philosophical, introduces
confusion into the matter, and single examples may be brought up in
which it seems as if the classification expressed the form
(Crestadoro’s “nature”) or something which a friend calls the
“essence” of the book and not its subject, so that we ought to speak
of an “essence catalogue” which might require some special
treatment; but the distinction can not be maintained. It might be said,
for example, that “Geology a proof of revelation” would have for its
subject-matter Geology but for its class Theology—which is true,
not because class and subject are incompatible but because this book
has two subjects, the first Geology, the second one of the evidences
of revealed religion, wherefore, as the Evidences are a subdivision
of Theology, the book belongs under that as a subject-class.
[10] It is plain enough that Mt. Jefferson, John Milton, the
Warrior Iron-clad are not classes. Countries, however, which for
most purposes it is convenient to consider as individual, are in
certain aspects classes; when by the word “England” we mean “the
English” it is the name of a class.
Class entry, registering a book under the name of its class; in the
subject-catalogue used in contradistinction to specific entry.
E. g., a book on repentance has class entry under Theology; its
specific entry would be under Repentance.
Page 22
Classed catalogues are made by class-entry, whether the classes
so formed are arranged logically as in the Systematic kind or
alphabetically as in the Alphabetico-classed.
A dictionary catalogue contains class-headings, inasmuch as it
contains the headings of extensive subjects, but under them there is no
class entry, only specific entry. The syndetic dictionary catalogue,
however, recognizes their nature by its cross-references, which constitute
it in a certain degree an alphabetico-classed (not a systematic) catalogue.
Moreover, the dictionary catalogue, without ceasing to be one, might, if it
were thought worth while (which it certainly is not), not merely give titles
under specific headings but repeat them under certain classes or under all
classes in ascending series, e. g., not merely have such headings as Rose,
Geranium, Fungi, Liliaceæ, Phænogamia, Cryptogamia, but also
under Botany include all the titles which appeared under Rose,
Geranium, etc.; provided the headings Botany, Cryptogamia, Fungi,
etc., were arranged alphabetically. The matter may be tabulated thus:
so formed are arranged logically as in the Systematic kind or
alphabetically as in the Alphabetico-classed.
A dictionary catalogue contains class-headings, inasmuch as it
contains the headings of extensive subjects, but under them there is no
class entry, only specific entry. The syndetic dictionary catalogue,
however, recognizes their nature by its cross-references, which constitute
it in a certain degree an alphabetico-classed (not a systematic) catalogue.
Moreover, the dictionary catalogue, without ceasing to be one, might, if it
were thought worth while (which it certainly is not), not merely give titles
under specific headings but repeat them under certain classes or under all
classes in ascending series, e. g., not merely have such headings as Rose,
Geranium, Fungi, Liliaceæ, Phænogamia, Cryptogamia, but also
under Botany include all the titles which appeared under Rose,
Geranium, etc.; provided the headings Botany, Cryptogamia, Fungi,
etc., were arranged alphabetically. The matter may be tabulated thus:
Page 23
Alphabetical arrangement.
Dictionary catalogue.
Specific entry. (Common dict. catal.)
Specific entry and class reference. (Bost. Pub. Lib., Boston
Athenæum.)
Specific and class entry. (No example.)
Alphabetico-classed catalogue.
Class entry with specific or class subentry. (Noyes.)
Class entry with chiefly class subentry. (Abbot.) {12}
Logical arrangement.
Systematic catalogue.
Class entry. (Undivided classed catal.)
Class entry and subentry and finally specific subentry.
(Subdivided classed catal.)
Dictionary catalogue.
Specific entry. (Common dict. catal.)
Specific entry and class reference. (Bost. Pub. Lib., Boston
Athenæum.)
Specific and class entry. (No example.)
Alphabetico-classed catalogue.
Class entry with specific or class subentry. (Noyes.)
Class entry with chiefly class subentry. (Abbot.) {12}
Logical arrangement.
Systematic catalogue.
Class entry. (Undivided classed catal.)
Class entry and subentry and finally specific subentry.
(Subdivided classed catal.)
Page 24
A, Specific dictionary.
B, Specific dict. by its cross-
references and its form-entries.
Alphabetico-classed catalogue.
C, Classed catalogue without
subdivisions.
D, Classed catalogue with
subdivisions.
A, B are alphabetical.
C, D are classed.
A, B, D contain specific subjects.
B, C, D contain classes.
The specific entries of A and the classes of B, though brought together
in the same catalogues (the class-dictionary and the alphabetico-classed),
simply stand side by side and do not unite, each preserving its own nature,
because the principle which brings them together—the alphabet—is
external, mechanical. But in D the specific entries and the classes become
intimately united to form a homogeneous whole, because the principle
which brings them together—the relations of the subjects to one another
—is internal, chemical, so to speak.
Collector. See Author.
Cross-reference. See Reference.
Dictionary catalogue, so called because the headings (author,
title, subject, and form) are arranged, like the words in a
dictionary, in alphabetical order.
Dictionary and other alphabetical catalogues. These are
differentiated not, as is often said, by the dictionary having
B, Specific dict. by its cross-
references and its form-entries.
Alphabetico-classed catalogue.
C, Classed catalogue without
subdivisions.
D, Classed catalogue with
subdivisions.
A, B are alphabetical.
C, D are classed.
A, B, D contain specific subjects.
B, C, D contain classes.
The specific entries of A and the classes of B, though brought together
in the same catalogues (the class-dictionary and the alphabetico-classed),
simply stand side by side and do not unite, each preserving its own nature,
because the principle which brings them together—the alphabet—is
external, mechanical. But in D the specific entries and the classes become
intimately united to form a homogeneous whole, because the principle
which brings them together—the relations of the subjects to one another
—is internal, chemical, so to speak.
Collector. See Author.
Cross-reference. See Reference.
Dictionary catalogue, so called because the headings (author,
title, subject, and form) are arranged, like the words in a
dictionary, in alphabetical order.
Dictionary and other alphabetical catalogues. These are
differentiated not, as is often said, by the dictionary having
Page 25
specific entry, but (1) by its giving specific entries in all cases
and (2) by its individual entry.
Even the classed catalogues often have specific entry. Whenever a
book treats of the whole subject of a class, it is specifically entered under
that class. A theological encyclopædia is specifically entered under
Theology, and theology is an unsubordinated class in many systems. The
alphabetico-classed catalogues have specific entry in many more cases,
because they have many more classes. Professor Abbot has such headings
as Ink, Jute, Lace, Leather, Life-savers, Locks, Mortars, Perfumery,
Safes, Salt, Smoke, Snow, Varnish, Vitriol. Mr. Noyes has scores of
similar headings; but neither of them permits individual entry, which the
dictionary-catalogue requires. The alphabetico-classed catalogue enters a
life of Napoleon and a history of England under Biography and History;
the dictionary enters them under Napoleon and England. This is the
invariable and chief distinction between the two.
Editor. See Author.
Entry, the registry of a book in the catalogue with the title and
imprint.
Author-entry, such registry with the author’s name for a
heading.
Title-entry, registry under some word of the title.
First-word-entry, such entry made from the first word of the
title not an article. {13}
Important-word or catch-word entry, such entry made from
some word of the title other than the first word and not
indicative of the subject, but likely to be remembered and
used by borrowers in asking for the book.
and (2) by its individual entry.
Even the classed catalogues often have specific entry. Whenever a
book treats of the whole subject of a class, it is specifically entered under
that class. A theological encyclopædia is specifically entered under
Theology, and theology is an unsubordinated class in many systems. The
alphabetico-classed catalogues have specific entry in many more cases,
because they have many more classes. Professor Abbot has such headings
as Ink, Jute, Lace, Leather, Life-savers, Locks, Mortars, Perfumery,
Safes, Salt, Smoke, Snow, Varnish, Vitriol. Mr. Noyes has scores of
similar headings; but neither of them permits individual entry, which the
dictionary-catalogue requires. The alphabetico-classed catalogue enters a
life of Napoleon and a history of England under Biography and History;
the dictionary enters them under Napoleon and England. This is the
invariable and chief distinction between the two.
Editor. See Author.
Entry, the registry of a book in the catalogue with the title and
imprint.
Author-entry, such registry with the author’s name for a
heading.
Title-entry, registry under some word of the title.
First-word-entry, such entry made from the first word of the
title not an article. {13}
Important-word or catch-word entry, such entry made from
some word of the title other than the first word and not
indicative of the subject, but likely to be remembered and
used by borrowers in asking for the book.
Page 26
Series entry, entry of a number of separate works published
under a collective title or half-title or title-page caption.
Such are “The English citizen” series and “American
statesmen.”
Subject-word-entry, such entry made under a word of the title
which indicates the subject of the book.
Subject-entry, registry under the name selected by the
cataloguer to indicate the subject.
A cataloguer who should put “The insect,” by Michelet, under
Entomology would be making a subject-entry; Duncan’s “Introduction to
entomology” entered under the same head would be at once a subject-
entry and a subject-word-entry.
Form-entry, registry under the name of the kind of literature
to which the book belongs.
Form, applied to a variety of classification founded on the form of
the book classified, which may be either Practical, as in
Almanacs, Dictionaries, Encyclopædias, Gazetteers,
Indexes, Tables (the form in these being for the most part
alphabetical), or Literary, as Fiction, Plays, Comedies,
Farces, Tragedies, Poetry, Letters, Orations, Sermons (the
latter with the subdivisions Charity, Election, Funeral,
Installation, Ordination, Thanksgiving, etc.). There are certain
headings which belong both to the Subject and the Form
family. “Encyclopædias,” inasmuch as the books treat of all
knowledge, is the most inclusive of all the subject-classes;
under a collective title or half-title or title-page caption.
Such are “The English citizen” series and “American
statesmen.”
Subject-word-entry, such entry made under a word of the title
which indicates the subject of the book.
Subject-entry, registry under the name selected by the
cataloguer to indicate the subject.
A cataloguer who should put “The insect,” by Michelet, under
Entomology would be making a subject-entry; Duncan’s “Introduction to
entomology” entered under the same head would be at once a subject-
entry and a subject-word-entry.
Form-entry, registry under the name of the kind of literature
to which the book belongs.
Form, applied to a variety of classification founded on the form of
the book classified, which may be either Practical, as in
Almanacs, Dictionaries, Encyclopædias, Gazetteers,
Indexes, Tables (the form in these being for the most part
alphabetical), or Literary, as Fiction, Plays, Comedies,
Farces, Tragedies, Poetry, Letters, Orations, Sermons (the
latter with the subdivisions Charity, Election, Funeral,
Installation, Ordination, Thanksgiving, etc.). There are certain
headings which belong both to the Subject and the Form
family. “Encyclopædias,” inasmuch as the books treat of all
knowledge, is the most inclusive of all the subject-classes;
Page 27
inasmuch as (with few exceptions) they are in alphabetic form,
it is a form-class.
Heading, the word by which the alphabetical place of an entry in
the catalogue is determined, usually the name of the author, of
the subject, or of the literary or practical form, or a word of the
title.
Imprint, the indication of the place, date, and form of printing.
Polygraphic, written by several authors.
Polytopical, treating of several topics.
Will the convenience of this word excuse the twist given to the
meaning of τόπος in its formation? Polygraphic might serve, as the French
use polygraphe for a miscellaneous writer; but it will be well to have both
words,—polygraphic denoting (as now) collections of several works by
one or many authors, polytopical denoting works on many subjects.
Reference, partial registry of a book (omitting the imprint) under
author, title, subject, or kind, referring to a more full entry
under some other heading; occasionally used to denote merely
entries without imprints, in which the reference is implied. The
distinction of entry and reference is almost without meaning
for Short, as a title-a-liner saves nothing by referring unless
there are several references. {14}
Analytical-reference, or, simply, an analytical, the registry of
some part of a book or of some work contained in a
collection, referring to the heading under which the book
or collection is entered.
Cross-reference, reference from one subject to another.
it is a form-class.
Heading, the word by which the alphabetical place of an entry in
the catalogue is determined, usually the name of the author, of
the subject, or of the literary or practical form, or a word of the
title.
Imprint, the indication of the place, date, and form of printing.
Polygraphic, written by several authors.
Polytopical, treating of several topics.
Will the convenience of this word excuse the twist given to the
meaning of τόπος in its formation? Polygraphic might serve, as the French
use polygraphe for a miscellaneous writer; but it will be well to have both
words,—polygraphic denoting (as now) collections of several works by
one or many authors, polytopical denoting works on many subjects.
Reference, partial registry of a book (omitting the imprint) under
author, title, subject, or kind, referring to a more full entry
under some other heading; occasionally used to denote merely
entries without imprints, in which the reference is implied. The
distinction of entry and reference is almost without meaning
for Short, as a title-a-liner saves nothing by referring unless
there are several references. {14}
Analytical-reference, or, simply, an analytical, the registry of
some part of a book or of some work contained in a
collection, referring to the heading under which the book
or collection is entered.
Cross-reference, reference from one subject to another.
Page 28
Heading-reference, from one form of a heading to another.
First-word-reference, catch-word-reference, subject-word-
reference, same as first-word-entry, etc., omitting the
imprint, and referring.
Series-entry. See Entry.
Specific entry, registering a book under a heading which expresses
its special subject as distinguished from entering it in a class
which includes that subject.
E. g., registering “The art of painting” under Painting, or a description
of the cactus under Cactus. Putting them under Fine arts and Botany
would be class-entry. “Specific entry,” by the way, has nothing to do with
“species.”
Subject, the theme or themes of the book, whether stated in the
title or not.
It is worth noting that subjects are of two sorts: (1) the individual, as
Goethe, Shakespeare, England, the Middle Ages, the ship Alexandra,
the dog Tray, the French Revolution, all of which are concrete; and (2)
general, as Man, History, Horse, Philosophy, which may be either
concrete or abstract. Every general subject is a class more or less
extensive. (See note on Class.) Some mistakes have also arisen from not
noting that certain words, Poetry, Fiction, Drama, etc., are subject-
headings for the books written about Poetry, Fiction, etc., and form-
headings for poems, novels, plays, etc.
Subject-entry, Subject-word entry. See Entry.
Syndetic, connective, applied to that kind of dictionary catalogue
which binds its entries together by means of cross-references
so as to form a whole, the references being made from the
First-word-reference, catch-word-reference, subject-word-
reference, same as first-word-entry, etc., omitting the
imprint, and referring.
Series-entry. See Entry.
Specific entry, registering a book under a heading which expresses
its special subject as distinguished from entering it in a class
which includes that subject.
E. g., registering “The art of painting” under Painting, or a description
of the cactus under Cactus. Putting them under Fine arts and Botany
would be class-entry. “Specific entry,” by the way, has nothing to do with
“species.”
Subject, the theme or themes of the book, whether stated in the
title or not.
It is worth noting that subjects are of two sorts: (1) the individual, as
Goethe, Shakespeare, England, the Middle Ages, the ship Alexandra,
the dog Tray, the French Revolution, all of which are concrete; and (2)
general, as Man, History, Horse, Philosophy, which may be either
concrete or abstract. Every general subject is a class more or less
extensive. (See note on Class.) Some mistakes have also arisen from not
noting that certain words, Poetry, Fiction, Drama, etc., are subject-
headings for the books written about Poetry, Fiction, etc., and form-
headings for poems, novels, plays, etc.
Subject-entry, Subject-word entry. See Entry.
Syndetic, connective, applied to that kind of dictionary catalogue
which binds its entries together by means of cross-references
so as to form a whole, the references being made from the
Page 29
most comprehensive subject to those of the next lower degree
of comprehensiveness, and from each of these to their
subordinate subjects, and vice versa. These cross-references
correspond to and are a good substitute for the arrangement in
a systematic catalogue. References are also made in the
syndetic catalogue to illustrative and coördinate subjects, and,
if it is perfect, from specific to general subjects.
Title in the broader sense includes heading, title proper, and
imprint; in the narrower (in which it is hereafter used) it is the
name of the book given by the author on the title-page,
omitting the imprint, but including names of editors,
translators, etc. The name of the book put on the leaf
preceding the title page is called the half-title; and the same
term is applied to lines indicating subdivisions of the book and
following the title; the name given at the head of the first page
of text is the caption. That given at the back of the book (the
binder’s title) should never be used in a catalogue which
makes the slightest pretensions to carefulness.
A title may be either the book’s name (as “&c.”) or its description (as
“A collection of occasional sermons”), or it may state its subject (as
“Synonyms of the New {15} Testament”), or it may be any two or all three
of these combined (as description and subject, “Brief account of a journey
through Europe;” name and description, “Happy thoughts;” name and
subject, “Men’s wives;” all three, “Index of dates”).
Bibliographers have established a cult of the title-page; its slightest
peculiarities are noted; it is followed religiously, with dots for omissions,
brackets for insertions, and uprights to mark the end of lines; it is even
of comprehensiveness, and from each of these to their
subordinate subjects, and vice versa. These cross-references
correspond to and are a good substitute for the arrangement in
a systematic catalogue. References are also made in the
syndetic catalogue to illustrative and coördinate subjects, and,
if it is perfect, from specific to general subjects.
Title in the broader sense includes heading, title proper, and
imprint; in the narrower (in which it is hereafter used) it is the
name of the book given by the author on the title-page,
omitting the imprint, but including names of editors,
translators, etc. The name of the book put on the leaf
preceding the title page is called the half-title; and the same
term is applied to lines indicating subdivisions of the book and
following the title; the name given at the head of the first page
of text is the caption. That given at the back of the book (the
binder’s title) should never be used in a catalogue which
makes the slightest pretensions to carefulness.
A title may be either the book’s name (as “&c.”) or its description (as
“A collection of occasional sermons”), or it may state its subject (as
“Synonyms of the New {15} Testament”), or it may be any two or all three
of these combined (as description and subject, “Brief account of a journey
through Europe;” name and description, “Happy thoughts;” name and
subject, “Men’s wives;” all three, “Index of dates”).
Bibliographers have established a cult of the title-page; its slightest
peculiarities are noted; it is followed religiously, with dots for omissions,
brackets for insertions, and uprights to mark the end of lines; it is even
Page 30
imitated by the fac-simile type or photographic copying. These things may
concern the cataloguer of the Lenox Library or the Prince collection. The
ordinary librarian has in general nothing to do with them; but it does not
follow that even he is to lose all respect for the title. It is the book’s name
and should not be changed but by act of legislature. Our necessities oblige
us to abbreviate it, but nothing obliges us to make additions to it or to
change it without giving notice to the reader that we have done so.
Moreover, it must influence the entry of a book more or less; it determines
the title-entry entirely; it affects the author-entry (see § 3) and the subject-
entry (see § 104). But to let it have more power than this is to pay it a
superstitious veneration.
Volume, a book distinguished from other books or other volumes
of the same work by having its own title, paging, and register.
This is the bibliographic use of the word, sanctioned by the British
Museum rules. That is, it is in this sense only that it applies to all the
copies of an edition as it comes from the printer. But there is also a
bibliopegic and bibliopolic use, to denote a number of pages bound
together, which pages may be several volumes in the other sense, or a part
of a volume or parts of several volumes. To avoid confusion I use
“volume” in the present treatise as defined in the Rules of the British
Museum catalogue, and I recommend this as the sole use in library
catalogues, except in such phrases as 2 v. bd. in 1. which means 2
volumes in the bibliographical sense united by binding so as to form one
piece of matter.
In the present treatise I am regarding the dictionary catalogue as
consisting of an author-catalogue, a subject-catalogue, a more or less
complete title-catalogue, and a more or less complete form-catalogue, all
interwoven in one alphabetical order. The greater part, however, of the
rules here given would apply equally to these catalogues when kept
separate.
concern the cataloguer of the Lenox Library or the Prince collection. The
ordinary librarian has in general nothing to do with them; but it does not
follow that even he is to lose all respect for the title. It is the book’s name
and should not be changed but by act of legislature. Our necessities oblige
us to abbreviate it, but nothing obliges us to make additions to it or to
change it without giving notice to the reader that we have done so.
Moreover, it must influence the entry of a book more or less; it determines
the title-entry entirely; it affects the author-entry (see § 3) and the subject-
entry (see § 104). But to let it have more power than this is to pay it a
superstitious veneration.
Volume, a book distinguished from other books or other volumes
of the same work by having its own title, paging, and register.
This is the bibliographic use of the word, sanctioned by the British
Museum rules. That is, it is in this sense only that it applies to all the
copies of an edition as it comes from the printer. But there is also a
bibliopegic and bibliopolic use, to denote a number of pages bound
together, which pages may be several volumes in the other sense, or a part
of a volume or parts of several volumes. To avoid confusion I use
“volume” in the present treatise as defined in the Rules of the British
Museum catalogue, and I recommend this as the sole use in library
catalogues, except in such phrases as 2 v. bd. in 1. which means 2
volumes in the bibliographical sense united by binding so as to form one
piece of matter.
In the present treatise I am regarding the dictionary catalogue as
consisting of an author-catalogue, a subject-catalogue, a more or less
complete title-catalogue, and a more or less complete form-catalogue, all
interwoven in one alphabetical order. The greater part, however, of the
rules here given would apply equally to these catalogues when kept
separate.
Page 31
These rules are written primarily for a printed catalogue; almost all of
them would apply equally to a card catalogue.
them would apply equally to a card catalogue.
Page 32
ENTRY.
I. AUTHOR-ENTRY.
CATALOGUE.
A. AUTHORS.
(a.) PERSONAL.
(i.) Under whom as author.
Author, 1. Anonymous, 2. Joint authors, 3, 4. Theses, 5. Pseudonyms, 6. Illustrators, 7.
Designer, Cartographer, Engraver, 8. Musical works, 9. Booksellers and auctioneers, 10,
11. Commentaries, 12. Continuations and indexes, 13. Epitomes, 14. Revisions, 15.
Excerpts and chrestomathies, 16. Concordances, 17. Reporters, translators, and editors,
18. {16}
(ii.) Under what part of the name.
Christian name, 19. Surname, 20. Title, 21. Changed names, 22. Compound names, 23.
Prefixes, 24. Latin names, 25. Capes, lakes, etc., 26.
(iii.) Under what form of the name.
Vernacular, 27. Several languages, 28. Masculine and feminine, 29. Various spellings,
30, 31. Forenames, 32. Places, 33–35. Transliteration, 36–38.
(b.) CORPORATE.
General principle, 39. Places, 40. Governmental bodies, 41. Laws, 42. Calendars, 43.
Works written officially, 44–46. Articles to be inquired after, 47. Reports, 48. Congresses,
49. Treaties, 50. Parties, denominations, orders, 51. Their conventions, conferences, etc.,
52. Ecclesiastical councils, 53. Reports of committees, 54. Classes of citizens, 55.
Societies, 56.
B. SUBSTITUTES.
Parts of the author’s name, 57. Pseudonyms, 58. Collectors, 59.
C. REFERENCES, 60, 61.
D. ECONOMIES, 62–67.
I. AUTHOR-ENTRY.
CATALOGUE.
A. AUTHORS.
(a.) PERSONAL.
(i.) Under whom as author.
Author, 1. Anonymous, 2. Joint authors, 3, 4. Theses, 5. Pseudonyms, 6. Illustrators, 7.
Designer, Cartographer, Engraver, 8. Musical works, 9. Booksellers and auctioneers, 10,
11. Commentaries, 12. Continuations and indexes, 13. Epitomes, 14. Revisions, 15.
Excerpts and chrestomathies, 16. Concordances, 17. Reporters, translators, and editors,
18. {16}
(ii.) Under what part of the name.
Christian name, 19. Surname, 20. Title, 21. Changed names, 22. Compound names, 23.
Prefixes, 24. Latin names, 25. Capes, lakes, etc., 26.
(iii.) Under what form of the name.
Vernacular, 27. Several languages, 28. Masculine and feminine, 29. Various spellings,
30, 31. Forenames, 32. Places, 33–35. Transliteration, 36–38.
(b.) CORPORATE.
General principle, 39. Places, 40. Governmental bodies, 41. Laws, 42. Calendars, 43.
Works written officially, 44–46. Articles to be inquired after, 47. Reports, 48. Congresses,
49. Treaties, 50. Parties, denominations, orders, 51. Their conventions, conferences, etc.,
52. Ecclesiastical councils, 53. Reports of committees, 54. Classes of citizens, 55.
Societies, 56.
B. SUBSTITUTES.
Parts of the author’s name, 57. Pseudonyms, 58. Collectors, 59.
C. REFERENCES, 60, 61.
D. ECONOMIES, 62–67.
Page 33
A. AUTHORS.
1. Make the author-entry under (A ) the name of the author whether
personal or corporate, or (B ) some substitute for it.
In regard to the author-entry it must be remembered that the object is
not merely to facilitate the finding of a given book by an author’s name. If
this were all, it might have been better to make the entry under the
professed name (pseudonym), or under the form of name mentioned in the
title (Bulwer in one book, Lytton in another, Bulwer Lytton in a third;
Sherlock, Th., in that divine’s earlier works; Bangor, Th. [Sherlock], Bp.
of, in later ones; Salisbury, Th. [Sherlock], Bp. of, in the next issues;
London, Th. [Sherlock], Bp. of, in his last works; Milnes, R. Monckton,
for “Good night and good morning,” and the nine other works published
before 1863, and Houghton, Rich. M. M., Baron, for the 1870 edition of
“Good night and good morning,” and for other books published since his
ennoblement), or under the name of editor or translator when the author’s
name is not given, as proposed by Mr. Crestadoro. This might have been
best with object A ; but we have also object D to provide for—the finding
of all the books of a given author—and this can most conveniently be
done if they are all collected in one place.
2. Anonymous books are to be entered under the name of the
author whenever it is known.
If it is not known with certainty the entry may be made under the
person to whom the work is attributed, with an explanatory note and a
reference from the first word, or the book may be treated as anonymous
and entered under the first word, with a note “Attributed to ——,” and a
reference from the supposed author. The degree of doubt will determine
which method is best. {17}
(a.) P ERSONAL.
1. Make the author-entry under (A ) the name of the author whether
personal or corporate, or (B ) some substitute for it.
In regard to the author-entry it must be remembered that the object is
not merely to facilitate the finding of a given book by an author’s name. If
this were all, it might have been better to make the entry under the
professed name (pseudonym), or under the form of name mentioned in the
title (Bulwer in one book, Lytton in another, Bulwer Lytton in a third;
Sherlock, Th., in that divine’s earlier works; Bangor, Th. [Sherlock], Bp.
of, in later ones; Salisbury, Th. [Sherlock], Bp. of, in the next issues;
London, Th. [Sherlock], Bp. of, in his last works; Milnes, R. Monckton,
for “Good night and good morning,” and the nine other works published
before 1863, and Houghton, Rich. M. M., Baron, for the 1870 edition of
“Good night and good morning,” and for other books published since his
ennoblement), or under the name of editor or translator when the author’s
name is not given, as proposed by Mr. Crestadoro. This might have been
best with object A ; but we have also object D to provide for—the finding
of all the books of a given author—and this can most conveniently be
done if they are all collected in one place.
2. Anonymous books are to be entered under the name of the
author whenever it is known.
If it is not known with certainty the entry may be made under the
person to whom the work is attributed, with an explanatory note and a
reference from the first word, or the book may be treated as anonymous
and entered under the first word, with a note “Attributed to ——,” and a
reference from the supposed author. The degree of doubt will determine
which method is best. {17}
(a.) P ERSONAL.
Page 34
(i.) Under whom as author.
3. Enter works written conjointly by several authors under the
name of the one first mentioned on the title-page, with references
from the others.
The writers of a correspondence and the participants in a debate are to
be considered as joint authors.
Ex.
Schiller, J: Christoph F: v. Briefwechsel zwischen S. und Cotta;
herausg. von Vollmar.
— Briefwechsel zw. S. und Goethe. Stuttg., 1829. 6 v. S.
— Briefwechsel zw. S. und W: v. Humboldt. Stuttg., 1830.
S.
Cotta. Briefwechsel. See Schiller, J: C. F: v.
Goethe, J: W. v. Briefwechsel. See Schiller, J: C. F: v.
Humboldt, K: W:, Freiherr v. Briefwechsel. See Schiller, J: C.
F: v.
Many catalogues adopt the form of heading
Schiller, J: Christoph F: v., and Humboldt, K: W:, Freiherr v.
Briefwechsel. Stuttg., 1830. S.
Humboldt, K: W:, Freiherr v. Briefwechsel. See Schiller, J: C.
F: v., and Humboldt, K: W: v. But see § 240.
When countries are joint authors it is better to make full entries under
each and arrange them as if the country under consideration were the only
one. Each country puts its own name first in its own edition of a joint
work; and the arrangement proposed avoids an additional complexity
under countries, which are confusing enough at the best.
Whether the joint authorship appears in the title or not should make no
difference in the mode of entry; if one name appears on the title, that
should be chosen for the entry; if none, take the most important.
4. When double headings are used distinguish between joint
authors of one work and two authors of separate works joined in
3. Enter works written conjointly by several authors under the
name of the one first mentioned on the title-page, with references
from the others.
The writers of a correspondence and the participants in a debate are to
be considered as joint authors.
Ex.
Schiller, J: Christoph F: v. Briefwechsel zwischen S. und Cotta;
herausg. von Vollmar.
— Briefwechsel zw. S. und Goethe. Stuttg., 1829. 6 v. S.
— Briefwechsel zw. S. und W: v. Humboldt. Stuttg., 1830.
S.
Cotta. Briefwechsel. See Schiller, J: C. F: v.
Goethe, J: W. v. Briefwechsel. See Schiller, J: C. F: v.
Humboldt, K: W:, Freiherr v. Briefwechsel. See Schiller, J: C.
F: v.
Many catalogues adopt the form of heading
Schiller, J: Christoph F: v., and Humboldt, K: W:, Freiherr v.
Briefwechsel. Stuttg., 1830. S.
Humboldt, K: W:, Freiherr v. Briefwechsel. See Schiller, J: C.
F: v., and Humboldt, K: W: v. But see § 240.
When countries are joint authors it is better to make full entries under
each and arrange them as if the country under consideration were the only
one. Each country puts its own name first in its own edition of a joint
work; and the arrangement proposed avoids an additional complexity
under countries, which are confusing enough at the best.
Whether the joint authorship appears in the title or not should make no
difference in the mode of entry; if one name appears on the title, that
should be chosen for the entry; if none, take the most important.
4. When double headings are used distinguish between joint
authors of one work and two authors of separate works joined in
Page 35
one volume. In the latter case, if there is no collective title, the
heading should be the name of the first author alone and an
analytical reference should be made from the second. (See § 58 b.)
Ex. “The works of Shelley and Keats” would be entered in full under
Shelley (both names being mentioned in the title, but Shelley alone in the
heading), and analytically (§ 127) under Keats. In such cases a double
heading would often mislead.
5. For university theses or dissertations Dziatzko gives the
following rules:
I. Until about 1750
a Unless the respondent is known to be the “auctor”
(“auctor et respondens,” “scriptor,” etc.) enter under
the name of the præses, without reference.
b If the respondent is “auctor” enter under him, with
reference from the præses.
II. After 1750 enter under the respondent, unless it is known
that the præses is the author, when his name will be the
heading. In neither case refer from the other name.
For universities where the old custom was kept up beyond 1750, as the
Swedish, Rule I applies till the change was made. {18}
Where there are two respondents, neither specified as author, enter
under the first, without reference from the second.
6. Enter pseudonymous works generally under the author’s real
name, when it is known, with a reference from the pseudonym;
but make the entry under the pseudonym, with a reference from
the real name, when the writer is better known by the false name.
heading should be the name of the first author alone and an
analytical reference should be made from the second. (See § 58 b.)
Ex. “The works of Shelley and Keats” would be entered in full under
Shelley (both names being mentioned in the title, but Shelley alone in the
heading), and analytically (§ 127) under Keats. In such cases a double
heading would often mislead.
5. For university theses or dissertations Dziatzko gives the
following rules:
I. Until about 1750
a Unless the respondent is known to be the “auctor”
(“auctor et respondens,” “scriptor,” etc.) enter under
the name of the præses, without reference.
b If the respondent is “auctor” enter under him, with
reference from the præses.
II. After 1750 enter under the respondent, unless it is known
that the præses is the author, when his name will be the
heading. In neither case refer from the other name.
For universities where the old custom was kept up beyond 1750, as the
Swedish, Rule I applies till the change was made. {18}
Where there are two respondents, neither specified as author, enter
under the first, without reference from the second.
6. Enter pseudonymous works generally under the author’s real
name, when it is known, with a reference from the pseudonym;
but make the entry under the pseudonym, with a reference from
the real name, when the writer is better known by the false name.
Page 36
In the first edition this rule was without limitation, and I added the
following note “One is strongly tempted to deviate from this rule in the
case of writers like George Eliot and George Sand, Gavarni and
Grandville, who appear in literature only under their pseudonyms. It
would apparently be much more convenient to enter their works under the
name by which alone they are known and under which everybody but a
professed cataloguer would assuredly look first. For an author-catalogue
this might be the best plan, but in a dictionary catalogue we have to deal
with such people not merely as writers of books, but as subjects of
biographies or parties in trials, and in such cases it seems proper to use
their legal names. Besides, if one attempts to exempt a few noted writers
from the rule given above, where is the line to be drawn? No definite
principle of exception can be laid down which will guide either the
cataloguer or the reader; and probably the confusion would in the end
produce greater inconvenience than the present rule. Moreover, the entries
made by using the pseudonym as a heading would often have to be
altered. For a long time it would have been proper to enter the works of
Dickens under Boz; the Dutch annual bibliography uniformly uses Boz-
Dickens as a heading. No one would think of looking under Boz now.
Mark Twain is in a transition state. The public mind is divided between
Twain and Clemens. The tendency is always toward the use of the real
name; and that tendency will be much helped in the reading public if the
real name is always preferred in catalogues. Some pseudonyms
persistently adopted by authors have come to be considered as the only
names, as Voltaire (see § 23), and the translation Melanchthon. Perhaps
George Sand and George Eliot will in time be adjudged to belong to the
same company. It would be well if cataloguers could appoint some
permanent committee with authority to decide this and similar points as
from time to time they occur.”
I am now in favor of frequent entry under the pseudonym, with
reference from the real name. I should recommend the pseudonym as
heading in the case of any popular writer who has not written under his
own name, provided he is known to the public chiefly by his pseudonym,
and in the subject catalogue for any person who is so known. Examples
following note “One is strongly tempted to deviate from this rule in the
case of writers like George Eliot and George Sand, Gavarni and
Grandville, who appear in literature only under their pseudonyms. It
would apparently be much more convenient to enter their works under the
name by which alone they are known and under which everybody but a
professed cataloguer would assuredly look first. For an author-catalogue
this might be the best plan, but in a dictionary catalogue we have to deal
with such people not merely as writers of books, but as subjects of
biographies or parties in trials, and in such cases it seems proper to use
their legal names. Besides, if one attempts to exempt a few noted writers
from the rule given above, where is the line to be drawn? No definite
principle of exception can be laid down which will guide either the
cataloguer or the reader; and probably the confusion would in the end
produce greater inconvenience than the present rule. Moreover, the entries
made by using the pseudonym as a heading would often have to be
altered. For a long time it would have been proper to enter the works of
Dickens under Boz; the Dutch annual bibliography uniformly uses Boz-
Dickens as a heading. No one would think of looking under Boz now.
Mark Twain is in a transition state. The public mind is divided between
Twain and Clemens. The tendency is always toward the use of the real
name; and that tendency will be much helped in the reading public if the
real name is always preferred in catalogues. Some pseudonyms
persistently adopted by authors have come to be considered as the only
names, as Voltaire (see § 23), and the translation Melanchthon. Perhaps
George Sand and George Eliot will in time be adjudged to belong to the
same company. It would be well if cataloguers could appoint some
permanent committee with authority to decide this and similar points as
from time to time they occur.”
I am now in favor of frequent entry under the pseudonym, with
reference from the real name. I should recommend the pseudonym as
heading in the case of any popular writer who has not written under his
own name, provided he is known to the public chiefly by his pseudonym,
and in the subject catalogue for any person who is so known. Examples
Page 37
are George Eliot, George Sand, Gavarni, Grandville, Cagliostro,
Cham, Pierre Loti, Daniel Stern, in some doubtful cases a card catalogue
might profitably make entry both under the real and the false name. This
elastic practice will give a little more trouble to the cataloguer than a rigid
rule of entry under the real name, but it will save trouble to those who use
the catalogue, which is more important.
But entry should not be made under a pseudonym which is used only
once or a few times; if the author writes also under his real name, if he is
known to the contemporary public or in literary history under his real
name, that is to be used for entry. It may sometimes happen that an author
is well known under a pseudonym and afterwards is better known by his
real name. In that case change the entries from the false to the real name.
If any author uses two different pseudonyms enter under each the works
written under it, with references both ways, and from the real name, until
the real name becomes better known.
It is plain that this practice of entering under the best known name,
whether real or false, puts an end to uniformity of entry between different
catalogues, leads to inconsistency of entry in the same catalogue, and will
often throw the cataloguer into perplexity to decide which name is best
known; but for the last objection it must be remembered that the catalogue
is made for the reader, not for the cataloguer, and {19} for the first two that
references will prevent any serious difficulty; and in the few cases of
nearly equal notoriety, double entry is an easy way out of the difficulty.
7. When the illustrations form a very important part of a work,
consider both the author of the text and the designer—or in certain
cases the engraver—of the plates to be author, and make a full
entry under each. Under the author mention the designer’s name in
the title, and vice versa.
Such works are: Walton’s Welsh scenery, with text by Bonney; Wolf’s
“Wild animals,” with text by Elliot. Which shall be taken as author in the
subject or form entry depends upon the work and the subject. Under
Cham, Pierre Loti, Daniel Stern, in some doubtful cases a card catalogue
might profitably make entry both under the real and the false name. This
elastic practice will give a little more trouble to the cataloguer than a rigid
rule of entry under the real name, but it will save trouble to those who use
the catalogue, which is more important.
But entry should not be made under a pseudonym which is used only
once or a few times; if the author writes also under his real name, if he is
known to the contemporary public or in literary history under his real
name, that is to be used for entry. It may sometimes happen that an author
is well known under a pseudonym and afterwards is better known by his
real name. In that case change the entries from the false to the real name.
If any author uses two different pseudonyms enter under each the works
written under it, with references both ways, and from the real name, until
the real name becomes better known.
It is plain that this practice of entering under the best known name,
whether real or false, puts an end to uniformity of entry between different
catalogues, leads to inconsistency of entry in the same catalogue, and will
often throw the cataloguer into perplexity to decide which name is best
known; but for the last objection it must be remembered that the catalogue
is made for the reader, not for the cataloguer, and {19} for the first two that
references will prevent any serious difficulty; and in the few cases of
nearly equal notoriety, double entry is an easy way out of the difficulty.
7. When the illustrations form a very important part of a work,
consider both the author of the text and the designer—or in certain
cases the engraver—of the plates to be author, and make a full
entry under each. Under the author mention the designer’s name in
the title, and vice versa.
Such works are: Walton’s Welsh scenery, with text by Bonney; Wolf’s
“Wild animals,” with text by Elliot. Which shall be taken as author in the
subject or form entry depends upon the work and the subject. Under
Page 38
Water-color drawings it would be Walton; under Wood-engravings,
Wolf; under Wales and Zoölogy, the cataloguer must decide which
illustrates the subject most, the writer or the artist. E. g., under Gothic
Architecture Pugin is undoubtedly to be considered the author of his
“Examples,” though “the literary part” is by E. J. Willson; for the
illustrator was really the author and the text was subsidiary to the plates. It
was to carry out Pugin’s ideas, not Willson’s, that the work was published.
8. The designer or painter copied is the author of engravings; the
cartographer is the author of maps; the engraver in general is to be
considered as no more the author than the printer. But in a special
catalogue of engravings the engraver would be considered as
author; in any full catalogue references should be made from the
names of famous engravers, as Raimondi, Müller, Steinla, Wolle.
An architect is the author of his designs and plans.
9. Enter musical works doubly, under the author of the words and
also the composer of the music.
Short and Medium will generally enter only under the composer; Don
Giovanni, for example, only under Mozart and not under Da Ponte. This
economy especially applies to songs.
10. Booksellers and auctioneers are to be considered as the authors
of their catalogues, unless the contrary is expressly asserted.
Entering these only under the form-heading Catalogues belongs to the
dark ages of cataloguing. Put the catalogue of a library under the library’s
name. (§ 56.)
11. Put the auctioneer’s catalogue of a public library under the
name of the library, of a private library under the name of the
Wolf; under Wales and Zoölogy, the cataloguer must decide which
illustrates the subject most, the writer or the artist. E. g., under Gothic
Architecture Pugin is undoubtedly to be considered the author of his
“Examples,” though “the literary part” is by E. J. Willson; for the
illustrator was really the author and the text was subsidiary to the plates. It
was to carry out Pugin’s ideas, not Willson’s, that the work was published.
8. The designer or painter copied is the author of engravings; the
cartographer is the author of maps; the engraver in general is to be
considered as no more the author than the printer. But in a special
catalogue of engravings the engraver would be considered as
author; in any full catalogue references should be made from the
names of famous engravers, as Raimondi, Müller, Steinla, Wolle.
An architect is the author of his designs and plans.
9. Enter musical works doubly, under the author of the words and
also the composer of the music.
Short and Medium will generally enter only under the composer; Don
Giovanni, for example, only under Mozart and not under Da Ponte. This
economy especially applies to songs.
10. Booksellers and auctioneers are to be considered as the authors
of their catalogues, unless the contrary is expressly asserted.
Entering these only under the form-heading Catalogues belongs to the
dark ages of cataloguing. Put the catalogue of a library under the library’s
name. (§ 56.)
11. Put the auctioneer’s catalogue of a public library under the
name of the library, of a private library under the name of the
Page 39
owner, unless there is reason to believe that another person made
it. In the latter case it would appear in the author catalogue under
the maker’s name, and in the subject catalogue under the owner’s
name.
12. Enter commentaries with the text complete under the author of
the text and also under the author of the commentary, provided
that is entitled “Commentary on * * *” and not “* * * with com‐
mentary.”
In a majority of cases this difference in the title will correspond to a
difference in the character of the works and in the expectation of the
public; if in any particular case the commentary preponderates in a title of
the second of the forms above, a reference can be made from the
commentator’s name. {20}
13. Enter a continuation or an index, when not written by the
author of the original work but printed with it, under the same
heading, with an analytical reference from its own author (§§ 164,
194); when printed separately, enter it under each author.
14. An epitome should be entered under the original author, with a
reference from the epitomator.
Ex. “The boy’s King Arthur” under Sir Thomas Malory, with a
reference from Sidney Lanier.
15. A revision should be entered under the name of the original
author unless it becomes substantially a new work.
There will often be doubt on this point. To determine it, notice
whether the revision is counted as one of the editions of the original work,
it. In the latter case it would appear in the author catalogue under
the maker’s name, and in the subject catalogue under the owner’s
name.
12. Enter commentaries with the text complete under the author of
the text and also under the author of the commentary, provided
that is entitled “Commentary on * * *” and not “* * * with com‐
mentary.”
In a majority of cases this difference in the title will correspond to a
difference in the character of the works and in the expectation of the
public; if in any particular case the commentary preponderates in a title of
the second of the forms above, a reference can be made from the
commentator’s name. {20}
13. Enter a continuation or an index, when not written by the
author of the original work but printed with it, under the same
heading, with an analytical reference from its own author (§§ 164,
194); when printed separately, enter it under each author.
14. An epitome should be entered under the original author, with a
reference from the epitomator.
Ex. “The boy’s King Arthur” under Sir Thomas Malory, with a
reference from Sidney Lanier.
15. A revision should be entered under the name of the original
author unless it becomes substantially a new work.
There will often be doubt on this point. To determine it, notice
whether the revision is counted as one of the editions of the original work,
Page 40
and whether it is described on the title-page as the work of the original
author or the reviser, and read and weigh the prefaces. Refer in all
doubtful cases.
16. Excerpts and chrestomathies from a single author go under
that author, with a reference from the excerptor if his introduction
and annotations are extensive, or he has added a lexicon of
importance.
Ex. Urlichs’ Chrestomathia Pliniana goes under Plinius, with a
reference from Urlichs.
17. Enter concordances both under their own author and the author
concorded. The latter entry, however, is to be regarded as a
subject-entry.
Ex. Cleveland’s Concordance to the poetical works of Milton,
Brightwell’s Concordance to Tennyson, Mrs. Furness’s Concordance to
Shakespeare’s poems.
18. Reporters are usually treated as authors of reports of trials,
etc. [11] Translators and editors are not to be considered as authors.
[12] (But see References, § 60.)
[11] A stenographic reporter is hardly more an author than the printer is; but it is not well to
attempt to make fine distinctions.
[12] A collection of works should be entered under the translator if he is also the collector
(see § 59); but again if he translates another man’s collection it should be put under the name
of the original collector; as Dasent’s “Tales from the North” is really a version of part of
Asbjörnsen and Moe’s “Norske Folkeventyr” and belongs under their names as joint
collectors, with a reference from Dasent.
(ii.) Under what part of the name.
19. Put under the Christian or forename:
author or the reviser, and read and weigh the prefaces. Refer in all
doubtful cases.
16. Excerpts and chrestomathies from a single author go under
that author, with a reference from the excerptor if his introduction
and annotations are extensive, or he has added a lexicon of
importance.
Ex. Urlichs’ Chrestomathia Pliniana goes under Plinius, with a
reference from Urlichs.
17. Enter concordances both under their own author and the author
concorded. The latter entry, however, is to be regarded as a
subject-entry.
Ex. Cleveland’s Concordance to the poetical works of Milton,
Brightwell’s Concordance to Tennyson, Mrs. Furness’s Concordance to
Shakespeare’s poems.
18. Reporters are usually treated as authors of reports of trials,
etc. [11] Translators and editors are not to be considered as authors.
[12] (But see References, § 60.)
[11] A stenographic reporter is hardly more an author than the printer is; but it is not well to
attempt to make fine distinctions.
[12] A collection of works should be entered under the translator if he is also the collector
(see § 59); but again if he translates another man’s collection it should be put under the name
of the original collector; as Dasent’s “Tales from the North” is really a version of part of
Asbjörnsen and Moe’s “Norske Folkeventyr” and belongs under their names as joint
collectors, with a reference from Dasent.
(ii.) Under what part of the name.
19. Put under the Christian or forename:
Page 41
a. Sovereigns or princes of sovereign houses. [13] Use the
English form of the name except for Greeks and Romans. {21}
b. Persons canonized.
Ex. Thomas [a Becket], Saint.
c. Friars who by the constitution of their order drop their
surname. Add the name of the family in parentheses and refer
from it.
Ex. Paolino da S. Bartolomeo [J. P. Wesdin].
d. Persons known under their first name only, whether or not
they add that of their native place or profession or rank.
Ex. Paulus Diaconus, Thomas Heisterbacensis.
Similarly are to be treated a few persons known almost entirely by the
forename, as Michelangelo Buonarroti, Raffaello Santi (refer from
Raphael), Rembrandt van Rhijn. Refer always from the family name.
e. Oriental authors, including Jewish rabbis whose works were
published before 1700.
Ex. Abu Bakr ibn Badr. This rule has exceptions. Some Oriental
writers are known and should be entered under other parts of their name
than the first, as “Abu-l-Kasim, Khalaf ibn Abbas,” or under some
appellation as “al-Masudi,” “at-Tabari.” Grässe’s “Lehrbuch einer
allgemeinen Literärgeschichte” is a convenient guide in this matter; he
prints that part of the name by which Arabic writers are commonly known
in a heavier type than the rest.
In Arabic names the words of relationship Abu (father), Umm
(mother), Ibn, Bin (son), Ahu (brother), though not to be treated as names
by themselves, are yet not to be disregarded, as proposed by Dr. Dziatzko.
They form a name in conjunction with the word following (e. g., Abu
English form of the name except for Greeks and Romans. {21}
b. Persons canonized.
Ex. Thomas [a Becket], Saint.
c. Friars who by the constitution of their order drop their
surname. Add the name of the family in parentheses and refer
from it.
Ex. Paolino da S. Bartolomeo [J. P. Wesdin].
d. Persons known under their first name only, whether or not
they add that of their native place or profession or rank.
Ex. Paulus Diaconus, Thomas Heisterbacensis.
Similarly are to be treated a few persons known almost entirely by the
forename, as Michelangelo Buonarroti, Raffaello Santi (refer from
Raphael), Rembrandt van Rhijn. Refer always from the family name.
e. Oriental authors, including Jewish rabbis whose works were
published before 1700.
Ex. Abu Bakr ibn Badr. This rule has exceptions. Some Oriental
writers are known and should be entered under other parts of their name
than the first, as “Abu-l-Kasim, Khalaf ibn Abbas,” or under some
appellation as “al-Masudi,” “at-Tabari.” Grässe’s “Lehrbuch einer
allgemeinen Literärgeschichte” is a convenient guide in this matter; he
prints that part of the name by which Arabic writers are commonly known
in a heavier type than the rest.
In Arabic names the words of relationship Abu (father), Umm
(mother), Ibn, Bin (son), Ahu (brother), though not to be treated as names
by themselves, are yet not to be disregarded, as proposed by Dr. Dziatzko.
They form a name in conjunction with the word following (e. g., Abu
Page 42
Bakr) and determine the alphabetical place of the entry. But the article al
(changed by assonance to ad-, ar-, as-, at-, az-, according to the letter it
precedes) is neglected (al-Masudi).
In all Oriental names the cataloguer must be careful not to take titles,
as Emir, Bey, Pasha, Sri, Babu, Pundit, for names.
In regard to East Indian names, Dr. Feigl (Centralbl. f. Bibl., 4: 120)
gives the rule: If there are two names, enter under the first, which is the
individual name, with a reference from the second; if there are three, enter
under the third, which is the family name, with a reference under the
second.
[13] This must include Popes even before the acquisition and after the loss of the temporal
power.
The direction “Use the English form of the name” was a concession to ignorance; when it
was given, that form was almost alone employed in English books; since then the tone of
literature has changed; the desire for local coloring has led to the use of foreign forms, and we
have become familiarized with Louis, Henri, Marguerite, Carlos, Karl, Wilhelm, Gustaf. If the
present tendency continues we shall be able to treat princes’ names like any other foreign
names; perhaps the next generation of cataloguers will no more tolerate the headings William
Emperor of Germany, Lewis XIV than they will tolerate Virgil, Horace, Pliny. The change, to
be sure, would give rise to some difficult questions of nationality, but it would diminish the
number of the titles now accumulated under the more common royal names.
20. Put under the surname:
a. In general, all persons not included under § 19.
In a few cases, chiefly of artists, a universally-used sobriquet is to be
taken in place of the family or forename, as Tintoretto (whose real name
was Giacomo Robusti). Similar cases are Canaletto (Antonio Canale
and also B. Belotto), Correggio (Ant. Allegri), Garofalo (Benvenuto
Piero Tisi), Il Sodoma (Giov. Ant. Bazzi), Spagnoletto (José Ribera),
Uccello (Paolo Doni). Always refer from the family name.
b. In particular, ecclesiastical dignitaries. Refer.
Ex.
Kaye, John, Bishop of Lincoln.
Lincoln, John, Bishop of. See Kaye.
(changed by assonance to ad-, ar-, as-, at-, az-, according to the letter it
precedes) is neglected (al-Masudi).
In all Oriental names the cataloguer must be careful not to take titles,
as Emir, Bey, Pasha, Sri, Babu, Pundit, for names.
In regard to East Indian names, Dr. Feigl (Centralbl. f. Bibl., 4: 120)
gives the rule: If there are two names, enter under the first, which is the
individual name, with a reference from the second; if there are three, enter
under the third, which is the family name, with a reference under the
second.
[13] This must include Popes even before the acquisition and after the loss of the temporal
power.
The direction “Use the English form of the name” was a concession to ignorance; when it
was given, that form was almost alone employed in English books; since then the tone of
literature has changed; the desire for local coloring has led to the use of foreign forms, and we
have become familiarized with Louis, Henri, Marguerite, Carlos, Karl, Wilhelm, Gustaf. If the
present tendency continues we shall be able to treat princes’ names like any other foreign
names; perhaps the next generation of cataloguers will no more tolerate the headings William
Emperor of Germany, Lewis XIV than they will tolerate Virgil, Horace, Pliny. The change, to
be sure, would give rise to some difficult questions of nationality, but it would diminish the
number of the titles now accumulated under the more common royal names.
20. Put under the surname:
a. In general, all persons not included under § 19.
In a few cases, chiefly of artists, a universally-used sobriquet is to be
taken in place of the family or forename, as Tintoretto (whose real name
was Giacomo Robusti). Similar cases are Canaletto (Antonio Canale
and also B. Belotto), Correggio (Ant. Allegri), Garofalo (Benvenuto
Piero Tisi), Il Sodoma (Giov. Ant. Bazzi), Spagnoletto (José Ribera),
Uccello (Paolo Doni). Always refer from the family name.
b. In particular, ecclesiastical dignitaries. Refer.
Ex.
Kaye, John, Bishop of Lincoln.
Lincoln, John, Bishop of. See Kaye.
Page 43
Bishops usually omit their family name, canons their forename, on
their title-pages, as “by Canon Liddon,” “by the Bishop of Ripon,” “by
Henry Edward, archbishop of Westminster,” i. e., H: E: Manning. Care
must be taken not to treat Canon as a forename or Edward as a family
name. {22}
c. Married women, using the last well-known form. Refer.
Wives often continue writing, and are known in literature, only under
their maiden names (as Miss Freer or Fanny Lewald), or after a second
marriage retain for literary purposes the first husband’s name. The
cataloguer should not hurry to make a change in the name as soon as he
learns of a marriage. Let him rather follow than lead the public.
21. Put under the title:
British [14] and foreign [15] noblemen, referring from earlier
titles by which they have been known, and, in the case of
British noblemen, from the family name.
Ex.
Chesterfield, Philip Dormer Stanhope, 4th Earl of. Refer from
Stanhope.
Saint-Simon, Louis de Rouvroi, duc de.
[14] The British Museum and Mr. Jewett enter British noblemen under the family name; Mr.
Perkins prefers entry under titles for British noblemen, in which I agree with him, although the
opposite practice is now so well established. The reasons for entry under the title are that
British noblemen are always so spoken of, always sign by their titles only, and seldom put the
family name upon the title-pages of their books, so that ninety-nine in a hundred readers must
look under the title first. The reasons against it are that the founders of noble families are often
as well known—sometimes even better—by their family name as by their titles (as Charles
Jenkinson afterwards Lord Liverpool, Sir Robert Walpole afterwards Earl of Orford); that the
same man bears different titles in different parts of his life (thus P. Stanhope published his
“History of England from the peace of Utrecht” as Lord Mahon, and his “Reign of Queen
Anne” as Earl Stanhope); that it separates members of the same family (Lord Chancellor
Eldon would be under Eldon and his father and all his brothers and sisters under the family
name Scott), and brings together members of different families (thus the earldom of Bath has
been held by members of the families of Shaunde, Bourchier, Granville, and Pulteney, and the
their title-pages, as “by Canon Liddon,” “by the Bishop of Ripon,” “by
Henry Edward, archbishop of Westminster,” i. e., H: E: Manning. Care
must be taken not to treat Canon as a forename or Edward as a family
name. {22}
c. Married women, using the last well-known form. Refer.
Wives often continue writing, and are known in literature, only under
their maiden names (as Miss Freer or Fanny Lewald), or after a second
marriage retain for literary purposes the first husband’s name. The
cataloguer should not hurry to make a change in the name as soon as he
learns of a marriage. Let him rather follow than lead the public.
21. Put under the title:
British [14] and foreign [15] noblemen, referring from earlier
titles by which they have been known, and, in the case of
British noblemen, from the family name.
Ex.
Chesterfield, Philip Dormer Stanhope, 4th Earl of. Refer from
Stanhope.
Saint-Simon, Louis de Rouvroi, duc de.
[14] The British Museum and Mr. Jewett enter British noblemen under the family name; Mr.
Perkins prefers entry under titles for British noblemen, in which I agree with him, although the
opposite practice is now so well established. The reasons for entry under the title are that
British noblemen are always so spoken of, always sign by their titles only, and seldom put the
family name upon the title-pages of their books, so that ninety-nine in a hundred readers must
look under the title first. The reasons against it are that the founders of noble families are often
as well known—sometimes even better—by their family name as by their titles (as Charles
Jenkinson afterwards Lord Liverpool, Sir Robert Walpole afterwards Earl of Orford); that the
same man bears different titles in different parts of his life (thus P. Stanhope published his
“History of England from the peace of Utrecht” as Lord Mahon, and his “Reign of Queen
Anne” as Earl Stanhope); that it separates members of the same family (Lord Chancellor
Eldon would be under Eldon and his father and all his brothers and sisters under the family
name Scott), and brings together members of different families (thus the earldom of Bath has
been held by members of the families of Shaunde, Bourchier, Granville, and Pulteney, and the
Page 44
family name of the present Marquis of Bath is Thymne), which last argument would be more
to the point in planning a family history. The same objections apply to the entry of French
noblemen under their titles, about which there can be no hesitation. The strongest argument in
favor of the Museum rule is that it is well-established and that it is desirable that there should
be some uniform rule. Ecclesiastical dignitaries stand on an entirely different footing. There is
much more use of the family name and much more change of title. In the first edition I
followed the British Museum rules, but I am now in favor of the more popular method of entry
of noblemen, namely, under their titles, except when the family name is decidedly better known
(Francis Bacon, Baron Verulam, Horace Walpole, 4th Earl of Orford). In such cases enter
under the family name and refer from the title. This rule was adopted by the committee of the
American Library Association (Lib. jnl., 3: 12–19; 8: 251–254). The reasons pro and con were
discussed in Lib. jnl., 3: 13, 14. The gist of them is: “Authors should be put under their names.
The definition of a name is ‘that by which a person or thing is known.’ British noblemen are
known by their titles, not by their family names.”
[15] Put the military nobles and princes of the French Empire under their family names, with
references from their titles, e. g., Lucien Bonaparte, Prince de Canino, MacMahon, duc de
Magenta.
22. Put the works of authors who change their name under the
latest form, provided the new name be legally and permanently
adopted.
Do not worry about the proper form of changed and transliterated
names, nor spend much time in hunting up facts and deciding. If the
necessary references are made, it is of little importance which form is
chosen for the main entry, provided, of course, that the library always
chooses the same heading.
If the change consist in the addition of a name the new name is to be
treated by the next rule. {23}
23. Put compound names:
a. If English, under the last part of the name, when the first has
not been used alone by the author.
Ex. Gould, Sabine Baring-; but Halliwell (afterwards Halliwell-
Phillipps), J. O., because the author wrote much under the first name.
This rule secures uniformity; but, like all rules, it sometimes leads to
entries under headings where nobody would look for them. Refer.
to the point in planning a family history. The same objections apply to the entry of French
noblemen under their titles, about which there can be no hesitation. The strongest argument in
favor of the Museum rule is that it is well-established and that it is desirable that there should
be some uniform rule. Ecclesiastical dignitaries stand on an entirely different footing. There is
much more use of the family name and much more change of title. In the first edition I
followed the British Museum rules, but I am now in favor of the more popular method of entry
of noblemen, namely, under their titles, except when the family name is decidedly better known
(Francis Bacon, Baron Verulam, Horace Walpole, 4th Earl of Orford). In such cases enter
under the family name and refer from the title. This rule was adopted by the committee of the
American Library Association (Lib. jnl., 3: 12–19; 8: 251–254). The reasons pro and con were
discussed in Lib. jnl., 3: 13, 14. The gist of them is: “Authors should be put under their names.
The definition of a name is ‘that by which a person or thing is known.’ British noblemen are
known by their titles, not by their family names.”
[15] Put the military nobles and princes of the French Empire under their family names, with
references from their titles, e. g., Lucien Bonaparte, Prince de Canino, MacMahon, duc de
Magenta.
22. Put the works of authors who change their name under the
latest form, provided the new name be legally and permanently
adopted.
Do not worry about the proper form of changed and transliterated
names, nor spend much time in hunting up facts and deciding. If the
necessary references are made, it is of little importance which form is
chosen for the main entry, provided, of course, that the library always
chooses the same heading.
If the change consist in the addition of a name the new name is to be
treated by the next rule. {23}
23. Put compound names:
a. If English, under the last part of the name, when the first has
not been used alone by the author.
Ex. Gould, Sabine Baring-; but Halliwell (afterwards Halliwell-
Phillipps), J. O., because the author wrote much under the first name.
This rule secures uniformity; but, like all rules, it sometimes leads to
entries under headings where nobody would look for them. Refer.
Page 45
b. If foreign, under the first part.
Both such compound names as Gentil-Bernard and such as Gentil de
Chavagnac. There are various exceptions, when a name has been more
known under the last part, as Fénelon, not Salignac de Lamothe
Fénelon; Voltaire, not Arouet de Voltaire; Sternberg, not Ungern-
Sternberg. Moreover, it is not always easy to determine what is a
compound surname in French. A convenient rule would be to follow the
authority of Hœfer (Biog. gén.) and Quérard, in such cases, if they always
agreed; unfortunately, they often differ. References are necessary
whichever way one decides each case, especially when the second part of
a foreign compound name has been used alone, as Merle d’Aubigné
(enter under Merle with a reference from Aubigné).
In French a forename is sometimes joined to a surname by a hyphen.
In such cases make the entry under the family name with a reference from
the forename, e. g., entry, Rochette, Désiré Raoul; reference, Raoul-
Rochette. See Rochette.
c. In foreign compound names of women also, although the
first part is generally the maiden name and the second the
husband’s name, the entry should generally be under the first,
with a reference from the second. (See 20, c.)
Ex. Rivé-King, with cross-reference from King, born Rivé.
24. Put surnames preceded by prefixes:
a. In French, under the prefix when it is or contains an article,
Le, La, L’, Du, Des; under the word following when the
prefix is a preposition, de, d’.
When the name is printed by the author as one word the entry is made
under the preposition, as Debucourt, Decamps.
Both such compound names as Gentil-Bernard and such as Gentil de
Chavagnac. There are various exceptions, when a name has been more
known under the last part, as Fénelon, not Salignac de Lamothe
Fénelon; Voltaire, not Arouet de Voltaire; Sternberg, not Ungern-
Sternberg. Moreover, it is not always easy to determine what is a
compound surname in French. A convenient rule would be to follow the
authority of Hœfer (Biog. gén.) and Quérard, in such cases, if they always
agreed; unfortunately, they often differ. References are necessary
whichever way one decides each case, especially when the second part of
a foreign compound name has been used alone, as Merle d’Aubigné
(enter under Merle with a reference from Aubigné).
In French a forename is sometimes joined to a surname by a hyphen.
In such cases make the entry under the family name with a reference from
the forename, e. g., entry, Rochette, Désiré Raoul; reference, Raoul-
Rochette. See Rochette.
c. In foreign compound names of women also, although the
first part is generally the maiden name and the second the
husband’s name, the entry should generally be under the first,
with a reference from the second. (See 20, c.)
Ex. Rivé-King, with cross-reference from King, born Rivé.
24. Put surnames preceded by prefixes:
a. In French, under the prefix when it is or contains an article,
Le, La, L’, Du, Des; under the word following when the
prefix is a preposition, de, d’.
When the name is printed by the author as one word the entry is made
under the preposition, as Debucourt, Decamps.
Page 46
b. In English, under the prefix, no matter from what language
the name is derived, as De Quincey, Van Buren, with
references when necessary.
c. In all other languages, under the name following the prefix,
as Gama, Vasco da. with references whenever the name has
been commonly used in English with the prefix, as Del Rio,
Vandyck, Van Ess.
But when the author prints his name as one word entry is made under
the prefix, as Vanderhaeghen.
d. Naturalized names are to be treated by the rules of the
nation adopting them.
Thus German names preceded by von when belonging to Russians are
to be entered under Von. E. g., Фонь Визин is to be entered as Von Vizin
(not Vizin, von), as this is the Russian custom. So when Dutch names
compounded with van are adopted into French or English (as Van Laun)
the Van is treated as part of the family name.
Prefixes are d’, de, de La (the name goes under La not de), Des, Du,
L’, La, Le, Les, St., Ste. (to be arranged as if written Saint, Sainte), Van,
A’, Ap, O’, Fitz, Mac (which is to be printed as it is in the title, whether
M’, or Mc, or Mac, but to be arranged as if written Mac). {24}
25. Put names of Latin authors under that part of the name chosen
in Smith’s Dictionary of Greek and Roman biography, unless there
is some good reason for not doing so.
26. Put names of capes, lakes, mountains, rivers, forts, etc.,
beginning with Cape, Lake, Mt., etc., under the word following
the prefix, but when the name is itself used as a prefix, do not
the name is derived, as De Quincey, Van Buren, with
references when necessary.
c. In all other languages, under the name following the prefix,
as Gama, Vasco da. with references whenever the name has
been commonly used in English with the prefix, as Del Rio,
Vandyck, Van Ess.
But when the author prints his name as one word entry is made under
the prefix, as Vanderhaeghen.
d. Naturalized names are to be treated by the rules of the
nation adopting them.
Thus German names preceded by von when belonging to Russians are
to be entered under Von. E. g., Фонь Визин is to be entered as Von Vizin
(not Vizin, von), as this is the Russian custom. So when Dutch names
compounded with van are adopted into French or English (as Van Laun)
the Van is treated as part of the family name.
Prefixes are d’, de, de La (the name goes under La not de), Des, Du,
L’, La, Le, Les, St., Ste. (to be arranged as if written Saint, Sainte), Van,
A’, Ap, O’, Fitz, Mac (which is to be printed as it is in the title, whether
M’, or Mc, or Mac, but to be arranged as if written Mac). {24}
25. Put names of Latin authors under that part of the name chosen
in Smith’s Dictionary of Greek and Roman biography, unless there
is some good reason for not doing so.
26. Put names of capes, lakes, mountains, rivers, forts, etc.,
beginning with Cape, Lake, Mt., etc., under the word following
the prefix, but when the name is itself used as a prefix, do not
Page 47
transpose Cape, etc., nor in such names as Isle of the Woods, Isles
of Shoals.
Ex. Cod, Cape; George, Lake; Washington, Mt.; Moultrie, Fort;
but Cape Breton Island. When the name of a fort becomes the name of a
city, of course the inversion must be abandoned, as Fort Wayne.
(iii.) Under what form of the name.
27. Give the names, both family and Christian, in the vernacular
form, [16] if any instance occurs of the use of that form in the
printed publications of the author. [17]
[16] The vernacular form of most Christian names may be found in Michaelis’s “Wörterbuch
der Taufnamen” (Berlin, 1856). There are also meagre lists in foreign dictionaries. For the
forms of mediæval names much assistance can be had from A. Potthast’s “Bibliotheca
historica medii aevi, Berlin, Weber, 1862,” O, and “Supplement, 1868,” O; also from Alfred
Franklin’s “Dictionnaire des noms, surnoms, et pseudonymes latins de l’histoire littéraire du
Moyen Age (1100 à 1530), Paris, 1876,” O. (On the names of sovereigns, see § 19; on the
Latin names of Greek authors, see § 36; on the names of Greek gods, see § 100.)
[17] This is the British Museum rule. It will obviously be sometimes impossible and often
difficult to determine this point in a library of less extent than the Museum, and the cataloguer
must make up his mind to some inconsistency in his treatment of mediæval names, and be
consoled by the knowledge that if proper references are made no harm will be done. Against a
too great preference for the vernacular Professor De Morgan writes in the preface to his
“Arithmetical books:” “I have not attempted to translate the names of those who wrote in
Latin at a time when that language was the universal medium of communication. I consider
that the Latin name is that which the author has left to posterity, and that the practice of
retaining it is convenient, as marking, to a certain extent, the epoch of his writings, and as
being the appellation by which his contemporaries and successors cite him. It is well to know
that Copernicus, Dasypodius, Xylander, Regiomontanus, and Clavius were Zepernik,
Rauchfuss, Holtzmann, Müller, and Schlüssel. But as the butchers’ bills of these eminent men
are all lost, and their writings only remain, it is best to designate them by the name they bear
on the latter rather than the former.”
The same may be said of Camerarius (Kämmerer), Capito (Kopflein), Mercator (Kramer),
Œcolampadius (Hausschein), where it would be useless to employ the vernacular name; if
both forms are in use, as in the case of Pomeranius = Bugenhagen, the vernacular should have
the preference. Reuchlin is much more common than its equivalent, Capnio.
Before the Reformation the presumption is in favor of the Latin form; after it in favor of
the vernacular.
Short will consult the convenience of his readers if he uses the English forms of names like
Homer, Horace, Virgil, in place of Homerus, Horatius, Vergilius.
of Shoals.
Ex. Cod, Cape; George, Lake; Washington, Mt.; Moultrie, Fort;
but Cape Breton Island. When the name of a fort becomes the name of a
city, of course the inversion must be abandoned, as Fort Wayne.
(iii.) Under what form of the name.
27. Give the names, both family and Christian, in the vernacular
form, [16] if any instance occurs of the use of that form in the
printed publications of the author. [17]
[16] The vernacular form of most Christian names may be found in Michaelis’s “Wörterbuch
der Taufnamen” (Berlin, 1856). There are also meagre lists in foreign dictionaries. For the
forms of mediæval names much assistance can be had from A. Potthast’s “Bibliotheca
historica medii aevi, Berlin, Weber, 1862,” O, and “Supplement, 1868,” O; also from Alfred
Franklin’s “Dictionnaire des noms, surnoms, et pseudonymes latins de l’histoire littéraire du
Moyen Age (1100 à 1530), Paris, 1876,” O. (On the names of sovereigns, see § 19; on the
Latin names of Greek authors, see § 36; on the names of Greek gods, see § 100.)
[17] This is the British Museum rule. It will obviously be sometimes impossible and often
difficult to determine this point in a library of less extent than the Museum, and the cataloguer
must make up his mind to some inconsistency in his treatment of mediæval names, and be
consoled by the knowledge that if proper references are made no harm will be done. Against a
too great preference for the vernacular Professor De Morgan writes in the preface to his
“Arithmetical books:” “I have not attempted to translate the names of those who wrote in
Latin at a time when that language was the universal medium of communication. I consider
that the Latin name is that which the author has left to posterity, and that the practice of
retaining it is convenient, as marking, to a certain extent, the epoch of his writings, and as
being the appellation by which his contemporaries and successors cite him. It is well to know
that Copernicus, Dasypodius, Xylander, Regiomontanus, and Clavius were Zepernik,
Rauchfuss, Holtzmann, Müller, and Schlüssel. But as the butchers’ bills of these eminent men
are all lost, and their writings only remain, it is best to designate them by the name they bear
on the latter rather than the former.”
The same may be said of Camerarius (Kämmerer), Capito (Kopflein), Mercator (Kramer),
Œcolampadius (Hausschein), where it would be useless to employ the vernacular name; if
both forms are in use, as in the case of Pomeranius = Bugenhagen, the vernacular should have
the preference. Reuchlin is much more common than its equivalent, Capnio.
Before the Reformation the presumption is in favor of the Latin form; after it in favor of
the vernacular.
Short will consult the convenience of his readers if he uses the English forms of names like
Homer, Horace, Virgil, in place of Homerus, Horatius, Vergilius.
Page 48
The vernacular names of the Middle Ages often appear in various forms. The form which
has survived to the present time is to be preferred (as Jean to Jehan), unless a name is
commonly used in the old form, as in the romances Jehan de Lançon. Refer from the one not
chosen.
28. If an author has written in several modern languages, choose
that in which he has written most.
29. In languages which use a masculine and a feminine form of
family names (as Modjeski and Modjeska), use that which the
authoress herself chiefly employs.
30. When an author’s name is variously spelled, select the best
authorized form as heading, add the variants in parentheses, and
make references from them to the form adopted.
Of course, great care must be taken not to enter separately works in
which an author spells his name differently, as Briant and Bryant,
Easterbrookes and Estabrook, Erdmann and Erdtmann. On the other hand,
different people who spell their names differently should be separated, as
Hofmann and Hoffmann, Maier, Mair, Majer, Mayer, Mayr, Meier, Meir,
Mejer, Meyer, Meyr, Schmid, Schmidt, Schmied, Schmiedt, Schmit,
Schmitt. (On the arrangement of such names in a card catalogue see §
218.)
In German Christian names there is a want of uniformity in the use of
C and K (Carl, Conrad, Karl, Konrad) and f and ph (Adolf, Adolph).
Occasionally an author uses both forms in different books, or writing only
in Latin (Carolus, Rudolphus), does not show which form he prefers.
Where the author thus leaves the point undecided, K and f should be
preferred to C and ph (except in Christoph). Swedish f is to be preferred to
v, as Gustaf, not Gustav.
31. When family names are written differently by different
persons, follow the spelling adopted by each, even though it
has survived to the present time is to be preferred (as Jean to Jehan), unless a name is
commonly used in the old form, as in the romances Jehan de Lançon. Refer from the one not
chosen.
28. If an author has written in several modern languages, choose
that in which he has written most.
29. In languages which use a masculine and a feminine form of
family names (as Modjeski and Modjeska), use that which the
authoress herself chiefly employs.
30. When an author’s name is variously spelled, select the best
authorized form as heading, add the variants in parentheses, and
make references from them to the form adopted.
Of course, great care must be taken not to enter separately works in
which an author spells his name differently, as Briant and Bryant,
Easterbrookes and Estabrook, Erdmann and Erdtmann. On the other hand,
different people who spell their names differently should be separated, as
Hofmann and Hoffmann, Maier, Mair, Majer, Mayer, Mayr, Meier, Meir,
Mejer, Meyer, Meyr, Schmid, Schmidt, Schmied, Schmiedt, Schmit,
Schmitt. (On the arrangement of such names in a card catalogue see §
218.)
In German Christian names there is a want of uniformity in the use of
C and K (Carl, Conrad, Karl, Konrad) and f and ph (Adolf, Adolph).
Occasionally an author uses both forms in different books, or writing only
in Latin (Carolus, Rudolphus), does not show which form he prefers.
Where the author thus leaves the point undecided, K and f should be
preferred to C and ph (except in Christoph). Swedish f is to be preferred to
v, as Gustaf, not Gustav.
31. When family names are written differently by different
persons, follow the spelling adopted by each, even though it
Page 49
should separate father and son.
32. Forenames are to be used in the form employed by their
owners, however unusual, as Will Carleton, Sally (Pratt)
McLean, Hans Droysen, Fritz Reuter.
33. Give names of places in the English form.
Munich not Muenchen or München, Vienna not Wien, Austria not
Oesterreich.
34. But if both the English and the foreign forms are used by
English writers, prefer the foreign form.
35. Use the modern name of a city and refer to it from the ancient,
provided its existence has been continuous and there is no doubt
as to the identity.
36. In transliteration of names from alphabets of differently
formed letters, use the vowels according to their German sounds.
(See Appendix II for the report of the Transliteration Committee of
the American Library Association.)
I. e., a (not ah) for the sound of a in father, e (not a) for the sound of e
in heir or of a in hate, i (not e) for the sound of i in mien, u (not oo nor
ou) for the sound of u in true or of oo in moon. This practice makes
transliterations that are likely to be pronounced in the main correctly by
anyone who knows any language but his own (who would naturally give
foreign vowel sounds to foreign names), and will give transliterations
agreeing at least in part with those of other nations. In some points,
however, we must be careful not to be misled by the practice of
foreigners, and when we take a name from Russian, for instance, through
the French or German, must see to it that the necessities of their alphabet
32. Forenames are to be used in the form employed by their
owners, however unusual, as Will Carleton, Sally (Pratt)
McLean, Hans Droysen, Fritz Reuter.
33. Give names of places in the English form.
Munich not Muenchen or München, Vienna not Wien, Austria not
Oesterreich.
34. But if both the English and the foreign forms are used by
English writers, prefer the foreign form.
35. Use the modern name of a city and refer to it from the ancient,
provided its existence has been continuous and there is no doubt
as to the identity.
36. In transliteration of names from alphabets of differently
formed letters, use the vowels according to their German sounds.
(See Appendix II for the report of the Transliteration Committee of
the American Library Association.)
I. e., a (not ah) for the sound of a in father, e (not a) for the sound of e
in heir or of a in hate, i (not e) for the sound of i in mien, u (not oo nor
ou) for the sound of u in true or of oo in moon. This practice makes
transliterations that are likely to be pronounced in the main correctly by
anyone who knows any language but his own (who would naturally give
foreign vowel sounds to foreign names), and will give transliterations
agreeing at least in part with those of other nations. In some points,
however, we must be careful not to be misled by the practice of
foreigners, and when we take a name from Russian, for instance, through
the French or German, must see to it that the necessities of their alphabet
Page 50
have not led them to use letters that do not suit our system. A Frenchman
writes for Turgenief Tourguénef, and for Golovin {26} Golovine, and uses
ou for u, ch for sh, dj for j, j for zh, gu for g, and qu for k. A German for
Dershavin writes Derschawin, and, worse than that, is obliged to use the
clumsy dsch where an Englishman can use j, as Dschellaleddin for Jalal-
ad-Din, and uses tsch for ch or tch, j for y or i (Turgenjew), w for v or f in
the ending of Russian names.
In Arabic names I am advised by good scholars to uniformly write a
where our ordinary Anglicized names have e, except for Ebn and Ben,
which become Ibn and Bin; also i for ee, and u where o has been
commonly used; in other words, to uniformly represent the vowel fatha by
a, kasra by i, and dhamma by u. Thus Mohammed becomes
Muhammad, Abou ed-Deen becomes Abu ad-Din. Of course references
must be made from the corrupt forms under which various Arabic authors
have become known in the West, unless it is thought that the altered form
has been so commonly used that it must be taken for the entry, as perhaps
Avicenna from Ibn Sina, Averroes from Ibn Roshd.
In Danish names if the type å is not to be had, use its older equivalent
aa; in a manuscript catalogue the modern orthography, å, should be
employed. Whichever is chosen should be uniformly used, however the
names may appear in the books. The diphthong æ should not be written
ae, nor should ö be written oe; ö, not œ, should be used for ø.
In old Dutch names write y for the modern ij and arrange so.
In German names used as headings, use ä, ö, ü, not ae, oe, ue, and
arrange accordingly.
For ancient Greek names use the Latinized form, as Democritus not
Demokritos, Longinus not Logginos. This holds good of translated
works as well as of the originals. It will not do to enter an Italian version
of the Odyssey under Omero, or of the Euterpe under Erodoto, or a
French version of the Noctes Atticæ under Aulu-Gelle. A college literary
catalogue may safely use the more nearly transliterated forms which are
coming into use, like Aiskulos, Homeros, but used in a town-library
catalogue they would only puzzle and mislead its readers. For that I
should prefer the English forms, as Homer, Horace.
writes for Turgenief Tourguénef, and for Golovin {26} Golovine, and uses
ou for u, ch for sh, dj for j, j for zh, gu for g, and qu for k. A German for
Dershavin writes Derschawin, and, worse than that, is obliged to use the
clumsy dsch where an Englishman can use j, as Dschellaleddin for Jalal-
ad-Din, and uses tsch for ch or tch, j for y or i (Turgenjew), w for v or f in
the ending of Russian names.
In Arabic names I am advised by good scholars to uniformly write a
where our ordinary Anglicized names have e, except for Ebn and Ben,
which become Ibn and Bin; also i for ee, and u where o has been
commonly used; in other words, to uniformly represent the vowel fatha by
a, kasra by i, and dhamma by u. Thus Mohammed becomes
Muhammad, Abou ed-Deen becomes Abu ad-Din. Of course references
must be made from the corrupt forms under which various Arabic authors
have become known in the West, unless it is thought that the altered form
has been so commonly used that it must be taken for the entry, as perhaps
Avicenna from Ibn Sina, Averroes from Ibn Roshd.
In Danish names if the type å is not to be had, use its older equivalent
aa; in a manuscript catalogue the modern orthography, å, should be
employed. Whichever is chosen should be uniformly used, however the
names may appear in the books. The diphthong æ should not be written
ae, nor should ö be written oe; ö, not œ, should be used for ø.
In old Dutch names write y for the modern ij and arrange so.
In German names used as headings, use ä, ö, ü, not ae, oe, ue, and
arrange accordingly.
For ancient Greek names use the Latinized form, as Democritus not
Demokritos, Longinus not Logginos. This holds good of translated
works as well as of the originals. It will not do to enter an Italian version
of the Odyssey under Omero, or of the Euterpe under Erodoto, or a
French version of the Noctes Atticæ under Aulu-Gelle. A college literary
catalogue may safely use the more nearly transliterated forms which are
coming into use, like Aiskulos, Homeros, but used in a town-library
catalogue they would only puzzle and mislead its readers. For that I
should prefer the English forms, as Homer, Horace.
Page 51
For modern Greek names Professor Abbot proposes the following
plan: Works in Romaic to be entered in a supplement, the names not
transliterated but printed in the Greek type. Translations of works of
modern Greek authors to be put under their Greek names in the
supplement, with references in the main catalogue under the forms
(whatever they may be) which their names assume in the translation.
Original works written in French, German, English, etc., by modern Greek
authors may be treated in the same way if their authors have not become
French, German, or English by residence and literary labors, in which
case they should be entered under the French, German, or English forms
which they have chosen for their names, with cross-references, if
necessary, from the Greek supplement to these names. If, however,
transliteration is attempted the following table of equivalents may be
used:
plan: Works in Romaic to be entered in a supplement, the names not
transliterated but printed in the Greek type. Translations of works of
modern Greek authors to be put under their Greek names in the
supplement, with references in the main catalogue under the forms
(whatever they may be) which their names assume in the translation.
Original works written in French, German, English, etc., by modern Greek
authors may be treated in the same way if their authors have not become
French, German, or English by residence and literary labors, in which
case they should be entered under the French, German, or English forms
which they have chosen for their names, with cross-references, if
necessary, from the Greek supplement to these names. If, however,
transliteration is attempted the following table of equivalents may be
used:
Page 52
αι æ
αυ av
ει ei
ευ ev
η i
ηυ iv
οι œ
υ y
υι yi
β v
γ gh
γ before κ, γ, χ, ξ n
δ dh
κ after γ g
ξ x
ου u
ρ r
χ kh
When Hindus themselves transliterate their names, use their form,
whether or not according to our rules. (Appendix II. )
In Hungarian names write ö, ü, with the diæresis (not oe, ue), and
arrange like the English o, u.
In Spanish names use the modern orthography i and j rather than the
ancient y and x.
In Swedish names ä, å, ö, should be so written (not ae, oe), and
arranged as the English a, o.
Ballhorn’s Grammatography (London, 1861) will be found very useful
on such points. {27}
37. When an author living in a foreign country has transliterated
his name according to the practice of that country and always uses
αυ av
ει ei
ευ ev
η i
ηυ iv
οι œ
υ y
υι yi
β v
γ gh
γ before κ, γ, χ, ξ n
δ dh
κ after γ g
ξ x
ου u
ρ r
χ kh
When Hindus themselves transliterate their names, use their form,
whether or not according to our rules. (Appendix II. )
In Hungarian names write ö, ü, with the diæresis (not oe, ue), and
arrange like the English o, u.
In Spanish names use the modern orthography i and j rather than the
ancient y and x.
In Swedish names ä, å, ö, should be so written (not ae, oe), and
arranged as the English a, o.
Ballhorn’s Grammatography (London, 1861) will be found very useful
on such points. {27}
37. When an author living in a foreign country has transliterated
his name according to the practice of that country and always uses
Page 53
it in that form, take that as the heading, referring from the form
which the name would have under § 36; but if he has written
much in his own language, use the English transliterated form.
Ex. Bikelas, Demetrius, with reference from Vikelas, Dmitri.
38. If a name which would properly be spelled by the English
alphabet has been transliterated into a foreign alphabet, refer from
the foreign form.
Ex. Šifner. See Schiefner.
(b.) C ORPORATE.
General principle.
39. Bodies of men are to be considered as authors of works
published in their name or by their authority.
The chief difficulty with regard to bodies of men is to determine (1)
what their names are, and (2) whether the name or some other word shall
be the heading. In regard to (2) the catalogues hitherto published may be
regarded as a series of experiments. No satisfactory usage has as yet been
established. Local names have always very strong claims to be headings;
but to enter the publications of all bodies of men under the places with
which the bodies are connected is to push a convenient practice so far that
it becomes inconvenient and leads to many rules entirely out of harmony
with the rest of the catalogue.
Details.
40. Enter under places (countries, or parts of countries, cities,
towns, ecclesiastical, military, or judicial districts) the works
published officially by their rulers (kings, [18] governors, mayors,
which the name would have under § 36; but if he has written
much in his own language, use the English transliterated form.
Ex. Bikelas, Demetrius, with reference from Vikelas, Dmitri.
38. If a name which would properly be spelled by the English
alphabet has been transliterated into a foreign alphabet, refer from
the foreign form.
Ex. Šifner. See Schiefner.
(b.) C ORPORATE.
General principle.
39. Bodies of men are to be considered as authors of works
published in their name or by their authority.
The chief difficulty with regard to bodies of men is to determine (1)
what their names are, and (2) whether the name or some other word shall
be the heading. In regard to (2) the catalogues hitherto published may be
regarded as a series of experiments. No satisfactory usage has as yet been
established. Local names have always very strong claims to be headings;
but to enter the publications of all bodies of men under the places with
which the bodies are connected is to push a convenient practice so far that
it becomes inconvenient and leads to many rules entirely out of harmony
with the rest of the catalogue.
Details.
40. Enter under places (countries, or parts of countries, cities,
towns, ecclesiastical, military, or judicial districts) the works
published officially by their rulers (kings, [18] governors, mayors,
Page 54
prelates, generals commanding, courts, [19] etc.). Refer from the
name of the ruler.
[18] Of course this does not affect works written privately by kings, etc., as K. James’s
“Counterblast.”
[19] The relation of courts to judicial districts is a little different from the others, but it is
convenient to treat them alike. The opinion of a single judge should be entered under his
name.
Ex.
U NITED S TATES. Supreme Court. Opinions of the judges in the case of Smith vs.
Turner, etc.
T ANEY , Roger Brooke. Decision in the Merryman case.
41. Similarly Congress, Parliament, and other governmental
bodies are authors of their journals, acts, minutes, laws, etc.; and
other departments of government of their reports, and of the works
published by them or under their auspices.
These are to be entered under the name of the country, city, or town,
and not in the main alphabet under the word Congress, Parliament, City
Council, or the like.
42. Laws on one or more particular subjects, whether digested or
merely collected, must have author-entries both under the name of
the country and under the name of the collector or digester.
Ex. Tilsley’s “Digest of the stamp acts” would appear both under
Great Britain and Tilsley. {28}
43. Calendars of documents, regesta, etc., are to be entered under
their maker, with a series-entry under the department which orders
the publication.
Ex. Green, Mrs. M.. Anne Everett (Wood). Calendar of state papers,
domestic, Charles II. The series-entry is under Great Britain. Master
of the Rolls.
name of the ruler.
[18] Of course this does not affect works written privately by kings, etc., as K. James’s
“Counterblast.”
[19] The relation of courts to judicial districts is a little different from the others, but it is
convenient to treat them alike. The opinion of a single judge should be entered under his
name.
Ex.
U NITED S TATES. Supreme Court. Opinions of the judges in the case of Smith vs.
Turner, etc.
T ANEY , Roger Brooke. Decision in the Merryman case.
41. Similarly Congress, Parliament, and other governmental
bodies are authors of their journals, acts, minutes, laws, etc.; and
other departments of government of their reports, and of the works
published by them or under their auspices.
These are to be entered under the name of the country, city, or town,
and not in the main alphabet under the word Congress, Parliament, City
Council, or the like.
42. Laws on one or more particular subjects, whether digested or
merely collected, must have author-entries both under the name of
the country and under the name of the collector or digester.
Ex. Tilsley’s “Digest of the stamp acts” would appear both under
Great Britain and Tilsley. {28}
43. Calendars of documents, regesta, etc., are to be entered under
their maker, with a series-entry under the department which orders
the publication.
Ex. Green, Mrs. M.. Anne Everett (Wood). Calendar of state papers,
domestic, Charles II. The series-entry is under Great Britain. Master
of the Rolls.
Page 55
44. Works written officially are to be entered under the name of
the department of government or society (see § 56) or
ecclesiastical district with a reference from the name of the
official, if it is thought worth making.
Some libraries may refer always; most will refer only when the report
has exceptional importance (1) from its subject, (2) from the treatment of
its subject, (3) from its literary merits, (4) from the fame of its author, or
(5) from having been separately published. Horace Mann’s reports, for
example, should be catalogued under Massachusetts. Board of
Education, to which heading a reference should be made from Mann.
Presidents’ messages should appear under United States. President.
Proclamations and all other official writings of kings should appear under
the name of the country (division King or Crown), arranged by reigns, as,
Great Britain. United States.
Crown. President.
Charles I. Buchanan.
Charles II. Lincoln.
James II. Johnson.
William and Mary. Grant.
45. In the entry of Government publications, use for a subdivision
the name of the office rather than the title of the officer, i. e.,
Ministère de la Marine, not Ministre de la Marine, Registry of
Deeds, not Register of Deeds. [20] The individual name of the
occupant of the office for the time being may be added in
parenthesis to the name of the office; [21] and it should be so added
when the publication has an individual character.
[20] There are cases, however, where the title of the officer is the only name of the office, as
Illinois. State Entomologist.
the department of government or society (see § 56) or
ecclesiastical district with a reference from the name of the
official, if it is thought worth making.
Some libraries may refer always; most will refer only when the report
has exceptional importance (1) from its subject, (2) from the treatment of
its subject, (3) from its literary merits, (4) from the fame of its author, or
(5) from having been separately published. Horace Mann’s reports, for
example, should be catalogued under Massachusetts. Board of
Education, to which heading a reference should be made from Mann.
Presidents’ messages should appear under United States. President.
Proclamations and all other official writings of kings should appear under
the name of the country (division King or Crown), arranged by reigns, as,
Great Britain. United States.
Crown. President.
Charles I. Buchanan.
Charles II. Lincoln.
James II. Johnson.
William and Mary. Grant.
45. In the entry of Government publications, use for a subdivision
the name of the office rather than the title of the officer, i. e.,
Ministère de la Marine, not Ministre de la Marine, Registry of
Deeds, not Register of Deeds. [20] The individual name of the
occupant of the office for the time being may be added in
parenthesis to the name of the office; [21] and it should be so added
when the publication has an individual character.
[20] There are cases, however, where the title of the officer is the only name of the office, as
Illinois. State Entomologist.
Page 56
[21] Great Britain. Crown, 1377–99 (Richard II ). A roll, etc.
46. Messages of a superior executive officer (as President or
Governor) transmitting to a legislative body or to some higher
executive officer the report of some inferior officer should be
entered as the report of the inferior officer, provided the message
is merely introductory and contains no independent matter;
provided, also, there are not three or more reports; if there are, the
higher officer is to be regarded as the collecting editor (§ 59, d); in
this case refer analytically to the superior officer’s official title
from all the inferior officers whose reports are so transmitted.
47. “Articles to be inquired of” in ecclesiastical districts should go
under the name of the district; but episcopal charges are not to go
under the name of the bishopric unless they relate especially to its
affairs, in which case they will have a subject-entry.
Ex. York, Archdeaconry of. Articles to be enquired of within the A.
of Y. {29}
48. Reports made to a department, but not by an official, are to be
entered under the department, with either an entry, reference, or
analytical under the author as circumstances require.
Gould’s “Mollusca and shells” and Cassin’s “Mammalogy and
ornithology of the United States Exploring Expedition under Wilkes” are
of this nature; so is “Memorial ceremonies at the graves of our soldiers,
collected under authority of Congress, by Frank Moore.” (Compare §
43.)
46. Messages of a superior executive officer (as President or
Governor) transmitting to a legislative body or to some higher
executive officer the report of some inferior officer should be
entered as the report of the inferior officer, provided the message
is merely introductory and contains no independent matter;
provided, also, there are not three or more reports; if there are, the
higher officer is to be regarded as the collecting editor (§ 59, d); in
this case refer analytically to the superior officer’s official title
from all the inferior officers whose reports are so transmitted.
47. “Articles to be inquired of” in ecclesiastical districts should go
under the name of the district; but episcopal charges are not to go
under the name of the bishopric unless they relate especially to its
affairs, in which case they will have a subject-entry.
Ex. York, Archdeaconry of. Articles to be enquired of within the A.
of Y. {29}
48. Reports made to a department, but not by an official, are to be
entered under the department, with either an entry, reference, or
analytical under the author as circumstances require.
Gould’s “Mollusca and shells” and Cassin’s “Mammalogy and
ornithology of the United States Exploring Expedition under Wilkes” are
of this nature; so is “Memorial ceremonies at the graves of our soldiers,
collected under authority of Congress, by Frank Moore.” (Compare §
43.)
Page 57
49. Enter congresses of several nations under the name of the
place of meeting (as that usually gives them their name), with
references from the nations taking part in them and from any name
by which they are popularly known.
Ex. The Congress of London, of Paris, of Verona.
50. Enter treaties under the name of each of the contracting
parties, with a reference from the name of the place, when the
treaty is commonly called by that name, and from any other usual
appellation.
Ex. Treaty of Versailles, Barrier treaty, Jay’s treaty.
51. Enter the official publications of any political party [22] or
religious denomination or order, [23] or military order, under the
name of the party, or denomination, or order. [24]
[22] Platforms, manifestoes, addresses, etc., under Democratic Party, Republican Party,
etc.
[23] Confessions of faith, creeds, catechisms, liturgies, breviaries, missals, hours, offices,
prayer books, etc., under Baptists, Benedictines, Catholic Church, Church of England, etc.
[24] That part of a body which belongs to any place should be entered under the name of the
body, not the place; e. g., Congregationalists in New England, Congregationalists in
Massachusetts, not New England Congregationalists, Massachusetts Congregationalists.
But references must be made from the place (indeed in cases like Massachusetts Convention,
Essex Conference, it may be doubted whether those well-known names should not be the
headings). It is to be noticed this rule is just the reverse of the one given under Subjects, § 97.
Single churches have usually been entered under the place, a practice which arose in American
catalogues from our way of naming churches “The First Church in ——,” “The Second
Church in ——,” etc., and applies very well to a majority of English churches, whose name
generally includes the name of the parish. It is more in accordance with dictionary principles
to limit the local entry of churches to First Church, etc., and those which have only the name
of the town or parish, and to put all others (as St. Sepulchre’s, St. Mary Aldermansbury)
under their names, as they read, and to treat convents and monasteries in the same way. (See
§ 56, Rule 2.) Of course the parishes of London (as Kensington, Marylebone, Southwark),
place of meeting (as that usually gives them their name), with
references from the nations taking part in them and from any name
by which they are popularly known.
Ex. The Congress of London, of Paris, of Verona.
50. Enter treaties under the name of each of the contracting
parties, with a reference from the name of the place, when the
treaty is commonly called by that name, and from any other usual
appellation.
Ex. Treaty of Versailles, Barrier treaty, Jay’s treaty.
51. Enter the official publications of any political party [22] or
religious denomination or order, [23] or military order, under the
name of the party, or denomination, or order. [24]
[22] Platforms, manifestoes, addresses, etc., under Democratic Party, Republican Party,
etc.
[23] Confessions of faith, creeds, catechisms, liturgies, breviaries, missals, hours, offices,
prayer books, etc., under Baptists, Benedictines, Catholic Church, Church of England, etc.
[24] That part of a body which belongs to any place should be entered under the name of the
body, not the place; e. g., Congregationalists in New England, Congregationalists in
Massachusetts, not New England Congregationalists, Massachusetts Congregationalists.
But references must be made from the place (indeed in cases like Massachusetts Convention,
Essex Conference, it may be doubted whether those well-known names should not be the
headings). It is to be noticed this rule is just the reverse of the one given under Subjects, § 97.
Single churches have usually been entered under the place, a practice which arose in American
catalogues from our way of naming churches “The First Church in ——,” “The Second
Church in ——,” etc., and applies very well to a majority of English churches, whose name
generally includes the name of the parish. It is more in accordance with dictionary principles
to limit the local entry of churches to First Church, etc., and those which have only the name
of the town or parish, and to put all others (as St. Sepulchre’s, St. Mary Aldermansbury)
under their names, as they read, and to treat convents and monasteries in the same way. (See
§ 56, Rule 2.) Of course the parishes of London (as Kensington, Marylebone, Southwark),
Page 58
like the parts of Boston (Dorchester, Roxbury, etc.), or of any other composite city, will be put
under their own names, not under the name of the city.
52. Enter reports, journals, minutes, etc., of conventions,
conferences, etc., under the names of the bodies holding the
conferences, etc. When the body has no exact name [25] enter under
the name of the place of meeting. [26]
[25] Some conventions are held by bodies which have no existence beyond the convention.
If, however, they have a definite name, use that; ex., 4th National Quarantine {30} and
Sanitary Convention. Often the name is given in different forms. Select that which appears to
be the most authentic, and make references from the others.
[26] In any case it is well to refer from the name of the place, and in the case of Presidential
conventions it is indispensable.
Put the convention of a county or other named district under the name of the district, with
a reference from the town in which it is held, when it is named in the title-page.
53. Enter ecclesiastical councils, both general and special, under
the name of the place of meeting. (The Vatican Council under
Vatican, not Rome.) Refer from the name of the ecclesiastical
body.
54. Enter reports of committees under the name of the body to
which they belong; but reports of “a committee of citizens,” etc.,
not belonging to any named body should be put under the name of
the writer, if known, if not, of the chairman, or if that is not given,
of the first signer, or if not signed, under the name of the place.
55. Put the anonymous publications of any class (not organized) of
citizens of a place under the place.
Ex. “Application to Parliament by the merchants of London” should
go under
London. Merchants.
under their own names, not under the name of the city.
52. Enter reports, journals, minutes, etc., of conventions,
conferences, etc., under the names of the bodies holding the
conferences, etc. When the body has no exact name [25] enter under
the name of the place of meeting. [26]
[25] Some conventions are held by bodies which have no existence beyond the convention.
If, however, they have a definite name, use that; ex., 4th National Quarantine {30} and
Sanitary Convention. Often the name is given in different forms. Select that which appears to
be the most authentic, and make references from the others.
[26] In any case it is well to refer from the name of the place, and in the case of Presidential
conventions it is indispensable.
Put the convention of a county or other named district under the name of the district, with
a reference from the town in which it is held, when it is named in the title-page.
53. Enter ecclesiastical councils, both general and special, under
the name of the place of meeting. (The Vatican Council under
Vatican, not Rome.) Refer from the name of the ecclesiastical
body.
54. Enter reports of committees under the name of the body to
which they belong; but reports of “a committee of citizens,” etc.,
not belonging to any named body should be put under the name of
the writer, if known, if not, of the chairman, or if that is not given,
of the first signer, or if not signed, under the name of the place.
55. Put the anonymous publications of any class (not organized) of
citizens of a place under the place.
Ex. “Application to Parliament by the merchants of London” should
go under
London. Merchants.
Page 59
56. Societies are authors of their journals, memoirs, proceedings,
transactions, publications. (On publishing-societies, see B.
Substitutes, § 59, e.)
The chief practices in regard to societies have been to enter them (1.
British Museum) under a special heading—Academies—with a
geographical arrangement; (2. Boston Public Library, printed catalogue)
under the name of the place where they have their headquarters; (3.
Harvard College Library and Bost. Pub. Lib., present system) under the
name of the place, if it enters into the legal name of the society, otherwise
under the first word of that name not an article; (4. Boston Athenæum)
English societies under the first word of the society’s name not an article,
foreign societies under the name of the place. Both 3 and 4 put under the
place all purely local societies, those whose membership or objects are
confined to the place. The 1st does not deserve a moment’s consideration;
such a heading is out of place in an author-catalogue, and the geographical
arrangement only serves to complicate matters and render it more difficult
to find any particular academy. [27] The 2d is utterly unsuited to American
and English societies. The 3d practice is simple; but it is difficult to see
the advantage of the exception which it makes to its general rule of entry
under the society’s name; the exception does not help the cataloguer, for it
is just as hard to determine whether the place enters into the legal name as
it is to ascertain the name; it does not help the reader, for he has no means
of knowing whether the place is part of the legal name or not. The 4th is
simple and intelligible; it is usually easy for both cataloguer and reader to
determine whether a society is English or foreign. I shall mention two
other possible plans, well aware that there are strong objections to both.
5TH PLAN. Rule 1. Enter academies, [28] associations, institutes,
universities, societies, libraries, galleries, museums, colleges, and all
similar bodies, and churches that {31} have an individual name, both
English and foreign, according to their corporate name, neglecting an
initial article when there is one.
Exception 1. Enter the universities and the royal academies of Berlin,
Göttingen, Leipzig, Lisbon, Madrid, Munich, St. Petersburg, Vienna, etc.,
transactions, publications. (On publishing-societies, see B.
Substitutes, § 59, e.)
The chief practices in regard to societies have been to enter them (1.
British Museum) under a special heading—Academies—with a
geographical arrangement; (2. Boston Public Library, printed catalogue)
under the name of the place where they have their headquarters; (3.
Harvard College Library and Bost. Pub. Lib., present system) under the
name of the place, if it enters into the legal name of the society, otherwise
under the first word of that name not an article; (4. Boston Athenæum)
English societies under the first word of the society’s name not an article,
foreign societies under the name of the place. Both 3 and 4 put under the
place all purely local societies, those whose membership or objects are
confined to the place. The 1st does not deserve a moment’s consideration;
such a heading is out of place in an author-catalogue, and the geographical
arrangement only serves to complicate matters and render it more difficult
to find any particular academy. [27] The 2d is utterly unsuited to American
and English societies. The 3d practice is simple; but it is difficult to see
the advantage of the exception which it makes to its general rule of entry
under the society’s name; the exception does not help the cataloguer, for it
is just as hard to determine whether the place enters into the legal name as
it is to ascertain the name; it does not help the reader, for he has no means
of knowing whether the place is part of the legal name or not. The 4th is
simple and intelligible; it is usually easy for both cataloguer and reader to
determine whether a society is English or foreign. I shall mention two
other possible plans, well aware that there are strong objections to both.
5TH PLAN. Rule 1. Enter academies, [28] associations, institutes,
universities, societies, libraries, galleries, museums, colleges, and all
similar bodies, and churches that {31} have an individual name, both
English and foreign, according to their corporate name, neglecting an
initial article when there is one.
Exception 1. Enter the universities and the royal academies of Berlin,
Göttingen, Leipzig, Lisbon, Madrid, Munich, St. Petersburg, Vienna, etc.,
Page 60
and the “Institut” of Paris, under those cities. An exception is an evil. This
one is adopted because the universities and academies are almost
universally known by the names of the cities, and are hardly ever referred
to by the name Königliche, Real, etc.
Exception 2. Enter London guilds under the name of the trade; e. g.,
“Stationers’ Company,” not “Master and Keepers or Wardens and
Commonalty of the Mystery and Art of Stationers of the City of London,”
which is the corporate title. This exception is adopted because (1) it gives
a heading easier to find, and (2) it would be difficult in many cases to
ascertain the real names of the London companies.
Exception 3. Enter bodies whose legal name begins with such words
as Board, Corporation, Trustees under that part of the name by which they
are usually known.
E. g. Trustees of the Eastern Dispensary. Corporation of the
Chamber of Commerce in the City of New York. Proprietors of the
Boston Athenæum. Contributors to the Asylum for the Relief of
Persons deprived of their Reason. Refer from the first word of the
legal name.
Exception 4. Enter orders of knighthood under the significant word of
the English title; as, Garter, Order of the; Malta, Knights of; Templars,
Knights; Teutonic Order.
Exception 5. Enter American State historical and agricultural societies
under the name of the State.
Rule 2. a. Enter churches which have no individual name and all
purely local benevolent or moral or similar societies under the name of the
place.
b. Young men’s Christian associations, mercantile library associations,
and the like are to be considered local.
c. Business firms or corporations (except national banks numbered as
First National Bank, etc.), libraries, galleries, museums, are not to be
considered local, nor are private schools local, but go under their
corporate name, or, if they are not corporate, under the name of the
proprietor.
one is adopted because the universities and academies are almost
universally known by the names of the cities, and are hardly ever referred
to by the name Königliche, Real, etc.
Exception 2. Enter London guilds under the name of the trade; e. g.,
“Stationers’ Company,” not “Master and Keepers or Wardens and
Commonalty of the Mystery and Art of Stationers of the City of London,”
which is the corporate title. This exception is adopted because (1) it gives
a heading easier to find, and (2) it would be difficult in many cases to
ascertain the real names of the London companies.
Exception 3. Enter bodies whose legal name begins with such words
as Board, Corporation, Trustees under that part of the name by which they
are usually known.
E. g. Trustees of the Eastern Dispensary. Corporation of the
Chamber of Commerce in the City of New York. Proprietors of the
Boston Athenæum. Contributors to the Asylum for the Relief of
Persons deprived of their Reason. Refer from the first word of the
legal name.
Exception 4. Enter orders of knighthood under the significant word of
the English title; as, Garter, Order of the; Malta, Knights of; Templars,
Knights; Teutonic Order.
Exception 5. Enter American State historical and agricultural societies
under the name of the State.
Rule 2. a. Enter churches which have no individual name and all
purely local benevolent or moral or similar societies under the name of the
place.
b. Young men’s Christian associations, mercantile library associations,
and the like are to be considered local.
c. Business firms or corporations (except national banks numbered as
First National Bank, etc.), libraries, galleries, museums, are not to be
considered local, nor are private schools local, but go under their
corporate name, or, if they are not corporate, under the name of the
proprietor.
Page 61
d. National libraries museums, and galleries and libraries, museums,
and galleries instituted or supported by a city go under the name of the
city provided they have not a name of their own. (E. g., the Boston Public
Library goes under Boston; but the Reuben Hoar Library of Littleton
goes under Hoar.) American public schools should in any case go under
the name of the city. (Rule 2, h.)
e. If college societies limited to one college are considered local, they
would be entered not under the name of the place but of the college; if
they are treated by rule 1, as all general college societies must be,
reference (6) must be made. College libraries go under the name of the
college. The colleges of an English university and the schools of an
American university go under the name of the university.
Refer
(1) from all the varying forms of the society’s name.
(2) from important words in the society’s name, when the first word is
unlikely to be thought of.
(3) from the name of the city where the society is situated.
(4) from the motto in the names of Dutch societies.
(5) from the names of the royal societies of Berlin, etc.
(6) from colleges to college societies.
(7) from such words as Gallery, Museum, etc., to all the galleries,
museums, etc., contained in the catalogue. {32}
f. Universities, galleries, etc., called merely Imperial, Royal, National
and the like are not to be considered as having individual names, except
the National Gallery of London.
g. Buildings are for the most part provided for in the above rules as
museums, galleries, libraries, churches, etc. Any others should be entered
under their names, with a reference from the city.
h. If a firm’s name is in the form Raphael Friedlander und Sohn it
might be put as it reads, i. e., under R, or reversed, i. e., Friedlander und
Sohn, Raphael. I prefer the latter, because the consulter is much more
likely to remember the family than the Christian name. Whether the
Christian name is written at the end or thus, Town (John) and Bowers
(Henry), all firms should be arranged after all the other entries of the first
and galleries instituted or supported by a city go under the name of the
city provided they have not a name of their own. (E. g., the Boston Public
Library goes under Boston; but the Reuben Hoar Library of Littleton
goes under Hoar.) American public schools should in any case go under
the name of the city. (Rule 2, h.)
e. If college societies limited to one college are considered local, they
would be entered not under the name of the place but of the college; if
they are treated by rule 1, as all general college societies must be,
reference (6) must be made. College libraries go under the name of the
college. The colleges of an English university and the schools of an
American university go under the name of the university.
Refer
(1) from all the varying forms of the society’s name.
(2) from important words in the society’s name, when the first word is
unlikely to be thought of.
(3) from the name of the city where the society is situated.
(4) from the motto in the names of Dutch societies.
(5) from the names of the royal societies of Berlin, etc.
(6) from colleges to college societies.
(7) from such words as Gallery, Museum, etc., to all the galleries,
museums, etc., contained in the catalogue. {32}
f. Universities, galleries, etc., called merely Imperial, Royal, National
and the like are not to be considered as having individual names, except
the National Gallery of London.
g. Buildings are for the most part provided for in the above rules as
museums, galleries, libraries, churches, etc. Any others should be entered
under their names, with a reference from the city.
h. If a firm’s name is in the form Raphael Friedlander und Sohn it
might be put as it reads, i. e., under R, or reversed, i. e., Friedlander und
Sohn, Raphael. I prefer the latter, because the consulter is much more
likely to remember the family than the Christian name. Whether the
Christian name is written at the end or thus, Town (John) and Bowers
(Henry), all firms should be arranged after all the other entries of the first
Page 62
family name, i. e., Friedlander und Sohn after all the Friedlanders. The
same reason applies to other bodies whose legal name begins with a
forename.
The plan might be tabulated thus:
Under name. Under place.
Churches not numbered and Churches numbered or
not named from the place. otherwise named from the
place.
Societies not local. Societies purely local.
English and American Academies and universities of
academies. the European Continent and
of South America.
Colleges, universities, libraries, National or municipal colleges,
galleries, museums, having libraries, galleries,
an individual name. museums, not having an
individual name.
Private schools. Public schools.
Business firms and Municipal corporations.
corporations.
London guilds (name of trade). State historical societies and
State agricultural societies
(name of state).
Ex.
Amiens. Académie des Sciences, Agriculture, Commerce,
Belles-Lettres, et Arts du Départment de la Somme.
(Rule 1, exc. 1.)
Association Scientifique Algérienne, Algiers. (Rule 1.)
Athenée de Vaucluse, Avignon. (Rule 1.)
Barbers and Surgeons of London (Mystery and Commonalty
of), afterwards Royal College of Surgeons. See Royal
College of Surgeons.
Boston (Mass.) Public Library. (Rule 2, d.)
Boston. Wells School. (Rule 2, d.)
same reason applies to other bodies whose legal name begins with a
forename.
The plan might be tabulated thus:
Under name. Under place.
Churches not numbered and Churches numbered or
not named from the place. otherwise named from the
place.
Societies not local. Societies purely local.
English and American Academies and universities of
academies. the European Continent and
of South America.
Colleges, universities, libraries, National or municipal colleges,
galleries, museums, having libraries, galleries,
an individual name. museums, not having an
individual name.
Private schools. Public schools.
Business firms and Municipal corporations.
corporations.
London guilds (name of trade). State historical societies and
State agricultural societies
(name of state).
Ex.
Amiens. Académie des Sciences, Agriculture, Commerce,
Belles-Lettres, et Arts du Départment de la Somme.
(Rule 1, exc. 1.)
Association Scientifique Algérienne, Algiers. (Rule 1.)
Athenée de Vaucluse, Avignon. (Rule 1.)
Barbers and Surgeons of London (Mystery and Commonalty
of), afterwards Royal College of Surgeons. See Royal
College of Surgeons.
Boston (Mass.) Public Library. (Rule 2, d.)
Boston. Wells School. (Rule 2, d.)
Page 63
Boston Athenæum. (Rule 1, exc. 3, Rule 2, c.)
Boston, First Church of. (Rule 2, d.)
British Museum. (Rule 2, d.)
Cambridge (Mass.), First Church of. (Rule 2.)
Chauncy Hall School, Boston, Mass. (Rule 2 c.)
Chemins de Fer de Paris à Lyon et à la Méditerranée, Comp.
des. (Rule 2, c.)
Christiania. Videnskabs-Selskab. (Rule 1, exc. 1.)
Clarke (W. B.), & Co. (Rule 2, c.)
Congrès International des Américanistes. (Rule 1.)
Firenze. Galleria Imperiale. (Rule 2, f.)
Freemasons in Iowa. (§ 513.)
Genootschap “Oefening kweekt Kunst,” Amsterdam. (Rule 1,
and ref. 4.)
Geschichts- und Alterthumsforschende Gesellschaft des
Osterlandes, Altenburg. (Rule 1.)
Göttingen. K. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. (Rule 1, exc.
1.)
Great Britain. Parliament. (§ 41.)
Harvard College. (Rule 1.)
Harvard College. Lawrence Scientific School. (Rule 1, 2, e.)
Harvard College. Library. (Rule 1, 2, e.) {33}
Hermitage, Gallerie de l’, St. Petersburg. (Rule 2, d.)
Houghton & Mifflin. (Rule 2, c.)
L’Internationale. (Rule 1.)
Intime Club, Paris. (Rule 1.)
London. Merchants. (§ 55.)
Louvre, Gallerie du, Paris. (Rule 2, d.)
Museum of Fine Arts, Boston, Mass. (Rule 2, c.)
Madrid. R. Academia de la Historia. (Rule 1, exc. 1.)
National Gallery, London. (Rule 2, f.)
3d National Quarantine and Sanitary Convention. (§ 521.)
New England Trust Co., Boston, Mass. (Rule 2, c.)
New York. Chamber of Commerce. (Rule 1, exc. 3, Rule 2,
c.)
Boston, First Church of. (Rule 2, d.)
British Museum. (Rule 2, d.)
Cambridge (Mass.), First Church of. (Rule 2.)
Chauncy Hall School, Boston, Mass. (Rule 2 c.)
Chemins de Fer de Paris à Lyon et à la Méditerranée, Comp.
des. (Rule 2, c.)
Christiania. Videnskabs-Selskab. (Rule 1, exc. 1.)
Clarke (W. B.), & Co. (Rule 2, c.)
Congrès International des Américanistes. (Rule 1.)
Firenze. Galleria Imperiale. (Rule 2, f.)
Freemasons in Iowa. (§ 513.)
Genootschap “Oefening kweekt Kunst,” Amsterdam. (Rule 1,
and ref. 4.)
Geschichts- und Alterthumsforschende Gesellschaft des
Osterlandes, Altenburg. (Rule 1.)
Göttingen. K. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. (Rule 1, exc.
1.)
Great Britain. Parliament. (§ 41.)
Harvard College. (Rule 1.)
Harvard College. Lawrence Scientific School. (Rule 1, 2, e.)
Harvard College. Library. (Rule 1, 2, e.) {33}
Hermitage, Gallerie de l’, St. Petersburg. (Rule 2, d.)
Houghton & Mifflin. (Rule 2, c.)
L’Internationale. (Rule 1.)
Intime Club, Paris. (Rule 1.)
London. Merchants. (§ 55.)
Louvre, Gallerie du, Paris. (Rule 2, d.)
Museum of Fine Arts, Boston, Mass. (Rule 2, c.)
Madrid. R. Academia de la Historia. (Rule 1, exc. 1.)
National Gallery, London. (Rule 2, f.)
3d National Quarantine and Sanitary Convention. (§ 521.)
New England Trust Co., Boston, Mass. (Rule 2, c.)
New York. Chamber of Commerce. (Rule 1, exc. 3, Rule 2,
c.)
Page 64
New York. First National Bank. (Rule 2, c.)
New York. Young Men’s Christian Association. (Rule 2, b.)
Or San Michele, Chiesa di, Florence. (Rule 1.)
Paris. Bibliothèque Nationale. (Rule 2, d, f.)
ΦΒΚ. A of Harvard. (Rule 2, e.)
Prado, Museo del, Madrid. (Rule 2, d.)
Pratt (Enoch) Free Library, Balt., Md. (Rule 2, d, h.)
San Francisco. Mercantile Library Assoc. (Rule 2, b.)
Société de l’Agriculture de l’Orne, Alençon. (Rule 1.)
Stationers’ Company, London. (Rule 1, exc. 2.)
Templars, Knights. (Rule 2, exc. 4.)
Tübingen. Eberhard-Karls Universität. (Rule 1, exc. 1.)
L’Union Générale, Paris. (Rule 2, c.)
United States. Library of Congress. (§ 40.)
Vatican Council. (§ 53.)
Verona, Congress of. (§ 49.)
Versailles, Treaty of. See ——. (§ 50.)
Wisconsin, State Historical Society of. (Rule 1, exc. 5.)
The 6TH PLAN has the same rules as the 5TH, and no exceptions. It
may be preferred by those who think the advantage of having a single
uniform rule greater than the inconvenience of unusual headings.
Perhaps from habit I prefer the 4TH PLAN. Of the other plans
experience confirms me in the belief that the 5TH PLAN is the best. The A.
L. A. adopted the 6TH PLAN. I have used it ever since in the Library
journal, and I do not think it works well.
[27] They are now arranged under Academies in a single alphabet
of places, so that the latter—the most serious—objection does not
apply.
[28] That is learned academies like the French Academy, not high
schools.
New York. Young Men’s Christian Association. (Rule 2, b.)
Or San Michele, Chiesa di, Florence. (Rule 1.)
Paris. Bibliothèque Nationale. (Rule 2, d, f.)
ΦΒΚ. A of Harvard. (Rule 2, e.)
Prado, Museo del, Madrid. (Rule 2, d.)
Pratt (Enoch) Free Library, Balt., Md. (Rule 2, d, h.)
San Francisco. Mercantile Library Assoc. (Rule 2, b.)
Société de l’Agriculture de l’Orne, Alençon. (Rule 1.)
Stationers’ Company, London. (Rule 1, exc. 2.)
Templars, Knights. (Rule 2, exc. 4.)
Tübingen. Eberhard-Karls Universität. (Rule 1, exc. 1.)
L’Union Générale, Paris. (Rule 2, c.)
United States. Library of Congress. (§ 40.)
Vatican Council. (§ 53.)
Verona, Congress of. (§ 49.)
Versailles, Treaty of. See ——. (§ 50.)
Wisconsin, State Historical Society of. (Rule 1, exc. 5.)
The 6TH PLAN has the same rules as the 5TH, and no exceptions. It
may be preferred by those who think the advantage of having a single
uniform rule greater than the inconvenience of unusual headings.
Perhaps from habit I prefer the 4TH PLAN. Of the other plans
experience confirms me in the belief that the 5TH PLAN is the best. The A.
L. A. adopted the 6TH PLAN. I have used it ever since in the Library
journal, and I do not think it works well.
[27] They are now arranged under Academies in a single alphabet
of places, so that the latter—the most serious—objection does not
apply.
[28] That is learned academies like the French Academy, not high
schools.
Page 65
B. SUBSTITUTES.
Substitutes for the author’s name (to be chosen in the
following order) are—
57. Part of the author’s name when only a part is known.
Ex. For a book “by J. B. Far...,” or “by L. M. P.,” or “by Ddg.,” or “by
—lsd—,” the entry is to be made under Far..., J. B., P., L. M., Ddg., —lsd
—. If the last initials are evidently, from the style of printing, those of a
title, the entry will be under the initial preceding them; thus for books “by
B. F., D.D.,” or “by M. P. R., Gent.,” or “by X. Y. Z., D.D.,” the entry is to
be made under F., B., D.D., and R., M. P., Gent., and Z., X. Y., D.D. In
such case it is safest to have also a reference from the last initial to the one
chosen, as D., X. Y. Z. D. See Z., X. Y., D.D. It is often well to make a
reference from the first word (title-reference). This mode of entry ensures
the easy finding of a particular book and brings together all of an author’s
works in which the same letters are used, and sometimes leads to the
discovery of a real name.
Even mere printer’s marks, as *** or ..., or !!!, unaccompanied by any
letters, though they can not be considered as names, may be used as
headings for a reference {34} for the sake of bringing together all the works
of an author using them; but each work should also have title entry if
anonymous.
58. A pseudonym, that is, a false name; as, John Phenix, Mark
Twain.
If the author’s real name is known, make the entry under that, with a
reference from the pseudonym; but if the writer is much better known by
the pseudonym, enter under that, with a reference from the real name.
(See note under § 6.)
Substitutes for the author’s name (to be chosen in the
following order) are—
57. Part of the author’s name when only a part is known.
Ex. For a book “by J. B. Far...,” or “by L. M. P.,” or “by Ddg.,” or “by
—lsd—,” the entry is to be made under Far..., J. B., P., L. M., Ddg., —lsd
—. If the last initials are evidently, from the style of printing, those of a
title, the entry will be under the initial preceding them; thus for books “by
B. F., D.D.,” or “by M. P. R., Gent.,” or “by X. Y. Z., D.D.,” the entry is to
be made under F., B., D.D., and R., M. P., Gent., and Z., X. Y., D.D. In
such case it is safest to have also a reference from the last initial to the one
chosen, as D., X. Y. Z. D. See Z., X. Y., D.D. It is often well to make a
reference from the first word (title-reference). This mode of entry ensures
the easy finding of a particular book and brings together all of an author’s
works in which the same letters are used, and sometimes leads to the
discovery of a real name.
Even mere printer’s marks, as *** or ..., or !!!, unaccompanied by any
letters, though they can not be considered as names, may be used as
headings for a reference {34} for the sake of bringing together all the works
of an author using them; but each work should also have title entry if
anonymous.
58. A pseudonym, that is, a false name; as, John Phenix, Mark
Twain.
If the author’s real name is known, make the entry under that, with a
reference from the pseudonym; but if the writer is much better known by
the pseudonym, enter under that, with a reference from the real name.
(See note under § 6.)
Page 66
A phrase—“One who loves his country,” “A friend to peace”—or even
a shorter appellation—“A lawyer”—is not a name. References might be
made from these to the word under which the book is entered, but they
would swell the catalogue and rarely be of use. Appellatives beginning
with the definite article, like “The Prig,” “The Old Shekarry,” “The
Duchess,” are not vague like “A lover of justice,” and when constantly
used should be treated as names in the way either of entry or reference.
Latin phrases, like “Amator patriæ,” should be treated as names and the
entry made under the last word; as, Patriæ, Amator. But it should not be
made under patronymic adjectives, or certain words like junior, senior,
evidently intended to qualify the name, not to be taken as the name; i. e.,
the heading for a book “by Phileleutherus Lipsiensis” would not be
Lipsiensis, Phileleutherus, but Phileleutherus Lipsiensis; Vanity Fair
Album by Jehu Junior would go under Jehu junior, not Junior, Jehu. In
such cases a reference from the word which is not taken as the heading
will be an additional safeguard.
Pseudonyms like Aunt Jane, Cousin Mary, Uncle John, should be
entered under the second word, although it is evidently not a family name
but a forename; it is all the name that we have.
The word Anonymus may be considered as a pseudonym when used
as follows: “Anonymi introductio in,” etc.
A foreign article beginning a pseudonym used in an English work is
considered as a part of the name; as, El-Mukattem, pseud.
59. Collector.
That is, the one who is responsible for the existence of a collection. A
collection is made by putting together, with a collective title, three or
more works by different authors, so as to make one work.
Examples: Johnson’s “Little classics,” Buchon’s “Collection des
mémoires.”
a. This rule does not apply to the collector (editor) of a
periodical. (§ 73.)
a shorter appellation—“A lawyer”—is not a name. References might be
made from these to the word under which the book is entered, but they
would swell the catalogue and rarely be of use. Appellatives beginning
with the definite article, like “The Prig,” “The Old Shekarry,” “The
Duchess,” are not vague like “A lover of justice,” and when constantly
used should be treated as names in the way either of entry or reference.
Latin phrases, like “Amator patriæ,” should be treated as names and the
entry made under the last word; as, Patriæ, Amator. But it should not be
made under patronymic adjectives, or certain words like junior, senior,
evidently intended to qualify the name, not to be taken as the name; i. e.,
the heading for a book “by Phileleutherus Lipsiensis” would not be
Lipsiensis, Phileleutherus, but Phileleutherus Lipsiensis; Vanity Fair
Album by Jehu Junior would go under Jehu junior, not Junior, Jehu. In
such cases a reference from the word which is not taken as the heading
will be an additional safeguard.
Pseudonyms like Aunt Jane, Cousin Mary, Uncle John, should be
entered under the second word, although it is evidently not a family name
but a forename; it is all the name that we have.
The word Anonymus may be considered as a pseudonym when used
as follows: “Anonymi introductio in,” etc.
A foreign article beginning a pseudonym used in an English work is
considered as a part of the name; as, El-Mukattem, pseud.
59. Collector.
That is, the one who is responsible for the existence of a collection. A
collection is made by putting together, with a collective title, three or
more works by different authors, so as to make one work.
Examples: Johnson’s “Little classics,” Buchon’s “Collection des
mémoires.”
a. This rule does not apply to the collector (editor) of a
periodical. (§ 73.)
Page 67
b. Several works published together without a collective title
are to be put under that author’s name which appears first on
the title-page, even though the collector’s name is also there;
in other words, he is then to be considered merely as the
editor. (See § 4.)
Thus, “The fraternitye of vacabondes, by J. Awdeley; A caueat for
common cursetors, by T. Harman; A sermon in praise of thieves, by
Parson Haben or Hyberdyne; those parts of The groundworke of conny-
catching that differ from Harman’s Caueat; ed. by E. Viles and F. J.
Furnivall,” should be entered not under Viles, E., and Furnivall, F. J., but
under Awdeley; but if it had been entitled “Early tracts on vagabonds and
beggars; edited by E. Viles and F. J. Furnivall,” it would properly be put
under the editors.
c. If the collector’s name is known, the collection is to be put
under it, whether it occurs on the title-page or not. If his name
is not known, enter the collection like any anonymous work,
under the first word of the collective title. In either case the
separate works forming the collection must be entered under
their respective authors. (See V. Analysis.) Title-references are
also often necessary. (See II. Titles.) {35}
d. A collection known chiefly by its title may be put under that
as well as under the collector.
The older collections, like Graevius’s Thesaurus antiquitatum
Romanarum, Gronovius’s Thesaurus Graecarum antiquitatum, are known
and referred to by their collectors’ names but of late years a swarm of
series (American statesmen series, etc.) has arisen which are known
wholly by their titles, under which they should be entered in full, with
are to be put under that author’s name which appears first on
the title-page, even though the collector’s name is also there;
in other words, he is then to be considered merely as the
editor. (See § 4.)
Thus, “The fraternitye of vacabondes, by J. Awdeley; A caueat for
common cursetors, by T. Harman; A sermon in praise of thieves, by
Parson Haben or Hyberdyne; those parts of The groundworke of conny-
catching that differ from Harman’s Caueat; ed. by E. Viles and F. J.
Furnivall,” should be entered not under Viles, E., and Furnivall, F. J., but
under Awdeley; but if it had been entitled “Early tracts on vagabonds and
beggars; edited by E. Viles and F. J. Furnivall,” it would properly be put
under the editors.
c. If the collector’s name is known, the collection is to be put
under it, whether it occurs on the title-page or not. If his name
is not known, enter the collection like any anonymous work,
under the first word of the collective title. In either case the
separate works forming the collection must be entered under
their respective authors. (See V. Analysis.) Title-references are
also often necessary. (See II. Titles.) {35}
d. A collection known chiefly by its title may be put under that
as well as under the collector.
The older collections, like Graevius’s Thesaurus antiquitatum
Romanarum, Gronovius’s Thesaurus Graecarum antiquitatum, are known
and referred to by their collectors’ names but of late years a swarm of
series (American statesmen series, etc.) has arisen which are known
wholly by their titles, under which they should be entered in full, with
Page 68
contents, to save the time of the searcher. The entry under the editor is
necessary because he is really the author of the series, but it may be brief,
with a reference for the “Contents” to the title-entry.
e. Societies like the Camden, Chetham, Hakluyt are collectors
of the series of works published by them, of which a list
should be given under their names.
But every such work filling one or more volumes should be entered
separately under its author or title as if it were published independently,
and should have the same subject-entry. (See § 125.) Works that fill part
of a volume are to be entered analytically, (See § 126.) Of course any
volume consisting of three or more treatises, put together with a collective
title by the society, should be entered under it as collector, if no collector’s
name is given.
For anonymous works, see Title-entry, § 68. For trials, see §
64.
necessary because he is really the author of the series, but it may be brief,
with a reference for the “Contents” to the title-entry.
e. Societies like the Camden, Chetham, Hakluyt are collectors
of the series of works published by them, of which a list
should be given under their names.
But every such work filling one or more volumes should be entered
separately under its author or title as if it were published independently,
and should have the same subject-entry. (See § 125.) Works that fill part
of a volume are to be entered analytically, (See § 126.) Of course any
volume consisting of three or more treatises, put together with a collective
title by the society, should be entered under it as collector, if no collector’s
name is given.
For anonymous works, see Title-entry, § 68. For trials, see §
64.
Page 69
C. REFERENCES.
60. Make references
(§ 3.) From joint authors (after the first) to the first.
(§ 5.) From the præses to the respondent or defendant of a
thesis, or vice versâ.
(§ 6.) From pseudonyms, initials, and part of names.
(§§ 7, 8.) From important illustrators when not important
enough for an entry.
(§ 12.) From commentators who are not entitled to an entry, if
the commentary preponderates or for any reason is likely to be
looked for under the commentator’s name. Where the line of
omission shall be drawn depends on the fullness of the
catalogue.
(§§ 13–16.) From the authors of continuations, indexes, and of
introductions of some length, also in some cases, of epitomes,
revisions, and excerpts.
(§ 18.) From the names of reporters, translators, and editors of
anonymous works and of works not anonymous which are
commonly known by the name of their editors or translators.
Ex. Some translations from the German by Mrs. Wister are wrongly
lettered as if she were the author, and are therefore asked for by her name.
60. Make references
(§ 3.) From joint authors (after the first) to the first.
(§ 5.) From the præses to the respondent or defendant of a
thesis, or vice versâ.
(§ 6.) From pseudonyms, initials, and part of names.
(§§ 7, 8.) From important illustrators when not important
enough for an entry.
(§ 12.) From commentators who are not entitled to an entry, if
the commentary preponderates or for any reason is likely to be
looked for under the commentator’s name. Where the line of
omission shall be drawn depends on the fullness of the
catalogue.
(§§ 13–16.) From the authors of continuations, indexes, and of
introductions of some length, also in some cases, of epitomes,
revisions, and excerpts.
(§ 18.) From the names of reporters, translators, and editors of
anonymous works and of works not anonymous which are
commonly known by the name of their editors or translators.
Ex. Some translations from the German by Mrs. Wister are wrongly
lettered as if she were the author, and are therefore asked for by her name.
Page 70
(§ 19 a.) From the foreign form of names of sovereigns,
whenever they are likely to be looked for under that form.
(§ 19 b, c.) From the family name of persons canonized, and
of friars who drop the family name on entering their order.
(§ 19 e.) From such parts of Oriental names as require it.
(§ 20.) From the names of English sees and deaneries. {36}
(§ 20 c.) From the maiden names or unused married names of
wives to the one used in the catalogue, provided they have
written under the earlier names or for any other reason are
likely to be looked for under them.
(§ 21.) From the family names of British noblemen to the
titles, or vice versâ, if the entry is made under the family
name.
From the family names of foreign noblemen, when they
are known by them wholly or in part.
From any other title by which a man may be better known
than by his real name.
As, “Claimant, The.” The Diary of the Shah of Persia, catalogued
under Nassr-ad-Din, requires a reference from Shah.
(§ 22.) From the earlier forms of names that are changed.
(§ 23.) From the part of compound names which is not used
for entry to the part which is, whenever it seems necessary.
whenever they are likely to be looked for under that form.
(§ 19 b, c.) From the family name of persons canonized, and
of friars who drop the family name on entering their order.
(§ 19 e.) From such parts of Oriental names as require it.
(§ 20.) From the names of English sees and deaneries. {36}
(§ 20 c.) From the maiden names or unused married names of
wives to the one used in the catalogue, provided they have
written under the earlier names or for any other reason are
likely to be looked for under them.
(§ 21.) From the family names of British noblemen to the
titles, or vice versâ, if the entry is made under the family
name.
From the family names of foreign noblemen, when they
are known by them wholly or in part.
From any other title by which a man may be better known
than by his real name.
As, “Claimant, The.” The Diary of the Shah of Persia, catalogued
under Nassr-ad-Din, requires a reference from Shah.
(§ 22.) From the earlier forms of names that are changed.
(§ 23.) From the part of compound names which is not used
for entry to the part which is, whenever it seems necessary.
Page 71
(§ 24.) From the prefixes of foreign names when they have
been commonly used in combination with the last part.
Ex. From Vandyck to Dyck, A. van, from Degerando to Gerando,
and De Candolle to Candolle.
(§ 25.) From the alternative part of Latin names.
(§§ 27–38.) From all forms of a name varying either by
spelling, translation, or transliteration that do not come into
immediate juxtaposition with the one chosen.
This should be done whether the rejected form occurs in the title of a
book in the library or not. The object of a reference is to enable the reader
to find the works of an author, not merely a particular book, and the reader
may have seen the author referred to under the rejected form whether the
library has a book with that form or not.
(§§ 40, 44, 48.) From the authors of official writings (with
discretion).
(§ 49.) From nations taking part in a congress to the place of
meeting.
(§ 52.) From the places where conventions are held to the
names of the bodies holding them.
(§ 53.) From the name of an ecclesiastical body to the
headings under which the councils of the body are entered.
(§ 56.) A list of references is given in the note.
(§ 57.) From part of the author’s name appearing on the title-
page to the whole name if discovered.
been commonly used in combination with the last part.
Ex. From Vandyck to Dyck, A. van, from Degerando to Gerando,
and De Candolle to Candolle.
(§ 25.) From the alternative part of Latin names.
(§§ 27–38.) From all forms of a name varying either by
spelling, translation, or transliteration that do not come into
immediate juxtaposition with the one chosen.
This should be done whether the rejected form occurs in the title of a
book in the library or not. The object of a reference is to enable the reader
to find the works of an author, not merely a particular book, and the reader
may have seen the author referred to under the rejected form whether the
library has a book with that form or not.
(§§ 40, 44, 48.) From the authors of official writings (with
discretion).
(§ 49.) From nations taking part in a congress to the place of
meeting.
(§ 52.) From the places where conventions are held to the
names of the bodies holding them.
(§ 53.) From the name of an ecclesiastical body to the
headings under which the councils of the body are entered.
(§ 56.) A list of references is given in the note.
(§ 57.) From part of the author’s name appearing on the title-
page to the whole name if discovered.
Page 72
From the last initial given on a title-page to the one chosen
for the entry.
(§ 58.) From a pseudonym to the real name when discovered.
From some phraseological pseudonyms, especially if brief.
Ex. From Lawyer, when an anonymous work is said to be “by a
lawyer.” For Full only.
From editors and translators.
If it is thought worth while to give a complete view of the literary and
artistic activity of every author so far as it is represented in the library, of
course references from editors, translators, illustrators, cartographers,
engravers, etc., must be made. But this completeness is not usually sought
even in large libraries. Such references {37} are also undeniably a help in
finding books. But they increase the bulk and the cost of a catalogue so
much and are comparatively of so little use that ordinary libraries must
content themselves with a selection, though the best-made selection is
certain to occasion complaints that the really useful ones have been
omitted and the least important made. The chief classes of necessary
references of this sort are—
(1.) From the editors of periodicals to the title-entry, when the
periodical is commonly called by the editor’s name, as
Poggendorff’s Annalen, Silliman’s Journal.
(2.) From the names of editors and translators which are habitually
mentioned in connection with a work, so that it is as likely to be
looked for under the editor’s name as under the author’s name.
When the form is a combination of author’s and editor’s name, as
Heyne’s Virgil, Leverett’s Cicero, the reference, though
convenient, is certainly not necessary, inasmuch as a person of
ordinary intelligence could hardly fail, not finding what he wanted
under one name, to try the other.
for the entry.
(§ 58.) From a pseudonym to the real name when discovered.
From some phraseological pseudonyms, especially if brief.
Ex. From Lawyer, when an anonymous work is said to be “by a
lawyer.” For Full only.
From editors and translators.
If it is thought worth while to give a complete view of the literary and
artistic activity of every author so far as it is represented in the library, of
course references from editors, translators, illustrators, cartographers,
engravers, etc., must be made. But this completeness is not usually sought
even in large libraries. Such references {37} are also undeniably a help in
finding books. But they increase the bulk and the cost of a catalogue so
much and are comparatively of so little use that ordinary libraries must
content themselves with a selection, though the best-made selection is
certain to occasion complaints that the really useful ones have been
omitted and the least important made. The chief classes of necessary
references of this sort are—
(1.) From the editors of periodicals to the title-entry, when the
periodical is commonly called by the editor’s name, as
Poggendorff’s Annalen, Silliman’s Journal.
(2.) From the names of editors and translators which are habitually
mentioned in connection with a work, so that it is as likely to be
looked for under the editor’s name as under the author’s name.
When the form is a combination of author’s and editor’s name, as
Heyne’s Virgil, Leverett’s Cicero, the reference, though
convenient, is certainly not necessary, inasmuch as a person of
ordinary intelligence could hardly fail, not finding what he wanted
under one name, to try the other.
Page 73
(3.) From the names of those who have made poetical versions, on the
ground that their work is something more than mere translation.
(4.) From the translators of anonymous works, because the title of the
original will generally be unknown to the searcher. This is less
necessary for famous works; thus J. Scott’s version of the Arabian
Nights would probably be looked for under Arabian nights rather
than under Scott; but it makes assurance doubly sure.
(5.) From the names of translators, editors, etc., of Oriental works,
because Occidental readers are much more likely to remember
these names than those of the authors.
It may be thought that an excessive number of references is
recommended, but it is plain that wherever there can be a reasonable
doubt among cataloguers under what head a book ought to be entered, it
should have at least a reference under each head. The object of an author-
catalogue is to enable one to find the book; if that object is not attained the
book might as well not be catalogued at all.
61. Make explanatory notes under such words as Congress,
Parliament, Academies, Societies, and others in regard to whose
entry there is a diverse usage, stating what is the rule of the
catalogue.
ground that their work is something more than mere translation.
(4.) From the translators of anonymous works, because the title of the
original will generally be unknown to the searcher. This is less
necessary for famous works; thus J. Scott’s version of the Arabian
Nights would probably be looked for under Arabian nights rather
than under Scott; but it makes assurance doubly sure.
(5.) From the names of translators, editors, etc., of Oriental works,
because Occidental readers are much more likely to remember
these names than those of the authors.
It may be thought that an excessive number of references is
recommended, but it is plain that wherever there can be a reasonable
doubt among cataloguers under what head a book ought to be entered, it
should have at least a reference under each head. The object of an author-
catalogue is to enable one to find the book; if that object is not attained the
book might as well not be catalogued at all.
61. Make explanatory notes under such words as Congress,
Parliament, Academies, Societies, and others in regard to whose
entry there is a diverse usage, stating what is the rule of the
catalogue.
Page 74
D. ECONOMIES.
62. In the title-a-liners references are not an economy; they
occupy as much room as an entry, and therefore the imprint may
as well be given whenever the reference does not take the place of
several titles.
63. Mr. Perkins would catalogue directories, state registers, and
local gazetteers under the name of the place, omitting the author-
entry This is for Short alone, and should never be done by Full or
Medium.
64. Trials of crown, state, and criminal cases may be entered only
under the name of the defendant, and trials of civil cases under the
parties to the suit, treated like joint authors, and trials relating to
vessels under the name of the vessel (subject-entries of course).
But Full and perhaps Medium should make author-entries under
the reporter. It may be doubted, however, whether a stenographic
reporter is entitled to be considered an author any more than a
type-setter.
Collected reports of trials will of course (§ 59) go under the collector:
for subject-entry they come under the place over which the court has
jurisdiction, and if they relate to a single crime (as murder), under that
also. {38}
65. Often in analysis it may be worth while to make a subject-
entry and not an author-entry, or vice versâ.
62. In the title-a-liners references are not an economy; they
occupy as much room as an entry, and therefore the imprint may
as well be given whenever the reference does not take the place of
several titles.
63. Mr. Perkins would catalogue directories, state registers, and
local gazetteers under the name of the place, omitting the author-
entry This is for Short alone, and should never be done by Full or
Medium.
64. Trials of crown, state, and criminal cases may be entered only
under the name of the defendant, and trials of civil cases under the
parties to the suit, treated like joint authors, and trials relating to
vessels under the name of the vessel (subject-entries of course).
But Full and perhaps Medium should make author-entries under
the reporter. It may be doubted, however, whether a stenographic
reporter is entitled to be considered an author any more than a
type-setter.
Collected reports of trials will of course (§ 59) go under the collector:
for subject-entry they come under the place over which the court has
jurisdiction, and if they relate to a single crime (as murder), under that
also. {38}
65. Often in analysis it may be worth while to make a subject-
entry and not an author-entry, or vice versâ.
Page 75
66. An economical device in some favor is to omit the entry under
the author’s name when the library contains only one work by
him.
By this practice many famous authors, of whom no small library is
likely to contain more than one work (such as Boswell, Dante, Gibbon,
Lamb, Macaulay, Milton, indeed almost any of the English poets), will not
appear in the catalogue; while the man who has written both a First class
reader and a Second class reader, or a Mental arithmetic and a Written
arithmetic, or two Sunday-school books, must be included. It is not
necessary to say more to show the absurdity of the rule. If some authors
must be omitted, let it be those who the librarian knows are never called
for, whether they have written one or fifty works.
67. Another objectionable economy is to put biographies under the
name of the subject alone, omitting author-entry, so that there is
no means of ascertaining whether the library possesses all the
works of a given author.
the author’s name when the library contains only one work by
him.
By this practice many famous authors, of whom no small library is
likely to contain more than one work (such as Boswell, Dante, Gibbon,
Lamb, Macaulay, Milton, indeed almost any of the English poets), will not
appear in the catalogue; while the man who has written both a First class
reader and a Second class reader, or a Mental arithmetic and a Written
arithmetic, or two Sunday-school books, must be included. It is not
necessary to say more to show the absurdity of the rule. If some authors
must be omitted, let it be those who the librarian knows are never called
for, whether they have written one or fifty works.
67. Another objectionable economy is to put biographies under the
name of the subject alone, omitting author-entry, so that there is
no means of ascertaining whether the library possesses all the
works of a given author.
Page 76
II. TITLE-ENTRY.
CATALOGUE.
First-word entry. (Anonymous works, 68–72; Periodicals, 73, 74; Fiction, 75; What is a first
word, 76–80.)
Changed titles, 81–83.
First-word reference. (Plays and poems, 84; other works, 85.)
Catch-word reference. (Anonymous works, 86 a; other works, 86 b.)
Subject-word entry. (Anonymous biographies, 87.)
Subject-word reference. (Anonymous works, 88 a; other works, 88 b.)
Title-reference to corporate entries, 89.
Title-reference from subtitles, 90.
Double title-pages, 91.
CATALOGUE.
First-word entry. (Anonymous works, 68–72; Periodicals, 73, 74; Fiction, 75; What is a first
word, 76–80.)
Changed titles, 81–83.
First-word reference. (Plays and poems, 84; other works, 85.)
Catch-word reference. (Anonymous works, 86 a; other works, 86 b.)
Subject-word entry. (Anonymous biographies, 87.)
Subject-word reference. (Anonymous works, 88 a; other works, 88 b.)
Title-reference to corporate entries, 89.
Title-reference from subtitles, 90.
Double title-pages, 91.
Page 77
TITLE-ENTRY.
68. Make a first-word entry for all [29] anonymous works, [30]
except anonymous biographies, which are to be entered under the
name of the subject of the life. [31] (If the author’s name can be
ascertained insert it within brackets.)
[29] Of course there are exceptions to this rule. There are works which are always known by
certain names, under which they should be entered, although the title-pages of different
editions may not begin with this name, or may not even contain it. The most noteworthy
example is Bible, which is the best heading—in an English catalogue—for the Bible and for
any of its parts in whatever language written and under whatever title published.
This is the British Museum rule. It is of a piece with putting all periodicals under the
heading Periodicals and all publications of learned societies under the head Academies. It
would be much more in accordance with dictionary principles to put the separate books of the
Bible each under its own name as given in the revised {39} English version (Matthew, Gospel
of, not Gospel of Matthew), with all necessary references.
Under the present rule, references should be made to Bible from Testament, Old
Testament, New Testament, Gospels, Apocrypha, Psalms, Pentateuch, the names of the
single books, and from such well-known names as Breeches Bible, Speaker’s commentary.
In cataloguing the anonymous books of the Middle Ages, “Incipit” or “Here begyns,” or
“Book the first of,” and similar phrases are not to be considered as first words. Thus the
history of the Seven Sages appears under the following variety of title:
1. Incipit historia septem sapientū Rome. [Cir. 1475.]
2. In hoc opusculo sunt subtilitates septē sapientū rome valde perutiles. [Later.]
3. Historia septem sapientum Romæ. 1490.
4. Historia calumnie nouercalis que septem sapientū inscribitur. 1490.
5. Ludus septem sapientum. [Cir. 1560.]
And the titles of the versions are equally various:
1. Li romans des sept sages.
2. Li romans de Dolopathos.
3. Les sept sages de Ro e.
4. Les sept saiges de romme.
5. Los siete sabios de Roma.
6. Hieuach volget ein gar schöne Cronick v hystori auss denn Geschichten der Römern.
7. Die hystorie uan die seuen wise mannen van Romen.
8. Hystory of the seuen maysters of Rome.
9. The Hystorie of the seven wise maisters of Rome.
10. The sevin seages.
11. De siu sive mestere.
68. Make a first-word entry for all [29] anonymous works, [30]
except anonymous biographies, which are to be entered under the
name of the subject of the life. [31] (If the author’s name can be
ascertained insert it within brackets.)
[29] Of course there are exceptions to this rule. There are works which are always known by
certain names, under which they should be entered, although the title-pages of different
editions may not begin with this name, or may not even contain it. The most noteworthy
example is Bible, which is the best heading—in an English catalogue—for the Bible and for
any of its parts in whatever language written and under whatever title published.
This is the British Museum rule. It is of a piece with putting all periodicals under the
heading Periodicals and all publications of learned societies under the head Academies. It
would be much more in accordance with dictionary principles to put the separate books of the
Bible each under its own name as given in the revised {39} English version (Matthew, Gospel
of, not Gospel of Matthew), with all necessary references.
Under the present rule, references should be made to Bible from Testament, Old
Testament, New Testament, Gospels, Apocrypha, Psalms, Pentateuch, the names of the
single books, and from such well-known names as Breeches Bible, Speaker’s commentary.
In cataloguing the anonymous books of the Middle Ages, “Incipit” or “Here begyns,” or
“Book the first of,” and similar phrases are not to be considered as first words. Thus the
history of the Seven Sages appears under the following variety of title:
1. Incipit historia septem sapientū Rome. [Cir. 1475.]
2. In hoc opusculo sunt subtilitates septē sapientū rome valde perutiles. [Later.]
3. Historia septem sapientum Romæ. 1490.
4. Historia calumnie nouercalis que septem sapientū inscribitur. 1490.
5. Ludus septem sapientum. [Cir. 1560.]
And the titles of the versions are equally various:
1. Li romans des sept sages.
2. Li romans de Dolopathos.
3. Les sept sages de Ro e.
4. Les sept saiges de romme.
5. Los siete sabios de Roma.
6. Hieuach volget ein gar schöne Cronick v hystori auss denn Geschichten der Römern.
7. Die hystorie uan die seuen wise mannen van Romen.
8. Hystory of the seuen maysters of Rome.
9. The Hystorie of the seven wise maisters of Rome.
10. The sevin seages.
11. De siu sive mestere.
Page 78
Of course it will not do to catalogue these severally under Incipit, Hoc, Historia, Ludus,
Romans, Sept, Siete, Hienach, Hystorie, Hystory, Sevin, and Siu. In this and other prose and
poetical romances of the Middle Ages the heading must be taken in general from the subject of
the romance; the name appearing of course in the original language, with all necessary
references from other forms. In the present case all the editions would be collected under
Septem sapientes,[[32]] with references from Ludus, Sept sages, Siete sabios, Hienach, and
Seven, provided the library has so many editions.
Somewhat similarly collections of papers known by the name of a principal contributor or
a previous owner or of the house where they were found should be entered under such name,
or, if they must be entered under the name of an editor, should have a reference from such
name; ex., Dudley papers, Winthrop papers, etc.
A title like “The modern Plutarch” does not mean to imply that the work is written by
Plutarchus; such a book would be treated as anonymous, unless it had an editor.
[30] A catalogue of authors alone finds the entry of its anonymous books a source of
incongruity. The dictionary catalogue has no such trouble. It does not attempt to enter them in
the author-catalogue until the author’s name is known.
[31] For a smaller catalogue this may read “except anonymous works relating to a person,
city, or other subject distinctly mentioned in the title, which are to be put under the name of
the person, city, or subject.” In the catalogue of a larger library where more exactness (“red
tape,” “pedantry”) is indispensable, biography should be the only exception, the place of entry
under subjects and under large cities being {40} too doubtful. And in planning a manuscript
catalogue, it should be remembered that a small library may grow into a large one, and that if
the catalogue is made in the best way at first there will be no need of alteration.
If a book’s title-page is lost, and it is impossible to ascertain what it was from other copies
or other editions, or from catalogues or bibliographies, use the half-title or the running title,
stating the fact; if it has neither, manufacture a title, within brackets. Such an entry will require
many references.
[32] Since this was in type I have come to the conclusion that all these should be entered
under Sandabad (Lat. Syntipas), the reputed author of the original Indian romance. But the
example will still serve to show the great variety in mediæval titles, and the inconvenience of
following a strict first-word rule.
69. A single inscription by an unknown author needs no title-entry,
but should have subject-entry under the subject of which it treats,
or the name of the place where it is found, or both.
70. When the author’s name is known, it will be enough for
Medium to make not an entry under the first word, but a reference
from it to the author. The shelf-mark or class-mark should always
be given with this reference, that the man who merely wishes to
Romans, Sept, Siete, Hienach, Hystorie, Hystory, Sevin, and Siu. In this and other prose and
poetical romances of the Middle Ages the heading must be taken in general from the subject of
the romance; the name appearing of course in the original language, with all necessary
references from other forms. In the present case all the editions would be collected under
Septem sapientes,[[32]] with references from Ludus, Sept sages, Siete sabios, Hienach, and
Seven, provided the library has so many editions.
Somewhat similarly collections of papers known by the name of a principal contributor or
a previous owner or of the house where they were found should be entered under such name,
or, if they must be entered under the name of an editor, should have a reference from such
name; ex., Dudley papers, Winthrop papers, etc.
A title like “The modern Plutarch” does not mean to imply that the work is written by
Plutarchus; such a book would be treated as anonymous, unless it had an editor.
[30] A catalogue of authors alone finds the entry of its anonymous books a source of
incongruity. The dictionary catalogue has no such trouble. It does not attempt to enter them in
the author-catalogue until the author’s name is known.
[31] For a smaller catalogue this may read “except anonymous works relating to a person,
city, or other subject distinctly mentioned in the title, which are to be put under the name of
the person, city, or subject.” In the catalogue of a larger library where more exactness (“red
tape,” “pedantry”) is indispensable, biography should be the only exception, the place of entry
under subjects and under large cities being {40} too doubtful. And in planning a manuscript
catalogue, it should be remembered that a small library may grow into a large one, and that if
the catalogue is made in the best way at first there will be no need of alteration.
If a book’s title-page is lost, and it is impossible to ascertain what it was from other copies
or other editions, or from catalogues or bibliographies, use the half-title or the running title,
stating the fact; if it has neither, manufacture a title, within brackets. Such an entry will require
many references.
[32] Since this was in type I have come to the conclusion that all these should be entered
under Sandabad (Lat. Syntipas), the reputed author of the original Indian romance. But the
example will still serve to show the great variety in mediæval titles, and the inconvenience of
following a strict first-word rule.
69. A single inscription by an unknown author needs no title-entry,
but should have subject-entry under the subject of which it treats,
or the name of the place where it is found, or both.
70. When the author’s name is known, it will be enough for
Medium to make not an entry under the first word, but a reference
from it to the author. The shelf-mark or class-mark should always
be given with this reference, that the man who merely wishes to
Page 79
get the book need not have to look in two places for the mark. If
there are several editions all the marks should be given, which is
not satisfactory unless the imprints are also given, that is, unless
an entry is made and not merely a reference.
The entry (or reference) for an anonymous work should be
made, even if the author’s name is given in another edition.
71. An anonymous work which forms a part of a larger whole is to
be entered where the whole would be, with a reference from its
own title.
Ex.
New testament. See Bible.
Die Klage. See Nibelungenlied.
72. Translations of anonymous works should be entered under the
same heading as the original, whether the library possesses the
original or not.
Ex. Gisli’s saga. Story of Gish the outlaw, from the Icelandic, by G.
W. Dasent.
So Perron’s translation, called by him “Glaive des couronnes,” would
appear under Saif-al-tidjan; and the Arabian nights’ entertainments under
Alif laila. Criticisms of anonymous works must be put under the heading
of the work criticised.
73. Periodicals are to be treated as anonymous and entered under
the first word.
Ex. Popular science monthly, Littell’s living age.
When a periodical changes its title the whole may be catalogued under
the original title, with an explanatory note there and a reference from the
new title to the old; or each part may be catalogued under its own title,
there are several editions all the marks should be given, which is
not satisfactory unless the imprints are also given, that is, unless
an entry is made and not merely a reference.
The entry (or reference) for an anonymous work should be
made, even if the author’s name is given in another edition.
71. An anonymous work which forms a part of a larger whole is to
be entered where the whole would be, with a reference from its
own title.
Ex.
New testament. See Bible.
Die Klage. See Nibelungenlied.
72. Translations of anonymous works should be entered under the
same heading as the original, whether the library possesses the
original or not.
Ex. Gisli’s saga. Story of Gish the outlaw, from the Icelandic, by G.
W. Dasent.
So Perron’s translation, called by him “Glaive des couronnes,” would
appear under Saif-al-tidjan; and the Arabian nights’ entertainments under
Alif laila. Criticisms of anonymous works must be put under the heading
of the work criticised.
73. Periodicals are to be treated as anonymous and entered under
the first word.
Ex. Popular science monthly, Littell’s living age.
When a periodical changes its title the whole may be catalogued under
the original title, with an explanatory note there and a reference from the
new title to the old; or each part may be catalogued under its own title,
Page 80
with references, “For a continuation, see ,” “For the previous volumes,
see .”
Treat almanacs and other annuals as periodicals. Do not confound
periodicals with serials. The four characteristics of a periodical are: (1)
that it be published at intervals usually but not necessarily regular; (2) in
general that the publication be intended to continue indefinitely; (3) that it
be written by a number of contributors under the supervision of one or
more editors; (4) that it consist of articles on various subjects, so that a set
of the work does not form an organic whole. The 2d, 3d, and 4th criteria
exclude works like Trollope’s “The way we live now,” and the
“Encyclopædia Britannica.” There are some exceptions to the 3d, as
“Brownson’s quarterly review.” {41}
Make a reference from the name of the editor when the periodical is
commonly called by his name, as in the case of Silliman’s Journal of
science.
The Memoirs, Proceedings, Transactions of a society are periodicals in
point of (1) occasional publication, (2) indefinite continuance, and—so far
as they contain anything beyond the record of the society’s meetings—of
(4) variety of subject; but they lack the 3d characteristic, variety of
authorship, inasmuch as the memoirs or other papers given in addition to
“proceedings” proper may be considered as the work of the society acting
through its members; the society, therefore, is the author, and the
Transactions, etc., need not have title-entry. There are, however, some
“Journals” published by or “under the auspices of” societies which are
really periodicals, and should be so treated in entry, the society being not
the author but the editor. Again, there are works which occupy a
borderland between the two classes, in regard to which the puzzled
cataloguer should remember that it is not of much importance which way
he decides, provided he is careful to make all necessary references.
Examples of such doubtful cases are “Alpine journal: a record of
mountain adventure and scientific observation. By members of the Alpine
Club;” which contains nothing of or about the Club itself;—“Journal of
the American Institute, a monthly publication devoted to the interest of
agriculture, commerce, etc. Edited by a committee, members of the
see .”
Treat almanacs and other annuals as periodicals. Do not confound
periodicals with serials. The four characteristics of a periodical are: (1)
that it be published at intervals usually but not necessarily regular; (2) in
general that the publication be intended to continue indefinitely; (3) that it
be written by a number of contributors under the supervision of one or
more editors; (4) that it consist of articles on various subjects, so that a set
of the work does not form an organic whole. The 2d, 3d, and 4th criteria
exclude works like Trollope’s “The way we live now,” and the
“Encyclopædia Britannica.” There are some exceptions to the 3d, as
“Brownson’s quarterly review.” {41}
Make a reference from the name of the editor when the periodical is
commonly called by his name, as in the case of Silliman’s Journal of
science.
The Memoirs, Proceedings, Transactions of a society are periodicals in
point of (1) occasional publication, (2) indefinite continuance, and—so far
as they contain anything beyond the record of the society’s meetings—of
(4) variety of subject; but they lack the 3d characteristic, variety of
authorship, inasmuch as the memoirs or other papers given in addition to
“proceedings” proper may be considered as the work of the society acting
through its members; the society, therefore, is the author, and the
Transactions, etc., need not have title-entry. There are, however, some
“Journals” published by or “under the auspices of” societies which are
really periodicals, and should be so treated in entry, the society being not
the author but the editor. Again, there are works which occupy a
borderland between the two classes, in regard to which the puzzled
cataloguer should remember that it is not of much importance which way
he decides, provided he is careful to make all necessary references.
Examples of such doubtful cases are “Alpine journal: a record of
mountain adventure and scientific observation. By members of the Alpine
Club;” which contains nothing of or about the Club itself;—“Journal of
the American Institute, a monthly publication devoted to the interest of
agriculture, commerce, etc. Edited by a committee, members of the
Page 81
Institute,” and “Journal of the Society of Arts and of The Institutions in
Union,” both of which are journals both in the sense of record of
proceedings and of periodical publication.
Newspaper titles are troublesome. It is not uncommon for the name of
the place to be included in the name on the first page (as The Boston
Ægis), but to be dropped over the editorial column, or vice versa, or to be
used for some years and afterwards dropped, or vice versa. The searcher
can not always remember whether it is used or not. It would be well,
therefore, to give under each name of a city the title of every newspaper
published there which the library has.
74. Collections of extracts from a periodical should go under the
name of the periodical.
Ex.
Life, Verses from.
Punch, A bowl of.
75. Make a first-word entry or reference for all works of prose
fiction. (Include the author’s name in the entry.)
Ex.
Daughter of Heth; novel, by W. Black. London, 1874. 3 v. O.
The reason is that novels are known more by their titles than by their
authors’ names. Whether to make an entry or a reference depends on the
space at command. An entry means giving the book-marks for every
edition. With a reference this may be done; but a reference without them
obliges the reader to turn to the author-entry for such details, which is
objectionable. It is better to give all the book-marks with the title.
If the name of the hero or heroine enters into the title the entry should
be made under that; ex., David Copperfield, Life and adventures of, by C.
Dickens.
76. When a title begins with an article, the heading of a first-word
entry or reference is the word following the article.
Union,” both of which are journals both in the sense of record of
proceedings and of periodical publication.
Newspaper titles are troublesome. It is not uncommon for the name of
the place to be included in the name on the first page (as The Boston
Ægis), but to be dropped over the editorial column, or vice versa, or to be
used for some years and afterwards dropped, or vice versa. The searcher
can not always remember whether it is used or not. It would be well,
therefore, to give under each name of a city the title of every newspaper
published there which the library has.
74. Collections of extracts from a periodical should go under the
name of the periodical.
Ex.
Life, Verses from.
Punch, A bowl of.
75. Make a first-word entry or reference for all works of prose
fiction. (Include the author’s name in the entry.)
Ex.
Daughter of Heth; novel, by W. Black. London, 1874. 3 v. O.
The reason is that novels are known more by their titles than by their
authors’ names. Whether to make an entry or a reference depends on the
space at command. An entry means giving the book-marks for every
edition. With a reference this may be done; but a reference without them
obliges the reader to turn to the author-entry for such details, which is
objectionable. It is better to give all the book-marks with the title.
If the name of the hero or heroine enters into the title the entry should
be made under that; ex., David Copperfield, Life and adventures of, by C.
Dickens.
76. When a title begins with an article, the heading of a first-word
entry or reference is the word following the article.
Page 82
Ex. Centaur, The, not fabulous, not The centaur not fabulous. The
entry has commonly been made under the first word “not an article or
preposition.” But it is found to work badly to except the preposition in the
titles of novels and plays, and it is awkward to omit or transpose it in any
case. One reason for excepting the article—that there would be an
immense accumulation of titles under the unimportant words A, The, Le,
Der, Uno, etc.—is not so strong in the case of prepositions; the other—
that it is difficult to remember with what article a given title begins—
hardly applies at all to prepositions. The preposition is full as likely to
fasten itself in the {42} memory as the word that follows it. The strongest
argument in favor of confining preposition-entry to fiction and the drama
is that in other cases the word following the preposition will probably be a
subject-word, so that one entry will do the work of two. This will
occasionally be true, but not often enough, I think, to make much
difference.
77. When a foreign phrase is used as an English title, refer from
the article as well as from the following word.
Ex. El Fureidis should have references to Cummins both under E and
F; L’arratiata both under L’ and A to Heyse.
78. When a title begins with a word expressive of the number
which the work holds in a series the first-word entry or reference
is to be made under the next word.
Ex. Collection of papers, 8th, not Eighth collection. Letter, 1st and
2d, to the Ministry, not First letter, etc., under F, and Second letter under
S. When the numeral comes after a word like Book or Part (as frequently
in Latin after Liber, Pars, Tomus, Volumen) both are to be neglected and
the word following put into the nominative and used as a heading; e. g.,
“Pars prima epistolarum” is to be entered under Epistolæ. Similarly
Evening, Morning, Daily, and Weekly should be disregarded in titles of
newspapers, otherwise we should have the morning edition at one end of
entry has commonly been made under the first word “not an article or
preposition.” But it is found to work badly to except the preposition in the
titles of novels and plays, and it is awkward to omit or transpose it in any
case. One reason for excepting the article—that there would be an
immense accumulation of titles under the unimportant words A, The, Le,
Der, Uno, etc.—is not so strong in the case of prepositions; the other—
that it is difficult to remember with what article a given title begins—
hardly applies at all to prepositions. The preposition is full as likely to
fasten itself in the {42} memory as the word that follows it. The strongest
argument in favor of confining preposition-entry to fiction and the drama
is that in other cases the word following the preposition will probably be a
subject-word, so that one entry will do the work of two. This will
occasionally be true, but not often enough, I think, to make much
difference.
77. When a foreign phrase is used as an English title, refer from
the article as well as from the following word.
Ex. El Fureidis should have references to Cummins both under E and
F; L’arratiata both under L’ and A to Heyse.
78. When a title begins with a word expressive of the number
which the work holds in a series the first-word entry or reference
is to be made under the next word.
Ex. Collection of papers, 8th, not Eighth collection. Letter, 1st and
2d, to the Ministry, not First letter, etc., under F, and Second letter under
S. When the numeral comes after a word like Book or Part (as frequently
in Latin after Liber, Pars, Tomus, Volumen) both are to be neglected and
the word following put into the nominative and used as a heading; e. g.,
“Pars prima epistolarum” is to be entered under Epistolæ. Similarly
Evening, Morning, Daily, and Weekly should be disregarded in titles of
newspapers, otherwise we should have the morning edition at one end of
Page 83
the catalogue and the evening at the other. So “Appendix to,”
“Continuation of” “Supplement to” (but not “Reply to”), are to be
disregarded when they are followed by the title of the work continued.
“Reply to” and similar beginnings are to be put under Reply, etc., with a
subject-entry under the author of the work replied to.
79. When the first word of a title is spelled unusually, all the
editions should be entered under the word spelled in the modern
or correct way, with a reference from the form adopted in the title.
Ex. The hystorie of the saints would be entered—
History.] The hystorie of the saints.
We enter under the common spelling (1) in order to get all editions of
a work together, (2) because the reader can not be expected to know
exactly how the word is misspelled in the title, and will generally look
first under the correct spelling.
Of two spellings equally correct, choose one and refer from the other.
80. When the first word of a title is in an oblique case, use the
nominative as a heading.
Ex. Put Monumentorum antiquae sculpturae quae supersunt under
Monumenta.
81. If the title has various forms, refer from any that differ enough
to affect the alphabetical order.
See the example in § 68.
82. Modern anonymous works whose titles are changed in
different editions may be entered under the first, with a reference
under the later; but the most satisfactory method is to enter in full
in both places.
“Continuation of” “Supplement to” (but not “Reply to”), are to be
disregarded when they are followed by the title of the work continued.
“Reply to” and similar beginnings are to be put under Reply, etc., with a
subject-entry under the author of the work replied to.
79. When the first word of a title is spelled unusually, all the
editions should be entered under the word spelled in the modern
or correct way, with a reference from the form adopted in the title.
Ex. The hystorie of the saints would be entered—
History.] The hystorie of the saints.
We enter under the common spelling (1) in order to get all editions of
a work together, (2) because the reader can not be expected to know
exactly how the word is misspelled in the title, and will generally look
first under the correct spelling.
Of two spellings equally correct, choose one and refer from the other.
80. When the first word of a title is in an oblique case, use the
nominative as a heading.
Ex. Put Monumentorum antiquae sculpturae quae supersunt under
Monumenta.
81. If the title has various forms, refer from any that differ enough
to affect the alphabetical order.
See the example in § 68.
82. Modern anonymous works whose titles are changed in
different editions may be entered under the first, with a reference
under the later; but the most satisfactory method is to enter in full
in both places.
Page 84
83. Anonymous works that change their titles in successive
volumes are to be entered under the first title, with a reference
from the later, unless the greater part of the work has the later title,
or the whole is much better known by the later title, in which case
entry should be made under that. {43}
84. Make a first-word reference to the author for all plays, and for
poems of some length or importance or notoriety.
Ex.
All’s well that ends well. See Shakespeare, W.
Nothing to wear. See Butler, W. A.
Of course entries are better than references for the reader; the latter are
recommended here merely for economy, which will be found to be
considerable when there are many editions of a play. It is much better to
distribute these like any other title-references, through the alphabet, than,
as some have done, to collect the titles of novels together in one place and
of plays in another. A man not unfrequently wishes to find a book whose
title he has heard of without learning whether it was a novel, a play, a
poem, or a book of travels.
If the catch-word of the title of a novel, poem, or play is the name of a
real person who is its subject, it is optional to make a reference, as in § 86,
or a biographical entry under the family name, or both.
Ex.
Paul Revere’s ride. See Longfellow, H. W.
or
Revere, Paul. L ONGFELLOW , H. W. (In his Tales of a way-side
inn.)
85. Make a first-word reference to the author for other works
which are likely to be inquired for under the first word of the title,
whether because the author-entry of the work is not obvious from
volumes are to be entered under the first title, with a reference
from the later, unless the greater part of the work has the later title,
or the whole is much better known by the later title, in which case
entry should be made under that. {43}
84. Make a first-word reference to the author for all plays, and for
poems of some length or importance or notoriety.
Ex.
All’s well that ends well. See Shakespeare, W.
Nothing to wear. See Butler, W. A.
Of course entries are better than references for the reader; the latter are
recommended here merely for economy, which will be found to be
considerable when there are many editions of a play. It is much better to
distribute these like any other title-references, through the alphabet, than,
as some have done, to collect the titles of novels together in one place and
of plays in another. A man not unfrequently wishes to find a book whose
title he has heard of without learning whether it was a novel, a play, a
poem, or a book of travels.
If the catch-word of the title of a novel, poem, or play is the name of a
real person who is its subject, it is optional to make a reference, as in § 86,
or a biographical entry under the family name, or both.
Ex.
Paul Revere’s ride. See Longfellow, H. W.
or
Revere, Paul. L ONGFELLOW , H. W. (In his Tales of a way-side
inn.)
85. Make a first-word reference to the author for other works
which are likely to be inquired for under the first word of the title,
whether because the author-entry of the work is not obvious from
Page 85
the title, [33] because the title does not indicate the subject, [34] or
because it is of a striking form, [35] or because the book is
commonly known by its title, [36] or for any other good reason.
[33] Codex Sinaiticus; ed. Tischendorf (entered under Bible).
[34] Cuppé’s “Heaven open to all men” needs a title-reference, because for its subject it
would be put under Universal salvation or Future punishment, Duration of. Hutton’s
“Plays and players” is merely an account of the New York stage. Keary’s “Nations around”
does not suggest any subject at all.
[35] Border and bastille.
[36] Divina commedia.
In a majority of cases, when a subject-word entry is made, no first-
word reference is needed; but, if the title is striking, there should be a
first-word reference, or a reference from that part of the title which is
striking. Title-references should not generally be made from certain
common titles, as “Sermons on various subjects,” “Essays, historical and
literary,” and should be made from less common collective words, as
“Century of painters,” “Century of praise,” etc. References should be
liberally made to the works of such authors as Brown, Jones, Schmidt,
Smith, Wilson; if one has forgotten the Christian name, it is a work of too
much time to find the book under the author, and one looks at once for a
subject- or a title-entry or reference. And a reference will facilitate the
finding of many collections entered properly under the editor; for it is
easy to forget an editor’s name, and often difficult to determine the
subject-entry of a collection.
To sum up, then, make a title-reference when the author’s name is
common, the title memorable, or the subject obscure.
86. Make a catch-word reference or references—
a. For all anonymous works which admit of it, if their subject
does not appear distinctly from the title. To be made to the
author if known, otherwise to the first word.
because it is of a striking form, [35] or because the book is
commonly known by its title, [36] or for any other good reason.
[33] Codex Sinaiticus; ed. Tischendorf (entered under Bible).
[34] Cuppé’s “Heaven open to all men” needs a title-reference, because for its subject it
would be put under Universal salvation or Future punishment, Duration of. Hutton’s
“Plays and players” is merely an account of the New York stage. Keary’s “Nations around”
does not suggest any subject at all.
[35] Border and bastille.
[36] Divina commedia.
In a majority of cases, when a subject-word entry is made, no first-
word reference is needed; but, if the title is striking, there should be a
first-word reference, or a reference from that part of the title which is
striking. Title-references should not generally be made from certain
common titles, as “Sermons on various subjects,” “Essays, historical and
literary,” and should be made from less common collective words, as
“Century of painters,” “Century of praise,” etc. References should be
liberally made to the works of such authors as Brown, Jones, Schmidt,
Smith, Wilson; if one has forgotten the Christian name, it is a work of too
much time to find the book under the author, and one looks at once for a
subject- or a title-entry or reference. And a reference will facilitate the
finding of many collections entered properly under the editor; for it is
easy to forget an editor’s name, and often difficult to determine the
subject-entry of a collection.
To sum up, then, make a title-reference when the author’s name is
common, the title memorable, or the subject obscure.
86. Make a catch-word reference or references—
a. For all anonymous works which admit of it, if their subject
does not appear distinctly from the title. To be made to the
author if known, otherwise to the first word.
Page 86
Ex. Scarlet gowns, True and exact account of the. See True. Here
Cardinals is the subject, but the word does not occur in the title; True is
the first word and is therefore taken for the heading; but Scarlet gowns is
a phrase very likely to remain {44} in the memory of anyone who had seen
the title, and therefore the reference is made. Books published under a
comparatively unknown pseudonym should have either a first-word or a
catch-word reference, unless their subject-entry can be easily inferred
from the title.
b. For other works which are likely to be inquired for not
under the first word but under the catch-word of the title. To
be made to the author.
Ex. The fac-simile of the Laurentian ms. of Sophocles might be
spoken of or referred to as “The Laurentian ms.” simply.
It is not easy to decide when to make such entries nor how many to
make. “An account of the baronial mansions of England in the olden
time” may be asked for as “Baronial halls” or as “English baronial halls”
or perhaps as “Mansions of the olden time.” If references are made from
all possible headings which might occur to an inaccurate memory, there
will be no end to the catalogue.
87. Make a subject-word entry for all anonymous biographies and
works of a biographical character. (See § 68, note 3.)
Ex.
Cromwell, Oliver. P ERFECT politician, The; life of Cromwell.
London, 1681. 8º.
— T REASON’S masterpiece; or, Conference between Oliver and
a committee of Parliament. London, 1680. 8º.
For greater security this latter ought to have also a first-word
reference.
88. Make a subject-word reference—
Cardinals is the subject, but the word does not occur in the title; True is
the first word and is therefore taken for the heading; but Scarlet gowns is
a phrase very likely to remain {44} in the memory of anyone who had seen
the title, and therefore the reference is made. Books published under a
comparatively unknown pseudonym should have either a first-word or a
catch-word reference, unless their subject-entry can be easily inferred
from the title.
b. For other works which are likely to be inquired for not
under the first word but under the catch-word of the title. To
be made to the author.
Ex. The fac-simile of the Laurentian ms. of Sophocles might be
spoken of or referred to as “The Laurentian ms.” simply.
It is not easy to decide when to make such entries nor how many to
make. “An account of the baronial mansions of England in the olden
time” may be asked for as “Baronial halls” or as “English baronial halls”
or perhaps as “Mansions of the olden time.” If references are made from
all possible headings which might occur to an inaccurate memory, there
will be no end to the catalogue.
87. Make a subject-word entry for all anonymous biographies and
works of a biographical character. (See § 68, note 3.)
Ex.
Cromwell, Oliver. P ERFECT politician, The; life of Cromwell.
London, 1681. 8º.
— T REASON’S masterpiece; or, Conference between Oliver and
a committee of Parliament. London, 1680. 8º.
For greater security this latter ought to have also a first-word
reference.
88. Make a subject-word reference—
Page 87
a. For all anonymous works which admit of it, to the author if
known, otherwise to the first word.
When the subject-word is the same as the heading of the subject-entry
this reference need not be made; but it will not do to omit an important
title-entry when there are many titles under the subject-heading or they are
much subdivided, so that it would be difficult to find the title-entry there.
Thus an anonymous book, “France and the Pope,” would no doubt have a
subject-entry under some subdivision of France, but as this in a large
catalogue would be little help towards finding the book, it should also
have a reference among the titles which follow the subject France. Of
course if there were only a dozen titles under France one entry would be
enough.
b. For other works, when the subject-word is not the same as
the name of the subject selected by the cataloguer.
In this case, however, a cross-reference, which will answer for all
titles, is to be preferred to a collection of subject-word references, being
more economical and nearly as convenient to the inquirer. Suppose, for
instance, that Insects is preferred as a subject-name to Entomology. It
will be better and more sparing of space to say once for all “Entomology.
See Insects,” referring a man to a part of the catalogue where he will find
not only the book he seeks but many similar ones, than to make number of
references like these:
Entomologie, Cours de. See Latreille, P. A.
Entomologique, Bibliographie. See Percheron, A.
Entomology, Dialogues on. See Dialogues.
Entomology, Elements of. See Dallas, W. S.; Ruschenberger,
W. S. W.
Entomology, Introduction to. See Duncan, J.; Kirby, W.
which will serve his turn only for the particular book he has in mind, and
serve it very little better than the general reference. {45}
known, otherwise to the first word.
When the subject-word is the same as the heading of the subject-entry
this reference need not be made; but it will not do to omit an important
title-entry when there are many titles under the subject-heading or they are
much subdivided, so that it would be difficult to find the title-entry there.
Thus an anonymous book, “France and the Pope,” would no doubt have a
subject-entry under some subdivision of France, but as this in a large
catalogue would be little help towards finding the book, it should also
have a reference among the titles which follow the subject France. Of
course if there were only a dozen titles under France one entry would be
enough.
b. For other works, when the subject-word is not the same as
the name of the subject selected by the cataloguer.
In this case, however, a cross-reference, which will answer for all
titles, is to be preferred to a collection of subject-word references, being
more economical and nearly as convenient to the inquirer. Suppose, for
instance, that Insects is preferred as a subject-name to Entomology. It
will be better and more sparing of space to say once for all “Entomology.
See Insects,” referring a man to a part of the catalogue where he will find
not only the book he seeks but many similar ones, than to make number of
references like these:
Entomologie, Cours de. See Latreille, P. A.
Entomologique, Bibliographie. See Percheron, A.
Entomology, Dialogues on. See Dialogues.
Entomology, Elements of. See Dallas, W. S.; Ruschenberger,
W. S. W.
Entomology, Introduction to. See Duncan, J.; Kirby, W.
which will serve his turn only for the particular book he has in mind, and
serve it very little better than the general reference. {45}
Page 88
89. Make title references (first-word, catch-word, or subject-word)
for works which are entered under the names of societies or of
governments.
Ex. Consular reports. See U. S. Consular Service.
The reason for this is that the inquirer might not think of looking for
such works under those headings or might be unable to find them in the
mass of titles under the larger countries, France, Great Britain, United
States. But in view of the room which such references would fill, if made
from all governmental titles, it seems best to state the rule for the entry of
governmental and society publications very distinctly in the preface and
then to require and presuppose a certain acquaintance with the plan of the
catalogue on the part of those who use it, and omit all reference for
ordinary official reports, making them only for works which have become
part of literature, and are likely to be much inquired for: as, the
“Astronomical exploring expedition,” “Connaissance des temps,”
“Description de l’Égypte,” “Documents inédits,” “Philosophical
transactions,” etc. Of course absolute uniformity can not be secured in this
way, but absolute uniformity is not very important. Even if occasionally a
reference of this kind fails to be made which might reasonably be
required, those which are made will be useful. It is easy to add the
reference wanted in a manuscript catalogue or in the inevitable
supplement of a printed catalogue.
90. Title references must sometimes be made from subtitles and
half-titles.
Because some books are known and referred to by them rather than by
the full title. For the same reason the binder’s title, used on the original
binding, may deserve a reference (never an entry); and also titles
commonly given to books though not appearing anywhere in them, as
Breeches Bible, Speaker’s commentary.
for works which are entered under the names of societies or of
governments.
Ex. Consular reports. See U. S. Consular Service.
The reason for this is that the inquirer might not think of looking for
such works under those headings or might be unable to find them in the
mass of titles under the larger countries, France, Great Britain, United
States. But in view of the room which such references would fill, if made
from all governmental titles, it seems best to state the rule for the entry of
governmental and society publications very distinctly in the preface and
then to require and presuppose a certain acquaintance with the plan of the
catalogue on the part of those who use it, and omit all reference for
ordinary official reports, making them only for works which have become
part of literature, and are likely to be much inquired for: as, the
“Astronomical exploring expedition,” “Connaissance des temps,”
“Description de l’Égypte,” “Documents inédits,” “Philosophical
transactions,” etc. Of course absolute uniformity can not be secured in this
way, but absolute uniformity is not very important. Even if occasionally a
reference of this kind fails to be made which might reasonably be
required, those which are made will be useful. It is easy to add the
reference wanted in a manuscript catalogue or in the inevitable
supplement of a printed catalogue.
90. Title references must sometimes be made from subtitles and
half-titles.
Because some books are known and referred to by them rather than by
the full title. For the same reason the binder’s title, used on the original
binding, may deserve a reference (never an entry); and also titles
commonly given to books though not appearing anywhere in them, as
Breeches Bible, Speaker’s commentary.
Page 89
91. If a book has several title-pages use the most general, giving
the others, if necessary, in a note or as contents.
This occurs especially in German books. The rule above should be
followed even when the library has only one of the parts. But under the
subject-heading the subtitle which corresponds to that subject may be
used, the general title being given in a parenthesis after the imprint, so as
to preserve the connection of the subject- and title-entries. Ex. Saxony,
House of. V EHSE , E. Geschichte der Höfe des Hauses Sachsen.
Hamburg, 1854. 7 v. 8º. (Vol. 28–34 of his Gesch. d. deut. Höfe.)
the others, if necessary, in a note or as contents.
This occurs especially in German books. The rule above should be
followed even when the library has only one of the parts. But under the
subject-heading the subtitle which corresponds to that subject may be
used, the general title being given in a parenthesis after the imprint, so as
to preserve the connection of the subject- and title-entries. Ex. Saxony,
House of. V EHSE , E. Geschichte der Höfe des Hauses Sachsen.
Hamburg, 1854. 7 v. 8º. (Vol. 28–34 of his Gesch. d. deut. Höfe.)
Page 90
III. SUBJECT-ENTRY.
CATALOGUE.
(a.) ENTRIES CONSIDERED SEPARATELY.
(i.) CHOICE BETWEEN DIFFERENT SUBJECTS.
Between general and specific, 93; Between person and country, 94; Between event and
country, 95; Between subject and country, 96, 97; Between subjects that overlap, 98.
(ii.) CHOICE BETWEEN DIFFERENT NAMES.
Language, 100; Synonyms, 101–103; Subject-word and subject, 107; Homonyms, 105;
Compound headings, 106, 107; Double entry, 108–112; Vessels, 113; Civil actions, 114;
Reviews, comments, etc., 115.
(b.) ENTRIES CONSIDERED AS PARTS OF A WHOLE.
Cross-references, 119, 120; Synoptical table, 121. {46}
CATALOGUE.
(a.) ENTRIES CONSIDERED SEPARATELY.
(i.) CHOICE BETWEEN DIFFERENT SUBJECTS.
Between general and specific, 93; Between person and country, 94; Between event and
country, 95; Between subject and country, 96, 97; Between subjects that overlap, 98.
(ii.) CHOICE BETWEEN DIFFERENT NAMES.
Language, 100; Synonyms, 101–103; Subject-word and subject, 107; Homonyms, 105;
Compound headings, 106, 107; Double entry, 108–112; Vessels, 113; Civil actions, 114;
Reviews, comments, etc., 115.
(b.) ENTRIES CONSIDERED AS PARTS OF A WHOLE.
Cross-references, 119, 120; Synoptical table, 121. {46}
Page 91
SUBJECTS.
(a.) E NTRIES CONSIDERED SEPARATELY.
92. Some questions in regard to the place of entry are common to
the author- and the subject-catalogue; because individuals
(persons, places, ships, etc.) may be at once authors and subjects.
For these questions consult Part I, and also § 100 of the present
part.
In a dictionary catalogue some books can not profitably have subject-
entry, because they not only have no one subject but do not even belong to
any class of subjects.
A collection is to be entered under the word which expresses its
subject or its general tendency. The memoirs, transactions, proceedings,
etc., of a society should be entered under name of the object for which the
society is founded. When there are many societies under one head, it is
economical to refer merely; as, from Agriculture or Agricultural
societies to the various names.
The importance of deciding aright where any given subject shall be
entered is in inverse proportion to the difficulty of decision. If there is no
obvious principle to guide the cataloguer, it is plain there will be no
reason why the public should expect to find the entry under one heading
rather than another, and therefore in regard to the public it matters not
which is chosen. But it is better that such decisions should be made to
conform when possible to some general system, as there is then more
likelihood that they will be decided alike by different cataloguers, and that
a usage will grow up which the public will finally learn and profit by, as a
usage has grown up in regard to the author-entry of French names
containing De, Du, La, etc.
(i.) C HOICE BETWEEN DIFFERENT SUBJECTS.
(a.) E NTRIES CONSIDERED SEPARATELY.
92. Some questions in regard to the place of entry are common to
the author- and the subject-catalogue; because individuals
(persons, places, ships, etc.) may be at once authors and subjects.
For these questions consult Part I, and also § 100 of the present
part.
In a dictionary catalogue some books can not profitably have subject-
entry, because they not only have no one subject but do not even belong to
any class of subjects.
A collection is to be entered under the word which expresses its
subject or its general tendency. The memoirs, transactions, proceedings,
etc., of a society should be entered under name of the object for which the
society is founded. When there are many societies under one head, it is
economical to refer merely; as, from Agriculture or Agricultural
societies to the various names.
The importance of deciding aright where any given subject shall be
entered is in inverse proportion to the difficulty of decision. If there is no
obvious principle to guide the cataloguer, it is plain there will be no
reason why the public should expect to find the entry under one heading
rather than another, and therefore in regard to the public it matters not
which is chosen. But it is better that such decisions should be made to
conform when possible to some general system, as there is then more
likelihood that they will be decided alike by different cataloguers, and that
a usage will grow up which the public will finally learn and profit by, as a
usage has grown up in regard to the author-entry of French names
containing De, Du, La, etc.
(i.) C HOICE BETWEEN DIFFERENT SUBJECTS.
Page 92
(a.) Between general and specific.
93. Enter a work under its subject-heading, not under the heading
of a class which includes that subject.
Ex. Put Lady Cust’s book on “The cat” under Cat, not under Zoölogy
or Mammals, or Domestic animals; and put Garnier’s “Le fer” under
Iron, not under Metals or Metallurgy.
This rule of “specific entry” is the main distinction between the
dictionary-catalogue and the alphabetico-classed.
Some subjects have no name; they are spoken of only by a phrase or
by several phrases not definite enough to be used as a heading. A book
may be written on the movements of fluids in plants, a very definite object
of investigation, but as yet nameless; it must be put under Botany
(Physiological). But if several works were written on it and it was called,
let us say, Phythydraulics, it would be seen that, under this rule, it no
more ought to be under Botany than Circulation of the blood under
Zoölogy. Thirty years ago “Fertilization of flowers” could hardly have
been used as a heading; but late writings have raised it to the status of a
subject. There are thousands of possible matters of investigation, some of
which are from time to time discussed, but before the catalogue can
profitably follow its “specific” rule in regard to them they must attain a
certain individuality as objects of inquiry, and be given some sort of
name, otherwise we must assign them class-entry.
And it is not always easy to decide what is a distinct subject. Many
catalogues have a heading Preaching. Is Extempore preaching a
sufficiently distinct matter to have a heading of its own? There are a
number of books on this branch of the {47} subject. In this particular case
the difficulty can be avoided by making the heading “Preaching without
notes.” Many such questions may be similarly solved, with perhaps more
satisfaction to the maker of the catalogue than to its users; but many
questions will remain.
Then, mixed with this, and sometimes hardly distinguishable from it,
is the case of subjects whose names begin within an unimportant adjective
93. Enter a work under its subject-heading, not under the heading
of a class which includes that subject.
Ex. Put Lady Cust’s book on “The cat” under Cat, not under Zoölogy
or Mammals, or Domestic animals; and put Garnier’s “Le fer” under
Iron, not under Metals or Metallurgy.
This rule of “specific entry” is the main distinction between the
dictionary-catalogue and the alphabetico-classed.
Some subjects have no name; they are spoken of only by a phrase or
by several phrases not definite enough to be used as a heading. A book
may be written on the movements of fluids in plants, a very definite object
of investigation, but as yet nameless; it must be put under Botany
(Physiological). But if several works were written on it and it was called,
let us say, Phythydraulics, it would be seen that, under this rule, it no
more ought to be under Botany than Circulation of the blood under
Zoölogy. Thirty years ago “Fertilization of flowers” could hardly have
been used as a heading; but late writings have raised it to the status of a
subject. There are thousands of possible matters of investigation, some of
which are from time to time discussed, but before the catalogue can
profitably follow its “specific” rule in regard to them they must attain a
certain individuality as objects of inquiry, and be given some sort of
name, otherwise we must assign them class-entry.
And it is not always easy to decide what is a distinct subject. Many
catalogues have a heading Preaching. Is Extempore preaching a
sufficiently distinct matter to have a heading of its own? There are a
number of books on this branch of the {47} subject. In this particular case
the difficulty can be avoided by making the heading “Preaching without
notes.” Many such questions may be similarly solved, with perhaps more
satisfaction to the maker of the catalogue than to its users; but many
questions will remain.
Then, mixed with this, and sometimes hardly distinguishable from it,
is the case of subjects whose names begin within an unimportant adjective
Page 93
or noun,—Are of the meridian, Capture of property at sea, Segment of a
circle, Quadrature of the circle. All that can be said in such cases is that, if
the subject be commonly recognized and the name accepted or likely to be
accepted by usage, the entry must be made under it. For the fuller
discussion of compound headings, see §§ 106, 107.
On the other hand, difficulty arises from the public, or a part of it,
being accustomed to think of certain subjects in connection with their
including classes, which especially happens to those persons who have
used classed catalogues or the dictionary catalogues in which specification
is only partially carried out; so that there is a temptation to enter certain
books doubly, once under the specific heading to satisfy the rule, and once
under the class to satisfy the public. The dictionary principle does not
forbid this. If room can be spared, the cataloguer may put what he pleases
under an extensive subject (a class), provided he puts the less
comprehensive works also under their respective specific headings. The
objection to this is that, if all the specifics are thus entered, the bulk of the
catalogue is enormously increased; and that, if a selection is made, it must
depend entirely upon the “judgment,” i. e., the prepossessions and
accidental associations, of the cataloguer, and there will be an end to all
uniformity, and probably the public will not be better satisfied, not
understanding why they do not find class-entry in all cases.
(b.) Choice between person and country.
94. Put under the name of a king or other ruler all his biographies,
and works purporting to be histories of his reign; but enter under
the country all histories which include more than his reign and
accounts of events which happened during the reign, and all
political pamphlets not directly criticising his conduct.
The first part of this rule is analogous to that by which the works of a
king of a private nature are put under his name, and all his public writings
under the country; putting histories of the reign under the king is partly
subject- and partly title-entry. Books of this sort have really two subjects
circle, Quadrature of the circle. All that can be said in such cases is that, if
the subject be commonly recognized and the name accepted or likely to be
accepted by usage, the entry must be made under it. For the fuller
discussion of compound headings, see §§ 106, 107.
On the other hand, difficulty arises from the public, or a part of it,
being accustomed to think of certain subjects in connection with their
including classes, which especially happens to those persons who have
used classed catalogues or the dictionary catalogues in which specification
is only partially carried out; so that there is a temptation to enter certain
books doubly, once under the specific heading to satisfy the rule, and once
under the class to satisfy the public. The dictionary principle does not
forbid this. If room can be spared, the cataloguer may put what he pleases
under an extensive subject (a class), provided he puts the less
comprehensive works also under their respective specific headings. The
objection to this is that, if all the specifics are thus entered, the bulk of the
catalogue is enormously increased; and that, if a selection is made, it must
depend entirely upon the “judgment,” i. e., the prepossessions and
accidental associations, of the cataloguer, and there will be an end to all
uniformity, and probably the public will not be better satisfied, not
understanding why they do not find class-entry in all cases.
(b.) Choice between person and country.
94. Put under the name of a king or other ruler all his biographies,
and works purporting to be histories of his reign; but enter under
the country all histories which include more than his reign and
accounts of events which happened during the reign, and all
political pamphlets not directly criticising his conduct.
The first part of this rule is analogous to that by which the works of a
king of a private nature are put under his name, and all his public writings
under the country; putting histories of the reign under the king is partly
subject- and partly title-entry. Books of this sort have really two subjects
Page 94
and ought to be entered twice (e. g., Boutaric’s “La France sous Philippe
le bel”); the rule above is simply an economical device to save room at the
expense of convenience. Perhaps a better practice would be to enter all
lives of kings as well as histories of their reigns under the country only,
with a reference from the king.
Similarly there are some biographies and autobiographies which have
such a very large proportion of history that they ought to appear both
under the man and the country. In general we merely refer from the
country, but occasionally nothing but double entry will suffice. Whether
they shall appear by way of entry or merely be mentioned in a note, must
be determined by circumstances.
(c.) Choice between event and country.
95. Events [37] or periods [38] in the history of a country which have
a proper name may be entered under that name with a reference
from the country; those whose name is common to many
countries [39] should be entered under the country.
[37] St. Bartholomew’s day.
[38] Fronde.
[39] Revolution; Restoration; Civil war.
(d.) Choice between subject (or form) and country.
96. The only satisfactory method is double entry under the local
and the scientific subject—to put, for instance, a work on the
geology of California under both California and Geology, and to
carry out this practice through the catalogue, so that the
geographical student shall not be obliged to search for works on
California under Botany, Geology, Natural history, Palæontol‐
ogy, Zoölogy, and a dozen similar headings, and the scientist shall
not be sent to California, England, Russia, and a score of other
le bel”); the rule above is simply an economical device to save room at the
expense of convenience. Perhaps a better practice would be to enter all
lives of kings as well as histories of their reigns under the country only,
with a reference from the king.
Similarly there are some biographies and autobiographies which have
such a very large proportion of history that they ought to appear both
under the man and the country. In general we merely refer from the
country, but occasionally nothing but double entry will suffice. Whether
they shall appear by way of entry or merely be mentioned in a note, must
be determined by circumstances.
(c.) Choice between event and country.
95. Events [37] or periods [38] in the history of a country which have
a proper name may be entered under that name with a reference
from the country; those whose name is common to many
countries [39] should be entered under the country.
[37] St. Bartholomew’s day.
[38] Fronde.
[39] Revolution; Restoration; Civil war.
(d.) Choice between subject (or form) and country.
96. The only satisfactory method is double entry under the local
and the scientific subject—to put, for instance, a work on the
geology of California under both California and Geology, and to
carry out this practice through the catalogue, so that the
geographical student shall not be obliged to search for works on
California under Botany, Geology, Natural history, Palæontol‐
ogy, Zoölogy, and a dozen similar headings, and the scientist shall
not be sent to California, England, Russia, and a score of other
Page 95
places to find the various treatises on geology. But as this
profusion of entry would make the catalogue very long, we are
generally obliged to choose between country and scientific
subject.
97. A work treating of a general subject with special reference to a
place is to be entered under the place, with merely a reference
from the subject.
Ex. Put Flagg’s “Birds and seasons of New England” under New
England, and under Ornithology say See also New England. As New
England ornithology and Ornithology of New England are merely
different names of the same specific subject, it may be asked why we
prefer the first. Because entry under Ornithology of New England,
though by itself specific entry, is when taken in connection with the
entries that would be grouped around it (Ornithology, Ornithology of
America, Ornithology of Scotland, etc.), in effect class-entry; whereas
the similar grouping under New England does not make that a class,
inasmuch as New England botany, New England history, New England
ornithology are not parts of New England, but simply the individual New
England considered in various aspects. Of course the dictionary catalogue
in choosing between a class and an individual prefers the latter. Its object
is to show at one view all the sides of each object; the classed catalogue
shows together the same side of many objects.
There is not as yet much uniformity in catalogues, nor does any carry
out this principle so absolutely as the more obvious “specific” rule is
obeyed. The Boston Public Library Supplement of 1866, for instance, has
under the country Antiquities, Coinage, Description and History,
Language, Religion (subjects), and Literature, and even Elocution and
Poetry (forms), but not Ballads nor Periodicals, which appear under those
words. Yet when Ballads are called Volkslieder they appear under the
country Germany,—an instance of the independence of the title produced
by foreign languages, the English title being entered by form-word, the
profusion of entry would make the catalogue very long, we are
generally obliged to choose between country and scientific
subject.
97. A work treating of a general subject with special reference to a
place is to be entered under the place, with merely a reference
from the subject.
Ex. Put Flagg’s “Birds and seasons of New England” under New
England, and under Ornithology say See also New England. As New
England ornithology and Ornithology of New England are merely
different names of the same specific subject, it may be asked why we
prefer the first. Because entry under Ornithology of New England,
though by itself specific entry, is when taken in connection with the
entries that would be grouped around it (Ornithology, Ornithology of
America, Ornithology of Scotland, etc.), in effect class-entry; whereas
the similar grouping under New England does not make that a class,
inasmuch as New England botany, New England history, New England
ornithology are not parts of New England, but simply the individual New
England considered in various aspects. Of course the dictionary catalogue
in choosing between a class and an individual prefers the latter. Its object
is to show at one view all the sides of each object; the classed catalogue
shows together the same side of many objects.
There is not as yet much uniformity in catalogues, nor does any carry
out this principle so absolutely as the more obvious “specific” rule is
obeyed. The Boston Public Library Supplement of 1866, for instance, has
under the country Antiquities, Coinage, Description and History,
Language, Religion (subjects), and Literature, and even Elocution and
Poetry (forms), but not Ballads nor Periodicals, which appear under those
words. Yet when Ballads are called Volkslieder they appear under the
country Germany,—an instance of the independence of the title produced
by foreign languages, the English title being entered by form-word, the
Page 96
foreign works having national classification, regardless of the title. There
are many other classes that in most catalogues at present, instead of being
confined to general works, absorb books which should rather have local
entry, as Vases, Gems, Sculpture, Painting, and other branches of the
fine arts, Ballads, Epigrams, Plays, and other forms of literature. In
catalogues of merely English libraries this is perhaps as well (see § 122),
but the multiplication of books and the accession of foreign literatures
render more system necessary.
To show the procedure under this rule, suppose we have a collection
of books on coins. Let the general works go under Numismatics; let
works on any particular coin, as a Pine-tree shilling or a Queen Anne’s
farthing, go under the name of the coin; let works on the coins of a
country be put under its name; refer from the country to all the particular
coins on which you have monographs, and from Numismatics both to all
the separate coins and to all the countries on whose coinage you have
treatises. {49}
(e.) Between subjects that overlap.
98. Among subjects that overlap choose the one that
preponderates, with a reference from the other.
Ex. Any complete treatise on domestic animals will cover a large part
of the ground of veterinary medicine; but it is unnecessary to enter all the
works on domestic animals under Veterinary medicine; a note to this
effect is sufficient. Astronomy and Geology overlap in regard to the
origin of the earth, Geology and Physical geography in regard to its
present condition. Any particular book must be classified with one or the
other subject according as the geological or geographical treatment
prevails.
(ii.) C HOICE BETWEEN DIFFERENT NAMES.
99. General rules, always applicable, for the choice of names of
subjects can no more be given than rules without exception in
are many other classes that in most catalogues at present, instead of being
confined to general works, absorb books which should rather have local
entry, as Vases, Gems, Sculpture, Painting, and other branches of the
fine arts, Ballads, Epigrams, Plays, and other forms of literature. In
catalogues of merely English libraries this is perhaps as well (see § 122),
but the multiplication of books and the accession of foreign literatures
render more system necessary.
To show the procedure under this rule, suppose we have a collection
of books on coins. Let the general works go under Numismatics; let
works on any particular coin, as a Pine-tree shilling or a Queen Anne’s
farthing, go under the name of the coin; let works on the coins of a
country be put under its name; refer from the country to all the particular
coins on which you have monographs, and from Numismatics both to all
the separate coins and to all the countries on whose coinage you have
treatises. {49}
(e.) Between subjects that overlap.
98. Among subjects that overlap choose the one that
preponderates, with a reference from the other.
Ex. Any complete treatise on domestic animals will cover a large part
of the ground of veterinary medicine; but it is unnecessary to enter all the
works on domestic animals under Veterinary medicine; a note to this
effect is sufficient. Astronomy and Geology overlap in regard to the
origin of the earth, Geology and Physical geography in regard to its
present condition. Any particular book must be classified with one or the
other subject according as the geological or geographical treatment
prevails.
(ii.) C HOICE BETWEEN DIFFERENT NAMES.
99. General rules, always applicable, for the choice of names of
subjects can no more be given than rules without exception in
Page 97
grammar. Usage in both cases is the supreme arbiter,—the usage,
in the present case, not of the cataloguer but of the public in
speaking of subjects.
(f.) Language.
100. When possible let the heading be in English, but a foreign
word may be used when no English word expresses the subject of
a book.
Ex. Écorcheurs, Émigrés, Raskolnik. Many terms of the Roman or
civil law are not exactly translatable; neither Fault nor Crime gives the
idea of Culpa; the Debitor inops is not our bankrupt or insolvent; he
would have been very glad to have the privileges of a bankrupt. Some
other technical terms, and some names of bodies, sects, events, should be
left in the original language. The use of the Latin names of Greek deities
(Jupiter, Neptune, Venus, in place of Zeus, Poseidon, Aphrodite) is a
manifest inaccuracy. Yet it may be defended on the plea: (1) that the Latin
names are at present more familiar to the majority of readers; (2) that it
would be difficult to divide the literature, or if it were done, many books
must be put both under Zeus and Jupiter, Poseidon and Neptune, etc.,
filling considerable room with no practical advantage.
On the language of place names, see § 33, 35.
(g.) Synonyms.
101. Of two exactly synonymous names choose one and make a
reference from the other.
Ex. Poisons and Toxicology; Antiquities and Archæology; Insects
and Entomology; Warming and Heating; Pacific Ocean and South Sea.
There are some cases in which separate headings (Hydraulics and
Mechanics of Fluids), which can not be combined, cover books almost
identical in character, so that the inquirer must look under both. This is an
evil; but there is no reason for increasing the evil by separating headings
in the present case, not of the cataloguer but of the public in
speaking of subjects.
(f.) Language.
100. When possible let the heading be in English, but a foreign
word may be used when no English word expresses the subject of
a book.
Ex. Écorcheurs, Émigrés, Raskolnik. Many terms of the Roman or
civil law are not exactly translatable; neither Fault nor Crime gives the
idea of Culpa; the Debitor inops is not our bankrupt or insolvent; he
would have been very glad to have the privileges of a bankrupt. Some
other technical terms, and some names of bodies, sects, events, should be
left in the original language. The use of the Latin names of Greek deities
(Jupiter, Neptune, Venus, in place of Zeus, Poseidon, Aphrodite) is a
manifest inaccuracy. Yet it may be defended on the plea: (1) that the Latin
names are at present more familiar to the majority of readers; (2) that it
would be difficult to divide the literature, or if it were done, many books
must be put both under Zeus and Jupiter, Poseidon and Neptune, etc.,
filling considerable room with no practical advantage.
On the language of place names, see § 33, 35.
(g.) Synonyms.
101. Of two exactly synonymous names choose one and make a
reference from the other.
Ex. Poisons and Toxicology; Antiquities and Archæology; Insects
and Entomology; Warming and Heating; Pacific Ocean and South Sea.
There are some cases in which separate headings (Hydraulics and
Mechanics of Fluids), which can not be combined, cover books almost
identical in character, so that the inquirer must look under both. This is an
evil; but there is no reason for increasing the evil by separating headings
Page 98
that are really synonymous, certainly not for dividing a subject in this way
for verbal causes and giving no hint that it has been divided.
It sometimes happens that a different name is given to the same
subject at different periods of its history. When the method of study of the
subject, or its objects, or the ideas connected with it, are very different at
those two periods (as in the case of Alchemy and Chemistry), of course
there must be two headings. There is not so much reason for separating
Fluxions and Differential calculus, which differ only in notation. And
there is no reason at all for separating Natural Philosophy and {50}
Physics. I am told that medical nomenclature has changed largely three
times within the present century. How is the cataloguer, unless he happens
to be a medical man, to escape occasionally putting works on one disease
under three different heads?
To arrive at a decision in any case one must balance the advantages on
the one hand of having all that relates to a subject together, and on the
other of making that economical conjunction of title-entry and of subject-
entry which comes from following the titles of the books in selecting
names for their subjects.
In choosing between synonymous headings prefer the one that—
(a) is most familiar to that class of people who consult the library; a
natural history society will of course use the scientific name, a town
library would equally of course use the popular name—Butterflies rather
than Lepidoptera, Horse rather than Equus caballus. But the scientific
may be preferable when the common name is ambiguous or of ill-defined
extent.
(b) is most used in other catalogues.
(c) has fewest meanings other than the sense in which it is to be
employed.
(d) comes first in the alphabet, so that the reference from the other can
be made to the exact page of the catalogue.
(e) brings the subject into the neighborhood of other related subjects.
It is, for instance, often an advantage to have near any art or science the
lives of those who have been famous in it; as, Art, Artists; Painters,
Painting; Historians, History. If one were hesitating between
for verbal causes and giving no hint that it has been divided.
It sometimes happens that a different name is given to the same
subject at different periods of its history. When the method of study of the
subject, or its objects, or the ideas connected with it, are very different at
those two periods (as in the case of Alchemy and Chemistry), of course
there must be two headings. There is not so much reason for separating
Fluxions and Differential calculus, which differ only in notation. And
there is no reason at all for separating Natural Philosophy and {50}
Physics. I am told that medical nomenclature has changed largely three
times within the present century. How is the cataloguer, unless he happens
to be a medical man, to escape occasionally putting works on one disease
under three different heads?
To arrive at a decision in any case one must balance the advantages on
the one hand of having all that relates to a subject together, and on the
other of making that economical conjunction of title-entry and of subject-
entry which comes from following the titles of the books in selecting
names for their subjects.
In choosing between synonymous headings prefer the one that—
(a) is most familiar to that class of people who consult the library; a
natural history society will of course use the scientific name, a town
library would equally of course use the popular name—Butterflies rather
than Lepidoptera, Horse rather than Equus caballus. But the scientific
may be preferable when the common name is ambiguous or of ill-defined
extent.
(b) is most used in other catalogues.
(c) has fewest meanings other than the sense in which it is to be
employed.
(d) comes first in the alphabet, so that the reference from the other can
be made to the exact page of the catalogue.
(e) brings the subject into the neighborhood of other related subjects.
It is, for instance, often an advantage to have near any art or science the
lives of those who have been famous in it; as, Art, Artists; Painters,
Painting; Historians, History. If one were hesitating between
Page 99
Conjuring, Juggling, Legerdemain, Prestidigitation, and Sleight of
hand, it would be in favor of Conjuring or Prestidigitation that one
could enter by their side Conjurors or Prestidigitators.
Sometimes one and sometimes another of these reasons must prevail.
Each case is to be decided on its own merits.
102. In choosing between two names not exactly synonymous,
consider whether there is difference enough to require separate
entry; if not, treat them as synonymous.
Ex. Culture and Civilization, Culture and Education.
103. Of two subjects exactly opposite choose one and refer from
the other.
Ex. Temperance and Intemperance, Free Trade and Protection,
Authority (in religion) and Private judgment. Reasons for choice the
same as between synonyms.
To this rule there may be exceptions. It may be best that works on
theism and atheism should be put together, perhaps under the heading
God; but Theists and Atheists as bodies of religious believers ought
certainly to go under those two headings, and therefore it is appropriate to
put works in defence of theistic doctrines and those in defence of atheistic
doctrines under Theism and Atheism.
(h.) Subject-word and subject.
104. Enter books under the word which best expresses their
subject, whether it occurs in the title or not.
It is strange that the delusion ever should have arisen that “a catalogue
must of necessity confine itself to titles only of books.” If it does, it can
not enter that very considerable number of books whose titles make no
mention or only an obscure or a defective mention of their subjects (§ 85),
and it is at the mercy of deceptive titles (e. g., Channing’s sermon “On a
future life,” which treats of Heaven only, Irving’s History of New York,
hand, it would be in favor of Conjuring or Prestidigitation that one
could enter by their side Conjurors or Prestidigitators.
Sometimes one and sometimes another of these reasons must prevail.
Each case is to be decided on its own merits.
102. In choosing between two names not exactly synonymous,
consider whether there is difference enough to require separate
entry; if not, treat them as synonymous.
Ex. Culture and Civilization, Culture and Education.
103. Of two subjects exactly opposite choose one and refer from
the other.
Ex. Temperance and Intemperance, Free Trade and Protection,
Authority (in religion) and Private judgment. Reasons for choice the
same as between synonyms.
To this rule there may be exceptions. It may be best that works on
theism and atheism should be put together, perhaps under the heading
God; but Theists and Atheists as bodies of religious believers ought
certainly to go under those two headings, and therefore it is appropriate to
put works in defence of theistic doctrines and those in defence of atheistic
doctrines under Theism and Atheism.
(h.) Subject-word and subject.
104. Enter books under the word which best expresses their
subject, whether it occurs in the title or not.
It is strange that the delusion ever should have arisen that “a catalogue
must of necessity confine itself to titles only of books.” If it does, it can
not enter that very considerable number of books whose titles make no
mention or only an obscure or a defective mention of their subjects (§ 85),
and it is at the mercy of deceptive titles (e. g., Channing’s sermon “On a
future life,” which treats of Heaven only, Irving’s History of New York,
Page 100
Gulliver’s Travels). A man who is looking up the history of the Christian
church does not care in the least whether the books on it were called by
their authors church histories or ecclesiastical histories; and the cataloguer
also should not care if he can avoid it. The title rules the title-catalogue;
let it confine itself to that province. {51}
(i.) Homonyms.
105. Carefully separate the entries on different subjects bearing
the same name, or take some other heading in place of one of the
homonyms.
E. g., it will not do to confound works on the vegetable kingdom with
works on vegetables, in the sense of kitchen-garden plants; the first would
be properly entered under Botany. Ottley’s “Italian school of design” or a
work on “Wagner and his school” are not to be put under Education.
Special care is of course needed with foreign titles; the cataloguer may be
easily misled by the sound if he is not on his guard. I have seen Lancelot’s
“Jardin des racines grecques” classed with works on Gardening,
Stephanus Byzantinus “De Dodone [urbe Molossidis]” put under Dodo
with a reference from Ornithology, and Garnier “Sur l’autorité
paternelle” among the works on the Christian Fathers.
(j.) Compound subject-names.
106. The name of a subject may be—
(a) A single word, as Botany, Ethics.
Or several words taken together, either—
(b) A noun preceded by an adjective, as Ancient history, Capital
punishment, Moral philosophy.
(c) A noun preceded by another noun used like an adjective, as Death
penalty, Flower fertilization.
church does not care in the least whether the books on it were called by
their authors church histories or ecclesiastical histories; and the cataloguer
also should not care if he can avoid it. The title rules the title-catalogue;
let it confine itself to that province. {51}
(i.) Homonyms.
105. Carefully separate the entries on different subjects bearing
the same name, or take some other heading in place of one of the
homonyms.
E. g., it will not do to confound works on the vegetable kingdom with
works on vegetables, in the sense of kitchen-garden plants; the first would
be properly entered under Botany. Ottley’s “Italian school of design” or a
work on “Wagner and his school” are not to be put under Education.
Special care is of course needed with foreign titles; the cataloguer may be
easily misled by the sound if he is not on his guard. I have seen Lancelot’s
“Jardin des racines grecques” classed with works on Gardening,
Stephanus Byzantinus “De Dodone [urbe Molossidis]” put under Dodo
with a reference from Ornithology, and Garnier “Sur l’autorité
paternelle” among the works on the Christian Fathers.
(j.) Compound subject-names.
106. The name of a subject may be—
(a) A single word, as Botany, Ethics.
Or several words taken together, either—
(b) A noun preceded by an adjective, as Ancient history, Capital
punishment, Moral philosophy.
(c) A noun preceded by another noun used like an adjective, as Death
penalty, Flower fertilization.
Page 101
(d) A noun connected with another by a preposition, as Penalty of
death, Fertilization of flowers.
(e) A noun connected with another by “and,” as Ancients and
moderns.
(f) A sentence, as in the titles “Sur la règle Paterna paternis materna
maternis” and “De usu paroemiae juris Germanici, Der Letzte thut
die Thüre zu;” where the whole phrase would be the subject of the
dissertation.
There are three main courses open:
(1) We can consider the subject to be the phrase as it reads, as
Agricultural chemistry, Survival of the fittest, which is the only
possible method in (a) and undoubtedly the best method in (c), (e),
and (f), and in most cases of proper names, as Democratic Party,
White Mountains, Missouri River (but see § 26).
(2) We can make our entry in (b), (c), and (d) under what we consider
the most significant word of the phrase, inverting the order of the
words if necessary; as, Probabilities (instead of Theory of
probabilities); Earth, Figure of the; Species, Origin of the, the word
Origin here being by itself of no account; Alimentary canal, Canal
being by itself of no account; Political economy, Political being here
the main word and economy by itself having a meaning entirely
different from that which it has in this connection.
(3) We can take the phrase as it reads in (c), (d), (e), and (f), but make
a special rule for a noun preceded by an adjective (b), first, that all
such phrases shall when possible be reduced to their equivalent nouns,
as Moral philosophy to Ethics or to Morals, Intellectual; or Mental
philosophy to Intellect; or Mind, Natural philosophy to Physics,
Sanitary science; or Hygiene, Scientific men to Scientists; or Social
science to Sociology; and, secondly, that in all cases where such
reduction is impossible the words shall be inverted and the noun taken
as the heading, as Chemistry, Agricultural; Chemistry, Organic;
death, Fertilization of flowers.
(e) A noun connected with another by “and,” as Ancients and
moderns.
(f) A sentence, as in the titles “Sur la règle Paterna paternis materna
maternis” and “De usu paroemiae juris Germanici, Der Letzte thut
die Thüre zu;” where the whole phrase would be the subject of the
dissertation.
There are three main courses open:
(1) We can consider the subject to be the phrase as it reads, as
Agricultural chemistry, Survival of the fittest, which is the only
possible method in (a) and undoubtedly the best method in (c), (e),
and (f), and in most cases of proper names, as Democratic Party,
White Mountains, Missouri River (but see § 26).
(2) We can make our entry in (b), (c), and (d) under what we consider
the most significant word of the phrase, inverting the order of the
words if necessary; as, Probabilities (instead of Theory of
probabilities); Earth, Figure of the; Species, Origin of the, the word
Origin here being by itself of no account; Alimentary canal, Canal
being by itself of no account; Political economy, Political being here
the main word and economy by itself having a meaning entirely
different from that which it has in this connection.
(3) We can take the phrase as it reads in (c), (d), (e), and (f), but make
a special rule for a noun preceded by an adjective (b), first, that all
such phrases shall when possible be reduced to their equivalent nouns,
as Moral philosophy to Ethics or to Morals, Intellectual; or Mental
philosophy to Intellect; or Mind, Natural philosophy to Physics,
Sanitary science; or Hygiene, Scientific men to Scientists; or Social
science to Sociology; and, secondly, that in all cases where such
reduction is impossible the words shall be inverted and the noun taken
as the heading, as Chemistry, Agricultural; Chemistry, Organic;
Page 102
Anatomy, Comparative; History, Ancient; History, Ecclesiastical;
History, Modern; History, Natural; History, Sacred. [40] {52}
The objection to (1) is that it may be pushed to an absurd extent in the
case (b). A man might plausibly assert that Ancient Egypt is a distinct
subject from Modern Egypt, having a recognized name of its own, as
much so as Ancient history, and might therefore demand that the one
should be put under A (Ancient) and the other under M (Modern) [41] and
similar claims might be made in the case of all subject-names to which an
adjective is ever prefixed, which would result in filling the catalogue with
a host of unexpected and therefore useless headings. Nevertheless the rule
seems to me the best if due discrimination be used in choosing subject-
names.
[40] This rule is proposed by Mr. Schwartz and carried out, with
some exceptions, in his catalogue of the New York Apprentices’
Library.
[41] Which would be much like putting Williams’s “Shakespeare’s
Youth” under Youthful Shakespeare. Individuals should not be
divided.
The objection to (2) is that there would often be disagreement as to
what is “the most important word of the phrase,” so that the rule would be
no guide to the reader. But in connection with (1) and as a guard against
its excesses (2) has its value. The combined rule might read:
107. Enter a compound subject-name by its first word, inverting
the phrase only when some other word is decidedly more
significant or is often used alone with the same meaning as the
whole name.
Ex. Special providences and Providence, Proper names and Names.
It must be confessed that this rule is somewhat vague and that it would
be often of doubtful application, and that on the other hand (3) is clear and
History, Modern; History, Natural; History, Sacred. [40] {52}
The objection to (1) is that it may be pushed to an absurd extent in the
case (b). A man might plausibly assert that Ancient Egypt is a distinct
subject from Modern Egypt, having a recognized name of its own, as
much so as Ancient history, and might therefore demand that the one
should be put under A (Ancient) and the other under M (Modern) [41] and
similar claims might be made in the case of all subject-names to which an
adjective is ever prefixed, which would result in filling the catalogue with
a host of unexpected and therefore useless headings. Nevertheless the rule
seems to me the best if due discrimination be used in choosing subject-
names.
[40] This rule is proposed by Mr. Schwartz and carried out, with
some exceptions, in his catalogue of the New York Apprentices’
Library.
[41] Which would be much like putting Williams’s “Shakespeare’s
Youth” under Youthful Shakespeare. Individuals should not be
divided.
The objection to (2) is that there would often be disagreement as to
what is “the most important word of the phrase,” so that the rule would be
no guide to the reader. But in connection with (1) and as a guard against
its excesses (2) has its value. The combined rule might read:
107. Enter a compound subject-name by its first word, inverting
the phrase only when some other word is decidedly more
significant or is often used alone with the same meaning as the
whole name.
Ex. Special providences and Providence, Proper names and Names.
It must be confessed that this rule is somewhat vague and that it would
be often of doubtful application, and that on the other hand (3) is clear and
Page 103
easy to follow. But there are objections to (3). It would put a great many
subjects under words where nobody unacquainted with the rule would
expect to find them.
Works on the would hardly
be looked
for under
Alimentary canal Canal.
Dangerous classes Classes.
Digestive organs Organs.
Dispensing power Power.
Domestic economy Economy.
Ecclesiastical polity Polity.
Final causes Causes.
Gastric juice Juice.
Laboring classes Classes.
Military art Art.
Parliamentary practice Practice.
Political economy Economy.
Solar system System.
Suspended animation Animation.
Zodiacal light Light.
Another objection is that in most cases the noun expresses a class, the
adjective limits the noun, and makes the name that of a subclass (as
International law, Remittent disease, Secret societies, Sumptuary laws,
Typhoid fever, Venemous insects, Whig party, Woolen manufactures), and
to adopt the noun (the class) as the heading is to violate the fundamental
principle of the dictionary catalogue. The rule is urged, however, not on
the ground of propriety or congruity with the rest of the system but simply
as convenient, as a purely arbitrary rule which once understood will be a
certain guide for the reader. “If he is told that he shall always find a
subject arranged under its substantive form and never under an adjective
subjects under words where nobody unacquainted with the rule would
expect to find them.
Works on the would hardly
be looked
for under
Alimentary canal Canal.
Dangerous classes Classes.
Digestive organs Organs.
Dispensing power Power.
Domestic economy Economy.
Ecclesiastical polity Polity.
Final causes Causes.
Gastric juice Juice.
Laboring classes Classes.
Military art Art.
Parliamentary practice Practice.
Political economy Economy.
Solar system System.
Suspended animation Animation.
Zodiacal light Light.
Another objection is that in most cases the noun expresses a class, the
adjective limits the noun, and makes the name that of a subclass (as
International law, Remittent disease, Secret societies, Sumptuary laws,
Typhoid fever, Venemous insects, Whig party, Woolen manufactures), and
to adopt the noun (the class) as the heading is to violate the fundamental
principle of the dictionary catalogue. The rule is urged, however, not on
the ground of propriety or congruity with the rest of the system but simply
as convenient, as a purely arbitrary rule which once understood will be a
certain guide for the reader. “If he is told that he shall always find a
subject arranged under its substantive form and never under an adjective
Page 104
he can hardly fail to find it. If, on the other hand, he is told that
Comparative anatomy is under C and Morbid anatomy under A, that
Physical geography is under P and Mathematical geography under G, he
will only be bewildered, and accuse the cataloguer of making distinctions
that it requires too much study to appreciate. Theoretically the distinctions
may be justified, but practically the simpler way of using the noun only is
more {53} easily grasped by the common mind. And the system of
classifying names under the surname is precisely analogous; [42] thus
Smith, John,
Smith, Joseph,
Smith, William,
seems to me to be arranged on the same principle as
History, Ancient,
History, Ecclesiastical,
History, Modern,
History, Sacred.” [43]
This is plausible. If the public could ever get as accustomed to the
inversion of subject-names as they are to the inversion of personal names
the rule would undoubtedly be very convenient; but it might be difficult to
teach the rule. The catalogue treatment of personal names is familiar to
every one, because it is used in all catalogues, dictionaries, directories,
and indexes. But there are less than three hundred subject-names
consisting of adjective and noun in a catalogue which has probably over
50,000 names of persons. The use of the rule would be so infrequent that
it would not remain in the memory. And it should be observed that the
confusion caused by the different treatment of Morbid anatomy and
Comparative anatomy would only occur to a man who was examining the
system of the catalogue, and not to the ordinary user. A man looks in the
catalogue for treatises on Comparative anatomy; he finds it, where he
first looks, under C. He does not know anything about the disposition of
works on Morbid anatomy, and is not confused by it. Another man looks
for works on Morbid anatomy and under M he is referred to Anatomy,
Morbid. [44] He finds there what he wants and does not stop to notice that
Comparative anatomy is not there, but under C, consequently he is not
Comparative anatomy is under C and Morbid anatomy under A, that
Physical geography is under P and Mathematical geography under G, he
will only be bewildered, and accuse the cataloguer of making distinctions
that it requires too much study to appreciate. Theoretically the distinctions
may be justified, but practically the simpler way of using the noun only is
more {53} easily grasped by the common mind. And the system of
classifying names under the surname is precisely analogous; [42] thus
Smith, John,
Smith, Joseph,
Smith, William,
seems to me to be arranged on the same principle as
History, Ancient,
History, Ecclesiastical,
History, Modern,
History, Sacred.” [43]
This is plausible. If the public could ever get as accustomed to the
inversion of subject-names as they are to the inversion of personal names
the rule would undoubtedly be very convenient; but it might be difficult to
teach the rule. The catalogue treatment of personal names is familiar to
every one, because it is used in all catalogues, dictionaries, directories,
and indexes. But there are less than three hundred subject-names
consisting of adjective and noun in a catalogue which has probably over
50,000 names of persons. The use of the rule would be so infrequent that
it would not remain in the memory. And it should be observed that the
confusion caused by the different treatment of Morbid anatomy and
Comparative anatomy would only occur to a man who was examining the
system of the catalogue, and not to the ordinary user. A man looks in the
catalogue for treatises on Comparative anatomy; he finds it, where he
first looks, under C. He does not know anything about the disposition of
works on Morbid anatomy, and is not confused by it. Another man looks
for works on Morbid anatomy and under M he is referred to Anatomy,
Morbid. [44] He finds there what he wants and does not stop to notice that
Comparative anatomy is not there, but under C, consequently he is not
Page 105
puzzled by that. And even those who are taking a general survey of all that
the library possesses on anatomy would probably be too intent upon their
object to pause and criticise the arrangement, provided the reference from
Anatomy to Comparative Anatomy were perfectly clear, so that they ran
no risk of overlooking it and had no difficulty in finding the subject
referred to.
The specific-entry rule is one which the reader of a dictionary
catalogue must learn if he is to use it with any facility; it is much better
that he should not be burdened with learning an exception to this, which
the noun rule certainly is.
It ought also to be noticed that this plan does not escape all the
difficulties of the others. In reducing, for instance, Intellectual philosophy
or Moral philosophy, will you say Mind or Intellect, Morals or Ethics?
And the reader will not always know what the equivalent noun is,—that
Physics = Natural Philosophy, for example, and Hygiene = Sanitary
science. Nor does it help us at all to decide whether to prefer Botanical
morphology or Morphological botany. These difficulties, which beset any
rule, are only mentioned here lest too much should be expected from a
plan which at first sight seems to solve all problems.
The practice of reducing a name to the substantive form is often a
good one; but should not be insisted upon as an invariable rule, as it might
lead to the adoption of some very out-of-the-way names. As a mere matter
of form Nebulæ is to be preferred for a heading to Nebular hypothesis,
Pantheism to Pantheistic theory, Lyceums to Lyceum system, etc. {54}
In (b), (c), and (d) the same subject can often be named in different
ways; as,
(b) Capital punishment. Floral fertilization.
(c) Death penalty. Flower fertilization.
(d) Penalty of death. Fertilization of flowers.
Is there any principle upon which the choice between these three can
be made, so that the cataloguer shall always enter books on the same
subject under the same heading? I see none. When there is any decided
usage (i. e., custom of the public to designate the subjects by one of the
the library possesses on anatomy would probably be too intent upon their
object to pause and criticise the arrangement, provided the reference from
Anatomy to Comparative Anatomy were perfectly clear, so that they ran
no risk of overlooking it and had no difficulty in finding the subject
referred to.
The specific-entry rule is one which the reader of a dictionary
catalogue must learn if he is to use it with any facility; it is much better
that he should not be burdened with learning an exception to this, which
the noun rule certainly is.
It ought also to be noticed that this plan does not escape all the
difficulties of the others. In reducing, for instance, Intellectual philosophy
or Moral philosophy, will you say Mind or Intellect, Morals or Ethics?
And the reader will not always know what the equivalent noun is,—that
Physics = Natural Philosophy, for example, and Hygiene = Sanitary
science. Nor does it help us at all to decide whether to prefer Botanical
morphology or Morphological botany. These difficulties, which beset any
rule, are only mentioned here lest too much should be expected from a
plan which at first sight seems to solve all problems.
The practice of reducing a name to the substantive form is often a
good one; but should not be insisted upon as an invariable rule, as it might
lead to the adoption of some very out-of-the-way names. As a mere matter
of form Nebulæ is to be preferred for a heading to Nebular hypothesis,
Pantheism to Pantheistic theory, Lyceums to Lyceum system, etc. {54}
In (b), (c), and (d) the same subject can often be named in different
ways; as,
(b) Capital punishment. Floral fertilization.
(c) Death penalty. Flower fertilization.
(d) Penalty of death. Fertilization of flowers.
Is there any principle upon which the choice between these three can
be made, so that the cataloguer shall always enter books on the same
subject under the same heading? I see none. When there is any decided
usage (i. e., custom of the public to designate the subjects by one of the
Page 106
names rather than by the others) let it be followed; that is to say, if, in the
examples given above, the more customary phrases are Capital
punishment, Fertilization of flowers, then we must use those names,
preferring in the first case the name which begins with an adjective to its
equivalent beginning with a noun, and in the other the name beginning
with a noun to its equivalent beginning with an adjective. As is often the
case in language, usage will be found not to follow any uniform course.
If usage manifests no preference for either name, we can not employ
the two indifferently; we must choose one; and some slight guide to
choice in certain cases may perhaps be found. On examination of the
phrases above, it appears that they are not all of the same composition. In
Comparative anatomy, Capital punishment, the noun is the name of a
general subject, one of whose subdivisions is indicated by the adjective.
And Capital, Comparative have only this limiting power; they do not
imply any general subject. But Ancient history, Mediæval history, etc.,
may be viewed not only in this way (History the class, Ancient history and
Mediæval history the subdivisions) but also as equivalent to Antiquity:
History, Middle Ages: History (as we say Europe: History), in which
case the adjectives (Ancient, Mediæval) imply a subject and the noun
(History) indicates the aspect in which the subject is viewed. Here, then,
we choose Ancient and Mediæval as the heading, on the principle of §
68. So in (b) and (c) each of the nouns in turn may be considered as
expressing the more general idea and the other as limiting it; e. g., we can
have various headings for Death considered in different lights, among
others as a penalty; and we can have headings of various sorts of
penalties, among others death. It is evident that this collection of penalties
taken together makes up a class, and therefore this belongs to a style of
entry which the dictionary catalogue is expected to avoid; but the series of
headings beginning with the word Death would not make a class, being
merely different aspects of the same thing, not different subordinate parts
of the same subject.
When an adjective implies the name of a place, as in French
literature, German philosophy, Greek art, it is most convenient on the
whole to make the subject a division under the country. In this way all that
examples given above, the more customary phrases are Capital
punishment, Fertilization of flowers, then we must use those names,
preferring in the first case the name which begins with an adjective to its
equivalent beginning with a noun, and in the other the name beginning
with a noun to its equivalent beginning with an adjective. As is often the
case in language, usage will be found not to follow any uniform course.
If usage manifests no preference for either name, we can not employ
the two indifferently; we must choose one; and some slight guide to
choice in certain cases may perhaps be found. On examination of the
phrases above, it appears that they are not all of the same composition. In
Comparative anatomy, Capital punishment, the noun is the name of a
general subject, one of whose subdivisions is indicated by the adjective.
And Capital, Comparative have only this limiting power; they do not
imply any general subject. But Ancient history, Mediæval history, etc.,
may be viewed not only in this way (History the class, Ancient history and
Mediæval history the subdivisions) but also as equivalent to Antiquity:
History, Middle Ages: History (as we say Europe: History), in which
case the adjectives (Ancient, Mediæval) imply a subject and the noun
(History) indicates the aspect in which the subject is viewed. Here, then,
we choose Ancient and Mediæval as the heading, on the principle of §
68. So in (b) and (c) each of the nouns in turn may be considered as
expressing the more general idea and the other as limiting it; e. g., we can
have various headings for Death considered in different lights, among
others as a penalty; and we can have headings of various sorts of
penalties, among others death. It is evident that this collection of penalties
taken together makes up a class, and therefore this belongs to a style of
entry which the dictionary catalogue is expected to avoid; but the series of
headings beginning with the word Death would not make a class, being
merely different aspects of the same thing, not different subordinate parts
of the same subject.
When an adjective implies the name of a place, as in French
literature, German philosophy, Greek art, it is most convenient on the
whole to make the subject a division under the country. In this way all that
Page 107
relates to a country is brought together and arranged in one alphabetical
series of subjects under its name (see § 258). It is not of the slightest
importance that this introduces the appearance of an alphabetico-classed
catalogue, so long as the main object of a dictionary, ready reference, is
attained. Of course Hebrew language, Latin language, Latin literature,
and Punic language can not be so treated; it is the custom and is probably
best not to put English language and English literature under England,
as they have extended far beyond the place of their origin; books on the
language spoken in the United States go with those on the English
language except the few on Americanisms, which are separated, like
accounts of any other dialect. Our literature can not be treated
satisfactorily. It is never called United States literature, and no one would
expect to find it under United States. On the other hand the name
American properly should include Canadian literature and all the Spanish
literature of South America. It is, however, the best name we have.
[42] But if analogies are to have any weight, why should we follow that of names of persons,
which are inverted, more than that of names of places, which are not? We do not say
Mountains, White; Regions, Antarctic; Sea, Red; why should we say Anatomy,
Comparative; Arts, fine; System, Brunonian?—C.
[43] Schwartz, slightly altered.
[44] This is on the supposition that Morbid Anatomy has been considered by the cataloguer
not to be a distinct subject, entitled to a name of its own.
(k.) Double entry.
108. It is plain that almost every book will appear several times in
the catalogue:
Under author, if he is known.
Under first word of title, if the book is anonymous or the title
is memorable. {55}
Under each distinct subject.
series of subjects under its name (see § 258). It is not of the slightest
importance that this introduces the appearance of an alphabetico-classed
catalogue, so long as the main object of a dictionary, ready reference, is
attained. Of course Hebrew language, Latin language, Latin literature,
and Punic language can not be so treated; it is the custom and is probably
best not to put English language and English literature under England,
as they have extended far beyond the place of their origin; books on the
language spoken in the United States go with those on the English
language except the few on Americanisms, which are separated, like
accounts of any other dialect. Our literature can not be treated
satisfactorily. It is never called United States literature, and no one would
expect to find it under United States. On the other hand the name
American properly should include Canadian literature and all the Spanish
literature of South America. It is, however, the best name we have.
[42] But if analogies are to have any weight, why should we follow that of names of persons,
which are inverted, more than that of names of places, which are not? We do not say
Mountains, White; Regions, Antarctic; Sea, Red; why should we say Anatomy,
Comparative; Arts, fine; System, Brunonian?—C.
[43] Schwartz, slightly altered.
[44] This is on the supposition that Morbid Anatomy has been considered by the cataloguer
not to be a distinct subject, entitled to a name of its own.
(k.) Double entry.
108. It is plain that almost every book will appear several times in
the catalogue:
Under author, if he is known.
Under first word of title, if the book is anonymous or the title
is memorable. {55}
Under each distinct subject.
Page 108
Under form-heading in many cases.
Under many other headings by way of cross-reference.
And this is necessary if the various objects enumerated on p. 8 are to
be attained quickly. But inasmuch as the extent and therefore the cost of
the catalogue increases in direct proportion with the multiplication of
entries, it becomes worth while to inquire whether some of these can not
be dispensed with by devices which will suit the inquirer as well or nearly
as well. Such economies are mentioned in §§ 93–97, 113, 114.
109. Enter a polytopical book under each distinct subject.
Ex. “An art journey in Italy and Greece;” “The history of France and
England compared;” “Handbook of drawing and engraving.”
But some of the subjects may be omitted if their treatment is so slight
that it is not worth while to take any notice of them, which is occasionally
the case even when they are mentioned on the title-page. Sometimes an
analytical can take the place of a full entry for the less important topics.
The points to be considered are; (1) Would this book be of any use to one
who is looking up this subject? (2) Is the entry or reference necessary as a
subject-word entry or reference (that is, to one who is looking for this
book)?
Some books are polytopical which do not appear to be so at first sight.
A collection of portraits of Germans, for example, has the subject
Germans, and so far as it has any artistic value might be quoted as one of
the illustrative works under the subject Portrait painting or Portrait
engraving. [45] If the biographical interest were all, the general collections
would be put under Portraits and the national collections (as “American
portrait gallery,” “Zwei Hundert Bildnisse deutscher Männer”) under
countries, with references from the general heading to the various
countries, as directed in § 97. If the artistic interest were alone considered,
the general titles would be put under Portraits, and collections by
painters or engravers of particular schools would be put under the names
Under many other headings by way of cross-reference.
And this is necessary if the various objects enumerated on p. 8 are to
be attained quickly. But inasmuch as the extent and therefore the cost of
the catalogue increases in direct proportion with the multiplication of
entries, it becomes worth while to inquire whether some of these can not
be dispensed with by devices which will suit the inquirer as well or nearly
as well. Such economies are mentioned in §§ 93–97, 113, 114.
109. Enter a polytopical book under each distinct subject.
Ex. “An art journey in Italy and Greece;” “The history of France and
England compared;” “Handbook of drawing and engraving.”
But some of the subjects may be omitted if their treatment is so slight
that it is not worth while to take any notice of them, which is occasionally
the case even when they are mentioned on the title-page. Sometimes an
analytical can take the place of a full entry for the less important topics.
The points to be considered are; (1) Would this book be of any use to one
who is looking up this subject? (2) Is the entry or reference necessary as a
subject-word entry or reference (that is, to one who is looking for this
book)?
Some books are polytopical which do not appear to be so at first sight.
A collection of portraits of Germans, for example, has the subject
Germans, and so far as it has any artistic value might be quoted as one of
the illustrative works under the subject Portrait painting or Portrait
engraving. [45] If the biographical interest were all, the general collections
would be put under Portraits and the national collections (as “American
portrait gallery,” “Zwei Hundert Bildnisse deutscher Männer”) under
countries, with references from the general heading to the various
countries, as directed in § 97. If the artistic interest were alone considered,
the general titles would be put under Portraits, and collections by
painters or engravers of particular schools would be put under the names
Page 109
of the schools; which would amount to nearly the same arrangement as
the previous.
So in regard to Hymns; there are three sources of interest, the
devotional, the literary (which would lead to national subdivision), and
the denominational; a similar treatment would place general collections
under Hymns, collections in any language under the national heading,
with either double entry under the name of the denomination or a
reference from that to the national heading, specifying which of the
collections there enumerated belong to the denomination. But the
devotional interest so decidedly preponderates that it has been customary
to collect everything under the form-heading Hymns.
In Full, almanacs will have form-entry under Almanacs and subject-
entry under the district about which they give information.
Sometimes if an ordinary reference be made from one subject to
another the title referred to can not easily be found. A reference from
Architecture to Spain. Architecture, is convenient, but a reference to the
same heading from Gothic architecture is not, because it obliges the
inquirer to look through the whole list of Spanish architecture to find
perhaps one title on the Gothic. In like manner there would be few entries
of works on vases under most countries, so that no division Vases would
be made, and the inquirer must search for his book among a number of
titles on Art. And if the reference were made the other way—from the
country to Vases—the inquirer would be in the same plight. There is no
need, however, of double entry. If merely the name of the particular author
or authors referred to under any subject be inserted in the reference, the
whole difficulty vanishes.
Ex. Gothic architecture. [Various titles.] See also Spain; Architecture
(S TREET ).
It is to be noted that herein Short has a great advantage; it does not
lose so much {56} by double entry and can afford to make it in many cases
where Medium must for economy put the reader to some trouble. The
notes, too, in such catalogues as the Quincy or the Boston Public history-
list afford a convenient way of briefly inserting considerable double entry
where it is thought expedient without any apparent inconsistency.
the previous.
So in regard to Hymns; there are three sources of interest, the
devotional, the literary (which would lead to national subdivision), and
the denominational; a similar treatment would place general collections
under Hymns, collections in any language under the national heading,
with either double entry under the name of the denomination or a
reference from that to the national heading, specifying which of the
collections there enumerated belong to the denomination. But the
devotional interest so decidedly preponderates that it has been customary
to collect everything under the form-heading Hymns.
In Full, almanacs will have form-entry under Almanacs and subject-
entry under the district about which they give information.
Sometimes if an ordinary reference be made from one subject to
another the title referred to can not easily be found. A reference from
Architecture to Spain. Architecture, is convenient, but a reference to the
same heading from Gothic architecture is not, because it obliges the
inquirer to look through the whole list of Spanish architecture to find
perhaps one title on the Gothic. In like manner there would be few entries
of works on vases under most countries, so that no division Vases would
be made, and the inquirer must search for his book among a number of
titles on Art. And if the reference were made the other way—from the
country to Vases—the inquirer would be in the same plight. There is no
need, however, of double entry. If merely the name of the particular author
or authors referred to under any subject be inserted in the reference, the
whole difficulty vanishes.
Ex. Gothic architecture. [Various titles.] See also Spain; Architecture
(S TREET ).
It is to be noted that herein Short has a great advantage; it does not
lose so much {56} by double entry and can afford to make it in many cases
where Medium must for economy put the reader to some trouble. The
notes, too, in such catalogues as the Quincy or the Boston Public history-
list afford a convenient way of briefly inserting considerable double entry
where it is thought expedient without any apparent inconsistency.
Page 110
[45] It also belongs to the class Portraits, but that is in the Form-catalogue, not the Subject-
catalogue.
110. If a book purports to treat of several subjects, which together
make the whole or a great part of one more general, it may be put
either under each of the special subjects, or under the general
subject, and in the latter case it may or may not have analytical
references from the specific subjects, according as the treatises are
more or less distinct and more or less important.
E. g., “A treatise on anatomy, physiology, pathology, and
therapeutics,” which might be put under each of those four headings,
ought rather to be entered under Medicine, in which case, if the separate
parts are by different authors, analyticals might very well be made under
the four headings; and at any rate an analytical under the first would
occasionally be useful as equivalent to a subject-word reference.
111. When a considerable number of books might all be entered
under the same two or more headings, entry under one will be
sufficient, with a reference from the others.
On the other hand, if in printing it were noticed that under any subject
only one or two titles were covered by the cross-references to countries
(as from Sculpture to Greece, Italy, Denmark), it may be thought that
double entry under nation and subject would be preferable. A man is
provoked if he turns to another part of the catalogue to find there only one
title. However, it should be remembered that one or two titles repeated
under each of many subjects will amount to a considerable number in the
whole. The want of uniformity produced by this mixture of reference and
double entry is of less importance.
112. When there are many editions of a book, it is allowable to
merely refer under the subject to the author-entry. In a college
catalogue.
110. If a book purports to treat of several subjects, which together
make the whole or a great part of one more general, it may be put
either under each of the special subjects, or under the general
subject, and in the latter case it may or may not have analytical
references from the specific subjects, according as the treatises are
more or less distinct and more or less important.
E. g., “A treatise on anatomy, physiology, pathology, and
therapeutics,” which might be put under each of those four headings,
ought rather to be entered under Medicine, in which case, if the separate
parts are by different authors, analyticals might very well be made under
the four headings; and at any rate an analytical under the first would
occasionally be useful as equivalent to a subject-word reference.
111. When a considerable number of books might all be entered
under the same two or more headings, entry under one will be
sufficient, with a reference from the others.
On the other hand, if in printing it were noticed that under any subject
only one or two titles were covered by the cross-references to countries
(as from Sculpture to Greece, Italy, Denmark), it may be thought that
double entry under nation and subject would be preferable. A man is
provoked if he turns to another part of the catalogue to find there only one
title. However, it should be remembered that one or two titles repeated
under each of many subjects will amount to a considerable number in the
whole. The want of uniformity produced by this mixture of reference and
double entry is of less importance.
112. When there are many editions of a book, it is allowable to
merely refer under the subject to the author-entry. In a college
Page 111
library, for instance, the full entry of all the editions of the classics
under their appropriate subjects (as of the Georgics under
Agriculture, of Thucydides under Greek history, and Polybius
under Roman history) would be a waste of room; it is enough to
mention the best edition and refer for other editions and
translations to the author’s name.
(l.) Miscellaneous rules and examples.
113. Trials relating to a vessel should be put under its name; Short
would make no other entry. Exploring expeditious or voyages in a
named vessel should have at least a reference from the name.
Ex.
Jeune Eugénie. M ASON , W. P. Report. Boston, 1822. 8º.
Herald, H. M. S., Voyage of the. See Seemann, B.
114. A civil action is to be entered under that party to it who is
first named on the title-page, with a reference from the other.
In Short (and in Medium and Full, if the report is anonymous) this will
be the only entry,—unless the case illustrates some subject, in which case
entry or reference under that will be needed. Patent cases furnish the most
common examples of subject-entry {57} of trials, but everyone will
remember trials in which points of ecclesiastical law, of medical
jurisprudence, etc., have been so fully discussed as to compel reference
from those subjects.
115. Enter “Review of,” “Remarks on,” “Comments on” under the
author reviewed (as a combined subject and subject-word entry),
and, if worth while, under the subject of the book reviewed.
under their appropriate subjects (as of the Georgics under
Agriculture, of Thucydides under Greek history, and Polybius
under Roman history) would be a waste of room; it is enough to
mention the best edition and refer for other editions and
translations to the author’s name.
(l.) Miscellaneous rules and examples.
113. Trials relating to a vessel should be put under its name; Short
would make no other entry. Exploring expeditious or voyages in a
named vessel should have at least a reference from the name.
Ex.
Jeune Eugénie. M ASON , W. P. Report. Boston, 1822. 8º.
Herald, H. M. S., Voyage of the. See Seemann, B.
114. A civil action is to be entered under that party to it who is
first named on the title-page, with a reference from the other.
In Short (and in Medium and Full, if the report is anonymous) this will
be the only entry,—unless the case illustrates some subject, in which case
entry or reference under that will be needed. Patent cases furnish the most
common examples of subject-entry {57} of trials, but everyone will
remember trials in which points of ecclesiastical law, of medical
jurisprudence, etc., have been so fully discussed as to compel reference
from those subjects.
115. Enter “Review of,” “Remarks on,” “Comments on” under the
author reviewed (as a combined subject and subject-word entry),
and, if worth while, under the subject of the book reviewed.
Page 112
116. The distinction between Bibliography and Literary history
is, with reference to the books on those subjects, a distinction of
more or less; the two classes of books run into each other and it is
hard to draw the line between them.
117. Any theological library will probably contain books which
treat—
(1) of the four last things, death, judgment, heaven, and hell.
(2) of the nature of the life after death, a much more extensive
question than (1).
(3) whether there is any future life, without regard to its
nature.
(4) of the retribution after death for the good and for the evil
deeds done in this life.
(5) whether there is any retribution for evil in a future life.
(6) what is its nature.
(7) how long does it last.
Here are seven questions on nearly the same subject-matter, and there
are six names for them. (It will be found, by the way, that although there
are some books treating of each separately, many of the works overlap as
the subjects do, and that the titles are no guide whatever to the contents of
the books.) Two main courses are open to the cataloguer:
1st. To make one heading, as Future life, cover the whole, with
subdivisions. In this way the catalogue becomes classed to a certain
extent. No matter, if that is on the whole the more convenient
arrangement;
2d. More consistently, to make four headings: Eschatology (covering
the 1st question, four last things, with references to each of them), Future
life (its nature, including retribution both for good and evil, 2d and 4th
is, with reference to the books on those subjects, a distinction of
more or less; the two classes of books run into each other and it is
hard to draw the line between them.
117. Any theological library will probably contain books which
treat—
(1) of the four last things, death, judgment, heaven, and hell.
(2) of the nature of the life after death, a much more extensive
question than (1).
(3) whether there is any future life, without regard to its
nature.
(4) of the retribution after death for the good and for the evil
deeds done in this life.
(5) whether there is any retribution for evil in a future life.
(6) what is its nature.
(7) how long does it last.
Here are seven questions on nearly the same subject-matter, and there
are six names for them. (It will be found, by the way, that although there
are some books treating of each separately, many of the works overlap as
the subjects do, and that the titles are no guide whatever to the contents of
the books.) Two main courses are open to the cataloguer:
1st. To make one heading, as Future life, cover the whole, with
subdivisions. In this way the catalogue becomes classed to a certain
extent. No matter, if that is on the whole the more convenient
arrangement;
2d. More consistently, to make four headings: Eschatology (covering
the 1st question, four last things, with references to each of them), Future
life (its nature, including retribution both for good and evil, 2d and 4th
Page 113
questions), Future punishment (existence, nature, duration, and so
including universalism, with references to Purgatory and Hell, covering
the 5th, 6th, and 7th questions), Immortality (is there any? 3d question).
(b.) E NTRIES CONSIDERED AS PARTS OF A WHOLE.
118. The systematic catalogue undertakes to exhibit a scientific
arrangement of the books in a library in the belief that it will thus
best aid those who would pursue any extensive or thorough study.
The dictionary catalogue sets out with another object and a
different method, but having attained that object—facility of
reference—is at liberty to try to secure some of the advantages of
classification and system in its own way. Its subject-entries,
individual, general, limited, extensive, thrown together without
any logical arrangement, in most absurd proximity—Abscess
followed by Absenteeism and that by Absolution, Club-foot next
to Clubs, and Communion to Communism, while Christianity
and Theology, Bibliography and Literary history are separated
by half the length of the catalogue—are a mass of utterly
disconnected particles without any relation to one another, each
useful in itself but only by itself. But by a well-devised net-work
of cross-references the mob becomes an army, of which each part
is capable of assisting many other parts. The effective force of the
catalogue is immensely increased. {58}
119. Make references from general subjects to their various
subordinate subjects and also to coördinate and illustrative
subjects.
including universalism, with references to Purgatory and Hell, covering
the 5th, 6th, and 7th questions), Immortality (is there any? 3d question).
(b.) E NTRIES CONSIDERED AS PARTS OF A WHOLE.
118. The systematic catalogue undertakes to exhibit a scientific
arrangement of the books in a library in the belief that it will thus
best aid those who would pursue any extensive or thorough study.
The dictionary catalogue sets out with another object and a
different method, but having attained that object—facility of
reference—is at liberty to try to secure some of the advantages of
classification and system in its own way. Its subject-entries,
individual, general, limited, extensive, thrown together without
any logical arrangement, in most absurd proximity—Abscess
followed by Absenteeism and that by Absolution, Club-foot next
to Clubs, and Communion to Communism, while Christianity
and Theology, Bibliography and Literary history are separated
by half the length of the catalogue—are a mass of utterly
disconnected particles without any relation to one another, each
useful in itself but only by itself. But by a well-devised net-work
of cross-references the mob becomes an army, of which each part
is capable of assisting many other parts. The effective force of the
catalogue is immensely increased. {58}
119. Make references from general subjects to their various
subordinate subjects and also to coördinate and illustrative
subjects.
Page 114
Cross-references should be made by Full from Classes of persons
(Merchants, Lawyers, Artists, Quakers, etc.) to individuals belonging to
those classes; from Cities to persons connected with them by birth or
residence, or at least to those who have taken part in the municipal affairs
or rendered the city illustrious; from Countries to their colonies,
provinces, counties, cities, etc. (unless their number is so great or the
divisions are so well known that reference is useless); also, under the
division History to rulers and statesmen, under Literature to authors,
under Art to artists, and so on; from other Subjects to all their parts, and
to the names of persons distinguished for discoveries in them or
knowledge of them. Short and Medium will make such of these references
as seem most likely to be useful.
The construction of this system may be carried on simultaneously with
the ordinary cataloguing of the library, each book as it goes through the
cataloguer’s hands not merely receiving its author- and subject-entries, but
also suggesting the appropriate cross-reference; but when all the books are
catalogued the system will not be complete. References are needed not
merely to the specific from the general but to the general from the more
general and to that from the most general. There must be a pyramid of
references, and this can be made only by a final revision after the
completion of the cataloguing. The best method is to draw off in a single
column a list of all the subject-headings that have been made, to write
opposite them their including classes in a second column and the
including classes of these in a third column; then to write these classes as
headings to cards and under them the subjects that stood respectively
opposite to them in the list, to arrange the cards alphabetically, verify the
references, and supplement them by thinking of all likely subordinate
headings and ascertaining whether they are in the catalogue, and also by
considering what an inquirer would like to be told or reminded of if he
were looking up the subject under consideration. In this way a reasonably
complete list may be made.
It will, however, often happen that there is no entry under the
including subject. Take a simple instance. The catalogue, we will suppose,
contains twenty histories of towns belonging to seven counties in
(Merchants, Lawyers, Artists, Quakers, etc.) to individuals belonging to
those classes; from Cities to persons connected with them by birth or
residence, or at least to those who have taken part in the municipal affairs
or rendered the city illustrious; from Countries to their colonies,
provinces, counties, cities, etc. (unless their number is so great or the
divisions are so well known that reference is useless); also, under the
division History to rulers and statesmen, under Literature to authors,
under Art to artists, and so on; from other Subjects to all their parts, and
to the names of persons distinguished for discoveries in them or
knowledge of them. Short and Medium will make such of these references
as seem most likely to be useful.
The construction of this system may be carried on simultaneously with
the ordinary cataloguing of the library, each book as it goes through the
cataloguer’s hands not merely receiving its author- and subject-entries, but
also suggesting the appropriate cross-reference; but when all the books are
catalogued the system will not be complete. References are needed not
merely to the specific from the general but to the general from the more
general and to that from the most general. There must be a pyramid of
references, and this can be made only by a final revision after the
completion of the cataloguing. The best method is to draw off in a single
column a list of all the subject-headings that have been made, to write
opposite them their including classes in a second column and the
including classes of these in a third column; then to write these classes as
headings to cards and under them the subjects that stood respectively
opposite to them in the list, to arrange the cards alphabetically, verify the
references, and supplement them by thinking of all likely subordinate
headings and ascertaining whether they are in the catalogue, and also by
considering what an inquirer would like to be told or reminded of if he
were looking up the subject under consideration. In this way a reasonably
complete list may be made.
It will, however, often happen that there is no entry under the
including subject. Take a simple instance. The catalogue, we will suppose,
contains twenty histories of towns belonging to seven counties in
Page 115
Connecticut. In the revision described above references have been made
both from Connecticut to these counties and to the towns from the
counties, but only three of the counties have any titles under them. The
others would not make their appearance in the catalogue at all if there
were no cross-references. And as this will happen continually, it follows
that the system will very greatly increase the number of headings and
therefore the length of the catalogue. Such fullness may be allowable in
regard to the state which contains the library, which, of course, should be
treated with exceptional completeness. It may possibly be worth while for
all the States of the Union and for England, but to attempt to do the same
for all countries and all subjects is too much. A modification of the plan
must be introduced which will make it much less complete but still useful.
With many subjects the next heading in the ascending series must be
skipped, and the references massed under one still higher; in the supposed
case, for example, the references to all the towns will be made under
Connecticut and under those counties alone which have any other entry
under them.
120. Make references occasionally from specific to general
subjects.
Of course much information about limited topics is to be found in
more general works; the very best description of a single plant or of a
family of plants may perhaps be contained in a botanical encyclopædia.
This fact, however, must be impressed upon the inquirer in the preface of
the catalogue or in a printed card giving directions for its use; it is out of
the question to make all possible references of the ascending kind. From
Cathedrals, for example, one would naturally refer to Christian art and
to Ecclesiastical architecture, because works on those subjects will
contain more or less on cathedrals. But so will histories of architecture
and {59} histories of English, French, German, or Spanish architecture; so
will travels in England, France, Germany, Italy, Spain. And anyone who
desired to take an absolutely complete survey of the subject, or who was
willing to spend unlimited time in getting information on some detail,
both from Connecticut to these counties and to the towns from the
counties, but only three of the counties have any titles under them. The
others would not make their appearance in the catalogue at all if there
were no cross-references. And as this will happen continually, it follows
that the system will very greatly increase the number of headings and
therefore the length of the catalogue. Such fullness may be allowable in
regard to the state which contains the library, which, of course, should be
treated with exceptional completeness. It may possibly be worth while for
all the States of the Union and for England, but to attempt to do the same
for all countries and all subjects is too much. A modification of the plan
must be introduced which will make it much less complete but still useful.
With many subjects the next heading in the ascending series must be
skipped, and the references massed under one still higher; in the supposed
case, for example, the references to all the towns will be made under
Connecticut and under those counties alone which have any other entry
under them.
120. Make references occasionally from specific to general
subjects.
Of course much information about limited topics is to be found in
more general works; the very best description of a single plant or of a
family of plants may perhaps be contained in a botanical encyclopædia.
This fact, however, must be impressed upon the inquirer in the preface of
the catalogue or in a printed card giving directions for its use; it is out of
the question to make all possible references of the ascending kind. From
Cathedrals, for example, one would naturally refer to Christian art and
to Ecclesiastical architecture, because works on those subjects will
contain more or less on cathedrals. But so will histories of architecture
and {59} histories of English, French, German, or Spanish architecture; so
will travels in England, France, Germany, Italy, Spain. And anyone who
desired to take an absolutely complete survey of the subject, or who was
willing to spend unlimited time in getting information on some detail,
Page 116
would have to consult such books. Yet the cataloguer may very excusably
not think of referring to those subjects, or if he thinks of it may deem the
connection too remote to justify reference, and that he should be
overloading the catalogue with what would be generally useless.
There are many things that are seldom used, and then perhaps but for
an instant, and yet their existence is justified because when wanted they
are indispensable, or because they make useful what is otherwise useless:
a policy of insurance, life-preservers in a steamer, the index of a book,
large parts of the catalogue of a library, among others the cross-references.
Of such a nature, but much less useful, more easily dispensed with, is a
121. Synoptical table of subjects.
I mention its possibility here; I do not advise its construction, because
there is little chance that the result would compensate for the immense
labor.
not think of referring to those subjects, or if he thinks of it may deem the
connection too remote to justify reference, and that he should be
overloading the catalogue with what would be generally useless.
There are many things that are seldom used, and then perhaps but for
an instant, and yet their existence is justified because when wanted they
are indispensable, or because they make useful what is otherwise useless:
a policy of insurance, life-preservers in a steamer, the index of a book,
large parts of the catalogue of a library, among others the cross-references.
Of such a nature, but much less useful, more easily dispensed with, is a
121. Synoptical table of subjects.
I mention its possibility here; I do not advise its construction, because
there is little chance that the result would compensate for the immense
labor.
Page 117
IV. FORM-ENTRY.
National entry has already been discussed under S UBJECTS (§ 97).
122. Make a form-entry for collections of works in any form of
literature.
In the catalogues of libraries consisting chiefly of English books, if it
is thought most convenient to make form-entries under the headings
Poetry, Drama, Fiction, it may be done, because for those libraries
Poetry is synonymous with English poetry, and so on; but if a library has
any considerable number of books in foreign languages the national
classification should be strictly followed; that is to say, entries should be
made under English drama, English fiction, English poetry, Latin
poetry, etc.; only those collections of plays, novels, poems that include
specimens of several literatures being put under Drama, Fiction, Poetry.
Or the English plays, novels, poems, etc., may be entered under Drama,
Fiction, Poetry, etc., and the dramatic works, etc., of foreign literatures
under the names of the several literatures.
The rule above confines itself to collections. It would be convenient to
have full lists of the single works in the library in all the various kinds of
literature, and when space can be afforded they ought to be given; if there
is not room for them, references must be made under these headings to the
names of all the single authors; an unsatisfactory substitute, it is true, but
better than entire omission. Note, however, that there is much less need of
these lists in libraries which give their frequenters access to the shelves
than where such access is denied, so that borrowers must depend entirely
on the catalogue. In the case of English fiction a form-list is of such
constant use that nearly all libraries have separate fiction catalogues.
It has been objected that such lists of novels, plays, etc., do not suit the
genius of the dictionary catalogue. The objection is of no importance if
true; if such lists are useful they ought to be given. There is nothing in the
National entry has already been discussed under S UBJECTS (§ 97).
122. Make a form-entry for collections of works in any form of
literature.
In the catalogues of libraries consisting chiefly of English books, if it
is thought most convenient to make form-entries under the headings
Poetry, Drama, Fiction, it may be done, because for those libraries
Poetry is synonymous with English poetry, and so on; but if a library has
any considerable number of books in foreign languages the national
classification should be strictly followed; that is to say, entries should be
made under English drama, English fiction, English poetry, Latin
poetry, etc.; only those collections of plays, novels, poems that include
specimens of several literatures being put under Drama, Fiction, Poetry.
Or the English plays, novels, poems, etc., may be entered under Drama,
Fiction, Poetry, etc., and the dramatic works, etc., of foreign literatures
under the names of the several literatures.
The rule above confines itself to collections. It would be convenient to
have full lists of the single works in the library in all the various kinds of
literature, and when space can be afforded they ought to be given; if there
is not room for them, references must be made under these headings to the
names of all the single authors; an unsatisfactory substitute, it is true, but
better than entire omission. Note, however, that there is much less need of
these lists in libraries which give their frequenters access to the shelves
than where such access is denied, so that borrowers must depend entirely
on the catalogue. In the case of English fiction a form-list is of such
constant use that nearly all libraries have separate fiction catalogues.
It has been objected that such lists of novels, plays, etc., do not suit the
genius of the dictionary catalogue. The objection is of no importance if
true; if such lists are useful they ought to be given. There is nothing in the
Page 118
dictionary plan which makes them hard to use if inserted. But the
objection is not well founded. Under the names of certain subjects we give
lists of the authors who have treated of those subjects; under the names of
certain kinds of literature we give lists of the authors who have written
books in those forms; the cases are parallel. The divisions of fiction, it
must be understood, are not the authors who have written novels but the
different kinds of novels which they have written; they are either such
varieties as “Historical fiction,” “Sea stories,” “Religious novels,” or such
as “English fiction,” “French fiction.” The first divisions we do not make
for single works because it would be very difficult to do so and of little
use; but if there were collections in those classes we should certainly
introduce such headings. The second division (by language) is made as it
is in Poetry and Drama, both for single works and collections. {60}
There is no reason but want of room why only collections should be
entered under form-headings. The first entries of collections were merely
title-entries, and Mr. Crestadoro is the only person who has thought that
plays, etc., deserve two title-entries, one from the first word, the other
from what we might call the form-word. It is not uninteresting to watch
the steps by which the fully organized quadruple syndetic dictionary
catalogue is gradually developing from the simple subject-word index.
123. Make a form-entry for single works in the rarer literatures, as
Japanese, or Kalmuc, or Cherokee.
References can be substituted, if necessary.
124. Make a form-entry of encyclopædias, indexes, and works of
similar practical form, the general ones under the headings
Encyclopædias, etc., the special ones in groups under their
appropriate subjects.
Thus an agricultural dictionary will not be entered under Dictionaries,
but under Agriculture, in a little division Dictionaries. Now and then
some one asks for “a grammar,” “the dictionary.” It does not follow that it
objection is not well founded. Under the names of certain subjects we give
lists of the authors who have treated of those subjects; under the names of
certain kinds of literature we give lists of the authors who have written
books in those forms; the cases are parallel. The divisions of fiction, it
must be understood, are not the authors who have written novels but the
different kinds of novels which they have written; they are either such
varieties as “Historical fiction,” “Sea stories,” “Religious novels,” or such
as “English fiction,” “French fiction.” The first divisions we do not make
for single works because it would be very difficult to do so and of little
use; but if there were collections in those classes we should certainly
introduce such headings. The second division (by language) is made as it
is in Poetry and Drama, both for single works and collections. {60}
There is no reason but want of room why only collections should be
entered under form-headings. The first entries of collections were merely
title-entries, and Mr. Crestadoro is the only person who has thought that
plays, etc., deserve two title-entries, one from the first word, the other
from what we might call the form-word. It is not uninteresting to watch
the steps by which the fully organized quadruple syndetic dictionary
catalogue is gradually developing from the simple subject-word index.
123. Make a form-entry for single works in the rarer literatures, as
Japanese, or Kalmuc, or Cherokee.
References can be substituted, if necessary.
124. Make a form-entry of encyclopædias, indexes, and works of
similar practical form, the general ones under the headings
Encyclopædias, etc., the special ones in groups under their
appropriate subjects.
Thus an agricultural dictionary will not be entered under Dictionaries,
but under Agriculture, in a little division Dictionaries. Now and then
some one asks for “a grammar,” “the dictionary.” It does not follow that it
Page 119
would be well to jumble together, under a form-heading, Grammars or
Dictionaries, all grammars and lexicons in all languages. Those who
inquire so vaguely must be made to state their wishes more definitely. The
cataloguer does his part if he inserts a note under such headings
explanatory of the practice of the catalogue; as
Grammar. [First a list of works on general grammar, then]
Note. For grammars of any language, see the name of the language.
Dictionaries, all grammars and lexicons in all languages. Those who
inquire so vaguely must be made to state their wishes more definitely. The
cataloguer does his part if he inserts a note under such headings
explanatory of the practice of the catalogue; as
Grammar. [First a list of works on general grammar, then]
Note. For grammars of any language, see the name of the language.
Page 120
V. ANALYSIS.
125. Enter in full every work, forming a part of a set, which fills a
whole volume or several volumes.
Ex. Colombo, C. Select letters rel. to his four voyages to the New
World; tr. and ed. by R. H. Major. London, 1847. 8º. (Vol. 2 of the
Hakluyt Soc.)
126. Enter analytically, that is without imprint—
a. Every work, forming part of a set, which has a separate title-
page and paging, but forms only part of a volume of the set.
Ex. Fairholt, F. W. The civic garland; songs from London pageants,
with introd. and notes. (In Percy Society, v. 19. 1845.)
Full must and Medium may make a full entry in this case also. That is
to say, Full will draw the line at a separate title-page, Short and perhaps
Medium at filling a volume. Those catalogues which give no imprints at
all and those which give no imprints under subjects will of course give
none for analyticals.
b. Every work which, though not separately paged or not
having a title-page, has been published separately, whether
before or since its publication in the work under treatment.
Ex. Dickens, C. J. F. Little Dorrit. (In Harper’s mag., v. 12–15,
1855–57.)
c. Under author, (1) every separate article or treatise over
[46] pages in length; (2) treatises of noted authors; (3) noted
works even if by authors otherwise obscure. {61}
125. Enter in full every work, forming a part of a set, which fills a
whole volume or several volumes.
Ex. Colombo, C. Select letters rel. to his four voyages to the New
World; tr. and ed. by R. H. Major. London, 1847. 8º. (Vol. 2 of the
Hakluyt Soc.)
126. Enter analytically, that is without imprint—
a. Every work, forming part of a set, which has a separate title-
page and paging, but forms only part of a volume of the set.
Ex. Fairholt, F. W. The civic garland; songs from London pageants,
with introd. and notes. (In Percy Society, v. 19. 1845.)
Full must and Medium may make a full entry in this case also. That is
to say, Full will draw the line at a separate title-page, Short and perhaps
Medium at filling a volume. Those catalogues which give no imprints at
all and those which give no imprints under subjects will of course give
none for analyticals.
b. Every work which, though not separately paged or not
having a title-page, has been published separately, whether
before or since its publication in the work under treatment.
Ex. Dickens, C. J. F. Little Dorrit. (In Harper’s mag., v. 12–15,
1855–57.)
c. Under author, (1) every separate article or treatise over
[46] pages in length; (2) treatises of noted authors; (3) noted
works even if by authors otherwise obscure. {61}
Page 121
[46] This limit must be determined by each library for itself, with the understanding that
there may be occasional exceptions.
d. Under subject treatises important either (1) as containing the
origin of a science or a controversy or developing new views,
or (2) as treating the subject ably or giving important
information, or (3) for length.
Absolute uniformity is unattainable; probably no one will be able to
draw the line always at the same height. It is most desirable—and
fortunately easiest—to make analysis when the subject is well marked, as
of biographies or histories of towns, or monographs on any subject.
General treatises or vague essays are much harder to classify and much
less valuable for analysis. In analyzing collections of essays original
articles should be brought out in preference to reviews, which are
commonly not worth touching (except in a very full catalogue) either
under the author of the work reviewed or under its subject. Of course
exception may be made for famous reviews or for good reviews of famous
works. A work giving a careful literary estimate of an author may be an
exception to this remark; reviews of the “Works” of any author are most
likely to contain such an estimate. Many reviews, like Macaulay’s, are
important for their treatment of the subject and not worth noticing under
the book reviewed, which is merely a pretext for the article.
e. Make analytical title-references for stories in a collection
when they are likely to be inquired for separately.
127. Make analyticals for the second and subsequent authors of a
book written (but not conjointly) by several authors. (See § 4.)
Sometimes it is better to give full entry under two headings than to
make the second analytical. Ex. A “Short account of the application to
Parliament by the merchants of London, with the substance of the
evidence as summed up by Mr. Glover,” is to be entered under London.
there may be occasional exceptions.
d. Under subject treatises important either (1) as containing the
origin of a science or a controversy or developing new views,
or (2) as treating the subject ably or giving important
information, or (3) for length.
Absolute uniformity is unattainable; probably no one will be able to
draw the line always at the same height. It is most desirable—and
fortunately easiest—to make analysis when the subject is well marked, as
of biographies or histories of towns, or monographs on any subject.
General treatises or vague essays are much harder to classify and much
less valuable for analysis. In analyzing collections of essays original
articles should be brought out in preference to reviews, which are
commonly not worth touching (except in a very full catalogue) either
under the author of the work reviewed or under its subject. Of course
exception may be made for famous reviews or for good reviews of famous
works. A work giving a careful literary estimate of an author may be an
exception to this remark; reviews of the “Works” of any author are most
likely to contain such an estimate. Many reviews, like Macaulay’s, are
important for their treatment of the subject and not worth noticing under
the book reviewed, which is merely a pretext for the article.
e. Make analytical title-references for stories in a collection
when they are likely to be inquired for separately.
127. Make analyticals for the second and subsequent authors of a
book written (but not conjointly) by several authors. (See § 4.)
Sometimes it is better to give full entry under two headings than to
make the second analytical. Ex. A “Short account of the application to
Parliament by the merchants of London, with the substance of the
evidence as summed up by Mr. Glover,” is to be entered under London.
Page 122
Merchants, as first author, but as Glover’s part is two-thirds of the whole,
it should also be entered under him, the entry in each case being made full
enough not to mislead.
128. In analyticals it is well to give the date of the book referred to
and also, though less necessary, to state the pages which contain
the article. Many readers will not notice these details, but they will
do no one any harm and will assist the careful student.
it should also be entered under him, the entry in each case being made full
enough not to mislead.
128. In analyticals it is well to give the date of the book referred to
and also, though less necessary, to state the pages which contain
the article. Many readers will not notice these details, but they will
do no one any harm and will assist the careful student.
Page 123
STYLE.
CATALOGUE.
A. HEADINGS.
Type, 130–134. Italics, 131. Pseud., 135, 136. Ed., 137. Family name, 138. Christian name,
139, 140. To distinguish authors of the same name, 139–144. To distinguish subject headings,
145. Dashes, 146. References, 147.
B. TITLES.
Order, 148, 149. Abridgment, 150–160. Articles, 151, 152. Unnecessary words, 153, 153½.
Dates, 154. Initials, 155. Abbreviations, 156. Numbers, 157. Position, 158. “Same,” 159.
Words to be retained, 160–164. Analyticals, 164. Exact copying, 165. Language, 167, 168. {62}
Translations, 168, 169. Transposition of the article, 170. Anon., 171–173. Lord, Gen., ed.,
174. Transliteration, 175.
C. EDITIONS, 176, 177.
D. IMPRINTS.
The parts of an imprint and their order, 178. Transliteration, 179. Abbreviations, 180. Two or
more places, 181, 182. Publisher’s name, 183. Colophon, 184. Dates, 185–194. Number of
volumes, 195. Typographical form, 196. Maps, 197.
E. CONTENTS, 198–200, AND NOTES, 201.
F. REFERENCES, 202, 203.
FF. LANGUAGE, 204.
G. CAPITALS, 205, 206.
H. PUNCTUATION, ACCENTS, BRACKETS AND PARENTHESES, ITALICS, etc., 207–
212.
I. ARRANGEMENT.
Order of the English alphabet, 213. Headings, 214–239. Person, place, title, subject, form,
214. Forenames, 215, 216. M’, etc., 217. Family names nearly alike, 218. Family names the
same, 219. Forenames the same, 220. Forenames not generally used, 221, 222. Forenames
changed, 223. Titles, Sees, 224. Possessive case, 225. Greek and Latin names, 226.
Compound names, 227–232. Pseudonyms, 233. Incomplete names, 234. Signs, 235. Every
word regarded, 236. Abbreviations, 237. Titles, 240–252. Under an author, 240–248.
Editions, 242, 243. Numerals, 244. Translations, 245. Biographies, etc., 246. Criticisms, 247.
Analyticals, 248, 249. Under countries, 250–252. Synopsis, 252. Bible, 252. Contents, 253.
Subjects, 254–258. Homonyms, 254. Topical arrangement, 255. Chronological arrangement,
256. Cross-references, 257. Divisions, 258.
J. ETC.
CATALOGUE.
A. HEADINGS.
Type, 130–134. Italics, 131. Pseud., 135, 136. Ed., 137. Family name, 138. Christian name,
139, 140. To distinguish authors of the same name, 139–144. To distinguish subject headings,
145. Dashes, 146. References, 147.
B. TITLES.
Order, 148, 149. Abridgment, 150–160. Articles, 151, 152. Unnecessary words, 153, 153½.
Dates, 154. Initials, 155. Abbreviations, 156. Numbers, 157. Position, 158. “Same,” 159.
Words to be retained, 160–164. Analyticals, 164. Exact copying, 165. Language, 167, 168. {62}
Translations, 168, 169. Transposition of the article, 170. Anon., 171–173. Lord, Gen., ed.,
174. Transliteration, 175.
C. EDITIONS, 176, 177.
D. IMPRINTS.
The parts of an imprint and their order, 178. Transliteration, 179. Abbreviations, 180. Two or
more places, 181, 182. Publisher’s name, 183. Colophon, 184. Dates, 185–194. Number of
volumes, 195. Typographical form, 196. Maps, 197.
E. CONTENTS, 198–200, AND NOTES, 201.
F. REFERENCES, 202, 203.
FF. LANGUAGE, 204.
G. CAPITALS, 205, 206.
H. PUNCTUATION, ACCENTS, BRACKETS AND PARENTHESES, ITALICS, etc., 207–
212.
I. ARRANGEMENT.
Order of the English alphabet, 213. Headings, 214–239. Person, place, title, subject, form,
214. Forenames, 215, 216. M’, etc., 217. Family names nearly alike, 218. Family names the
same, 219. Forenames the same, 220. Forenames not generally used, 221, 222. Forenames
changed, 223. Titles, Sees, 224. Possessive case, 225. Greek and Latin names, 226.
Compound names, 227–232. Pseudonyms, 233. Incomplete names, 234. Signs, 235. Every
word regarded, 236. Abbreviations, 237. Titles, 240–252. Under an author, 240–248.
Editions, 242, 243. Numerals, 244. Translations, 245. Biographies, etc., 246. Criticisms, 247.
Analyticals, 248, 249. Under countries, 250–252. Synopsis, 252. Bible, 252. Contents, 253.
Subjects, 254–258. Homonyms, 254. Topical arrangement, 255. Chronological arrangement,
256. Cross-references, 257. Divisions, 258.
J. ETC.
Page 124
Supplement, 259. An economy, 260. Incunabula and other rare books, 261.
Page 125
VI. STYLE.
129. Uniformity for its own sake is of very little account; for the
sake of intelligibility, to prevent perplexity and misunderstanding,
it is worth something. And it is well to be uniform, merely to
avoid the question, “Why were you not consistent?” {63}
A. HEADINGS.
130. Print headings in some marked type.
Either heavy-faced (best, if it can be had not too black), small capitals
(handsome), or italics (least pleasing); never capitals (ugly and hard to
read). Christian names should be in ordinary type; to make them like the
heading is confusing, to have a special type for them would be
extravagant.
131. Italicize titles of honor and similar distinguishing words.
Earl, Mrs., Rev., of Paris, Alexandrinus, etc., also the name of a
country or state following the name of a town, as Wilton, N. H.,
Cambridge, Eng. These words are to be italicized only in the headings
and not in the title. They are italicized in the heading to distinguish the
name and bring it out clearly; there is no need of such distinction in titles.
Do not print Badeau, Gen. A. Life of Gen. Grant. If the heading is
italicized, the words Mrs., Earl, etc., must be distinguished from it in
some other way.
132. Print the headings of all the four kinds of entry (author, title,
subject, form) in the same kind of type.
In some indexes a distinction is made between persons and places or
between authors and subjects, but in a catalogue varieties of type must be
129. Uniformity for its own sake is of very little account; for the
sake of intelligibility, to prevent perplexity and misunderstanding,
it is worth something. And it is well to be uniform, merely to
avoid the question, “Why were you not consistent?” {63}
A. HEADINGS.
130. Print headings in some marked type.
Either heavy-faced (best, if it can be had not too black), small capitals
(handsome), or italics (least pleasing); never capitals (ugly and hard to
read). Christian names should be in ordinary type; to make them like the
heading is confusing, to have a special type for them would be
extravagant.
131. Italicize titles of honor and similar distinguishing words.
Earl, Mrs., Rev., of Paris, Alexandrinus, etc., also the name of a
country or state following the name of a town, as Wilton, N. H.,
Cambridge, Eng. These words are to be italicized only in the headings
and not in the title. They are italicized in the heading to distinguish the
name and bring it out clearly; there is no need of such distinction in titles.
Do not print Badeau, Gen. A. Life of Gen. Grant. If the heading is
italicized, the words Mrs., Earl, etc., must be distinguished from it in
some other way.
132. Print the headings of all the four kinds of entry (author, title,
subject, form) in the same kind of type.
In some indexes a distinction is made between persons and places or
between authors and subjects, but in a catalogue varieties of type must be
Page 126
reserved for more important distinctions. The Catalogue of the Library of
the Interior Department uses a heavy-faced title type for authors and a
light-faced antique for other entries, with very satisfactory effect; but such
typographical luxuries are not within general reach.
133. Print the whole of an author-, title-, or form-heading in the
special type; also an alternative family name and the family name
of the second of joint authors, if both authors are put into the
heading (§ 240), and the family names of British noblemen.
Ex. Cervantes Saavedra, Varnhagen von Ense, Cape of Good
Hope, Bicknell & Goodhue, American Antiquarian Society,
Comparative anatomy, Political economy; Chasteillon (Lat. Castalio
or Castellio), S.; Craik, G. L., and Knight, C.; Manchester, W. Drogo
Montagu, 7th Duke of.
134. Print the first word of a title-entry in the special type.
Ex. Rough diamond. But compound words, whether hyphened or not,
should be printed wholly in the heading type; as, Out of door
amusements. London, 1864. 8º. This is merely for looks; the kind of
type has nothing to do with the arrangement.
135. Add pseud. to the heading for all sorts of false names of
whatever origin.
So much is necessary to prevent mistake on the part of the public; but
it is a waste of time for the cataloguer to rack his brains to discover which
of the ingenious names invented by Pierquin de Gembloux (cryptonym,
geonym, phrenonym, etc.) is applicable to each case; for the only result is
that readers are puzzled. A list of these terms may be found in the Notice
of Quérard by Olphar Hamst [i. e., R. Thomas], London, 1867.
The unauthorized assumption of any name should be indicated by
such phrases as called, calling himself, dit, soi disant, se dicente or che si
dice, que se dice or se dicendiose, genannt, genoemd, etc.
the Interior Department uses a heavy-faced title type for authors and a
light-faced antique for other entries, with very satisfactory effect; but such
typographical luxuries are not within general reach.
133. Print the whole of an author-, title-, or form-heading in the
special type; also an alternative family name and the family name
of the second of joint authors, if both authors are put into the
heading (§ 240), and the family names of British noblemen.
Ex. Cervantes Saavedra, Varnhagen von Ense, Cape of Good
Hope, Bicknell & Goodhue, American Antiquarian Society,
Comparative anatomy, Political economy; Chasteillon (Lat. Castalio
or Castellio), S.; Craik, G. L., and Knight, C.; Manchester, W. Drogo
Montagu, 7th Duke of.
134. Print the first word of a title-entry in the special type.
Ex. Rough diamond. But compound words, whether hyphened or not,
should be printed wholly in the heading type; as, Out of door
amusements. London, 1864. 8º. This is merely for looks; the kind of
type has nothing to do with the arrangement.
135. Add pseud. to the heading for all sorts of false names of
whatever origin.
So much is necessary to prevent mistake on the part of the public; but
it is a waste of time for the cataloguer to rack his brains to discover which
of the ingenious names invented by Pierquin de Gembloux (cryptonym,
geonym, phrenonym, etc.) is applicable to each case; for the only result is
that readers are puzzled. A list of these terms may be found in the Notice
of Quérard by Olphar Hamst [i. e., R. Thomas], London, 1867.
The unauthorized assumption of any name should be indicated by
such phrases as called, calling himself, dit, soi disant, se dicente or che si
dice, que se dice or se dicendiose, genannt, genoemd, etc.
Page 127
136. When an author uses a single pseudonym add it to his name,
unless the entry is made under the pseudonym; when the
pseudonym is used only in one work, and different ones in other
works, include it in that title, followed by [pseud.].
Ex.
Clemens, S. C. (pseud. Mark Twain).
Godwin, Wm. The looking-glass; by T. Marcliffe [pseud.]. {64}
137. Add ed. to the heading when it is needed to show that a book
is merely put together, not written, by the author in hand.
The title usually shows this fact clearly enough without ed. Short
would omit to note the fact, and in Full, perhaps even in Medium, it is
better to state it in the title than in the heading. The distinction, after all, is
rarely of practical value.
138. Repeat the family name for each person.
Ex.
Smith, Caleb. Sermon.
Smith, Charles. Address.
Smith, Conrad. Narrative.
not
Smith, Caleb. Sermon.
—, Charles. Address.
—, Conrad. Narrative.
139. Distinguish authors whose family name is the same by giving
the forename in full or by initials.
In a card catalogue the names should always be given in full; in
printing, initials are often used to save room; but the saving is small, and
the advantages of full names are so considerable that any cataloguer who
is relieved from the necessity of the greatest possible compression ought
unless the entry is made under the pseudonym; when the
pseudonym is used only in one work, and different ones in other
works, include it in that title, followed by [pseud.].
Ex.
Clemens, S. C. (pseud. Mark Twain).
Godwin, Wm. The looking-glass; by T. Marcliffe [pseud.]. {64}
137. Add ed. to the heading when it is needed to show that a book
is merely put together, not written, by the author in hand.
The title usually shows this fact clearly enough without ed. Short
would omit to note the fact, and in Full, perhaps even in Medium, it is
better to state it in the title than in the heading. The distinction, after all, is
rarely of practical value.
138. Repeat the family name for each person.
Ex.
Smith, Caleb. Sermon.
Smith, Charles. Address.
Smith, Conrad. Narrative.
not
Smith, Caleb. Sermon.
—, Charles. Address.
—, Conrad. Narrative.
139. Distinguish authors whose family name is the same by giving
the forename in full or by initials.
In a card catalogue the names should always be given in full; in
printing, initials are often used to save room; but the saving is small, and
the advantages of full names are so considerable that any cataloguer who
is relieved from the necessity of the greatest possible compression ought
Page 128
to give them. For the more common forenames fullness can be combined
with economy by the use of the colon abbreviations (C: = Charles, etc.
See Appendix V.) Under subjects it is rare that two persons of even the
same family name come together and initials are sufficient; but here also
the colon initials should be used. An exception may well be made in the
case of men always known by a double name; as, Sydney Smith or Bayard
Taylor. Nobody talks of Smith or Taylor. Taylor, B., conveys no idea
whatever to most readers. Taylor, Bayard, they know. When one name
alone is usual, as Gladstone, Shakespeare, and when both forms are used,
as Dickens and Charles Dickens, initials will suffice. Of course there can
be no uniformity in such practice, but there will be utility, which is better.
Forenames used by the author in a diminutive or otherwise varied
form may be given in that form.
Ex. Carleton, Will; McLean, Sally; Reuter, Fritz.
140. Mark in some way those forenames which are usually
omitted by the author, and neglect them in the arrangement.
Ex. Collins, (Wm.) Wilkie; Gérard, (Cécile) Jules (Basile). This is of
practical use. The consulter running over the Collinses is puzzled by the
unusual name unless some generally accepted sign shows him that it is
unusual. He does not quickly recognize Charles Dickens in Dickens,
Charles John Huffam; or Leigh Hunt in Hunt, James Henry Leigh; or
Max Müller in Müller, Friedrich Max. Besides, the eye finds the well-
known name more quickly if the others are, as it were, pushed aside. The
most common methods of distinction are inclosure in parentheses and
spacing: Guizot, (François Pierre) Guillaume, or Guizot, F r a n ç o i s
P i e r r e Guillaume. The latter is objectionable as unusual, as taking too
much room, and as making emphatic the very part of the name which one
wants to hide. I prefer the style, Dickens, Charles (in full C: J: Huffam).
See § 221. But in those catalogues in which all Christian names are
inclosed in parentheses, some other sign must of course be used to mark
the less usual names.
with economy by the use of the colon abbreviations (C: = Charles, etc.
See Appendix V.) Under subjects it is rare that two persons of even the
same family name come together and initials are sufficient; but here also
the colon initials should be used. An exception may well be made in the
case of men always known by a double name; as, Sydney Smith or Bayard
Taylor. Nobody talks of Smith or Taylor. Taylor, B., conveys no idea
whatever to most readers. Taylor, Bayard, they know. When one name
alone is usual, as Gladstone, Shakespeare, and when both forms are used,
as Dickens and Charles Dickens, initials will suffice. Of course there can
be no uniformity in such practice, but there will be utility, which is better.
Forenames used by the author in a diminutive or otherwise varied
form may be given in that form.
Ex. Carleton, Will; McLean, Sally; Reuter, Fritz.
140. Mark in some way those forenames which are usually
omitted by the author, and neglect them in the arrangement.
Ex. Collins, (Wm.) Wilkie; Gérard, (Cécile) Jules (Basile). This is of
practical use. The consulter running over the Collinses is puzzled by the
unusual name unless some generally accepted sign shows him that it is
unusual. He does not quickly recognize Charles Dickens in Dickens,
Charles John Huffam; or Leigh Hunt in Hunt, James Henry Leigh; or
Max Müller in Müller, Friedrich Max. Besides, the eye finds the well-
known name more quickly if the others are, as it were, pushed aside. The
most common methods of distinction are inclosure in parentheses and
spacing: Guizot, (François Pierre) Guillaume, or Guizot, F r a n ç o i s
P i e r r e Guillaume. The latter is objectionable as unusual, as taking too
much room, and as making emphatic the very part of the name which one
wants to hide. I prefer the style, Dickens, Charles (in full C: J: Huffam).
See § 221. But in those catalogues in which all Christian names are
inclosed in parentheses, some other sign must of course be used to mark
the less usual names.
Page 129
141. Distinguish authors whose family and forenames are the
same by the dates of their birth and death, or, if these are not
known, by some other label.
Ex. Bp., C. E., Capt., Col., D.D., F.R.S., etc., always to be printed in
italics.
In a manuscript catalogue, in preparing which of course one never
knows how many new names may be added, such titles should be given to
every name. In {65} printing, if room is an object, they may be omitted
except when needed for the distinction of synonymous authors. Note,
however, that many persons are commonly known and spoken of by a title
rather than by their first name, and it is a convenience for the man who is
looking, for instance, for the life of Gen. Greene, whose Christian name
he does not know, to see at once, as he runs his eye over the list of
Greenes, which are generals, without having to read all the titles of books
written by or about the Greenes in order to identify him. For the same
reason Mrs. should always be given with the name of a married woman,
whether the forename which follows is her own or her husband’s; even
when the following form is adopted, “Hall, Mrs. Anna Maria (Fielding),
wife of S. C.,” which is always to be done when in her titles she uses her
husband’s initials. In this case a reference should be made from Hall, Mrs.
S. C., to Hall, Mrs. A. M., and so in similar cases. If forenames are
represented under subjects by their initials, it is well to give Miss or Mrs.
with the names of female authors. The reader who would like to read a
book by Miss Cobbe on a certain subject may not feel sure that Cobbe, F.
P., is Miss Cobbe.
As late as 1760 unmarried women were usually styled Mrs.; as, Mrs.
Lepel, Mrs. Woffington, Mrs. Blount, and among writers Mrs. Hannah
More. There is no objection to following this practice in cataloguing, as
the object of the cataloguer is not to furnish biographical information but
to identify the people catalogued.
same by the dates of their birth and death, or, if these are not
known, by some other label.
Ex. Bp., C. E., Capt., Col., D.D., F.R.S., etc., always to be printed in
italics.
In a manuscript catalogue, in preparing which of course one never
knows how many new names may be added, such titles should be given to
every name. In {65} printing, if room is an object, they may be omitted
except when needed for the distinction of synonymous authors. Note,
however, that many persons are commonly known and spoken of by a title
rather than by their first name, and it is a convenience for the man who is
looking, for instance, for the life of Gen. Greene, whose Christian name
he does not know, to see at once, as he runs his eye over the list of
Greenes, which are generals, without having to read all the titles of books
written by or about the Greenes in order to identify him. For the same
reason Mrs. should always be given with the name of a married woman,
whether the forename which follows is her own or her husband’s; even
when the following form is adopted, “Hall, Mrs. Anna Maria (Fielding),
wife of S. C.,” which is always to be done when in her titles she uses her
husband’s initials. In this case a reference should be made from Hall, Mrs.
S. C., to Hall, Mrs. A. M., and so in similar cases. If forenames are
represented under subjects by their initials, it is well to give Miss or Mrs.
with the names of female authors. The reader who would like to read a
book by Miss Cobbe on a certain subject may not feel sure that Cobbe, F.
P., is Miss Cobbe.
As late as 1760 unmarried women were usually styled Mrs.; as, Mrs.
Lepel, Mrs. Woffington, Mrs. Blount, and among writers Mrs. Hannah
More. There is no objection to following this practice in cataloguing, as
the object of the cataloguer is not to furnish biographical information but
to identify the people catalogued.
Page 130
142. Titles of Englishwomen are to be treated by the following
rules: [47]
In the matter of titles an Englishwoman in marrying has
everything to gain and nothing to lose. If she marries above
her own rank she takes her husband’s title in exchange for her
own, if below her own rank she keeps her own title.
Titles of married women.
a. The wife of a peer takes her husband’s style.
That is, she is Baroness, Viscountess, Marchioness, etc. In
cataloguing, say Brassey, Annie (Allnutt), Baroness; not Brassey, Annie
(Allnutt), Lady.
b. The wife of a knight or baronet is Lady. Whether this title
precedes or follows her forename depends upon whether she
had a title before her marriage.
That is, if Lady Mary Smith marries Sir John Brown (either knight or
baronet), she is Lady Mary Brown, also if Hon. Mary Smith marries Sir
John Brown (knight or baronet) she is Lady Mary Brown; but if Miss
Mary Smith marries Sir John Brown (knight or baronet), she becomes
Mary, Lady Brown.
c. A maid of honor retains her Hon. after marriage, unless, of
course, it is merged into a higher title.
Thus, if she marries a baronet she is the Honble Lady Brown, if a peer
the Lady So and So, in either case as though she had been a peer’s
daughter.
rules: [47]
In the matter of titles an Englishwoman in marrying has
everything to gain and nothing to lose. If she marries above
her own rank she takes her husband’s title in exchange for her
own, if below her own rank she keeps her own title.
Titles of married women.
a. The wife of a peer takes her husband’s style.
That is, she is Baroness, Viscountess, Marchioness, etc. In
cataloguing, say Brassey, Annie (Allnutt), Baroness; not Brassey, Annie
(Allnutt), Lady.
b. The wife of a knight or baronet is Lady. Whether this title
precedes or follows her forename depends upon whether she
had a title before her marriage.
That is, if Lady Mary Smith marries Sir John Brown (either knight or
baronet), she is Lady Mary Brown, also if Hon. Mary Smith marries Sir
John Brown (knight or baronet) she is Lady Mary Brown; but if Miss
Mary Smith marries Sir John Brown (knight or baronet), she becomes
Mary, Lady Brown.
c. A maid of honor retains her Hon. after marriage, unless, of
course, it is merged into a higher title.
Thus, if she marries a baronet she is the Honble Lady Brown, if a peer
the Lady So and So, in either case as though she had been a peer’s
daughter.
Page 131
d. The wife of an earl’s (or higher peer’s) younger son is never
the Honble Lady; if she used the Lady before marriage in her
own right she does not, of course, add anything by such
marriage, but the wife of a younger son of a lower peer than an
earl is Honble Mrs. (not Lady)—the younger children of all
peers using, of course, the family name, with or without their
forenames, according to their rank. {66}
e. If the lady to whom the title Hon. belongs in virtue of her
father’s rank marries a commoner, she retains her title,
becoming Hon. Lady, if she marries a knight or baronet; and
Hon. Mrs., if her husband has no title.
None of these courtesy titles are inherited by the children of those who
bear them, the third generation of even the highest peer being simply
commoners unless raised in rank by marriage or merit.
Titles of unmarried women.
f. The title Lady belongs to daughters of all noblemen not
lower than earl.
g. The title Hon. belongs to daughters of viscounts and barons;
also to an untitled woman who becomes maid of honor to the
Queen, and this title is retained after she leaves the service. If
a woman who has the title Lady becomes maid of honor she
does not acquire the title Hon.
[47] Prepared by Miss May Seymour and Mr. F. Wells Williams (Lib. jnl., 13: 321, 361).
143. Distinctive epithets to be in the same language as the name.
the Honble Lady; if she used the Lady before marriage in her
own right she does not, of course, add anything by such
marriage, but the wife of a younger son of a lower peer than an
earl is Honble Mrs. (not Lady)—the younger children of all
peers using, of course, the family name, with or without their
forenames, according to their rank. {66}
e. If the lady to whom the title Hon. belongs in virtue of her
father’s rank marries a commoner, she retains her title,
becoming Hon. Lady, if she marries a knight or baronet; and
Hon. Mrs., if her husband has no title.
None of these courtesy titles are inherited by the children of those who
bear them, the third generation of even the highest peer being simply
commoners unless raised in rank by marriage or merit.
Titles of unmarried women.
f. The title Lady belongs to daughters of all noblemen not
lower than earl.
g. The title Hon. belongs to daughters of viscounts and barons;
also to an untitled woman who becomes maid of honor to the
Queen, and this title is retained after she leaves the service. If
a woman who has the title Lady becomes maid of honor she
does not acquire the title Hon.
[47] Prepared by Miss May Seymour and Mr. F. Wells Williams (Lib. jnl., 13: 321, 361).
143. Distinctive epithets to be in the same language as the name.
Page 132
Ex. Kniaz, Fürst von, Freiherr zu, duc de Magenta, Bishop of Lincoln,
évêque de Meaux; but Emperor of Germany, King of France, not Kaiser
and roi, because names of sovereign princes are given in English. Treat in
the same way patronymics habitually joined with a person’s name; as,
Clemens Alexandrinus.
144. Prefixes (i. e., titles which in speaking come before the
name), as, Hon., Mrs., Rev., etc., should be placed before the
Christian name (as Smith, Capt. John), and suffixes as Jr., D.D.,
LL.D., after it (as Channing, James Ellery, D.D.).
Hereditary titles generally follow the Christian name, as Derby,
Thomas Stanley, 1st Earl of; but British courtesy titles (i. e., those given
to the younger sons of dukes and marquesses) precede, as Wellesley, Lord
Charles (2d son of the Duke of Wellington). In other languages than
English, French, and German the title usually precedes the forename; as,
Alfieri, Conte Vittorio. Occasionally a French nobleman uniformly places
his title before his forenames; as, Gasparin, Comte Agénor de.
Lord should be replaced by the exact title in the names of English
noblemen, e. g., Lord Macaulay should be entered as Macaulay, 1st
Baron. Lord in the title of Scotch judges follows the family name; as,
Kames, H. Home, afterwards Lord.
The title Baronet is given in the form Scott, Sir Walter, Bart.
Patronymic phrases, as of Dedham, follow all the names; but they
must immediately follow the family name when they are always used in
close connection with it, as Girault de St. Farjeau, Eusèbe; similarly
aîné, fils, jeune, as Dumas fils, Alexandre; Didot fils, Ambroise. Latin
appellatives should not in general be separated from their nouns by a
comma; as, Cæsar Heisterbacensis.
145. Distinguish two subject-headings which are spelled alike by
italicized phrases in parentheses.
Ex.
évêque de Meaux; but Emperor of Germany, King of France, not Kaiser
and roi, because names of sovereign princes are given in English. Treat in
the same way patronymics habitually joined with a person’s name; as,
Clemens Alexandrinus.
144. Prefixes (i. e., titles which in speaking come before the
name), as, Hon., Mrs., Rev., etc., should be placed before the
Christian name (as Smith, Capt. John), and suffixes as Jr., D.D.,
LL.D., after it (as Channing, James Ellery, D.D.).
Hereditary titles generally follow the Christian name, as Derby,
Thomas Stanley, 1st Earl of; but British courtesy titles (i. e., those given
to the younger sons of dukes and marquesses) precede, as Wellesley, Lord
Charles (2d son of the Duke of Wellington). In other languages than
English, French, and German the title usually precedes the forename; as,
Alfieri, Conte Vittorio. Occasionally a French nobleman uniformly places
his title before his forenames; as, Gasparin, Comte Agénor de.
Lord should be replaced by the exact title in the names of English
noblemen, e. g., Lord Macaulay should be entered as Macaulay, 1st
Baron. Lord in the title of Scotch judges follows the family name; as,
Kames, H. Home, afterwards Lord.
The title Baronet is given in the form Scott, Sir Walter, Bart.
Patronymic phrases, as of Dedham, follow all the names; but they
must immediately follow the family name when they are always used in
close connection with it, as Girault de St. Farjeau, Eusèbe; similarly
aîné, fils, jeune, as Dumas fils, Alexandre; Didot fils, Ambroise. Latin
appellatives should not in general be separated from their nouns by a
comma; as, Cæsar Heisterbacensis.
145. Distinguish two subject-headings which are spelled alike by
italicized phrases in parentheses.
Ex.
Page 133
Calculus (in mathematics).
Calculus (in medicine).
146. Medium avoids the repetition of the heading with all titles
after the first by using a dash. Short usually employs indention.
Indention takes as much room as the dash and is much less clear.
There should always be at least a hair-space between the end of the dash
and the next letter; indeed that is the rule of all good printing. Under a
subject the repetition of the {67} author’s name is indicated by a second
dash. [48] (The repetition of the title is shown by the word Same.)
Cobbett, Wm. Emigrant’s guide.
— A little plain English. London, 1795. 8º.
— Same. Phila., 1795. 8º.
— Porcupine’s works.
Atheism. Beecher, L. Lectures, etc.
— Bentley, R. Confutation of A.
— – Folly of A. and deism.
— – Matter and motion.
— – Fotherby, M. Atheomastix.
[48] After trying several experiments I have settled upon the following as producing the best
effect:
Put
before the second and following lines of a title 3 em quads.
before and after the em dash that denotes repetition an en quad.
before and after the double dash (an em dash followed by an en quad.
an en dash)
between the parts of the double dash a 5-em space.
before Same, in addition to the regular en quad a 5-em space.
before the first line of Notes and Contents (Do not indent the an em quad.
other lines of Notes and Contents at all.)
before the place of publication an em quad.
between the date and the size-mark an en quad and a 5-em
space.
Calculus (in medicine).
146. Medium avoids the repetition of the heading with all titles
after the first by using a dash. Short usually employs indention.
Indention takes as much room as the dash and is much less clear.
There should always be at least a hair-space between the end of the dash
and the next letter; indeed that is the rule of all good printing. Under a
subject the repetition of the {67} author’s name is indicated by a second
dash. [48] (The repetition of the title is shown by the word Same.)
Cobbett, Wm. Emigrant’s guide.
— A little plain English. London, 1795. 8º.
— Same. Phila., 1795. 8º.
— Porcupine’s works.
Atheism. Beecher, L. Lectures, etc.
— Bentley, R. Confutation of A.
— – Folly of A. and deism.
— – Matter and motion.
— – Fotherby, M. Atheomastix.
[48] After trying several experiments I have settled upon the following as producing the best
effect:
Put
before the second and following lines of a title 3 em quads.
before and after the em dash that denotes repetition an en quad.
before and after the double dash (an em dash followed by an en quad.
an en dash)
between the parts of the double dash a 5-em space.
before Same, in addition to the regular en quad a 5-em space.
before the first line of Notes and Contents (Do not indent the an em quad.
other lines of Notes and Contents at all.)
before the place of publication an em quad.
between the date and the size-mark an en quad and a 5-em
space.
Page 134
147. Print in the special type a heading occurring in other parts of
the catalogue, when a reference is intended.
After See or In, or when in a note some book contained in the
catalogue is referred to; as, “For a discussion of the authorship, see
Graesse’s Lehrbuch.”
the catalogue, when a reference is intended.
After See or In, or when in a note some book contained in the
catalogue is referred to; as, “For a discussion of the authorship, see
Graesse’s Lehrbuch.”
Page 135
B. TITLES.
(a.) O RDER.
148. Preserve the order of words of the title.
Short will depart from the order whenever it can not otherwise abridge
the title; Medium and Full will do the same, but they will bracket all
words introduced out of their original place as much as if they did not
occur in the title at all.
149. When the title-page begins with the indication of the series to
which the book belongs, followed by the title of the book,
transpose the series name to a parenthesis after the imprint,
including the number in the series, when the series is numbered.
Ex. American commonwealths. Virginia; a history of the people, by
John Esten Cooke, would be entered Cooke, J: E. Virginia; a history of
the people. Boston, 1883. D. (Amer, commonwealths.)
(b.) A BRIDGMENT.
150. The more careful and student-like the probable use of the
library the fuller the title should be,—fuller, that is, of
information, not of words. Many a title a yard long does not
convey as much meaning as two well-chosen words. No precise
rule can be given for abridgment. The title must not be so much
shortened that the book shall be confounded with any other book
of the same author or any other edition of the same book, or that it
shall fail to be recognized by those who know it or have been
(a.) O RDER.
148. Preserve the order of words of the title.
Short will depart from the order whenever it can not otherwise abridge
the title; Medium and Full will do the same, but they will bracket all
words introduced out of their original place as much as if they did not
occur in the title at all.
149. When the title-page begins with the indication of the series to
which the book belongs, followed by the title of the book,
transpose the series name to a parenthesis after the imprint,
including the number in the series, when the series is numbered.
Ex. American commonwealths. Virginia; a history of the people, by
John Esten Cooke, would be entered Cooke, J: E. Virginia; a history of
the people. Boston, 1883. D. (Amer, commonwealths.)
(b.) A BRIDGMENT.
150. The more careful and student-like the probable use of the
library the fuller the title should be,—fuller, that is, of
information, not of words. Many a title a yard long does not
convey as much meaning as two well-chosen words. No precise
rule can be given for abridgment. The title must not be so much
shortened that the book shall be confounded with any other book
of the same author or any other edition of the same book, or that it
shall fail to be recognized by those who know it or have been
Page 136
referred to it by title, or that it shall convey a false or insufficient
idea of the nature of the work and (under the subject) of its theme
and its {68} method of treating its theme. [49] On the other hand, it
must not retain anything which could reasonably be inferred from
the rest of the title or from its position under a given heading. [50]
[49] This clause must be very differently interpreted according to the character of the
catalogue. It expresses rather the object to be aimed at than the point which an ordinary
catalogue can expect to reach. To fully describe and characterize every book is impossible for
most cataloguers. Still by a little management much may be briefly done. The words drama,
play, novel, historical novel, poem, retained from or inserted in the title tell a great deal in a
little space.
[50] It must make these omissions not merely that the catalogue may be short but that
consulting it may be easy. Other things being equal, that title is best which can be taken in at a
glance. What has been said in defence of full titles may be true, that “it takes longer to abridge
a title than to copy it in full,” but it is also true that it takes longer for the printer to set the
unabridged title, and longer for the reader to ascertain its meaning, and a long-title catalogue,
besides being more expensive, is more bulky and therefore less convenient.
151. Omit the preliminary article when it can be done without
altering the sense or too much offending the ear.
It will not do even for Short to catalogue “On the true, the beautiful,
and the good” thus:
Cousin, V. True, beautiful, good;
but a list of Buckstone’s plays may as well be printed
— Breach of promise, comedy.
— Christening, farce.
— Dead shot, farce.
— Dream at sea.
— Kiss in the dark, farce.
— Lesson for ladies, com.,
though the meaning of “Christening” and “The christening” is slightly
different, and “Kiss in the dark” might be taken for an injunction, whereas
“A kiss in the dark” is evidently only a title. Still neither Short nor
Medium should hesitate to omit even in these cases. Besides the economy,
idea of the nature of the work and (under the subject) of its theme
and its {68} method of treating its theme. [49] On the other hand, it
must not retain anything which could reasonably be inferred from
the rest of the title or from its position under a given heading. [50]
[49] This clause must be very differently interpreted according to the character of the
catalogue. It expresses rather the object to be aimed at than the point which an ordinary
catalogue can expect to reach. To fully describe and characterize every book is impossible for
most cataloguers. Still by a little management much may be briefly done. The words drama,
play, novel, historical novel, poem, retained from or inserted in the title tell a great deal in a
little space.
[50] It must make these omissions not merely that the catalogue may be short but that
consulting it may be easy. Other things being equal, that title is best which can be taken in at a
glance. What has been said in defence of full titles may be true, that “it takes longer to abridge
a title than to copy it in full,” but it is also true that it takes longer for the printer to set the
unabridged title, and longer for the reader to ascertain its meaning, and a long-title catalogue,
besides being more expensive, is more bulky and therefore less convenient.
151. Omit the preliminary article when it can be done without
altering the sense or too much offending the ear.
It will not do even for Short to catalogue “On the true, the beautiful,
and the good” thus:
Cousin, V. True, beautiful, good;
but a list of Buckstone’s plays may as well be printed
— Breach of promise, comedy.
— Christening, farce.
— Dead shot, farce.
— Dream at sea.
— Kiss in the dark, farce.
— Lesson for ladies, com.,
though the meaning of “Christening” and “The christening” is slightly
different, and “Kiss in the dark” might be taken for an injunction, whereas
“A kiss in the dark” is evidently only a title. Still neither Short nor
Medium should hesitate to omit even in these cases. Besides the economy,
Page 137
the alphabetical order is brought out more clearly by this omission. That
can also be done awkwardly by transposing the article; as,
— Breach of promise, The; com.
— Christening, The; farce.
— Dead shot, The; farce.
— Dream at sea, The.
152. Short omits articles in the title.
Ex. “Observations upon an alteration of the charter of the Bank of
England” is abridged: “Alteration of charter of Bank of England,” which
is certainly not euphonious, but is as intelligible as if it were. Medium
usually indulges in the luxury of good English. Perhaps in time a
catalogue style will be adopted in which these elisions shall be not merely
allowed, but required. It may be possible to increase the number of
cataloguing signs. We have now 8º where we once had octavo, then 8vo.
Why not insist upon N. Y. for New York, L. for London, P. for Paris, etc.,
as a few adventurous libraries have done? Why not make free substitution
of commas for words, and leave out articles and prepositions in titles
wherever the sense will still remain gleanable?
153. Omit puffs [51] and many descriptive words which are implied
either by the rest of the title [52] or by the custom of books of the
class {69} under treatment, [53] and those descriptive phrases which,
though they add to the significance of the title, do not give enough
information to pay for their retention. [54]
[51] Ex. A (plain) treatise on; an (exact and full) account.
[52] In “Compendious pocket dictionary,” either compendious or pocket is superfluous.
[53] Ex. Nekrolog, 1790–1800 (enthaltend Nachrichten von dem Leben merkwürdiger in
diesem Jahre verstorbener Personen).
[54] “by an American not by birth but by the love of liberty.”
153½. Omit all other unnecessary words.
can also be done awkwardly by transposing the article; as,
— Breach of promise, The; com.
— Christening, The; farce.
— Dead shot, The; farce.
— Dream at sea, The.
152. Short omits articles in the title.
Ex. “Observations upon an alteration of the charter of the Bank of
England” is abridged: “Alteration of charter of Bank of England,” which
is certainly not euphonious, but is as intelligible as if it were. Medium
usually indulges in the luxury of good English. Perhaps in time a
catalogue style will be adopted in which these elisions shall be not merely
allowed, but required. It may be possible to increase the number of
cataloguing signs. We have now 8º where we once had octavo, then 8vo.
Why not insist upon N. Y. for New York, L. for London, P. for Paris, etc.,
as a few adventurous libraries have done? Why not make free substitution
of commas for words, and leave out articles and prepositions in titles
wherever the sense will still remain gleanable?
153. Omit puffs [51] and many descriptive words which are implied
either by the rest of the title [52] or by the custom of books of the
class {69} under treatment, [53] and those descriptive phrases which,
though they add to the significance of the title, do not give enough
information to pay for their retention. [54]
[51] Ex. A (plain) treatise on; an (exact and full) account.
[52] In “Compendious pocket dictionary,” either compendious or pocket is superfluous.
[53] Ex. Nekrolog, 1790–1800 (enthaltend Nachrichten von dem Leben merkwürdiger in
diesem Jahre verstorbener Personen).
[54] “by an American not by birth but by the love of liberty.”
153½. Omit all other unnecessary words.
Page 138
In the following examples I use the double (( )) to indicate what every
catalogue ought to omit, the single ( ) to indicate what may well be
omitted.
Ed. alt. (priore emendatior).
2e éd. (augmentée).
2d ed. (with additions and improvements).
with ((an appendix containing)) problems.
((a collection of)) papers relating to the war in India.
((a series of)) letters.
((On the)) brick architecture of the north of Italy.
(debate) on ((the subject of)) the impressment bill.
on ((the question of)) a financial agent.
((being some)) account of his travels.
in ((the year)) 1875.
Sermons ((on various subjects)). N. B. Must occasionally be
retained to distinguish different collections of sermons by
the same author.
The grounds of infant damnation ((considered in)) (a) sermon
((preached)) Nov. 5, (1717). Boston, 1717. O.
Sermon (the Lord’s day after the) interment of.
Opera ((quæ extant)) (omnia).
Geology ((of the State)) of Maine.
Tables for ((the use of)) civil engineers.
Reflections ((suggested by a perusal of)) [55] J. H. Palmer’s
((pamphlet on the)) “Causes (and consequences) of the
war.”
Occasioned by his ((book entitled)) “True narrative.”
defended against ((the cavils of)) G. Martin.
Howe during his command (of the King’s troops) in North
America.
So a “Discourse in Albany, Feb. 27, 1848, occasioned by the death of
John Quincy Adams, etc. Albany, 1848. O.,” would become Disc.,
Albany, Feb. 27, death of J. Q. Adams. Albany, 1848. O., in Medium;
and Short would probably omit “Albany, Feb. 27.”
catalogue ought to omit, the single ( ) to indicate what may well be
omitted.
Ed. alt. (priore emendatior).
2e éd. (augmentée).
2d ed. (with additions and improvements).
with ((an appendix containing)) problems.
((a collection of)) papers relating to the war in India.
((a series of)) letters.
((On the)) brick architecture of the north of Italy.
(debate) on ((the subject of)) the impressment bill.
on ((the question of)) a financial agent.
((being some)) account of his travels.
in ((the year)) 1875.
Sermons ((on various subjects)). N. B. Must occasionally be
retained to distinguish different collections of sermons by
the same author.
The grounds of infant damnation ((considered in)) (a) sermon
((preached)) Nov. 5, (1717). Boston, 1717. O.
Sermon (the Lord’s day after the) interment of.
Opera ((quæ extant)) (omnia).
Geology ((of the State)) of Maine.
Tables for ((the use of)) civil engineers.
Reflections ((suggested by a perusal of)) [55] J. H. Palmer’s
((pamphlet on the)) “Causes (and consequences) of the
war.”
Occasioned by his ((book entitled)) “True narrative.”
defended against ((the cavils of)) G. Martin.
Howe during his command (of the King’s troops) in North
America.
So a “Discourse in Albany, Feb. 27, 1848, occasioned by the death of
John Quincy Adams, etc. Albany, 1848. O.,” would become Disc.,
Albany, Feb. 27, death of J. Q. Adams. Albany, 1848. O., in Medium;
and Short would probably omit “Albany, Feb. 27.”
Page 139
[55] Substitute [on].
154. For chronological phrases use dates.
Ex. For “from the accession of Edward III. to the death of Henry VIII., ”
say [1327–1547].
155. In Short and Medium use initials for all Christian names
introduced in titles, notes, and contents, and omit the initials
altogether for famous men unless there are two of the same name.
Ex. Write “Life of L. V. Bell,” “ed. by F. J. Furnivall,” but “Lives of
Cicero, Milton, Tell, Washington;” and distinguish by initials the Bachs,
Grimms, Humboldts, Schlegels. Short may as well omit the initials of
editors, translators, etc.
E. g.
Dante. Divine comedy; tr. by Cayley. London, 1851–54. 4 v.
S.
— Same. Tr. by Wright. London, Bohn, 1854. O.
— Same. Tr. by Longfellow. Boston, 1867. 3 v. O. {70}
156. Abbreviate certain common words always, and less common
words in a long title which can not be shortened in any other way.
Abbreviations should suggest the word for which they are used, and
should not, if it can be avoided, suggest any other. When one abbreviation
is used for two words, if the context does not determine the sense the
abbreviation must be lengthened. The most common and useful are Abp.
(Archbishop), a. d. Lat. (aus dem Lateinischen), add. (additions), Amer. or
Am. (American), anon. (anonymous), app. (appendix), Aufl., Ausg., or
even A. (Auflage, Ausgabe), bibl. (biblical, bibliographical, bibliotheca,
etc.), biog. (biographical, biography), Bp. (Bishop), B. S. L., etc. (Bohn’s
scientific library, etc.), Chr. (Christian), class. (classical), col. or coll.
(collections, college), com. (commerce, committee), comp. (compiled,
compiler), conc. (concerning), dept. (department), dom. (domestic), ed.
154. For chronological phrases use dates.
Ex. For “from the accession of Edward III. to the death of Henry VIII., ”
say [1327–1547].
155. In Short and Medium use initials for all Christian names
introduced in titles, notes, and contents, and omit the initials
altogether for famous men unless there are two of the same name.
Ex. Write “Life of L. V. Bell,” “ed. by F. J. Furnivall,” but “Lives of
Cicero, Milton, Tell, Washington;” and distinguish by initials the Bachs,
Grimms, Humboldts, Schlegels. Short may as well omit the initials of
editors, translators, etc.
E. g.
Dante. Divine comedy; tr. by Cayley. London, 1851–54. 4 v.
S.
— Same. Tr. by Wright. London, Bohn, 1854. O.
— Same. Tr. by Longfellow. Boston, 1867. 3 v. O. {70}
156. Abbreviate certain common words always, and less common
words in a long title which can not be shortened in any other way.
Abbreviations should suggest the word for which they are used, and
should not, if it can be avoided, suggest any other. When one abbreviation
is used for two words, if the context does not determine the sense the
abbreviation must be lengthened. The most common and useful are Abp.
(Archbishop), a. d. Lat. (aus dem Lateinischen), add. (additions), Amer. or
Am. (American), anon. (anonymous), app. (appendix), Aufl., Ausg., or
even A. (Auflage, Ausgabe), bibl. (biblical, bibliographical, bibliotheca,
etc.), biog. (biographical, biography), Bp. (Bishop), B. S. L., etc. (Bohn’s
scientific library, etc.), Chr. (Christian), class. (classical), col. or coll.
(collections, college), com. (commerce, committee), comp. (compiled,
compiler), conc. (concerning), dept. (department), dom. (domestic), ed.
Page 140
(edited, edition, editor), encyc. (encyclopædia), ff. (folios or leaves),
geog., geol., geom. (geology, geography, geometry), ges. (gesammelte),
Ges. or Gesch. (Geschichte), Gr. (Great, Greek), H. F. L. (Harper’s family
library), hrsg. (herausgegeben), imp. (imperfect), incl. (including), int.
(intorno), lib. (library), mem. (memoir), mis. or miscel. (miscellaneous),
nat. (natural), n. d. (no date of publication), n. p. (no place), n. s. (new
series), n. t.-p. (no title-page), nouv. (nouvelle), obl. (oblong), p. pp.
(page, pages), pseud. (pseudonym, pseudonymous), pt. (part), pub.
(published), rec. (recensuit), rel. (relating, relative), rept. (report), rev.
(review, revised), s. or ser. (series), sämm. (sämmtlich), sm. (small), soc.
(society), t.-p. mut., t.-p. w. (title-page mutilated, wanting), tr. (translated,
traduit, tradotto, etc.), trans. (transactions), u. (und), übers. (übersetzt), v.
(volume), v. (von, but give van in full), w. (wanting). For others see
Appendix V., pp. 119–126.
157. Express numbers by Arabic figures instead of words.
Ex. With 30,000 (not thirty thousand) men; but Charles II., in place of
King Charles the Second.
158. In Short omit all that can be expressed by position.
Ex. In a title-entry
and in a subject-entry
If this is thought too disagreeable, use an initial for the heading when
it is repeated in the title; as:
159. In cataloguing different editions of a book avoid the
repetition of the title by using “Same.”
geog., geol., geom. (geology, geography, geometry), ges. (gesammelte),
Ges. or Gesch. (Geschichte), Gr. (Great, Greek), H. F. L. (Harper’s family
library), hrsg. (herausgegeben), imp. (imperfect), incl. (including), int.
(intorno), lib. (library), mem. (memoir), mis. or miscel. (miscellaneous),
nat. (natural), n. d. (no date of publication), n. p. (no place), n. s. (new
series), n. t.-p. (no title-page), nouv. (nouvelle), obl. (oblong), p. pp.
(page, pages), pseud. (pseudonym, pseudonymous), pt. (part), pub.
(published), rec. (recensuit), rel. (relating, relative), rept. (report), rev.
(review, revised), s. or ser. (series), sämm. (sämmtlich), sm. (small), soc.
(society), t.-p. mut., t.-p. w. (title-page mutilated, wanting), tr. (translated,
traduit, tradotto, etc.), trans. (transactions), u. (und), übers. (übersetzt), v.
(volume), v. (von, but give van in full), w. (wanting). For others see
Appendix V., pp. 119–126.
157. Express numbers by Arabic figures instead of words.
Ex. With 30,000 (not thirty thousand) men; but Charles II., in place of
King Charles the Second.
158. In Short omit all that can be expressed by position.
Ex. In a title-entry
and in a subject-entry
If this is thought too disagreeable, use an initial for the heading when
it is repeated in the title; as:
159. In cataloguing different editions of a book avoid the
repetition of the title by using “Same.”
Page 141
Ex.
Chaucer, G. Canterbury tales; [ed.] by T. Tyrwhitt. London,
1822. 5 v. 8º.
— Same. Ed. by T. Wright. London, 1847–51. 3 v. 8º.
The word following Same should generally begin with a capital.
160. Retain under the author only what is necessary to distinguish
the work from other works of the same writer, but under the
subject what is needed to state the subject and show how it is
treated.
The preface of an excellent catalogue remarks that “the primary object
of subject-entries is to inform the reader who have written upon a given
topic rather than what has been written.” This is a mistake. The inquirer
wishes to know both; in fact he wants to know who have written about it
because their character will suggest to him what they have written. {71}
161. Retain both of alternative titles.
Ex. Knights and sea-kings; or, The Middle Ages.
The reason is that the book may be referred to by either title.
162. Retain in the author entry the first words of the title; let the
abridgement be made farther on.
Because (1) it facilitates library work, by rendering the identification
of the book quicker and surer; (2) if there is no part of the title which must
be given, two persons may abridge so differently that not a single word
shall be the same in the two abridged titles, so that two works will be
made out of one (I have often known this to happen); (3) books are
frequently referred to by the first word of the title (Grassi’s “Notizie sullo
stato presente degli Stati Uniti” may be quoted as Grassi: Notizie). Short,
however, can probably not afford to retain first words in all cases. Half the
phrases used at the beginning of titles add little or nothing to the meaning,
such as “Treatise on,” “System of,” “Series of lectures on,” “Practical
Chaucer, G. Canterbury tales; [ed.] by T. Tyrwhitt. London,
1822. 5 v. 8º.
— Same. Ed. by T. Wright. London, 1847–51. 3 v. 8º.
The word following Same should generally begin with a capital.
160. Retain under the author only what is necessary to distinguish
the work from other works of the same writer, but under the
subject what is needed to state the subject and show how it is
treated.
The preface of an excellent catalogue remarks that “the primary object
of subject-entries is to inform the reader who have written upon a given
topic rather than what has been written.” This is a mistake. The inquirer
wishes to know both; in fact he wants to know who have written about it
because their character will suggest to him what they have written. {71}
161. Retain both of alternative titles.
Ex. Knights and sea-kings; or, The Middle Ages.
The reason is that the book may be referred to by either title.
162. Retain in the author entry the first words of the title; let the
abridgement be made farther on.
Because (1) it facilitates library work, by rendering the identification
of the book quicker and surer; (2) if there is no part of the title which must
be given, two persons may abridge so differently that not a single word
shall be the same in the two abridged titles, so that two works will be
made out of one (I have often known this to happen); (3) books are
frequently referred to by the first word of the title (Grassi’s “Notizie sullo
stato presente degli Stati Uniti” may be quoted as Grassi: Notizie). Short,
however, can probably not afford to retain first words in all cases. Half the
phrases used at the beginning of titles add little or nothing to the meaning,
such as “Treatise on,” “System of,” “Series of lectures on,” “Practical
Page 142
hints on the quantitative pronunciation of Latin” (here “Practical hints”
belongs in the preface, not in the title, to which it really adds nothing
whatever). “History of” must often be retained under the subject. One can
say
Y OUNG , Sir W. Athens. 3d ed. London, 1804;
but under Athens that would not be enough; it would be necessary to write
Y OUNG , Sir W. History of Athens,
to distinguish it from such works as Stuart’s “Antiquities of Athens,” and
Leake’s “Topography of Athens.” But if there are enough titles under
Athens to admit of the subheadings Art, Antiquities, History, the words
“History of” again become unnecessary. Medium ought always to retain
first words under author, and may omit them under subject; but such
phrases as “Manual of,” “Lectures on,” do much to explain the character
of the book, and for that reason ought often to be retained.
Mottoes, however, at the top of the title-page (often separated by a line
from the real title) may be neglected. Sometimes such superscriptions are
important, generally not.
When the author’s name alone or his name and titles are first on the
title-page, as is frequently the case in old Latin and modern French books,
omit them. Example: Jani Jacobi Boissardi Vesuntini de divinatione.
A custom has grown up of late, particularly in French publications, of
putting at the top of the title-page, before the title proper, the name of the
series to which the work belongs or else what might be called the
classification of the book. The name of the series should be given in
parentheses after the imprint. The cataloguer may retain or omit the
classification at his discretion. To avoid all possibility of mistake Full will
mark the omission of these words by ...
163. Do not by abridgment render the words retained false or
meaningless or ungrammatical.
(c.) M ISCELLANEOUS R ULES AND R EMARKS.
belongs in the preface, not in the title, to which it really adds nothing
whatever). “History of” must often be retained under the subject. One can
say
Y OUNG , Sir W. Athens. 3d ed. London, 1804;
but under Athens that would not be enough; it would be necessary to write
Y OUNG , Sir W. History of Athens,
to distinguish it from such works as Stuart’s “Antiquities of Athens,” and
Leake’s “Topography of Athens.” But if there are enough titles under
Athens to admit of the subheadings Art, Antiquities, History, the words
“History of” again become unnecessary. Medium ought always to retain
first words under author, and may omit them under subject; but such
phrases as “Manual of,” “Lectures on,” do much to explain the character
of the book, and for that reason ought often to be retained.
Mottoes, however, at the top of the title-page (often separated by a line
from the real title) may be neglected. Sometimes such superscriptions are
important, generally not.
When the author’s name alone or his name and titles are first on the
title-page, as is frequently the case in old Latin and modern French books,
omit them. Example: Jani Jacobi Boissardi Vesuntini de divinatione.
A custom has grown up of late, particularly in French publications, of
putting at the top of the title-page, before the title proper, the name of the
series to which the work belongs or else what might be called the
classification of the book. The name of the series should be given in
parentheses after the imprint. The cataloguer may retain or omit the
classification at his discretion. To avoid all possibility of mistake Full will
mark the omission of these words by ...
163. Do not by abridgment render the words retained false or
meaningless or ungrammatical.
(c.) M ISCELLANEOUS R ULES AND R EMARKS.
Page 143
164. In analyticals, if there are several entries under the author
referred to, give the first word or words of the title referred to, so
that the entry can easily be found; if there are few entries take one
or two words which unmistakably identify the book.
A word or two is enough [56] and those abbreviated if possible; [57] but
sometimes, when the article has an insufficient or no title it is well to give
more of the title of the book in which it is contained, if that is more
communicative; e. g., Wordsworth, J. Grammatical introduction. (In
his Fragments of early Latin. 1874.), where “of early Latin” explains
“grammatical introduction.” The date should always be given to show in
what edition of the work the passage is contained and also to what period
the ideas belong. Giving the pages facilitates reference. {72}
[56] (In Mueller, F. M. Chips, v. 1. 1867.) not (In Mueller, F. M. Chips from a
German workshop, v. 1. 1867.)
[57] (In Grævius. Thes. Rom. antiq., v. 10. 1699.)
165. The title is to be copied, so far as it is copied, exactly.
Omissions may be made without giving notice to the reader,
unless by etc. when the sentence is manifestly unfinished. [58]
Additions made to a title are to be marked by inclosing the words
in brackets [ ]. [59] All additions to be in the same language as the
title; if this can not be done, put the addition into a note. [60] After
a word spelled wrongly or unusually insert [sic]. [61]
[58] The use of ... is suited only to bibliographies. I do not see why even Full should use this
sign, except for very rare or typographically-important books. The title in a catalogue is not
intended to be a substitute for the book itself and must leave some questions to be answered by
the latter. But if the ... are used they should be printed as a group, separated from the word or
punctuation mark which they follow or precede by a slight space, as . ... or ... .
[59] The use of [ ] is important, both as a check on indiscriminate addition and as an aid to
identification. It will not often be of use in the latter respect, but as one can never tell when it
will be needed it must be employed always.
referred to, give the first word or words of the title referred to, so
that the entry can easily be found; if there are few entries take one
or two words which unmistakably identify the book.
A word or two is enough [56] and those abbreviated if possible; [57] but
sometimes, when the article has an insufficient or no title it is well to give
more of the title of the book in which it is contained, if that is more
communicative; e. g., Wordsworth, J. Grammatical introduction. (In
his Fragments of early Latin. 1874.), where “of early Latin” explains
“grammatical introduction.” The date should always be given to show in
what edition of the work the passage is contained and also to what period
the ideas belong. Giving the pages facilitates reference. {72}
[56] (In Mueller, F. M. Chips, v. 1. 1867.) not (In Mueller, F. M. Chips from a
German workshop, v. 1. 1867.)
[57] (In Grævius. Thes. Rom. antiq., v. 10. 1699.)
165. The title is to be copied, so far as it is copied, exactly.
Omissions may be made without giving notice to the reader,
unless by etc. when the sentence is manifestly unfinished. [58]
Additions made to a title are to be marked by inclosing the words
in brackets [ ]. [59] All additions to be in the same language as the
title; if this can not be done, put the addition into a note. [60] After
a word spelled wrongly or unusually insert [sic]. [61]
[58] The use of ... is suited only to bibliographies. I do not see why even Full should use this
sign, except for very rare or typographically-important books. The title in a catalogue is not
intended to be a substitute for the book itself and must leave some questions to be answered by
the latter. But if the ... are used they should be printed as a group, separated from the word or
punctuation mark which they follow or precede by a slight space, as . ... or ... .
[59] The use of [ ] is important, both as a check on indiscriminate addition and as an aid to
identification. It will not often be of use in the latter respect, but as one can never tell when it
will be needed it must be employed always.
Page 144
[60] The intercalation of English words in a foreign title is extremely awkward.
[61] Ex. The beginning end [sic] end of drinking.
166. If the title-page is lost and the title can not be ascertained, use
the half-title or the running title, stating that fact; if the book has
neither, manufacture a title, putting it in brackets.
167. State in what language the book is written unless it is evident
from the title.
Ex.
Aelianus. De natura animalium [Gr. et Lat.].
Aeschines. Orations on the crown [Gr.], with Eng. notes.
168. Retain in or add to the title of a translation words stating
from what language it was made, unless that is evident from the
author’s name or is shown by its position after the original title.
Ex.
Beckford, Wm. Vathek; [tr. fr. the French].
Lessing, Gotthold Ephraim. Laocoon; tr. by E. Frothingham.
Euripides. Ἱππόλυτος στεφανηφόρος.
— Eng. The crowned Hippolytus; tr. by M. P. Fitz-Gerald.
169. In the entry of translations after the original give the
translated title, preceded by the name of the language of the
version.
This is for the good of persons unacquainted with the original
language, who would not know the book by the foreign title, and also to
identify the book, different translations not always having the same title.
Sand, George. Le château des désertes.
— Eng. The castle in the wilderness.
— L’homme de neige.
[61] Ex. The beginning end [sic] end of drinking.
166. If the title-page is lost and the title can not be ascertained, use
the half-title or the running title, stating that fact; if the book has
neither, manufacture a title, putting it in brackets.
167. State in what language the book is written unless it is evident
from the title.
Ex.
Aelianus. De natura animalium [Gr. et Lat.].
Aeschines. Orations on the crown [Gr.], with Eng. notes.
168. Retain in or add to the title of a translation words stating
from what language it was made, unless that is evident from the
author’s name or is shown by its position after the original title.
Ex.
Beckford, Wm. Vathek; [tr. fr. the French].
Lessing, Gotthold Ephraim. Laocoon; tr. by E. Frothingham.
Euripides. Ἱππόλυτος στεφανηφόρος.
— Eng. The crowned Hippolytus; tr. by M. P. Fitz-Gerald.
169. In the entry of translations after the original give the
translated title, preceded by the name of the language of the
version.
This is for the good of persons unacquainted with the original
language, who would not know the book by the foreign title, and also to
identify the book, different translations not always having the same title.
Sand, George. Le château des désertes.
— Eng. The castle in the wilderness.
— L’homme de neige.
Page 145
— Eng. The snow man.
Dante. Divina commedia.
— Eng. Vision of hell, purgatory, and paradise; tr. by Cary.
— – Divine comedy; tr. by Cayley.
170. In anonymous titles entered under the first word put the
transposed article after the first phrase.
Ex. Ame en peine, Une, not Ame, Une, en peine. {73}
171. Under the author distinguish the titles of anonymous books.
Enclosing the dash in brackets is ugly [ — ]; enclosing the title in
brackets is misleading, as if the title were false. Stars (*) or daggers (†)
are sometimes prefixed to the title, but they are often used for other
purposes and they throw the titles out of line. [Anon.] may be used
between the title and the imprint; † in the same position would take less
room and as soon as accepted would be equally intelligible; it has
occasionally been used.
172. In the preliminary card catalogue enclose in brackets the
name of the author of an anonymous or pseudonymous work. This
may be extended to cases where the name is only implied.
Ex. “By the Bishop of Ripon,” “M. Tullii oratio;” meaning M. Tullii
Ciceronis oratio, or Cat. used in old editions for Catullus.
173. In the title-entry of an anonymous work insert the author’s
name in brackets.
Ex. Colloquies of Edw. Osborne; [by M. A. Manning]. London,
1860. S.
174. Words like Lord, Gen., Rev., King, ed., tr., occurring in the
title are not to be italicized.
Dante. Divina commedia.
— Eng. Vision of hell, purgatory, and paradise; tr. by Cary.
— – Divine comedy; tr. by Cayley.
170. In anonymous titles entered under the first word put the
transposed article after the first phrase.
Ex. Ame en peine, Une, not Ame, Une, en peine. {73}
171. Under the author distinguish the titles of anonymous books.
Enclosing the dash in brackets is ugly [ — ]; enclosing the title in
brackets is misleading, as if the title were false. Stars (*) or daggers (†)
are sometimes prefixed to the title, but they are often used for other
purposes and they throw the titles out of line. [Anon.] may be used
between the title and the imprint; † in the same position would take less
room and as soon as accepted would be equally intelligible; it has
occasionally been used.
172. In the preliminary card catalogue enclose in brackets the
name of the author of an anonymous or pseudonymous work. This
may be extended to cases where the name is only implied.
Ex. “By the Bishop of Ripon,” “M. Tullii oratio;” meaning M. Tullii
Ciceronis oratio, or Cat. used in old editions for Catullus.
173. In the title-entry of an anonymous work insert the author’s
name in brackets.
Ex. Colloquies of Edw. Osborne; [by M. A. Manning]. London,
1860. S.
174. Words like Lord, Gen., Rev., King, ed., tr., occurring in the
title are not to be italicized.
Page 146
175. When the title is in an alphabet which differs from the
English, transliterate the first few words and add a translation.
Ex. [Pisni Russkaho naroda; Songs of the Russian people.]
When the title is in Greek, followed by a Latin translation, it is
customary to use the latter alone, and the same may be done in the case of
other languages. But for identification it is necessary that some part of the
book’s own title should be printed. It is not enough to give merely a made
title or a translation.
English, transliterate the first few words and add a translation.
Ex. [Pisni Russkaho naroda; Songs of the Russian people.]
When the title is in Greek, followed by a Latin translation, it is
customary to use the latter alone, and the same may be done in the case of
other languages. But for identification it is necessary that some part of the
book’s own title should be printed. It is not enough to give merely a made
title or a translation.
Page 147
C. EDITIONS.
176. Distinguish editions by the number, the name of the editor,
translator, etc., and by mentioning in parentheses (not brackets)
after the imprint the collection, library, series, to which it belongs,
or the name of the society by which it is published.
Ex. 4th ed., 10th thous., New ed., ed. by T. Good, (Bohn’s standard
library), (Weale’s series, v. 20), (Camden Soc., v. 3). It is shorter and
nearly as useful to give Bohn, Weale, etc., as publishers in the imprint,—
London, Bohn, 1867. O.
The various editions of different volumes may be stated thus:
Hales, Stephen. Statical essays. (Vol. 1, 3d ed.) London,
1738, 33. 2 v. O.
The specification of edition is necessary: (1) for the student, who often
wants a particular edition and cares no more for another than he would for
an entirely different work; (2) in the library service, to prevent the
rejection of works which are not really duplicates. And the number of the
edition is a fact in the literary history of the author worth preserving under
his name; under the subject it is some guarantee for the repute, if not for
the value, of the work.
177. Full will note carefully whether there is any change in a new
edition, or whether it is merely what the Germans call a title-
edition (the same matter with a new title-page). Medium and Short
generally content themselves with noting the number of the
edition. Short often takes no notice of the edition. {74}
176. Distinguish editions by the number, the name of the editor,
translator, etc., and by mentioning in parentheses (not brackets)
after the imprint the collection, library, series, to which it belongs,
or the name of the society by which it is published.
Ex. 4th ed., 10th thous., New ed., ed. by T. Good, (Bohn’s standard
library), (Weale’s series, v. 20), (Camden Soc., v. 3). It is shorter and
nearly as useful to give Bohn, Weale, etc., as publishers in the imprint,—
London, Bohn, 1867. O.
The various editions of different volumes may be stated thus:
Hales, Stephen. Statical essays. (Vol. 1, 3d ed.) London,
1738, 33. 2 v. O.
The specification of edition is necessary: (1) for the student, who often
wants a particular edition and cares no more for another than he would for
an entirely different work; (2) in the library service, to prevent the
rejection of works which are not really duplicates. And the number of the
edition is a fact in the literary history of the author worth preserving under
his name; under the subject it is some guarantee for the repute, if not for
the value, of the work.
177. Full will note carefully whether there is any change in a new
edition, or whether it is merely what the Germans call a title-
edition (the same matter with a new title-page). Medium and Short
generally content themselves with noting the number of the
edition. Short often takes no notice of the edition. {74}
Page 148
D. IMPRINTS.
178. The imprint consists of place of publication, publisher’s
name, date, number of volumes, number of pages, number of
maps, engravings, and the like, and typographic form, which are
to be given in the above order.
Washington, 1875. 2 v. 7, 441, (12); 4, 424 p. O. ; 20 engr., 24
photographs, 4 maps. The imprint proper consists merely of place, date,
form, and number of volumes (Wash., 1875. 2 v. O). The other details
are given by Medium in particular cases. Full gives them always, but it
may be doubted whether their use is frequent enough to pay for the very
considerable increase in the trouble of cataloguing. It is worth while to
show by some sign (as pm.) that the pages are less than 100 or than 50 (40
is the limit of the French Bibliothèque Nationale), for the fact is easily
ascertained, and the mark fills little space and may prevent some one
sending for a book he does not care to look at. It is not an exact
designation, but many things are useful which are not exact. On the other
hand an inquirer might occasionally fail to see the best treatise on his
subject, thinking it too short to be of any value. Neither Short nor Medium
should give the exact number of maps, plates, etc., but it is well worth
while, especially for a popular library, to add the word illus. to the titles of
books in which the illustrations are at all prominent, and, under
Biography, to note the presence of portraits.
Imprints are indispensable in a catalogue designed for scholars, that is
for college libraries, for historical or scientific libraries, and for large city
libraries. They may not be of much use to nine persons in ten who use
those libraries, but they should be inserted for the tenth person. But in the
majority of popular city and town libraries neither the character of the
readers nor of the books justifies their insertion. Their place may be much
better filled (as in the Quincy catalogue) with more important matter—
178. The imprint consists of place of publication, publisher’s
name, date, number of volumes, number of pages, number of
maps, engravings, and the like, and typographic form, which are
to be given in the above order.
Washington, 1875. 2 v. 7, 441, (12); 4, 424 p. O. ; 20 engr., 24
photographs, 4 maps. The imprint proper consists merely of place, date,
form, and number of volumes (Wash., 1875. 2 v. O). The other details
are given by Medium in particular cases. Full gives them always, but it
may be doubted whether their use is frequent enough to pay for the very
considerable increase in the trouble of cataloguing. It is worth while to
show by some sign (as pm.) that the pages are less than 100 or than 50 (40
is the limit of the French Bibliothèque Nationale), for the fact is easily
ascertained, and the mark fills little space and may prevent some one
sending for a book he does not care to look at. It is not an exact
designation, but many things are useful which are not exact. On the other
hand an inquirer might occasionally fail to see the best treatise on his
subject, thinking it too short to be of any value. Neither Short nor Medium
should give the exact number of maps, plates, etc., but it is well worth
while, especially for a popular library, to add the word illus. to the titles of
books in which the illustrations are at all prominent, and, under
Biography, to note the presence of portraits.
Imprints are indispensable in a catalogue designed for scholars, that is
for college libraries, for historical or scientific libraries, and for large city
libraries. They may not be of much use to nine persons in ten who use
those libraries, but they should be inserted for the tenth person. But in the
majority of popular city and town libraries neither the character of the
readers nor of the books justifies their insertion. Their place may be much
better filled (as in the Quincy catalogue) with more important matter—
Page 149
with “Illus.” or “Portraits,” or a word or two explaining an obscure title.
But the number of volumes should invariably be given. And the year of
publication is important under subjects.
Epithets like “Large paper,” which are applicable, generally, to only a
part of the copies of a book, should be mentioned after all the details
which apply to the whole edition (place, date, number of volume, etc.).
179. Do not translate the name of the place of publication, but if it
is not in a Roman alphabet transliterate it.
Göttingen, not Gottingen; München, not Munich; Wien, not Vienna;
Londini, not London; Lisboa, not Lisbon, when the first are the forms on
the title-page. So [Moskva], Moskau, Moscou, Moscow, according as the
imprint is in Russian, German, French, or English.
180. Use abbreviations and even initials for names of the most
common places of publication.
Ex. Balt., Berl., Bost., Camb., Cin., Cop. or Copenh., Göt., L.
(London), Lisb., Lpz., Madr., N. O., N. Y., Oxf., P. (Paris), Phila., St. P.
(St. Petersburg), Ven., Wash.; and use the ordinary abbreviations for state
names. (A list is given in Appendix V.)
181. If there is more than one place of publication Short and
Medium should give only one.
If the places are connected by “and,” as London and Edinburgh, New
York and London, take the first; if they are unconnected, as
Berlin Paris Genève
H. Baillière
take that which proves on examination to be the real place of publication.
In this economy there is some danger of cataloguing the same book at
different times with {75} different imprints, and making two editions out of
one; but a little watchfulness will prevent this.
But the number of volumes should invariably be given. And the year of
publication is important under subjects.
Epithets like “Large paper,” which are applicable, generally, to only a
part of the copies of a book, should be mentioned after all the details
which apply to the whole edition (place, date, number of volume, etc.).
179. Do not translate the name of the place of publication, but if it
is not in a Roman alphabet transliterate it.
Göttingen, not Gottingen; München, not Munich; Wien, not Vienna;
Londini, not London; Lisboa, not Lisbon, when the first are the forms on
the title-page. So [Moskva], Moskau, Moscou, Moscow, according as the
imprint is in Russian, German, French, or English.
180. Use abbreviations and even initials for names of the most
common places of publication.
Ex. Balt., Berl., Bost., Camb., Cin., Cop. or Copenh., Göt., L.
(London), Lisb., Lpz., Madr., N. O., N. Y., Oxf., P. (Paris), Phila., St. P.
(St. Petersburg), Ven., Wash.; and use the ordinary abbreviations for state
names. (A list is given in Appendix V.)
181. If there is more than one place of publication Short and
Medium should give only one.
If the places are connected by “and,” as London and Edinburgh, New
York and London, take the first; if they are unconnected, as
Berlin Paris Genève
H. Baillière
take that which proves on examination to be the real place of publication.
In this economy there is some danger of cataloguing the same book at
different times with {75} different imprints, and making two editions out of
one; but a little watchfulness will prevent this.
Page 150
182. If the place differs in the different volumes, state the fact.
Ex. History of England. Vol. 1–2, Boston; 3–5, N. Y., 1867–69. 5 v.
O.
183. Print publishers’ names, when it is necessary to give them,
after the place.
Ex. London, Pickering, 1849; Antwerpen, bi mi Claes die Graue.
The publisher’s name must not be mistaken for the place. I have seen a
dozen books catalogued as Redfield, 185–. D; Redfield being a New
York publisher who had a fancy for making his name the most prominent
object in the imprint of his books.
184. If the place or date given at the end of the book differs from
that on the title-page, or if place and date are given there only,
they should be printed in brackets.
Ex.
Augsb., 1525 [colophon Nuremb., 1526].
Lpz., [col. 1571].
185. In early works the date is sometimes given without the
century, as “im vierten Jahre,” i. e., 1604. Of course the century
should be supplied in brackets.
186. Masonic dates should be followed by the date in the usual
form.
Ex. 5834 [1834]. O.
187. Chronograms should be interpreted and given in Arabic
numerals.
Ex. Me DuCit ChrIstVs = 1704.
Ex. History of England. Vol. 1–2, Boston; 3–5, N. Y., 1867–69. 5 v.
O.
183. Print publishers’ names, when it is necessary to give them,
after the place.
Ex. London, Pickering, 1849; Antwerpen, bi mi Claes die Graue.
The publisher’s name must not be mistaken for the place. I have seen a
dozen books catalogued as Redfield, 185–. D; Redfield being a New
York publisher who had a fancy for making his name the most prominent
object in the imprint of his books.
184. If the place or date given at the end of the book differs from
that on the title-page, or if place and date are given there only,
they should be printed in brackets.
Ex.
Augsb., 1525 [colophon Nuremb., 1526].
Lpz., [col. 1571].
185. In early works the date is sometimes given without the
century, as “im vierten Jahre,” i. e., 1604. Of course the century
should be supplied in brackets.
186. Masonic dates should be followed by the date in the usual
form.
Ex. 5834 [1834]. O.
187. Chronograms should be interpreted and given in Arabic
numerals.
Ex. Me DuCit ChrIstVs = 1704.
Page 151
188. When the place or date is given falsely, whether intentionally
or by a typographical error, add the true place or date in brackets,
if it can be ascertained.
Ex.
London, 1975 [1775]. O. Boston, 1887 [1886]. O.
Paris, 1884 [mistake for 1874]. O. En Suisse [Paris], 1769.
189. When the place or date is not given, supply it in brackets, if it
can be ascertained. If neither is discoverable, write n. p. (=no
place), n. d. (=no date), to show that the omission of place and
date is not an oversight.
Ex. n. p., n. d. O.
190. But avoid n. d., and if possible give the decade or at least the
century, even if an interrogation point must be added.
Ex.
London, [17—]. Q.
Phila., [182–?] O.
191. Print the date in Arabic numerals.
Ex. 1517 for MDXVII or CI I XIIIX.
When the subarrangement of the catalogue is by dates (as in that of the
Amer. Philos. Society), it may be well to place the date uniformly at the
end of the line in this order: O. Wash., 1864. Otherwise the best
order is to put the place and date immediately after the title, because like it
they are taken from the title-page. The form, which is not copied but is the
cataloguer’s own assertion, then comes last. The dates can be made
prominent in a chronological arrangement by printing them in heavy type,
as in Prof. Abbot’s “Literature of the doctrine of a future life.” In Very
or by a typographical error, add the true place or date in brackets,
if it can be ascertained.
Ex.
London, 1975 [1775]. O. Boston, 1887 [1886]. O.
Paris, 1884 [mistake for 1874]. O. En Suisse [Paris], 1769.
189. When the place or date is not given, supply it in brackets, if it
can be ascertained. If neither is discoverable, write n. p. (=no
place), n. d. (=no date), to show that the omission of place and
date is not an oversight.
Ex. n. p., n. d. O.
190. But avoid n. d., and if possible give the decade or at least the
century, even if an interrogation point must be added.
Ex.
London, [17—]. Q.
Phila., [182–?] O.
191. Print the date in Arabic numerals.
Ex. 1517 for MDXVII or CI I XIIIX.
When the subarrangement of the catalogue is by dates (as in that of the
Amer. Philos. Society), it may be well to place the date uniformly at the
end of the line in this order: O. Wash., 1864. Otherwise the best
order is to put the place and date immediately after the title, because like it
they are taken from the title-page. The form, which is not copied but is the
cataloguer’s own assertion, then comes last. The dates can be made
prominent in a chronological arrangement by printing them in heavy type,
as in Prof. Abbot’s “Literature of the doctrine of a future life.” In Very
Page 152
Short the German style of printing dates should be adopted, 742 (i. e.,
1742), 875 (i. e., 1875). {76}
192. When different volumes of a work were published at different
times, give the extreme dates.
Ex. Paris, 1840–42. O. Sometimes Vol. 1 is of the 2d ed. and its
date is later than that of Vol. 2. This is in Medium: (Vol. 1, 2d ed.) 1874,
69–73. 5 v. O; in Short merely 1869–74.
193. In cataloguing reprints, Full should give the date of the
original edition.
Ex. Ascham, R. Toxophilus, 1545. London, 1870. O.
(Arber’s reprints.)
or 3d ed. London, 1857 [1st ed. 1542].
O.
The labor of always hunting up the original date is so great that
Medium may be allowed to give it when it can easily be ascertained and
omit it in other cases.
In a printed catalogue, if the first edition is in the library, of course its
date need not be given with the subsequent editions.
194. In analyticals Medium and Full should give the date of the
work referred to, and the number of pages; Short should specify at
least which volume is meant.
The date, if it be that of original publication, tends to show the style of
treatment; if it be that of a reprint or of “Works” it shows which of the
various editions in the library is meant. The number of pages will help the
reader to decide whether the reference is worth looking up.
The Birmingham Free Library has an ingenious way of printing
analyticals. The title is in long primer type, the parenthesis is in pearl, of
which two lines will justify with one of the long primer.
1742), 875 (i. e., 1875). {76}
192. When different volumes of a work were published at different
times, give the extreme dates.
Ex. Paris, 1840–42. O. Sometimes Vol. 1 is of the 2d ed. and its
date is later than that of Vol. 2. This is in Medium: (Vol. 1, 2d ed.) 1874,
69–73. 5 v. O; in Short merely 1869–74.
193. In cataloguing reprints, Full should give the date of the
original edition.
Ex. Ascham, R. Toxophilus, 1545. London, 1870. O.
(Arber’s reprints.)
or 3d ed. London, 1857 [1st ed. 1542].
O.
The labor of always hunting up the original date is so great that
Medium may be allowed to give it when it can easily be ascertained and
omit it in other cases.
In a printed catalogue, if the first edition is in the library, of course its
date need not be given with the subsequent editions.
194. In analyticals Medium and Full should give the date of the
work referred to, and the number of pages; Short should specify at
least which volume is meant.
The date, if it be that of original publication, tends to show the style of
treatment; if it be that of a reprint or of “Works” it shows which of the
various editions in the library is meant. The number of pages will help the
reader to decide whether the reference is worth looking up.
The Birmingham Free Library has an ingenious way of printing
analyticals. The title is in long primer type, the parenthesis is in pearl, of
which two lines will justify with one of the long primer.
Page 153
Fossils. Recent and fossil shells by Woodward (Weale’s Series,
vol. 27. )
Lardner’s Cyclo-
Gleig, G. R. Eminent military commanders (pædia, vols. 19–21) 3
duo 1832.
By this arrangement the analytical nature of the reference is made much
clearer and often a line is saved. But it is very troublesome to the printer.
195. Give the number of volumes.
An imperfect set can be catalogued thus:
Vol. 2–4, 6–7. Bost., 1830. 5 v. O, or
Bost., 1830. 7 v. (v. 5 w.). O.
7 v. O means Vol. 1–7 if nothing is said to the contrary, and any
number of missing volumes can be enumerated in the second of these
forms; but as the first volumes of periodicals are often missing, the
exception may be made of always cataloguing them in the first form.
Whatever Short may be forced to do by its system of charging books,
Medium and Full ought to give the number of volumes bibliographically,
that is to say, they should count only that a volume which has its own title,
paging, and register. If the parts of a work have a continuous register or a
continuous paging they form one volume; but if they are called Vol. 1,
Vol. 2 on the title-page they may be described as 1 v. in 2. For the
bibliographical cataloguer binding has nothing to do with the matter. That
the binder has joined two or more thin volumes or divided a thick one
ought to be recorded in the accessions-book and in the shelf-list, but is not
worth notice in the catalogue; if mentioned at all it should be in such a
way that the description of the accidental condition of a single copy in a
particular library shall not be mistaken for an assertion applicable to a
whole edition (thus, 1 v. bd. in 2, or 2 v. bd. in 1, as the case may be). A
work which has a title-page, but is connected with another work by
mention on its title-page as part of the volume, or by continuous paging or
register, is said to be appended to that work.
196. Let the signs fº, 4º, 8º, etc., if used, represent the fold of the
sheet as ascertained from the signature, not be guessed from the
vol. 27. )
Lardner’s Cyclo-
Gleig, G. R. Eminent military commanders (pædia, vols. 19–21) 3
duo 1832.
By this arrangement the analytical nature of the reference is made much
clearer and often a line is saved. But it is very troublesome to the printer.
195. Give the number of volumes.
An imperfect set can be catalogued thus:
Vol. 2–4, 6–7. Bost., 1830. 5 v. O, or
Bost., 1830. 7 v. (v. 5 w.). O.
7 v. O means Vol. 1–7 if nothing is said to the contrary, and any
number of missing volumes can be enumerated in the second of these
forms; but as the first volumes of periodicals are often missing, the
exception may be made of always cataloguing them in the first form.
Whatever Short may be forced to do by its system of charging books,
Medium and Full ought to give the number of volumes bibliographically,
that is to say, they should count only that a volume which has its own title,
paging, and register. If the parts of a work have a continuous register or a
continuous paging they form one volume; but if they are called Vol. 1,
Vol. 2 on the title-page they may be described as 1 v. in 2. For the
bibliographical cataloguer binding has nothing to do with the matter. That
the binder has joined two or more thin volumes or divided a thick one
ought to be recorded in the accessions-book and in the shelf-list, but is not
worth notice in the catalogue; if mentioned at all it should be in such a
way that the description of the accidental condition of a single copy in a
particular library shall not be mistaken for an assertion applicable to a
whole edition (thus, 1 v. bd. in 2, or 2 v. bd. in 1, as the case may be). A
work which has a title-page, but is connected with another work by
mention on its title-page as part of the volume, or by continuous paging or
register, is said to be appended to that work.
196. Let the signs fº, 4º, 8º, etc., if used, represent the fold of the
sheet as ascertained from the signature, not be guessed from the
Page 154
size.
In the older books this is important, and in modern books the
distinction between the octavo and the duodecimo series is so easily
ascertained that it is not worth while {77} to be inaccurate. The size may be
more exactly indicated, if it is thought worth while, by l. or sm., sq., obl.,
prefixed to the fold, as l. 8º, sm. 4º. The “vo” or “mo” should be
represented by a superior º if it can be had, otherwise a degree-mark °,
though manifestly improper, must be employed; it has abundant usage in
its favor.
Another method of giving the form is fº (8), 4º (2), 8º (4), in which fº,
4º, 8º indicate the apparent form of the book as the terms folio, quarto,
octavo are generally understood, and the figures within the parentheses
show the number of leaves intervening between the successive signatures.
“In the folio the sheet of paper makes two leaves or four pages, in the
4º four leaves, in the 8º eight, in the 12º twelve, and so on. When a sheet
of paper is folded into six leaves, making what ought to be a 6º book, it is
called a 12º printed in half sheets, because such printing is always done
with half-sized paper, or with half-sheets, so as to give a 12º size. From a
very early period it has been universal to distinguish the sheets by
different letters called signatures. At present a sheet has A on the first leaf
or A1 on the first leaf and A2 on the second, which is enough for the
folder’s purpose. But in former times the signatures were generally carried
on through half the sheet, and sometimes through the whole. Again, in
modern times, no sheet ever goes into and forms part of another; that is,
no leaf of any one sheet ever lies between two leaves of another. But in
the sixteenth century, and even later in Italy, it was common enough to
print in quire-fashion, the same letter being used for the whole quire, and
the leaves of the quire distinguished as they were successively placed
inside of one another by the figures 2, 3, 4, so that a book actually printed
in folio might have the signatures of a modern octavo. In exact
bibliography such books are sometimes described as ‘folio in twos,’ ‘folio
in fours.’ Rules are given for determining the form of printing by the
water-lines of the paper and by the catchwords. It is supposed that the
In the older books this is important, and in modern books the
distinction between the octavo and the duodecimo series is so easily
ascertained that it is not worth while {77} to be inaccurate. The size may be
more exactly indicated, if it is thought worth while, by l. or sm., sq., obl.,
prefixed to the fold, as l. 8º, sm. 4º. The “vo” or “mo” should be
represented by a superior º if it can be had, otherwise a degree-mark °,
though manifestly improper, must be employed; it has abundant usage in
its favor.
Another method of giving the form is fº (8), 4º (2), 8º (4), in which fº,
4º, 8º indicate the apparent form of the book as the terms folio, quarto,
octavo are generally understood, and the figures within the parentheses
show the number of leaves intervening between the successive signatures.
“In the folio the sheet of paper makes two leaves or four pages, in the
4º four leaves, in the 8º eight, in the 12º twelve, and so on. When a sheet
of paper is folded into six leaves, making what ought to be a 6º book, it is
called a 12º printed in half sheets, because such printing is always done
with half-sized paper, or with half-sheets, so as to give a 12º size. From a
very early period it has been universal to distinguish the sheets by
different letters called signatures. At present a sheet has A on the first leaf
or A1 on the first leaf and A2 on the second, which is enough for the
folder’s purpose. But in former times the signatures were generally carried
on through half the sheet, and sometimes through the whole. Again, in
modern times, no sheet ever goes into and forms part of another; that is,
no leaf of any one sheet ever lies between two leaves of another. But in
the sixteenth century, and even later in Italy, it was common enough to
print in quire-fashion, the same letter being used for the whole quire, and
the leaves of the quire distinguished as they were successively placed
inside of one another by the figures 2, 3, 4, so that a book actually printed
in folio might have the signatures of a modern octavo. In exact
bibliography such books are sometimes described as ‘folio in twos,’ ‘folio
in fours.’ Rules are given for determining the form of printing by the
water-lines of the paper and by the catchwords. It is supposed that the
Page 155
latter are always at the end of the sheet, and also that the water-lines are
perpendicular in folio, octavo, and decimo-octavo books, horizontal in
quarto and duodecimo. But in the first place a great many old books have
catchwords at the bottom of every page, many have none at all; and as to
the rule of water-lines, there are exceptions to every case of it.” [62]
For anything but exact bibliographical description it is better
to take no account of the fold of the sheet, but either to give the
size in centimeters or to use the notation of the American Library
Association (see A PPENDIX III, p. 115), which is founded on
measurement.
F E, anything less than 10 centimeters.
T T, anything between 10 and 12½ centimeters.
T, anything between 12½ and 15 centimeters.
S, anything between 15 and 17½ centimeters.
D, anything between 17½ and 20 centimeters.
O, anything between 20 and 25 centimeters.
Q, anything between 25 and 30 centimeters.
F, anything over 30 centimeters. centimeters.
F4, anything over 40 centimeters.
F5, anything over 50 centimeters.
And so on.
[62] De Morgan, altered.
197. Maps may be identified either by giving the scale or by
measurement.
The measure (in centimeters) should be taken from the inner margin of
the degrees, unless the map extends beyond it, in which case measure to
the farthest point; pictures at the side are not to be included in the measure
perpendicular in folio, octavo, and decimo-octavo books, horizontal in
quarto and duodecimo. But in the first place a great many old books have
catchwords at the bottom of every page, many have none at all; and as to
the rule of water-lines, there are exceptions to every case of it.” [62]
For anything but exact bibliographical description it is better
to take no account of the fold of the sheet, but either to give the
size in centimeters or to use the notation of the American Library
Association (see A PPENDIX III, p. 115), which is founded on
measurement.
F E, anything less than 10 centimeters.
T T, anything between 10 and 12½ centimeters.
T, anything between 12½ and 15 centimeters.
S, anything between 15 and 17½ centimeters.
D, anything between 17½ and 20 centimeters.
O, anything between 20 and 25 centimeters.
Q, anything between 25 and 30 centimeters.
F, anything over 30 centimeters. centimeters.
F4, anything over 40 centimeters.
F5, anything over 50 centimeters.
And so on.
[62] De Morgan, altered.
197. Maps may be identified either by giving the scale or by
measurement.
The measure (in centimeters) should be taken from the inner margin of
the degrees, unless the map extends beyond it, in which case measure to
the farthest point; pictures at the side are not to be included in the measure
Page 156
unless they come within the degree-mark. The perpendicular measure to
be stated first, then the horizontal. {78}
be stated first, then the horizontal. {78}
Page 157
E. CONTENTS AND NOTES.
198. Give (under the author) a list of the contents of books
containing several works by the same author, or works by several
authors, or works on several subjects, or a single work on a
number of distinct subjects, [63] especially if the collective title
does not sufficiently describe them. [64]
[63] As a collection of lives.
[64] Only Full can give the contents of all such works, including the memoirs, transactions,
etc., of all the learned societies. And in an analytical catalogue this is much less important.
When every separate treatise is entered in its proper places under the names of its author and
of its subject, why should it be given again in a long column of fine type which few persons
will ever read? Because, if analysis is not complete, contents supplement it; and one who has
forgotten author and subject may occasionally recall them by looking over a “contents;” and
this list is, so far as it goes, a substitute for a classed catalogue in this respect. Moreover, the
“contents” is needed to fully explain the character of the subject-entry (see § 4). In the division
Biography under countries we have many such titles as “Memoirs of eminent Englishwomen,”
“British senators,” “Political portraits.” It is an advantage to the reader, though perhaps neither
a great nor a frequent advantage, to be able to find out from the catalogue what Englishwomen
and what British senators he shall find described in the books. No catalogue can be considered
complete that omits such information.
For collected works of any author “contents” have been found so useful that even Short
often gives them, especially of late, and strange to say, not rarely prints them in the most
extravagant style, allowing a line for each item. One may sometimes see a quarter of a page
left bare from this cause.
199. When a single work fills several volumes give the contents
under the author, provided the division is definite and easily
described.
Object, that the inquirer may know which volume he wants;
application, chiefly to dictionaries and historical works; method, in
general, giving dates and letters of the alphabet, which take little room. It
is particularly important also to fully describe in this way very bulky
198. Give (under the author) a list of the contents of books
containing several works by the same author, or works by several
authors, or works on several subjects, or a single work on a
number of distinct subjects, [63] especially if the collective title
does not sufficiently describe them. [64]
[63] As a collection of lives.
[64] Only Full can give the contents of all such works, including the memoirs, transactions,
etc., of all the learned societies. And in an analytical catalogue this is much less important.
When every separate treatise is entered in its proper places under the names of its author and
of its subject, why should it be given again in a long column of fine type which few persons
will ever read? Because, if analysis is not complete, contents supplement it; and one who has
forgotten author and subject may occasionally recall them by looking over a “contents;” and
this list is, so far as it goes, a substitute for a classed catalogue in this respect. Moreover, the
“contents” is needed to fully explain the character of the subject-entry (see § 4). In the division
Biography under countries we have many such titles as “Memoirs of eminent Englishwomen,”
“British senators,” “Political portraits.” It is an advantage to the reader, though perhaps neither
a great nor a frequent advantage, to be able to find out from the catalogue what Englishwomen
and what British senators he shall find described in the books. No catalogue can be considered
complete that omits such information.
For collected works of any author “contents” have been found so useful that even Short
often gives them, especially of late, and strange to say, not rarely prints them in the most
extravagant style, allowing a line for each item. One may sometimes see a quarter of a page
left bare from this cause.
199. When a single work fills several volumes give the contents
under the author, provided the division is definite and easily
described.
Object, that the inquirer may know which volume he wants;
application, chiefly to dictionaries and historical works; method, in
general, giving dates and letters of the alphabet, which take little room. It
is particularly important also to fully describe in this way very bulky
Page 158
works; Walton’s Polyglott is a good example, in consulting which, without
such a guide, one may have to handle ten gigantic folios.
200. Under the subject repeat so much of the contents as is
necessary to show how the subject is treated or what part is treated
in the different volumes.
This is particularly desirable in works with an insufficiently
descriptive title which treat of several subjects, for which under each
heading will be given its appropriate part of the contents. For example,
Hugo’s “Jus civile Antejustinianeum” contains the originals of
Antejustinian law, but this does not appear from its title, and if it did, it
would be hardly worth while to save a few lines by obliging the reader to
turn to Hugo to ascertain just what is in the book. On the other hand, the
contents of Pertz’s “Monumenta Germaniae historica” is so long that only
Fullest can afford to give it under Germany as well as under Pertz. In such
a case the reader feels it to be more reasonable that he should be referred.
The contents is often more useful under subject-heading than under
author; but it is best that there should be one uniform place where it can
always be found, and where the whole of it can be found, and that place
should be the author-catalogue.
201. Put into notes (in small type) that information which is not
given in the title but is required to be given by the plan of the
catalogue. {79}
Notes have several objects:
1. To give any information about the author, the form of his name, his
pseudonyms, etc., about the different editions or places of publication, or
about the gaps in a set (especially of periodicals), which can not be
included in the title without making it disproportionately long. Short,
especially if without imprints, can get many of these into the title; which it
is well to do, for a short note is not economical.
such a guide, one may have to handle ten gigantic folios.
200. Under the subject repeat so much of the contents as is
necessary to show how the subject is treated or what part is treated
in the different volumes.
This is particularly desirable in works with an insufficiently
descriptive title which treat of several subjects, for which under each
heading will be given its appropriate part of the contents. For example,
Hugo’s “Jus civile Antejustinianeum” contains the originals of
Antejustinian law, but this does not appear from its title, and if it did, it
would be hardly worth while to save a few lines by obliging the reader to
turn to Hugo to ascertain just what is in the book. On the other hand, the
contents of Pertz’s “Monumenta Germaniae historica” is so long that only
Fullest can afford to give it under Germany as well as under Pertz. In such
a case the reader feels it to be more reasonable that he should be referred.
The contents is often more useful under subject-heading than under
author; but it is best that there should be one uniform place where it can
always be found, and where the whole of it can be found, and that place
should be the author-catalogue.
201. Put into notes (in small type) that information which is not
given in the title but is required to be given by the plan of the
catalogue. {79}
Notes have several objects:
1. To give any information about the author, the form of his name, his
pseudonyms, etc., about the different editions or places of publication, or
about the gaps in a set (especially of periodicals), which can not be
included in the title without making it disproportionately long. Short,
especially if without imprints, can get many of these into the title; which it
is well to do, for a short note is not economical.
Page 159
2. To explain the title or correct any misapprehension to which it
might lead. In a popular library the boys take out “The cruise of the
Betsy,” imagining it to be another “Cruise of the Midge.”
3. To direct the attention of persons not familiar with literature to the
best books. The main principles of such annotating are simple. (a.) The
notes should characterize the best books only; to insert them under every
author would only confuse and weary; if few they will arrest attention
much better. Dull books and morally bad books should be left in
obscurity. Under some of the poorer works which have attained unmerited
popularity a brief protest may be made; it will probably be ineffectual; but
it can do no harm to call Mühlbach unreliable or Tupper commonplace.
(b.) They should be brief and pointed. Perhaps after this direction it is
necessary to add that they should be true.
4. To lay out courses of reading for that numerous class who are
desirous of “improving their minds,” and are willing to spend
considerable effort and time but know neither where to begin or how to go
on.
5. To state what is the practice of the catalogue in the entry of the
publications of Congress, Parliament, Academies, Societies, etc., the notes
to be made under those words.
might lead. In a popular library the boys take out “The cruise of the
Betsy,” imagining it to be another “Cruise of the Midge.”
3. To direct the attention of persons not familiar with literature to the
best books. The main principles of such annotating are simple. (a.) The
notes should characterize the best books only; to insert them under every
author would only confuse and weary; if few they will arrest attention
much better. Dull books and morally bad books should be left in
obscurity. Under some of the poorer works which have attained unmerited
popularity a brief protest may be made; it will probably be ineffectual; but
it can do no harm to call Mühlbach unreliable or Tupper commonplace.
(b.) They should be brief and pointed. Perhaps after this direction it is
necessary to add that they should be true.
4. To lay out courses of reading for that numerous class who are
desirous of “improving their minds,” and are willing to spend
considerable effort and time but know neither where to begin or how to go
on.
5. To state what is the practice of the catalogue in the entry of the
publications of Congress, Parliament, Academies, Societies, etc., the notes
to be made under those words.
Page 160
F. REFERENCES.
202. In references use the word See when there is no entry under
the heading from which the reference is made; See also when
there is one.
Ex.
Death penalty. See Capital punishment.
Horticulture. L INDLEY, J. Theory of H.
See also Flowers;—Fruit.
Not Vide; the language of an English catalogue should be English.
203. References must be brief.
Yet the convenience of the public must not be sacrificed to brevity. If,
for instance, several authors had used the same pseudonym, the titles of
their respective works should be given in the references that the reader
may know under which of the authors he will find the work he is in search
of, and not have to turn to all three.
Detlef, Carl, pseud. See Baur, C.
is the usual form of reference; but it is not enough for Hamilton.
Hamilton, pseud. Essay on a congress of nations. See
Whitman, G. H.
Hamilton, pseud. Hamilton. No. 1, etc. See Carey, M.
Analytical references to treatises of the same author or on the same
subject, contained in different volumes of the same work, may be made
thus:
Charles, A. O. Reformatory and refuge union. (In National Assoc.
Prom. Soc. Sci. Trans., 1860.)—Reformatory legislation. (In Trans.,
1861.)—Punishment and reformation in America. (In Trans., 1863.)
Comets. P EIRCE, B. Connection of comets with the solar system.
(In Amer. Assoc., Proc., v. 2. 1850.)—H UBBARD, J. S. Biela’s double
202. In references use the word See when there is no entry under
the heading from which the reference is made; See also when
there is one.
Ex.
Death penalty. See Capital punishment.
Horticulture. L INDLEY, J. Theory of H.
See also Flowers;—Fruit.
Not Vide; the language of an English catalogue should be English.
203. References must be brief.
Yet the convenience of the public must not be sacrificed to brevity. If,
for instance, several authors had used the same pseudonym, the titles of
their respective works should be given in the references that the reader
may know under which of the authors he will find the work he is in search
of, and not have to turn to all three.
Detlef, Carl, pseud. See Baur, C.
is the usual form of reference; but it is not enough for Hamilton.
Hamilton, pseud. Essay on a congress of nations. See
Whitman, G. H.
Hamilton, pseud. Hamilton. No. 1, etc. See Carey, M.
Analytical references to treatises of the same author or on the same
subject, contained in different volumes of the same work, may be made
thus:
Charles, A. O. Reformatory and refuge union. (In National Assoc.
Prom. Soc. Sci. Trans., 1860.)—Reformatory legislation. (In Trans.,
1861.)—Punishment and reformation in America. (In Trans., 1863.)
Comets. P EIRCE, B. Connection of comets with the solar system.
(In Amer. Assoc., Proc., v. 2. 1850.)—H UBBARD, J. S. Biela’s double
Page 161
comet. (In v. 8.)—K IRKWOOD, D. Mean distances of the periodic
comet. (In v. 12. 1859.)
The signs have been used instead of ( ) in analytical references to
mean “contained in.” They are more conspicuous,—unnecessarily so. {80}
References are frequently printed in smaller type than the rest of the
catalogue. This is well when there are enough not to be overlooked; but a
single reference from one form of a name to another, or from one subject-
name to its synonym, should be in the title type, not in the note type, e. g.
Bell, Acton, pseud. See Bronté, Anne.
Gardening. See Horticulture.
Similarly notes explaining the practice of the catalogue (§§ 61, 201
no. 5) should be made typographically conspicuous.
comet. (In v. 12. 1859.)
The signs have been used instead of ( ) in analytical references to
mean “contained in.” They are more conspicuous,—unnecessarily so. {80}
References are frequently printed in smaller type than the rest of the
catalogue. This is well when there are enough not to be overlooked; but a
single reference from one form of a name to another, or from one subject-
name to its synonym, should be in the title type, not in the note type, e. g.
Bell, Acton, pseud. See Bronté, Anne.
Gardening. See Horticulture.
Similarly notes explaining the practice of the catalogue (§§ 61, 201
no. 5) should be made typographically conspicuous.
Page 162
G. LANGUAGE.
204. The language of the compiler’s part of an English catalogue
should be English.
Therefore all notes, explanations, and such words as in, see, see also,
note, contents, and (between joint authors), and others, n. p., n. d., should
be English; however, etc., q. v., and sic may be used.
For the language of HEADINGS, see §§ 27–36. In the entry of
Government publications the name of the country or city will have the
English form (§§ 33, 34), but the name of the department should usually
be in the language of the country, e. g.:
Italy. Ministero di Agricoltura.
But for countries like Russia, Turkey, Japan, where the vernacular
name could not easily be ascertained, an English form may be used.
For titles see §§ 165–169, 175; put the specifications of the EDITION in
the language of the title, also the IMPRINT (§ 179), CONTENTS, NOTES, and
REFERENCES.
H. CAPITALS.
205. In English use an initial capital
1. for the first word,
a. of every sentence,
b. of every title quoted,
c. of every alternative title,
2. for all proper names, each separate word not an article or
preposition.
204. The language of the compiler’s part of an English catalogue
should be English.
Therefore all notes, explanations, and such words as in, see, see also,
note, contents, and (between joint authors), and others, n. p., n. d., should
be English; however, etc., q. v., and sic may be used.
For the language of HEADINGS, see §§ 27–36. In the entry of
Government publications the name of the country or city will have the
English form (§§ 33, 34), but the name of the department should usually
be in the language of the country, e. g.:
Italy. Ministero di Agricoltura.
But for countries like Russia, Turkey, Japan, where the vernacular
name could not easily be ascertained, an English form may be used.
For titles see §§ 165–169, 175; put the specifications of the EDITION in
the language of the title, also the IMPRINT (§ 179), CONTENTS, NOTES, and
REFERENCES.
H. CAPITALS.
205. In English use an initial capital
1. for the first word,
a. of every sentence,
b. of every title quoted,
c. of every alternative title,
2. for all proper names, each separate word not an article or
preposition.
Page 163
a. of persons and places,
b. of bodies
c. of noted events and periods,
N. B. This does not include names of genera, species, etc., in the
animal and vegetable kingdoms, which in an ordinary catalogue should
not be capitalized; as digitalis purpurea, raia batis, the horse.
3. for adjectives and other derivatives from proper names
when they have a direct reference to the person, place, etc.,
from which they are derived.
4. for titles of honor standing instead of a proper name.
Ex.
1b. Reply to the Essay on the discovery of America.
1c. Institutio legalis; or, Introduction to the laws of England. But it is
better, when the sense will permit, to omit the “or” and consider
the second title as a clause explanatory of the first, as Institutio
legalis; introduction to the laws of England.
2b. Society for Promoting the Diffusion of Useful Knowledge.
2c. Boston Massacre, French Revolution, Gunpowder Plot, Middle
Ages.
4. The Earl of Derby, but John Stanley, earl of Derby. {81}
206. In foreign languages, use initial capitals
5. for 1a, 1b, 1c.
6. (Persons and places)
a. In German and Danish for every noun and for adjectives
derived from names of persons, but for no others.
b. In the Romance languages (Italian, French, Spanish,
Portuguese) and in Swedish and Greek for proper
b. of bodies
c. of noted events and periods,
N. B. This does not include names of genera, species, etc., in the
animal and vegetable kingdoms, which in an ordinary catalogue should
not be capitalized; as digitalis purpurea, raia batis, the horse.
3. for adjectives and other derivatives from proper names
when they have a direct reference to the person, place, etc.,
from which they are derived.
4. for titles of honor standing instead of a proper name.
Ex.
1b. Reply to the Essay on the discovery of America.
1c. Institutio legalis; or, Introduction to the laws of England. But it is
better, when the sense will permit, to omit the “or” and consider
the second title as a clause explanatory of the first, as Institutio
legalis; introduction to the laws of England.
2b. Society for Promoting the Diffusion of Useful Knowledge.
2c. Boston Massacre, French Revolution, Gunpowder Plot, Middle
Ages.
4. The Earl of Derby, but John Stanley, earl of Derby. {81}
206. In foreign languages, use initial capitals
5. for 1a, 1b, 1c.
6. (Persons and places)
a. In German and Danish for every noun and for adjectives
derived from names of persons, but for no others.
b. In the Romance languages (Italian, French, Spanish,
Portuguese) and in Swedish and Greek for proper
Page 164
names of persons and places, but not for adjectives
derived from them.
c. in Latin and Dutch for proper names and also for the
adjectives derived from them, but not for common
nouns.
7. (Bodies) as in English, except that in German and Danish
only the nouns are to be capitalized, and adjectives when
they begin the name.
8. (Events and periods) as in English, with the same exception.
9. (Titles) in German and Danish, but not in the Romance
languages, in Latin or in Greek.
Ex.
6a. Die Homerische Frage, but Die griechischen Scholien. In many
German books capitals are not used even for adjectives derived
from personal names.
6b. Les Français, but le peuple français.
7. Société de l’Histoire de France.
8. Le Moyen Âge, la Révolution Française, Die französische
Revolution. The French, however, now generally print le moyen
âge, la révolution française. Capitals are to be avoided, because in
the short sentences of which a catalogue consists they confuse
rather than help the eye. For this reason it is better not to capitalize
names in natural history whether English or Latin (bee, rana
pipiens, liliaceæ, etc.). Several libraries following the lead of the
Congress catalogue have discarded capitals for German nouns.
Grimm’s authority is alleged in justification, but Grimm’s example
is followed by a very small minority even of German scholars, and
the titles so printed still have an awkward look to most readers.
The Boston Public Library also goes to an extreme in its avoidance
derived from them.
c. in Latin and Dutch for proper names and also for the
adjectives derived from them, but not for common
nouns.
7. (Bodies) as in English, except that in German and Danish
only the nouns are to be capitalized, and adjectives when
they begin the name.
8. (Events and periods) as in English, with the same exception.
9. (Titles) in German and Danish, but not in the Romance
languages, in Latin or in Greek.
Ex.
6a. Die Homerische Frage, but Die griechischen Scholien. In many
German books capitals are not used even for adjectives derived
from personal names.
6b. Les Français, but le peuple français.
7. Société de l’Histoire de France.
8. Le Moyen Âge, la Révolution Française, Die französische
Revolution. The French, however, now generally print le moyen
âge, la révolution française. Capitals are to be avoided, because in
the short sentences of which a catalogue consists they confuse
rather than help the eye. For this reason it is better not to capitalize
names in natural history whether English or Latin (bee, rana
pipiens, liliaceæ, etc.). Several libraries following the lead of the
Congress catalogue have discarded capitals for German nouns.
Grimm’s authority is alleged in justification, but Grimm’s example
is followed by a very small minority even of German scholars, and
the titles so printed still have an awkward look to most readers.
The Boston Public Library also goes to an extreme in its avoidance
Page 165
of capitals, not using them for such proper names as methodists,
protestant episcopal church, royal society, etc.
The names of languages are not to be capitalized in the Romance
languages, as “traduit de l’anglais,” “in francese.”
Titles of honor are not to be capitalized in the Romance languages, as
comte, conte, marchese. But Monsieur, Madame, Signor, Don, Donna
always begin with capitals.
Use capitals (or, better, small capitals) for numbers after the names of
kings (Charles III. or Henry IV. ) and for single-letter abbreviations (A. D.,
B. C., H. M. S., F. R. S. E., etc., or A. D., F. R. S. E., etc.). But n. p. no place,
n. t. p. no title-page, may be in lower-case letters or small capitals, and b.
born, d. died, ms. manuscript, should be in lower case.
protestant episcopal church, royal society, etc.
The names of languages are not to be capitalized in the Romance
languages, as “traduit de l’anglais,” “in francese.”
Titles of honor are not to be capitalized in the Romance languages, as
comte, conte, marchese. But Monsieur, Madame, Signor, Don, Donna
always begin with capitals.
Use capitals (or, better, small capitals) for numbers after the names of
kings (Charles III. or Henry IV. ) and for single-letter abbreviations (A. D.,
B. C., H. M. S., F. R. S. E., etc., or A. D., F. R. S. E., etc.). But n. p. no place,
n. t. p. no title-page, may be in lower-case letters or small capitals, and b.
born, d. died, ms. manuscript, should be in lower case.
Page 166
I. PUNCTUATION, ETC.
207. Let each entry consist of four (or five) sentences:
1. the heading, Cicero, Marcus Tullius.
2. the title, including editors Brutus de claris
and translators, oratoribus; erkl. von O.
Jahn.
3. the edition, 2e Aufl. {82}
4. the imprint, as given by Berlin, 1856.
the book,
5. the part of the imprint O.
added by the cataloguer,
Which, if not the first title under Cicero, would read:
— Brutus de Claris oratoribus; erkl. von O. Jahn. 2e
Aufl. Berlin, 1856. O.
Separate by a ; the title proper from the phrase relating to the editor,
translator, etc. This requires a minimum of capitals. It will occasionally
happen that the title can not be thrown into one sentence, but that should
always be done when possible. It is usual to separate 4 and 5. The French,
however, make one sentence of them (Paris, 1864, in–12). This has the
advantage of agreeing with the best form of quoting a title (“see his
Memoirs, London, 1874, O. in which,” etc.). It is useless for one who
abridges titles to make any attempt to follow the punctuation. The spelling
should be retained, but it is hardly worth while for Short or Medium to
imitate the old printers in their indiscriminate use of i and j, u and v.
A library may have a collection of books or a few volumes which from
their rarity deserve to be catalogued with every bibliographical nicety,
with the most exact copying of punctuation, spelling, and forms of letters,
207. Let each entry consist of four (or five) sentences:
1. the heading, Cicero, Marcus Tullius.
2. the title, including editors Brutus de claris
and translators, oratoribus; erkl. von O.
Jahn.
3. the edition, 2e Aufl. {82}
4. the imprint, as given by Berlin, 1856.
the book,
5. the part of the imprint O.
added by the cataloguer,
Which, if not the first title under Cicero, would read:
— Brutus de Claris oratoribus; erkl. von O. Jahn. 2e
Aufl. Berlin, 1856. O.
Separate by a ; the title proper from the phrase relating to the editor,
translator, etc. This requires a minimum of capitals. It will occasionally
happen that the title can not be thrown into one sentence, but that should
always be done when possible. It is usual to separate 4 and 5. The French,
however, make one sentence of them (Paris, 1864, in–12). This has the
advantage of agreeing with the best form of quoting a title (“see his
Memoirs, London, 1874, O. in which,” etc.). It is useless for one who
abridges titles to make any attempt to follow the punctuation. The spelling
should be retained, but it is hardly worth while for Short or Medium to
imitate the old printers in their indiscriminate use of i and j, u and v.
A library may have a collection of books or a few volumes which from
their rarity deserve to be catalogued with every bibliographical nicety,
with the most exact copying of punctuation, spelling, and forms of letters,
Page 167
and even with marks to show where the lines of the title end. Such
collections are the Prince and the Ticknor books in the Boston Public
Library, such single books are fifteeners or the rarest Americana. Yet it
may be questioned whether a library does well to redescribe books already
fully described by Hain, Harrisse, Thiele, Trömmel, Stevens, or Sabin. A
simple reference to these works will generally suffice (§ 261).
208. Supply the proper accents if they are not given in the title.
In French and Greek titles printed in capitals the accents are often
omitted. In the titles of rare books, copied exactly, accents should not be
supplied.
209. Use [ ] only for words added to the title, and ( ) to express
inclusion.
Ex.
Talbot, E. A. Five years’ residence in Canada, [1818–23].
Maguire, J. F. Canada. (In his Irish in America. 1868.)
Bale, J. Kinge John, a play; ed. by J. P. Collier. Westm., 1838.
4º. (Camden Soc., v. 2.)
210. If any title contains [ ] or ( ) omit them, using commas
instead.
One sign should never be used to express two things, if that can be
avoided; each should have one definite meaning. Also alter — into , or ;
or . as the context may require.
211. Use italics for the words See or See also in references, In and
In his in analytical, and for Same, Note, Contents, and Namely,
and for etc. when used to indicate omission of part of the title, also
for subdivisions of subjects (as France, History).
collections are the Prince and the Ticknor books in the Boston Public
Library, such single books are fifteeners or the rarest Americana. Yet it
may be questioned whether a library does well to redescribe books already
fully described by Hain, Harrisse, Thiele, Trömmel, Stevens, or Sabin. A
simple reference to these works will generally suffice (§ 261).
208. Supply the proper accents if they are not given in the title.
In French and Greek titles printed in capitals the accents are often
omitted. In the titles of rare books, copied exactly, accents should not be
supplied.
209. Use [ ] only for words added to the title, and ( ) to express
inclusion.
Ex.
Talbot, E. A. Five years’ residence in Canada, [1818–23].
Maguire, J. F. Canada. (In his Irish in America. 1868.)
Bale, J. Kinge John, a play; ed. by J. P. Collier. Westm., 1838.
4º. (Camden Soc., v. 2.)
210. If any title contains [ ] or ( ) omit them, using commas
instead.
One sign should never be used to express two things, if that can be
avoided; each should have one definite meaning. Also alter — into , or ;
or . as the context may require.
211. Use italics for the words See or See also in references, In and
In his in analytical, and for Same, Note, Contents, and Namely,
and for etc. when used to indicate omission of part of the title, also
for subdivisions of subjects (as France, History).
Page 168
212. In long Contents make the division of the volumes plain
either by heavy-faced volume-numbers or by giving each volume
a separate paragraph.
Anyone will recoil from the labor of looking through a long undivided
mass of small type; moreover the reader ought to be able to determine at
once in what volume any article whose title he is reading is contained. {83}
either by heavy-faced volume-numbers or by giving each volume
a separate paragraph.
Anyone will recoil from the labor of looking through a long undivided
mass of small type; moreover the reader ought to be able to determine at
once in what volume any article whose title he is reading is contained. {83}
Page 169
J. ARRANGEMENT. [ 6 5 ]
213. Arrange entries according to the English alphabet, whatever
the order of the alphabet in which a foreign name might have to be
entered in its original language.
Treat I and J, U and V, as separate letters; ij, at least in the older
Dutch names, should be arranged as y; do not put Spanish names
beginning with Ch, Ll, Ñ, after all other names beginning with C, L, and
N, as is done by the Spanish Academy, nor ä, å, æ, ö, ø, at the end of the
alphabet, as is done by the Swedes and Danes, nor the German ä, ö, ü, as
if written ae, oe, ue (except Goethe). If two names are spelled exactly
alike except for the umlaut (as Müller and Muller) arrange by the
forenames.
[65] On this subject consult Appendix IV, pp. 116–118; also p. 36–69 of Dr. C: Dziatzko’s
“Instruction für die Ordnung der Titel im alphabetischen Zettelkatalog der Univ.-Bibliothek zu
Breslau, Berlin, 1886,” 74 pp. O (the first 35 pp. are a treatise on Entry).
(a.) H EADINGS.
214. When the same word serves for several kinds of heading let
the order be the following: person, place, followed by subject
(except person or place), form, and title.
Arrangement must be arbitrary. This order is easy to remember,
because it follows the course of cataloguing; we put down first the author,
then the title. The subject and form, expressed sometimes in more than
one word, and the title, almost always having more than one word, must
be arranged among themselves by the usual rules. Of course, the person
considered as a subject can not be separated from the person as author. As
the place may be either author or subject or both, it may come between the
two.
213. Arrange entries according to the English alphabet, whatever
the order of the alphabet in which a foreign name might have to be
entered in its original language.
Treat I and J, U and V, as separate letters; ij, at least in the older
Dutch names, should be arranged as y; do not put Spanish names
beginning with Ch, Ll, Ñ, after all other names beginning with C, L, and
N, as is done by the Spanish Academy, nor ä, å, æ, ö, ø, at the end of the
alphabet, as is done by the Swedes and Danes, nor the German ä, ö, ü, as
if written ae, oe, ue (except Goethe). If two names are spelled exactly
alike except for the umlaut (as Müller and Muller) arrange by the
forenames.
[65] On this subject consult Appendix IV, pp. 116–118; also p. 36–69 of Dr. C: Dziatzko’s
“Instruction für die Ordnung der Titel im alphabetischen Zettelkatalog der Univ.-Bibliothek zu
Breslau, Berlin, 1886,” 74 pp. O (the first 35 pp. are a treatise on Entry).
(a.) H EADINGS.
214. When the same word serves for several kinds of heading let
the order be the following: person, place, followed by subject
(except person or place), form, and title.
Arrangement must be arbitrary. This order is easy to remember,
because it follows the course of cataloguing; we put down first the author,
then the title. The subject and form, expressed sometimes in more than
one word, and the title, almost always having more than one word, must
be arranged among themselves by the usual rules. Of course, the person
considered as a subject can not be separated from the person as author. As
the place may be either author or subject or both, it may come between the
two.
Page 170
Ex.
Washington, George. (person)
Washington, D. C. (place)
Homes, H. A. (person)
Homes family. (persons)
Homes. (subject)
Homes and shrines. (title)
215. Forenames used as headings precede surnames.
Ex.
Christian II.
Christian, James.
Christian art.
Francis II.
Francis, Abraham.
Francis and Jane.
216. Headings like Charles, George, Henry, when very numerous,
must be divided into classes, in this order: Saints, Popes,
Emperors, Kings, Princes and Noblemen, others. The Saints are
subarranged by their usual appellatives, the Popes by their
number, Sovereigns and Sovereign princes in alphabetical order of
countries, and under countries numerically. Other persons are
subarranged by their usual appellatives, neglecting the
prepositions. [66]
[66] So that Thomas de Insula and Thomas Insulanus may not be separated.
Ex.
Peter, Saint.
Peter, Pope.
Peter the Great, Emperor of Russia.
Washington, George. (person)
Washington, D. C. (place)
Homes, H. A. (person)
Homes family. (persons)
Homes. (subject)
Homes and shrines. (title)
215. Forenames used as headings precede surnames.
Ex.
Christian II.
Christian, James.
Christian art.
Francis II.
Francis, Abraham.
Francis and Jane.
216. Headings like Charles, George, Henry, when very numerous,
must be divided into classes, in this order: Saints, Popes,
Emperors, Kings, Princes and Noblemen, others. The Saints are
subarranged by their usual appellatives, the Popes by their
number, Sovereigns and Sovereign princes in alphabetical order of
countries, and under countries numerically. Other persons are
subarranged by their usual appellatives, neglecting the
prepositions. [66]
[66] So that Thomas de Insula and Thomas Insulanus may not be separated.
Ex.
Peter, Saint.
Peter, Pope.
Peter the Great, Emperor of Russia.
Page 171
Peter II. of Aragon.
Peter III. of Aragon.
Peter I. of Portugal.
Peter, Duke of Newcastle.
Peter, of Groningen, enthusiast. See Pieter.
Peter, John Henry.
Peter, Lake.
Peter, Mt.
Peter Lewis, a true tale.
Peter-Hansen, Erik.
When there are two appellatives coming in different parts of the
alphabet, refer from the rejected one, as Thomas Cantuariensis. See
Thomas Becket.
217. Arrange proper names beginning with M’, Mc, St., Ste. as if
spelled Mac, Saint, Sainte.
Because they are so pronounced. But L’ is not arranged as La or Le,
nor O’ as if it stood for Of, because they are not so pronounced.
218. In a card catalogue mix in one alphabet names that differ
slightly in spelling and come close together in the alphabet.
Ex. Clark and Clarke, and the French names beginning with Saint and
Sainte. The names should be spelled correctly, but the difference of
spelling disregarded by the arranger. But the exceptional order should be
clearly indicated. A guide block should have the inscription Clark and
Clarke, and there should be a reference guide block, Clarke. See Clark.
The most common spelling should go first; if the forms are equally used,
let that precede that comes first in alphabetical order.
219. Arrange by the forename headings in which the family name
is the same.
No attention is to be paid to prefixes, as Bp., Capt., Dr., Hon., Sir,
Fräulein, Miss, Mlle., Mme., Mrs., or to suffixes, as D.D., F.R.S., LL.D.,
Peter III. of Aragon.
Peter I. of Portugal.
Peter, Duke of Newcastle.
Peter, of Groningen, enthusiast. See Pieter.
Peter, John Henry.
Peter, Lake.
Peter, Mt.
Peter Lewis, a true tale.
Peter-Hansen, Erik.
When there are two appellatives coming in different parts of the
alphabet, refer from the rejected one, as Thomas Cantuariensis. See
Thomas Becket.
217. Arrange proper names beginning with M’, Mc, St., Ste. as if
spelled Mac, Saint, Sainte.
Because they are so pronounced. But L’ is not arranged as La or Le,
nor O’ as if it stood for Of, because they are not so pronounced.
218. In a card catalogue mix in one alphabet names that differ
slightly in spelling and come close together in the alphabet.
Ex. Clark and Clarke, and the French names beginning with Saint and
Sainte. The names should be spelled correctly, but the difference of
spelling disregarded by the arranger. But the exceptional order should be
clearly indicated. A guide block should have the inscription Clark and
Clarke, and there should be a reference guide block, Clarke. See Clark.
The most common spelling should go first; if the forms are equally used,
let that precede that comes first in alphabetical order.
219. Arrange by the forename headings in which the family name
is the same.
No attention is to be paid to prefixes, as Bp., Capt., Dr., Hon., Sir,
Fräulein, Miss, Mlle., Mme., Mrs., or to suffixes, as D.D., F.R.S., LL.D.,
Page 172
etc. In regard to Hungarian names, observe that the name appears on the
title-page as it does in a catalogue, the family name first, followed by the
Christian name; as, “Elbeszélések; irta báró Eötvös Jozsef.”
220. When the forenames are the same arrange chronologically.
Again, no attention is to be paid to the titles Sir, etc. The alphabetical
principle is of no use here because no one can know beforehand which of
many possible titles we have taken to arrange by, whereas some one may
know when the author whom he is seeking lived. Of course
Brown, T. L., comes before
Brown, Thomas, for the same reason that
Brown comes before
Browne.
221. Forenames not generally used should be neglected in the
arrangement.
When an author is generally known by one of several forenames he
will be looked for by that alone, and that alone should determine the
arrangement, at least in a card catalogue. Instances are: Agassiz, (J:) L:
(Rudolph), Cleveland, (Stephen) Grover, Collins, (W:) Wilkie, Cook,
(Flavius Josephus known as) Joseph, Dobson, (H:) Austin, Doré, (Paul)
Gustav. The form should be
Harte, Bret (full name Francis Bret), or Harte, Bret (in full
Francis Bret).
Make references whenever the omission of a name will change the
alphabetical arrangement, as from Müller, F: Max, to Müller, Max.
But if they are counted in arranging they should be spaced or
parenthesized, because when there are several persons with the same
family name the spacing or parenthesizing assists the eye in picking out
the right one. Thus if we have
Franklin, John, d. 1759,
Franklin, Sir John, d. 1863,
Franklin, John Andrew,
Franklin, John Charles,
title-page as it does in a catalogue, the family name first, followed by the
Christian name; as, “Elbeszélések; irta báró Eötvös Jozsef.”
220. When the forenames are the same arrange chronologically.
Again, no attention is to be paid to the titles Sir, etc. The alphabetical
principle is of no use here because no one can know beforehand which of
many possible titles we have taken to arrange by, whereas some one may
know when the author whom he is seeking lived. Of course
Brown, T. L., comes before
Brown, Thomas, for the same reason that
Brown comes before
Browne.
221. Forenames not generally used should be neglected in the
arrangement.
When an author is generally known by one of several forenames he
will be looked for by that alone, and that alone should determine the
arrangement, at least in a card catalogue. Instances are: Agassiz, (J:) L:
(Rudolph), Cleveland, (Stephen) Grover, Collins, (W:) Wilkie, Cook,
(Flavius Josephus known as) Joseph, Dobson, (H:) Austin, Doré, (Paul)
Gustav. The form should be
Harte, Bret (full name Francis Bret), or Harte, Bret (in full
Francis Bret).
Make references whenever the omission of a name will change the
alphabetical arrangement, as from Müller, F: Max, to Müller, Max.
But if they are counted in arranging they should be spaced or
parenthesized, because when there are several persons with the same
family name the spacing or parenthesizing assists the eye in picking out
the right one. Thus if we have
Franklin, John, d. 1759,
Franklin, Sir John, d. 1863,
Franklin, John Andrew,
Franklin, John Charles,
Page 173
Franklin, John D a v i d,
the reader not knowing of the name David would expect to find the last
among the simple Johns, but seeing the David spaced would understand
that it was a rarely used name. This supposes that he knows the system,
but one can not have a condensed catalogue without obliging the reader to
learn how to use it. (See § 140.) {85}
222. If an author uses both the shorter and the longer forms in
different works and yet is decidedly better known by the shorter,
arrange by that.
Ex. Müller, Max (in full F: Max). Otherwise give and arrange by all
the names.
223. If a person’s forenames occur differently in different books or
different authorities, or occur in a different order, or the person has
changed one or more of his forenames, arrange by one form (the
best known or the latest) and refer from the others if alphabetically
separated.
224. Arrange a nobleman’s title, under which entry is made, and
the name of a bishop’s see, from which reference is made to the
family name, among the personal names, not with the places.
Ex.
London, Alfred.
London, David, Bp. of.
London, John.
London, Conn.
London, Eng.
not
London, John.
London, David, Bp. of.
the reader not knowing of the name David would expect to find the last
among the simple Johns, but seeing the David spaced would understand
that it was a rarely used name. This supposes that he knows the system,
but one can not have a condensed catalogue without obliging the reader to
learn how to use it. (See § 140.) {85}
222. If an author uses both the shorter and the longer forms in
different works and yet is decidedly better known by the shorter,
arrange by that.
Ex. Müller, Max (in full F: Max). Otherwise give and arrange by all
the names.
223. If a person’s forenames occur differently in different books or
different authorities, or occur in a different order, or the person has
changed one or more of his forenames, arrange by one form (the
best known or the latest) and refer from the others if alphabetically
separated.
224. Arrange a nobleman’s title, under which entry is made, and
the name of a bishop’s see, from which reference is made to the
family name, among the personal names, not with the places.
Ex.
London, Alfred.
London, David, Bp. of.
London, John.
London, Conn.
London, Eng.
not
London, John.
London, David, Bp. of.
Page 174
London, Conn.
nor
London, John.
London, Conn.
London, David, Bp. of.
London, Eng.
Danby, John.
Danby, Thomas Osborne, Earl of.
Danby, Wm.
Danby, Eng.
Holland, C.
Holland, H: E. Fox-Vassal, 4th Baron.
Holland, H: R. Fox-Vassal, 3d Baron.
Holland [the country].
225. The possessive case singular should be arranged with the
plural.
The alphabet demands this, and I see no reason to make an exception
which can not be made in foreign languages.
Bride of Lammermoor.
Brides and bridals.
Bride’s choice.
Boys’ and girls’ book.
Boy’s King Arthur.
Boys of ’76.
226. Arrange Greek and Latin personal names by their
patronymics or other appellatives.
Ex.
Dionysius.
Dionysius Areopagita.
Dionysius Chalcidensis.
Dionysius Genuensis.
nor
London, John.
London, Conn.
London, David, Bp. of.
London, Eng.
Danby, John.
Danby, Thomas Osborne, Earl of.
Danby, Wm.
Danby, Eng.
Holland, C.
Holland, H: E. Fox-Vassal, 4th Baron.
Holland, H: R. Fox-Vassal, 3d Baron.
Holland [the country].
225. The possessive case singular should be arranged with the
plural.
The alphabet demands this, and I see no reason to make an exception
which can not be made in foreign languages.
Bride of Lammermoor.
Brides and bridals.
Bride’s choice.
Boys’ and girls’ book.
Boy’s King Arthur.
Boys of ’76.
226. Arrange Greek and Latin personal names by their
patronymics or other appellatives.
Ex.
Dionysius.
Dionysius Areopagita.
Dionysius Chalcidensis.
Dionysius Genuensis.
Page 175
227. Arrange English personal names compounded with prefixes
as single words; also those foreign names in which the prefix is
not transposed (see § 24).
Ex.
Demonstration.
De Montfort.
Demophilus.
De Morgan.
Demosthenes.
Other such names are Ap Thomas, Des Barres, Du Chaillu, Fitz Allen,
La Motte Fouqué, Le Sage, Mac Fingal, O’Neal, Saint-Réal, Sainte-
Beuve, Van Buren.
This is the universal custom, founded on the fact that the prefixes are
often not separated in printing from the following part of the name. It
would, of course, be wrong to have Demorgan in one place and De
Morgan in another. {86}
228. Arrange personal names compounded of two names with or
without a hyphen after the first name but before the next longer
word.
Ex.
Fonte, Bart. de.
Fonte Resbecq, Auguste.
Fontenay, Louis.
Fontenay Mareuil, François.
229. In the preliminary card catalogue it is best to arrange these by
the first name, neglecting the second entirely [67] and subarranging
by forenames.
The reason is (1) that authors do not always use the second part of
their names, and (2) that the single alphabet is easier to use in a card
as single words; also those foreign names in which the prefix is
not transposed (see § 24).
Ex.
Demonstration.
De Montfort.
Demophilus.
De Morgan.
Demosthenes.
Other such names are Ap Thomas, Des Barres, Du Chaillu, Fitz Allen,
La Motte Fouqué, Le Sage, Mac Fingal, O’Neal, Saint-Réal, Sainte-
Beuve, Van Buren.
This is the universal custom, founded on the fact that the prefixes are
often not separated in printing from the following part of the name. It
would, of course, be wrong to have Demorgan in one place and De
Morgan in another. {86}
228. Arrange personal names compounded of two names with or
without a hyphen after the first name but before the next longer
word.
Ex.
Fonte, Bart. de.
Fonte Resbecq, Auguste.
Fontenay, Louis.
Fontenay Mareuil, François.
229. In the preliminary card catalogue it is best to arrange these by
the first name, neglecting the second entirely [67] and subarranging
by forenames.
The reason is (1) that authors do not always use the second part of
their names, and (2) that the single alphabet is easier to use in a card
Page 176
catalogue.
Ex.
Halliwell (afterwards Halliwell-Phillipps), James Orchard.
[67] Except when the first family names and forenames of two
persons are the same, when the one with a second part will come
after the other; but if both have a second part, subarrange by these
second parts when they differ.
230. Arrange compound names of places as separate words.
Ex.
New, John.
New Hampshire.
New legion of Satan.
New Sydenham Society.
New York.
Newark.
Newfoundland.
Newspapers.
not
New, John.
New legion of Satan.
Newark.
Newfoundland.
New Hampshire.
Newspapers.
New Sydenham Society.
New York.
231. Arrange names of societies as separate words.
See New Sydenham Society in the list above.
232. Arrange as single words compound words which are printed
as one.
Ex.
Halliwell (afterwards Halliwell-Phillipps), James Orchard.
[67] Except when the first family names and forenames of two
persons are the same, when the one with a second part will come
after the other; but if both have a second part, subarrange by these
second parts when they differ.
230. Arrange compound names of places as separate words.
Ex.
New, John.
New Hampshire.
New legion of Satan.
New Sydenham Society.
New York.
Newark.
Newfoundland.
Newspapers.
not
New, John.
New legion of Satan.
Newark.
Newfoundland.
New Hampshire.
Newspapers.
New Sydenham Society.
New York.
231. Arrange names of societies as separate words.
See New Sydenham Society in the list above.
232. Arrange as single words compound words which are printed
as one.
Page 177
Ex. Bookseller, Bookplates. Sometimes such words are printed on
title-pages as two words; in such case do the same in copying the title, but
if the word is used as a heading follow the authority of a dictionary; each
library should select some one dictionary as its standard.
233. Arrange hyphened words as if separate.
Ex.
Happy home.
Happy-Thought Hall.
Happy thoughts.
Home and hearth.
Home rule.
Homely traits.
Homer.
Sing, pseud.
Sing, James.
Sing, James, pseud.
Sing-Sing Prison.
Singapore.
Singing.
Grave and Reverend Club.
Grave County.
Grave Creek.
Grave-digger.
Grave-mounds.
Grave objections.
Grave de Mézeray, Antoine.
Gravel.
Gravestone.
Graveyard.
Out and about.
Out in the cold, a song.
Out-of-door Parliament.
Outer darkness, The. {87}
title-pages as two words; in such case do the same in copying the title, but
if the word is used as a heading follow the authority of a dictionary; each
library should select some one dictionary as its standard.
233. Arrange hyphened words as if separate.
Ex.
Happy home.
Happy-Thought Hall.
Happy thoughts.
Home and hearth.
Home rule.
Homely traits.
Homer.
Sing, pseud.
Sing, James.
Sing, James, pseud.
Sing-Sing Prison.
Singapore.
Singing.
Grave and Reverend Club.
Grave County.
Grave Creek.
Grave-digger.
Grave-mounds.
Grave objections.
Grave de Mézeray, Antoine.
Gravel.
Gravestone.
Graveyard.
Out and about.
Out in the cold, a song.
Out-of-door Parliament.
Outer darkness, The. {87}
Page 178
234. Arrange pseudonyms after the corresponding real name.
Ex.
Andrew, pseud.
Andrew, St.
Andrew, St., pseud.
Andrew, John.
Andrew, John, pseud.
Andrew, John Albion.
235. Arrange incomplete names by the letters. If the same letters
are followed by different signs, if there are no forenames, arrange
in the order of the complexity of signs; but if there are forenames
arrange by them.
Ex.
Far from the world.
Far...
Far***
Far***, B.F.
Far..., J. B.
Farr, John.
236. If signs without any letters are used as headings (§ 57) (as ...
or †††) put them all before the first entries under the letter A.
237. The arrangement of title-entries is first by the heading words;
if they are the same, then by the next word; if that is the same, by
the next; and so on. Every word, articles and prepositions
included, is to be regarded; but not a transposed article.
Ex.
Uncovenanted mercies.
Under a cloud.
Ex.
Andrew, pseud.
Andrew, St.
Andrew, St., pseud.
Andrew, John.
Andrew, John, pseud.
Andrew, John Albion.
235. Arrange incomplete names by the letters. If the same letters
are followed by different signs, if there are no forenames, arrange
in the order of the complexity of signs; but if there are forenames
arrange by them.
Ex.
Far from the world.
Far...
Far***
Far***, B.F.
Far..., J. B.
Farr, John.
236. If signs without any letters are used as headings (§ 57) (as ...
or †††) put them all before the first entries under the letter A.
237. The arrangement of title-entries is first by the heading words;
if they are the same, then by the next word; if that is the same, by
the next; and so on. Every word, articles and prepositions
included, is to be regarded; but not a transposed article.
Ex.
Uncovenanted mercies.
Under a cloud.
Page 179
Under the ban.
Under the greenwood tree; a novel.
Under the greenwood tree; a poem.
Under which king.
Undone task, The.
Undone task done.
Here the transposed The is non-existent for the arranger.
It makes no difference whether the words are connected with one
another in sense or not; the searcher should not be compelled to think of
that. Let the arrangement be by words as ordinarily printed. Thus Home
rule is one idea but it is two words, and its place must be determined
primarily by its first word Home, which brings it before Homeless. If it
were printed Homerule it would come after Homeless. Similarly Art
amateur is one phrase, but as the first word Art is followed by a word
beginning with am, it must come before Art and artists, although its parts
are more closely connected than the parts of the latter phrase.
The French d’ and l’ are not to be treated as part of the following
word:
Ex.
Art d’économiser.
Art d’être grandpère.
Art d’instruire.
Art de faire.
Art de l’instruction.
Art de linguistique.
Art des mines.
Art digne.
not
Art de faire.
Art de linguistique.
Art de l’instruction.
Art d’économiser.
Art des mines.
Art d’être grandpère.
Art digne.
Under the greenwood tree; a novel.
Under the greenwood tree; a poem.
Under which king.
Undone task, The.
Undone task done.
Here the transposed The is non-existent for the arranger.
It makes no difference whether the words are connected with one
another in sense or not; the searcher should not be compelled to think of
that. Let the arrangement be by words as ordinarily printed. Thus Home
rule is one idea but it is two words, and its place must be determined
primarily by its first word Home, which brings it before Homeless. If it
were printed Homerule it would come after Homeless. Similarly Art
amateur is one phrase, but as the first word Art is followed by a word
beginning with am, it must come before Art and artists, although its parts
are more closely connected than the parts of the latter phrase.
The French d’ and l’ are not to be treated as part of the following
word:
Ex.
Art d’économiser.
Art d’être grandpère.
Art d’instruire.
Art de faire.
Art de l’instruction.
Art de linguistique.
Art des mines.
Art digne.
not
Art de faire.
Art de linguistique.
Art de l’instruction.
Art d’économiser.
Art des mines.
Art d’être grandpère.
Art digne.
Page 180
Art d’instruire. {88}
238. Arrange titles beginning with numeral figures (not expressing
the number of the work in a series, § 244) as if the figures were
written out in the language of the rest of the title.
Ex. 100 deutscher Männer = Ein hundert deutsche Männer; 1812 =
Mil huit cent douze.
239. Arrange abbreviations as if spelled in full; but elisions as they
are printed.
Ex. Dr., M., Mlle., Mme., Mr., Mrs., as Doctor, Monsieur, etc.
But
Who’d be a king?
Who killed Cock Robin?
Who’s to blame?
The arrangement recommended in §§ 227–232 suits the eye best
and requires as little knowledge or thought as any to use. The exception
made in § 227 is required by universal practice and by the fact that a very
large part of the personal names beginning with prefixes are commonly
printed as one word. Names of places beginning with New, Old, Red,
Blue, Green, etc. (which might be likened to the prefixes De, Des, Du,
etc., and made the ground of a similar exception), are much less
frequently printed as one, and when they are the accent is different.
Moreover the words New, Old, etc., have an independent meaning and
occur as personal names, first words of titles, or of the names of societies,
as in the examples in § 230. The reason for separating New Hampshire
and Newark in the first example is patent to every consulter at a glance;
the reason for the different positions of New legion and New York in the
second example would not be clear and would have to be thought out; and
it is not well to demand thought from those who use the catalogue if it can
be avoided.
(b.) T ITLES.
238. Arrange titles beginning with numeral figures (not expressing
the number of the work in a series, § 244) as if the figures were
written out in the language of the rest of the title.
Ex. 100 deutscher Männer = Ein hundert deutsche Männer; 1812 =
Mil huit cent douze.
239. Arrange abbreviations as if spelled in full; but elisions as they
are printed.
Ex. Dr., M., Mlle., Mme., Mr., Mrs., as Doctor, Monsieur, etc.
But
Who’d be a king?
Who killed Cock Robin?
Who’s to blame?
The arrangement recommended in §§ 227–232 suits the eye best
and requires as little knowledge or thought as any to use. The exception
made in § 227 is required by universal practice and by the fact that a very
large part of the personal names beginning with prefixes are commonly
printed as one word. Names of places beginning with New, Old, Red,
Blue, Green, etc. (which might be likened to the prefixes De, Des, Du,
etc., and made the ground of a similar exception), are much less
frequently printed as one, and when they are the accent is different.
Moreover the words New, Old, etc., have an independent meaning and
occur as personal names, first words of titles, or of the names of societies,
as in the examples in § 230. The reason for separating New Hampshire
and Newark in the first example is patent to every consulter at a glance;
the reason for the different positions of New legion and New York in the
second example would not be clear and would have to be thought out; and
it is not well to demand thought from those who use the catalogue if it can
be avoided.
(b.) T ITLES.
Page 181
240. Under an author’s name adopt the following order: (1)
Complete (or nearly complete) works, (2) Extracts from the
complete works, (3) Single works, whether by him alone or
written in conjunction with another author, (4) Works about him.
Nos. 1–3 come first as belonging to the author-catalogue; 4 comes last
as belonging to the subject-catalogue.
It is better to let the smaller collections come in their alphabetical
place with the single works. The single works of a voluminous author (as
Aristotle, Cicero, Homer, Shakespere) should be so printed that the
different titles will strike the eye readily. If the “contents” of the collected
words are not printed alphabetically, it is well to insert under the titles of
the chief single works a reference to the particular volumes of the
collections in which they are to be found. (See Boston Athenæum catal.,
art. Goethe.) Two works published together are arranged by the first title,
with reference from the second.
Extracts from single works come immediately after the respective
works.
A spurious work is arranged with the single works, but with a note
stating the spuriousness. But if the author’s name is used as a pseudonym
the entry should have a separate heading after all the works; as, Browne,
H. History. Browne, H., pseud. Stones from the old quarry. See
Ellison, H.
If there are only two joint authors both may appear in the heading, but
the entry should be arranged among the works written by the first author
alone; if there are more than two the heading may be made in the form
Smith, John, and others. The usual practice hitherto has been to arrange
entries by joint authors after the works written by the first author alone,
and this was recommended in the first edition in regard both to the form
of the heading and the arrangement; but although it is pleasing to a
classifying mind, it is practically objectionable because a reader, not
knowing that the book he is looking for is a joint production, and not
finding it in the first {89} series of titles, may suppose that it is not in the
Complete (or nearly complete) works, (2) Extracts from the
complete works, (3) Single works, whether by him alone or
written in conjunction with another author, (4) Works about him.
Nos. 1–3 come first as belonging to the author-catalogue; 4 comes last
as belonging to the subject-catalogue.
It is better to let the smaller collections come in their alphabetical
place with the single works. The single works of a voluminous author (as
Aristotle, Cicero, Homer, Shakespere) should be so printed that the
different titles will strike the eye readily. If the “contents” of the collected
words are not printed alphabetically, it is well to insert under the titles of
the chief single works a reference to the particular volumes of the
collections in which they are to be found. (See Boston Athenæum catal.,
art. Goethe.) Two works published together are arranged by the first title,
with reference from the second.
Extracts from single works come immediately after the respective
works.
A spurious work is arranged with the single works, but with a note
stating the spuriousness. But if the author’s name is used as a pseudonym
the entry should have a separate heading after all the works; as, Browne,
H. History. Browne, H., pseud. Stones from the old quarry. See
Ellison, H.
If there are only two joint authors both may appear in the heading, but
the entry should be arranged among the works written by the first author
alone; if there are more than two the heading may be made in the form
Smith, John, and others. The usual practice hitherto has been to arrange
entries by joint authors after the works written by the first author alone,
and this was recommended in the first edition in regard both to the form
of the heading and the arrangement; but although it is pleasing to a
classifying mind, it is practically objectionable because a reader, not
knowing that the book he is looking for is a joint production, and not
finding it in the first {89} series of titles, may suppose that it is not in the
Page 182
library. This danger is greatest in a card catalogue, where it entirely
overweighs the somewhat visionary advantage of the separate
arrangement. The arrangement of a card catalogue should be as simple as
possible, because the reader having only one card at a time under his eyes
can not easily see what the arrangement is. On the printed page, where he
takes in many titles at a glance, more classification can be ventured upon;
there the danger is confined to the more voluminous authors; where there
are few titles the consulter will read them all and so will not miss any. On
the printed page, too, the mixing in of joint authors interrupts to the eye
the alphabetical order of titles; e. g.,
Dod, T. Anamites and their country.
— and others. Barracouta.
— Carriboo, a voyage to the interior.
— and White, E. Dahomey and the slave trade.
— Elephanta, its caves and their images.
This trifling inconvenience can be easily avoided, however, by
including the second name in the title; e. g.,
Dod, T. Anamites.
— Barracouta, by D. [and others].
— Carriboo.
— Dahomey, by Dod and E. White.
— Elephanta.
When the form Smith, John, and others is used, Full will give a list of
the “others” in a note. They are not put into a heading merely because
there is not room for many names on the first line of a card, and in a
printed catalogue the information seems more in place in a note than in a
very long heading.
241. In the order of titles take account of every word except initial
articles. If two titles have the same words arrange by date of
imprint, the earliest first.
Ex.
Address of Southern delegates in Congress.
Address of the people of Great Britain.
overweighs the somewhat visionary advantage of the separate
arrangement. The arrangement of a card catalogue should be as simple as
possible, because the reader having only one card at a time under his eyes
can not easily see what the arrangement is. On the printed page, where he
takes in many titles at a glance, more classification can be ventured upon;
there the danger is confined to the more voluminous authors; where there
are few titles the consulter will read them all and so will not miss any. On
the printed page, too, the mixing in of joint authors interrupts to the eye
the alphabetical order of titles; e. g.,
Dod, T. Anamites and their country.
— and others. Barracouta.
— Carriboo, a voyage to the interior.
— and White, E. Dahomey and the slave trade.
— Elephanta, its caves and their images.
This trifling inconvenience can be easily avoided, however, by
including the second name in the title; e. g.,
Dod, T. Anamites.
— Barracouta, by D. [and others].
— Carriboo.
— Dahomey, by Dod and E. White.
— Elephanta.
When the form Smith, John, and others is used, Full will give a list of
the “others” in a note. They are not put into a heading merely because
there is not room for many names on the first line of a card, and in a
printed catalogue the information seems more in place in a note than in a
very long heading.
241. In the order of titles take account of every word except initial
articles. If two titles have the same words arrange by date of
imprint, the earliest first.
Ex.
Address of Southern delegates in Congress.
Address of the people of Great Britain.
Page 183
Address of twenty thousand loyal Protestant apprentices.
Address on national education.
Address to a provincial bashaw.
Address to Christians, recommending the distribution.
Husson, F. Vie d’une grande dame.
— Vie dans le Sahel.
Mason, T. The corner stone.
— A wall of defence.
242. Arrange different editions of the same works chronologically.
Ex.
Homerus. Carmina [Gr.]; cum annot., cur. C. G. Heyne. Lips.,
1802. 8 v. 8º.
— Same. [Gr.]; cum notis et proleg. R. P. Knight. Londini,
1820. 4º.
— Same. [Gr.]; ed. J. Bekker. Bonnae, 1858. 2 v. 8º.
Bartlett, John. Collection of familiar quotations. 3d ed.
Camb., 1860. 12º.
— Same. 4th ed. Boston, 1863. 12º.
— Same. 8th ed. Boston, 1882. 16º.
243. Undated editions should have the date supplied as nearly as
may be; absolutely undatable editions should precede dated
editions.
244. Disregard numerals commencing a title before such words as
Report, Annual report.
Not
First report,
Fourth report,
General account,
Second report.
but
General account.
Address on national education.
Address to a provincial bashaw.
Address to Christians, recommending the distribution.
Husson, F. Vie d’une grande dame.
— Vie dans le Sahel.
Mason, T. The corner stone.
— A wall of defence.
242. Arrange different editions of the same works chronologically.
Ex.
Homerus. Carmina [Gr.]; cum annot., cur. C. G. Heyne. Lips.,
1802. 8 v. 8º.
— Same. [Gr.]; cum notis et proleg. R. P. Knight. Londini,
1820. 4º.
— Same. [Gr.]; ed. J. Bekker. Bonnae, 1858. 2 v. 8º.
Bartlett, John. Collection of familiar quotations. 3d ed.
Camb., 1860. 12º.
— Same. 4th ed. Boston, 1863. 12º.
— Same. 8th ed. Boston, 1882. 16º.
243. Undated editions should have the date supplied as nearly as
may be; absolutely undatable editions should precede dated
editions.
244. Disregard numerals commencing a title before such words as
Report, Annual report.
Not
First report,
Fourth report,
General account,
Second report.
but
General account.
Page 184
1st, 2d, 4th report. {90}
245. Arrange translations immediately after the original, prefixing
the name of the language into which they are made; if there are
several, arrange the languages alphabetically.
Ex.
Cicero. De officiis. [Various editions, arranged
chronologically.]
— Same. Erkl. von O. Heine. Berlin, 1857. 8º.
— Eng. Offices; tr. by C. R. Edmonds. London, 1850. 8º.
— French. Les offices; tr. par [G. Dubois]. Paris, 1691. 8º.
If the original is not in the library the translation may be arranged
either by the first words of its own title or by the first words of the
original title prefixed in brackets. The latter order is to be preferred when
most of the other titles are in the original language. When the list of
entries is long a reference should be made from any title of a translation
which is alphabetically much separated from its original back to the
original title under which it is to be found.
Ex.
Hofland, Mrs. B. (W. H.). [The son of a genius. French:]
Ludovico; tr. par Mme. de Montolieu.
Dudevant. L’homme de neige.
— Eng. The snow man.
[58 titles interposed.]
— The snow man. See, back, L’homme de neige.
An original text with a translation is to be arranged as if alone, but if
there are many editions make a reference from among the translations to
the original. If there are translations into two languages in a volume,
arrange by the first, and, if necessary, refer from the second.
Polyglots precede all other editions.
246. Divide the works about a person when numerous by
collecting the titles of lives into a group.
245. Arrange translations immediately after the original, prefixing
the name of the language into which they are made; if there are
several, arrange the languages alphabetically.
Ex.
Cicero. De officiis. [Various editions, arranged
chronologically.]
— Same. Erkl. von O. Heine. Berlin, 1857. 8º.
— Eng. Offices; tr. by C. R. Edmonds. London, 1850. 8º.
— French. Les offices; tr. par [G. Dubois]. Paris, 1691. 8º.
If the original is not in the library the translation may be arranged
either by the first words of its own title or by the first words of the
original title prefixed in brackets. The latter order is to be preferred when
most of the other titles are in the original language. When the list of
entries is long a reference should be made from any title of a translation
which is alphabetically much separated from its original back to the
original title under which it is to be found.
Ex.
Hofland, Mrs. B. (W. H.). [The son of a genius. French:]
Ludovico; tr. par Mme. de Montolieu.
Dudevant. L’homme de neige.
— Eng. The snow man.
[58 titles interposed.]
— The snow man. See, back, L’homme de neige.
An original text with a translation is to be arranged as if alone, but if
there are many editions make a reference from among the translations to
the original. If there are translations into two languages in a volume,
arrange by the first, and, if necessary, refer from the second.
Polyglots precede all other editions.
246. Divide the works about a person when numerous by
collecting the titles of lives into a group.
Page 185
247. When a writer is voluminous insert the criticisms or notes on
or replies to each work after its title; otherwise give them
according to § 240, at the end of the article.
248. Arrange analyticals, when there are several for the same
article, chronologically, as being different editions.
Ex. Pretty, F. Prosperous voyage of Sir T. Cavendish. (In Purchas,
S. Pilgrims, v. 1, b. 2. 1625; — Harris, J. Col., v. 1. 1705; and v. 1.
1764; — Callander, J. Terra Austr., v. 1. 1768; — Hakluyt, R. Col.,
v. 4. 1811.)
249. If the library has a work both as part of another work and
independently, arrange in the probable order of publication.
Ex.
Cutter, C: A. Common sense in libraries. (In Library journal,
v. 14. 1889.)
— Same. (In American Library Assoc. Proceedings at St.
Louis, 1889.)
— Same, separated.
— Same. [Boston, 1889.] Q.
250. Under countries arrange titles as under any other author.
That is, put first the country’s own works (governmental publications),
then the works about the country; and as we put the criticisms on a
voluminous author after the separate writings to which they respectively
apply, so we put accounts of or attacks upon any branch of government
after the entry of the branch.
251. In arranging government publications make all necessary
divisions but avoid subdivision. {91}
or replies to each work after its title; otherwise give them
according to § 240, at the end of the article.
248. Arrange analyticals, when there are several for the same
article, chronologically, as being different editions.
Ex. Pretty, F. Prosperous voyage of Sir T. Cavendish. (In Purchas,
S. Pilgrims, v. 1, b. 2. 1625; — Harris, J. Col., v. 1. 1705; and v. 1.
1764; — Callander, J. Terra Austr., v. 1. 1768; — Hakluyt, R. Col.,
v. 4. 1811.)
249. If the library has a work both as part of another work and
independently, arrange in the probable order of publication.
Ex.
Cutter, C: A. Common sense in libraries. (In Library journal,
v. 14. 1889.)
— Same. (In American Library Assoc. Proceedings at St.
Louis, 1889.)
— Same, separated.
— Same. [Boston, 1889.] Q.
250. Under countries arrange titles as under any other author.
That is, put first the country’s own works (governmental publications),
then the works about the country; and as we put the criticisms on a
voluminous author after the separate writings to which they respectively
apply, so we put accounts of or attacks upon any branch of government
after the entry of the branch.
251. In arranging government publications make all necessary
divisions but avoid subdivision. {91}
Page 186
It is much clearer—and it is the dictionary plan—to make the parts of
a division themselves independent divisions, referring from the including
division to the subordinate one. E. g. (to take part of the headings under
United States):
Subordination.
United States.
Department of the Interior.
Bureau of Indian Affairs.
Patent Office.
Pension Office.
Public Land Office.
Department of the Navy.
Bureau of Navigation.
Hydrographic Office.
Naval Academy.
Naval Observatory.
Bureau of Navy-Yards and Docks.
Naval Asylum.
Department of War.
Adjutant-General’s Office.
Bureau of Engineers.
Bureau of Topographical Engineers.
Commissary-General’s Office.
Freedmen’s Bureau.
Military Academy.
Better order.
U. S.
Adjutant-General.
Bureau of Engineers.
Bureau of Indian Affairs.
Bureau of Navigation.
Bureau of Navy Yards and Docks.
Bureau of Topographical Engineers.
Commissary-General.
a division themselves independent divisions, referring from the including
division to the subordinate one. E. g. (to take part of the headings under
United States):
Subordination.
United States.
Department of the Interior.
Bureau of Indian Affairs.
Patent Office.
Pension Office.
Public Land Office.
Department of the Navy.
Bureau of Navigation.
Hydrographic Office.
Naval Academy.
Naval Observatory.
Bureau of Navy-Yards and Docks.
Naval Asylum.
Department of War.
Adjutant-General’s Office.
Bureau of Engineers.
Bureau of Topographical Engineers.
Commissary-General’s Office.
Freedmen’s Bureau.
Military Academy.
Better order.
U. S.
Adjutant-General.
Bureau of Engineers.
Bureau of Indian Affairs.
Bureau of Navigation.
Bureau of Navy Yards and Docks.
Bureau of Topographical Engineers.
Commissary-General.
Page 187
Department of the Interior.
Department of the Navy.
Department of War.
Freedmen’s Bureau.
Hydrographic Office.
Military Academy.
Naval Academy.
Naval Asylum.
Naval Observatory.
Patent Office.
Pension Office.
Public Lands.
The subordination of bureaus and offices to departments is adopted
simply for convenience, and is changed from time to time as the
exigencies of the public service demand. There is no corresponding
convenience in preserving such an order in a catalogue, but
inconvenience, especially in the case of the above-mentioned changes.
The alphabetical arrangement has here all its usual advantages without its
usual disadvantage of wide separation.
252. Insert a synopsis of the arrangement whenever there are
enough titles under a heading to require it.
This applies chiefly to the larger countries (as France, Great Britain,
United States), the more voluminous authors (as Cicero, Shakespeare),
one title-entry (Bible), and possibly some subjects not national. The
arrangement of titles under Bible will be governed by §§ 240, 242, 245,
and 247; but it can be best understood from an example in some catalogue
which has many titles under that heading. The synopsis in the Boston
Athenæum catalogue is as follows:
Whole Bibles (first Polyglots, then single languages arranged
alphabetically).
Works illustrating the whole Bible (under the heads Analysis,
Antiquities, Bibliography, Biography, Canon, Catechisms,
Department of the Navy.
Department of War.
Freedmen’s Bureau.
Hydrographic Office.
Military Academy.
Naval Academy.
Naval Asylum.
Naval Observatory.
Patent Office.
Pension Office.
Public Lands.
The subordination of bureaus and offices to departments is adopted
simply for convenience, and is changed from time to time as the
exigencies of the public service demand. There is no corresponding
convenience in preserving such an order in a catalogue, but
inconvenience, especially in the case of the above-mentioned changes.
The alphabetical arrangement has here all its usual advantages without its
usual disadvantage of wide separation.
252. Insert a synopsis of the arrangement whenever there are
enough titles under a heading to require it.
This applies chiefly to the larger countries (as France, Great Britain,
United States), the more voluminous authors (as Cicero, Shakespeare),
one title-entry (Bible), and possibly some subjects not national. The
arrangement of titles under Bible will be governed by §§ 240, 242, 245,
and 247; but it can be best understood from an example in some catalogue
which has many titles under that heading. The synopsis in the Boston
Athenæum catalogue is as follows:
Whole Bibles (first Polyglots, then single languages arranged
alphabetically).
Works illustrating the whole Bible (under the heads Analysis,
Antiquities, Bibliography, Biography, Canon, Catechisms,
Page 188
historical and theological, Commentaries, Concordances,
Criticism, Dictionaries, Evidences, authority, etc., Geography,
Hermeneutics, History, Inspiration, Introductions, Natural history,
Science and the Bible, Theology, morals, etc., Miscellaneous
illustrative works).
Selections from both Testaments.
Prophetical books of both Testaments.
Old Testament.
Illustrative works. {92}
Parts of the Old Testament (arranged in the order of the English
version), and works severally illustrating them.
Apocrypha.
New Testament.
Illustrative works.
Parts of the New Testament, and works illustrating them.
Under each part the order is: Editions of the original texts
chronologically arranged;—Versions, in the alphabetical order of the
languages;—Illustrative works.
(c.) C ONTENTS.
253. Arrange contents either in the order of the volumes or
alphabetically by the titles of the articles.
Alphabetical order.
Contents.
Argentile and Curan; a legendary drama, v. 2.
Art of painting, by Du Fresnoy, v. 3.
Caractacus; a dramatic poem, v. 2.
Chronological list of painters to 1689, v. 3.
Dryden’s preface to his translation of Du Fresnoy, v. 3.
Elegies, v. 1.
Elfrida; a dramatic poem, v. 2.
English garden, The, v. 1.
Epitaphs and inscriptions, v. 1.
Criticism, Dictionaries, Evidences, authority, etc., Geography,
Hermeneutics, History, Inspiration, Introductions, Natural history,
Science and the Bible, Theology, morals, etc., Miscellaneous
illustrative works).
Selections from both Testaments.
Prophetical books of both Testaments.
Old Testament.
Illustrative works. {92}
Parts of the Old Testament (arranged in the order of the English
version), and works severally illustrating them.
Apocrypha.
New Testament.
Illustrative works.
Parts of the New Testament, and works illustrating them.
Under each part the order is: Editions of the original texts
chronologically arranged;—Versions, in the alphabetical order of the
languages;—Illustrative works.
(c.) C ONTENTS.
253. Arrange contents either in the order of the volumes or
alphabetically by the titles of the articles.
Alphabetical order.
Contents.
Argentile and Curan; a legendary drama, v. 2.
Art of painting, by Du Fresnoy, v. 3.
Caractacus; a dramatic poem, v. 2.
Chronological list of painters to 1689, v. 3.
Dryden’s preface to his translation of Du Fresnoy, v. 3.
Elegies, v. 1.
Elfrida; a dramatic poem, v. 2.
English garden, The, v. 1.
Epitaphs and inscriptions, v. 1.
Page 189
Essay on the meaning of the word angel, as used by St. Paul, v.
4.
Essays on English church music, v. 3.
Examination of the prophecy in Matthew 24th, v. 4.
Hymns and psalms, v. 1.
Musæus: a monody to the memory of Mr. Pope, v. 1.
Odes, v. 1.
Pygmalion; a lyrical scene, v. 2.
Religio clerici, v. 1.
Sappho; a lyrical drama, v. 2.
Sermons, v. 4.
Sonnets, v. 1.
Volume order.
Contents.
Vol. 1. Musæus, a monody to the memory of Mr. Pope. —
Odes, sonnets, epitaphs and inscriptions, elegies. — The
English garden. — Religio clerici. — Hymns and psalms.
2. Elfrida, a dramatic poem. — Caractacus, a dramatic
poem. — Sappho. — Argentile and Curan, a legendary
drama. — Pygmalion, a lyrical scene. 3. Du Fresnoy’s art
of painting. — Dryden’s preface to his translation of Du
Fresnoy. — Chronological list of painters to 1689. — Essays
on English church music. 4. Sermons. — Essay on the
meaning of the word angel, as used by St. Paul. —
Examination of the prophecy in Matthew 24th.
It is evident how much much more compendious the second method
is. But there is no reason why an alphabetical “contents” should not be run
into a single paragraph.
The titles of novels and plays contained in any collection ought to be
entered in the main alphabet; it is difficult then to see the advantage of an
alphabetical arrangement of the same titles under the collection. Many
other collections are composed of works for which alphabetical order is
no gain, because the words of their titles are not mnemonic words, and it
is not worth while to take the trouble of arranging them; but there are
4.
Essays on English church music, v. 3.
Examination of the prophecy in Matthew 24th, v. 4.
Hymns and psalms, v. 1.
Musæus: a monody to the memory of Mr. Pope, v. 1.
Odes, v. 1.
Pygmalion; a lyrical scene, v. 2.
Religio clerici, v. 1.
Sappho; a lyrical drama, v. 2.
Sermons, v. 4.
Sonnets, v. 1.
Volume order.
Contents.
Vol. 1. Musæus, a monody to the memory of Mr. Pope. —
Odes, sonnets, epitaphs and inscriptions, elegies. — The
English garden. — Religio clerici. — Hymns and psalms.
2. Elfrida, a dramatic poem. — Caractacus, a dramatic
poem. — Sappho. — Argentile and Curan, a legendary
drama. — Pygmalion, a lyrical scene. 3. Du Fresnoy’s art
of painting. — Dryden’s preface to his translation of Du
Fresnoy. — Chronological list of painters to 1689. — Essays
on English church music. 4. Sermons. — Essay on the
meaning of the word angel, as used by St. Paul. —
Examination of the prophecy in Matthew 24th.
It is evident how much much more compendious the second method
is. But there is no reason why an alphabetical “contents” should not be run
into a single paragraph.
The titles of novels and plays contained in any collection ought to be
entered in the main alphabet; it is difficult then to see the advantage of an
alphabetical arrangement of the same titles under the collection. Many
other collections are composed of works for which alphabetical order is
no gain, because the words of their titles are not mnemonic words, and it
is not worth while to take the trouble of arranging them; but there are
Page 190
others composed of both classes, in which such order is very convenient.
{93}
(d.) S UBJECTS.
254. Care must be taken not to mix two subjects together because
their names are spelled in the same way.
Thus Grace before meals, Grace of body, Grace the musical term,
and Grace the theological term, must be four distinct headings.
255. Under subject-headings group titles topically when it can be
done, otherwise arrange them by the authors’ names.
Alphabetical arrangement by authors’ names is useful when a subject-
entry is a substitute for a title-entry, but otherwise is as useless as it is
inappropriate. If the author’s name is known the book should be looked
for under that, not under the subject; if it is not known, what good can an
arrangement by authors do? Sometimes, if one has forgotten the Christian
name of an author, it may be easier to find him under a subject than in a
crowd of Smiths or Joneses or Müllers, and this use of a subject-heading
is impaired by grouping or by chronological order; but such use is
infrequent, and the main design of a subject-entry should not be
subordinated to this side advantage.
It is even urged that it is harder to find a work treating of the subject in
any special way among subdivisions than when there is only one alphabet,
which is absurd. On the one hand one must look over a list of books
embracing five or six distinct divisions of a subject and select from titles
often ambiguous or provokingly uncommunicative those that seem likely
to treat of the matter in the way desired. On the other plan he must run
over five or six headings given by another man, and representing that
man’s ideas of classification, and decide under which of them the treatise
he is in search of is likely to be put. Which system gives the least trouble
and demands the least brain-work? Plainly the latter. In three cases out of
four he can comprehend the system at a glance. And if in the fourth there
{93}
(d.) S UBJECTS.
254. Care must be taken not to mix two subjects together because
their names are spelled in the same way.
Thus Grace before meals, Grace of body, Grace the musical term,
and Grace the theological term, must be four distinct headings.
255. Under subject-headings group titles topically when it can be
done, otherwise arrange them by the authors’ names.
Alphabetical arrangement by authors’ names is useful when a subject-
entry is a substitute for a title-entry, but otherwise is as useless as it is
inappropriate. If the author’s name is known the book should be looked
for under that, not under the subject; if it is not known, what good can an
arrangement by authors do? Sometimes, if one has forgotten the Christian
name of an author, it may be easier to find him under a subject than in a
crowd of Smiths or Joneses or Müllers, and this use of a subject-heading
is impaired by grouping or by chronological order; but such use is
infrequent, and the main design of a subject-entry should not be
subordinated to this side advantage.
It is even urged that it is harder to find a work treating of the subject in
any special way among subdivisions than when there is only one alphabet,
which is absurd. On the one hand one must look over a list of books
embracing five or six distinct divisions of a subject and select from titles
often ambiguous or provokingly uncommunicative those that seem likely
to treat of the matter in the way desired. On the other plan he must run
over five or six headings given by another man, and representing that
man’s ideas of classification, and decide under which of them the treatise
he is in search of is likely to be put. Which system gives the least trouble
and demands the least brain-work? Plainly the latter. In three cases out of
four he can comprehend the system at a glance. And if in the fourth there
Page 191
is a doubt, and he is compelled after all to look over the whole list or
several of the divisions, he is no worse off than if there were no divisions;
the list is not any longer. The objection then to subdivisions is not real, but
fanciful. The reader at first glance is frightened by the appearance of a
system to be learned, and perversely regards it as a hinderance instead of
an assistance. But if anyone has such a rooted aversion to subdivisions it
is very easy for him to disregard them altogether, and read the list as if
they were not there, leaving them to be of service to wiser men.
As the number of titles under each heading increases in number so
does the opportunity and need of division. The first and most usual groups
to be made are Bibliography and its companion History, and the
“practical-form” groups Dictionaries and Periodicals Under countries the
first grouping will be Description and Travels, History and Politics,
Language and Literature, followed by Natural history, etc. For examples
of further subdivisions see the longer catalogues. It is not worth while in a
printed catalogue to make very minute divisions. The object aimed at,—
enabling the enquirer to find quickly the book that treats of the branch of
the subject which he is interested in,—is attained if the mass of titles is
broken up into sections containing from half a dozen to a score. Of course
there are masses of titles which can not be so broken up because they all
treat of the same subject in the same way, or at least show no difference of
treatment that admits of classification. The general works on the Fine Arts
in a library of 100,000 volumes may number 100 titles, even after
Periodicals and Dictionaries have been set aside.
There is one objection to grouping,—that books can seldom be made
to fill any classification exactly, their contents overrunning the classes, so
that they must be entered in several places, or they will fail to be found
under some of the subdivisions of which they treat. Thus in the
chronological arrangement of History, whether we arrange by the first
date, the average, or the last date of each work, the books cover periods of
such various length that one can never get all that relates to one period
together. {94}
There is another objection,—that it is much harder to make a
catalogue with subdivisions, which of course require a knowledge of the
several of the divisions, he is no worse off than if there were no divisions;
the list is not any longer. The objection then to subdivisions is not real, but
fanciful. The reader at first glance is frightened by the appearance of a
system to be learned, and perversely regards it as a hinderance instead of
an assistance. But if anyone has such a rooted aversion to subdivisions it
is very easy for him to disregard them altogether, and read the list as if
they were not there, leaving them to be of service to wiser men.
As the number of titles under each heading increases in number so
does the opportunity and need of division. The first and most usual groups
to be made are Bibliography and its companion History, and the
“practical-form” groups Dictionaries and Periodicals Under countries the
first grouping will be Description and Travels, History and Politics,
Language and Literature, followed by Natural history, etc. For examples
of further subdivisions see the longer catalogues. It is not worth while in a
printed catalogue to make very minute divisions. The object aimed at,—
enabling the enquirer to find quickly the book that treats of the branch of
the subject which he is interested in,—is attained if the mass of titles is
broken up into sections containing from half a dozen to a score. Of course
there are masses of titles which can not be so broken up because they all
treat of the same subject in the same way, or at least show no difference of
treatment that admits of classification. The general works on the Fine Arts
in a library of 100,000 volumes may number 100 titles, even after
Periodicals and Dictionaries have been set aside.
There is one objection to grouping,—that books can seldom be made
to fill any classification exactly, their contents overrunning the classes, so
that they must be entered in several places, or they will fail to be found
under some of the subdivisions of which they treat. Thus in the
chronological arrangement of History, whether we arrange by the first
date, the average, or the last date of each work, the books cover periods of
such various length that one can never get all that relates to one period
together. {94}
There is another objection,—that it is much harder to make a
catalogue with subdivisions, which of course require a knowledge of the
Page 192
subject and examination of the books; and the difficulty increases in
proportion to the number of the books and the minuteness of the divisions.
256. The subarrangement in groups will often be alphabetical by
authors; but in groups or subjects of a historical character it should
be chronological, the order being made clear by putting the dates
first or by printing them in heavy-faced type.
Thus under countries the division History will be arranged according
to the period treated of, the earliest first; so under Description, for
England as seen by foreigners in the days of Elizabeth was a very
different country from the England seen by Prince Pückler-Muskau in
1828, or satirized by Max O’Rell in 1883. So Statistics and Literature,
and other divisions, should be treated when they are long enough.
257. When there are many cross-references classify them.
Ex. Architecture. See also Arches;—Baths;—Bridges;—
Cathedrals;—Fonts;—[and many other things built];
also Carpentry;—Drawing;—Metal-work;—Painting;—[and many
other means or methods of building];
also Athens;—Berlin;—Boston;—Milan;—Rome;—Venice;—
Verona;—[and many other cities whose buildings are described];
also Arabia;—Assyria;—Egypt;—France;—Greece;—India;—
Italy;—[and many other countries whose architecture is described].
258. When the titles are numerous under a subject-heading divide
them, but avoid subdivision.
It may not be best to adopt strictly the same method in the
subdivisions under countries that was recommended for government
publications. There are advantages in both the following plans. The
second is the dictionary plan pure and simple; the first is a bit of
classification introduced for special reasons into a dictionary catalogue,
proportion to the number of the books and the minuteness of the divisions.
256. The subarrangement in groups will often be alphabetical by
authors; but in groups or subjects of a historical character it should
be chronological, the order being made clear by putting the dates
first or by printing them in heavy-faced type.
Thus under countries the division History will be arranged according
to the period treated of, the earliest first; so under Description, for
England as seen by foreigners in the days of Elizabeth was a very
different country from the England seen by Prince Pückler-Muskau in
1828, or satirized by Max O’Rell in 1883. So Statistics and Literature,
and other divisions, should be treated when they are long enough.
257. When there are many cross-references classify them.
Ex. Architecture. See also Arches;—Baths;—Bridges;—
Cathedrals;—Fonts;—[and many other things built];
also Carpentry;—Drawing;—Metal-work;—Painting;—[and many
other means or methods of building];
also Athens;—Berlin;—Boston;—Milan;—Rome;—Venice;—
Verona;—[and many other cities whose buildings are described];
also Arabia;—Assyria;—Egypt;—France;—Greece;—India;—
Italy;—[and many other countries whose architecture is described].
258. When the titles are numerous under a subject-heading divide
them, but avoid subdivision.
It may not be best to adopt strictly the same method in the
subdivisions under countries that was recommended for government
publications. There are advantages in both the following plans. The
second is the dictionary plan pure and simple; the first is a bit of
classification introduced for special reasons into a dictionary catalogue,
Page 193
and perhaps out of place there. It is, however, the one which I have
adopted for the catalogue of the Boston Athenæum.
[(1.) Dictionary Catalogue with a Bit of Classification]
[Name of country.]
Administration.
Agriculture.
Antiquities.
Architecture.
Army.
Art.
Biography.
Botany.
Calendar.
Ceremonies.
Charities.
Climate.
Colonies.
Commerce and Trade.
Costume.
Description and Travels.
Ecclesiastical history.
Education.
Entomology.
Finance.
Folk-lore.
Foreign relations.
Geology.
Heraldry.
Herpetology.
History.
Bibliography.
General works.
Chronological arrangement.
Ichthyology.
adopted for the catalogue of the Boston Athenæum.
[(1.) Dictionary Catalogue with a Bit of Classification]
[Name of country.]
Administration.
Agriculture.
Antiquities.
Architecture.
Army.
Art.
Biography.
Botany.
Calendar.
Ceremonies.
Charities.
Climate.
Colonies.
Commerce and Trade.
Costume.
Description and Travels.
Ecclesiastical history.
Education.
Entomology.
Finance.
Folk-lore.
Foreign relations.
Geology.
Heraldry.
Herpetology.
History.
Bibliography.
General works.
Chronological arrangement.
Ichthyology.
Page 194
Industry.
Language.
Bibliography.
General and miscellaneous works.
Composition.
Conversation and Phrases.
Correspondence.
Dialects.
Dictionaries.
Epithets.
Etymology.
Exercises.
Grammar.
Historical grammars.
History.
Homonyms.
Pronunciation and spelling.
Prosody.
Readers (for foreign languages).
Rhymes.
Synonyms.
Law.
Bibliography.
History.
General works.
Literature.
General
Bibliography.
History (including lives of authors).
Collections.
Manuals.
Selections for reading and speaking.
Ballads and songs.
Dialogues.
Language.
Bibliography.
General and miscellaneous works.
Composition.
Conversation and Phrases.
Correspondence.
Dialects.
Dictionaries.
Epithets.
Etymology.
Exercises.
Grammar.
Historical grammars.
History.
Homonyms.
Pronunciation and spelling.
Prosody.
Readers (for foreign languages).
Rhymes.
Synonyms.
Law.
Bibliography.
History.
General works.
Literature.
General
Bibliography.
History (including lives of authors).
Collections.
Manuals.
Selections for reading and speaking.
Ballads and songs.
Dialogues.
Page 195
Drama.
Eloquence or oratory.
Epigrams.
Epitaphs.
Essays.
Fables.
Fairy tales.
Fiction.
Legends.
Letters.
Parodies.
Periodicals.
Poetical romances.
Poetry.
Popular literature. [68]
Prose romances. [69]
Satire.
Sonnets.
Wit and humor.
Malacology.
Manufactures.
Medicine.
Mineralogy.
Money.
Music.
Names.
Natural history.
Navy.
Naval history.
Numismatics.
Ornithology.
Palæontology.
Philosophy.
Politics.
Eloquence or oratory.
Epigrams.
Epitaphs.
Essays.
Fables.
Fairy tales.
Fiction.
Legends.
Letters.
Parodies.
Periodicals.
Poetical romances.
Poetry.
Popular literature. [68]
Prose romances. [69]
Satire.
Sonnets.
Wit and humor.
Malacology.
Manufactures.
Medicine.
Mineralogy.
Money.
Music.
Names.
Natural history.
Navy.
Naval history.
Numismatics.
Ornithology.
Palæontology.
Philosophy.
Politics.
Page 196
Population.
Public works.
Registers.
Religion.
Sanitary affairs.
Science.
Social distinctions.
Social life, Manners and customs.
Social science.
Statistics.
Technology.
Theatre.
Theology.
Zoölogy.
Etc.
[(2.) Dictionary Catalogue Pure and Simple]
[Name of country.]
Administration.
Agriculture.
Antiquities.
Architecture.
Army.
Art.
Ballads and songs.
Bibliography.
Botany.
Calendar.
Ceremonies.
Charities.
Climate.
Colonies.
Commerce.
Composition.
Conversation and Phrases.
Public works.
Registers.
Religion.
Sanitary affairs.
Science.
Social distinctions.
Social life, Manners and customs.
Social science.
Statistics.
Technology.
Theatre.
Theology.
Zoölogy.
Etc.
[(2.) Dictionary Catalogue Pure and Simple]
[Name of country.]
Administration.
Agriculture.
Antiquities.
Architecture.
Army.
Art.
Ballads and songs.
Bibliography.
Botany.
Calendar.
Ceremonies.
Charities.
Climate.
Colonies.
Commerce.
Composition.
Conversation and Phrases.
Page 197
Correspondence.
Costume.
Description and Travels.
Dialects.
Dialogues.
Dictionaries.
Drama.
Ecclesiastical history.
Education.
Eloquence or oratory.
Entomology.
Etymology.
Epigrams.
Epitaphs.
Epithets.
Exercises.
Fables.
Fairy tales.
Fiction.
Finance.
Foreign relations.
Geology.
Grammar.
Heraldry.
Herpetology.
History.
Bibliography.
General works.
Chronological arrangement.
Homonyms.
Ichthyology.
Language.
Bibliography.
History.
Costume.
Description and Travels.
Dialects.
Dialogues.
Dictionaries.
Drama.
Ecclesiastical history.
Education.
Eloquence or oratory.
Entomology.
Etymology.
Epigrams.
Epitaphs.
Epithets.
Exercises.
Fables.
Fairy tales.
Fiction.
Finance.
Foreign relations.
Geology.
Grammar.
Heraldry.
Herpetology.
History.
Bibliography.
General works.
Chronological arrangement.
Homonyms.
Ichthyology.
Language.
Bibliography.
History.
Page 198
General and miscellaneous works.
Law.
Bibliography.
History.
General and miscellaneous works.
Legends.
Letters.
Literature.
Bibliography.
History.
General and miscellaneous works.
Collections.
Malacology.
Manufactures.
Medicine.
Mineralogy.
Money.
Music.
Names.
Natural history.
Navy.
Naval history.
Numismatics.
Ornithology.
Palæontology.
Parodies.
Periodicals.
Philosophy.
Poetical romances.
Poetry.
Politics.
Popular literature. [68]
Population.
Pronunciation.
Law.
Bibliography.
History.
General and miscellaneous works.
Legends.
Letters.
Literature.
Bibliography.
History.
General and miscellaneous works.
Collections.
Malacology.
Manufactures.
Medicine.
Mineralogy.
Money.
Music.
Names.
Natural history.
Navy.
Naval history.
Numismatics.
Ornithology.
Palæontology.
Parodies.
Periodicals.
Philosophy.
Poetical romances.
Poetry.
Politics.
Popular literature. [68]
Population.
Pronunciation.
Page 199
Prose romances. [69]
Prosody.
Public works.
Registers.
Religion.
Rhymes.
Sanitary affairs.
Satire.
Science.
Social distinctions.
Social life, Manners and customs.
Social science.
Sonnets.
Spelling.
Statistics.
Synonyms.
Technology.
Theatre.
Theology.
Wit and humor.
Zoölogy.
Etc.
[68] Not meaning novels, but broadsides, chap-books, and the like,
—the literature of the people in times past.
[69] Again not meaning novels, but the romances of chivalry, etc.
Note, however, that if the subordination under Language and
Literature is objected to, it is very easy to make them independent
headings in the main alphabet, having
instead of
Italy.
Description.
History.
Prosody.
Public works.
Registers.
Religion.
Rhymes.
Sanitary affairs.
Satire.
Science.
Social distinctions.
Social life, Manners and customs.
Social science.
Sonnets.
Spelling.
Statistics.
Synonyms.
Technology.
Theatre.
Theology.
Wit and humor.
Zoölogy.
Etc.
[68] Not meaning novels, but broadsides, chap-books, and the like,
—the literature of the people in times past.
[69] Again not meaning novels, but the romances of chivalry, etc.
Note, however, that if the subordination under Language and
Literature is objected to, it is very easy to make them independent
headings in the main alphabet, having
instead of
Italy.
Description.
History.
Page 200
Language.
Literature.
Natural history.
the headings
Italian
language.
Italian
literature.
Italy.
Description.
History.
Natural history.
Of course different countries will require different divisions, e. g.,
Ecclesiastical history, Mythology, Religion, Theology will not often be
required for the same {97} country. And often it will be expedient to
combine those divisions in which there are very few titles into one more
general; thus Botany, Herpetology, Ichthyology, Zoölogy, would join to
give Natural history a respectable size, and Geology, Mineralogy,
Palæontology, Physical geography would combine, or in very small
countries all these would go together under Description. Under some
countries other divisions will be required; in the list are given only those
in actual use; but the arrangement is elastic and admits of new divisions
whenever they are needed. In regard to a few (such as Epitaphs, Fables,
Names, Proverbs) there is room for doubt whether they ought to be under
countries; whether the subject cohesion is not much stronger than the
national cohesion. Many others are not usually put here (as Numismatics,
Philosophy, Religion, Science, Theology, Zoölogy). The former usage was
to put under the country only its history, travels in it, and the general
descriptive works; and books that treated of the Art, Architecture, Ballads,
Botany, Drama, etc., of that land were put with the general works on Art,
Architecture, etc. But the tendency of the dictionary catalogue is towards
national classification; that is, in separating what relates to the parts of a
subject, as is required by its specific principle, it necessarily brings
Literature.
Natural history.
the headings
Italian
language.
Italian
literature.
Italy.
Description.
History.
Natural history.
Of course different countries will require different divisions, e. g.,
Ecclesiastical history, Mythology, Religion, Theology will not often be
required for the same {97} country. And often it will be expedient to
combine those divisions in which there are very few titles into one more
general; thus Botany, Herpetology, Ichthyology, Zoölogy, would join to
give Natural history a respectable size, and Geology, Mineralogy,
Palæontology, Physical geography would combine, or in very small
countries all these would go together under Description. Under some
countries other divisions will be required; in the list are given only those
in actual use; but the arrangement is elastic and admits of new divisions
whenever they are needed. In regard to a few (such as Epitaphs, Fables,
Names, Proverbs) there is room for doubt whether they ought to be under
countries; whether the subject cohesion is not much stronger than the
national cohesion. Many others are not usually put here (as Numismatics,
Philosophy, Religion, Science, Theology, Zoölogy). The former usage was
to put under the country only its history, travels in it, and the general
descriptive works; and books that treated of the Art, Architecture, Ballads,
Botany, Drama, etc., of that land were put with the general works on Art,
Architecture, etc. But the tendency of the dictionary catalogue is towards
national classification; that is, in separating what relates to the parts of a
subject, as is required by its specific principle, it necessarily brings
Page 201
together all that relates to a country in every aspect, as it would what
relates to any other individual.
It may be asked (1) why the parts of Natural history are here separated
and the parts of Language and Literature not; and (2) why we do not
divide still more (following out the dictionary plan fully), so as to have
divisions like Liliaceæ, Cows, Horses. As to (2), in a library catalogue of a
million volumes it would no doubt be best to adopt rigidly this specific
mode of entry for the larger countries; for a catalogue of one or two
hundred thousand, arrangement in classes is as well suited to quick
reference and avoids the loss of room occasioned by numerous headings.
With few books minute division has a very incomplete appearance,
specialties occurring only here and there, and most of the titles being
those of general works. This may be compared to the division of a library
into alcoves. One of from 10,000 to 20,000 volumes has an alcove for
Natural History; from 20,000 to 50,000 it has alcoves for Botany and for
Zoölogy; from 50,000 to 100,000 it has alcoves for Birds, Fishes, Insects,
Mammals, Reptiles, but it must be either very large or very special before
it allows to smaller divisions of Zoölogy separate apartments. On an
expansive system it is easy to make new alcoves as they are wanted; a
similar multiplication by fission is possible in the successively enlarging
editions of a printed catalogue. A card catalogue, designed for continuous
growth, should have more thorough division than can be put into print,
because it must look into the future, while the printed catalogue has no
future.
As to (1) I can only say that the divisions of Language seem to me too
intimately connected to be dispersed in catalogues of the present size, but
that those of Literature have a more substantive existence and ought to be
separated sooner. A double subdivision, however, ought to be avoided.
Under Language there should be only one alphabet. It is better to arrange
Greece.
Language.
Accents.
Dictionaries.
Ellipses.
relates to any other individual.
It may be asked (1) why the parts of Natural history are here separated
and the parts of Language and Literature not; and (2) why we do not
divide still more (following out the dictionary plan fully), so as to have
divisions like Liliaceæ, Cows, Horses. As to (2), in a library catalogue of a
million volumes it would no doubt be best to adopt rigidly this specific
mode of entry for the larger countries; for a catalogue of one or two
hundred thousand, arrangement in classes is as well suited to quick
reference and avoids the loss of room occasioned by numerous headings.
With few books minute division has a very incomplete appearance,
specialties occurring only here and there, and most of the titles being
those of general works. This may be compared to the division of a library
into alcoves. One of from 10,000 to 20,000 volumes has an alcove for
Natural History; from 20,000 to 50,000 it has alcoves for Botany and for
Zoölogy; from 50,000 to 100,000 it has alcoves for Birds, Fishes, Insects,
Mammals, Reptiles, but it must be either very large or very special before
it allows to smaller divisions of Zoölogy separate apartments. On an
expansive system it is easy to make new alcoves as they are wanted; a
similar multiplication by fission is possible in the successively enlarging
editions of a printed catalogue. A card catalogue, designed for continuous
growth, should have more thorough division than can be put into print,
because it must look into the future, while the printed catalogue has no
future.
As to (1) I can only say that the divisions of Language seem to me too
intimately connected to be dispersed in catalogues of the present size, but
that those of Literature have a more substantive existence and ought to be
separated sooner. A double subdivision, however, ought to be avoided.
Under Language there should be only one alphabet. It is better to arrange
Greece.
Language.
Accents.
Dictionaries.
Ellipses.
Page 202
Etymology.
Grammar.
History.
Particles.
Pleonasms.
Pronunciation.
Syntax.
than
Dictionaries.
Etymology.
Grammar.
Accents.
Ellipses.
Particles.
Pleonasms.
Pronunciation.
Syntax.
History.
Any subdivision of the groups under countries has been strongly
opposed as being troublesome to make, useless, and even confusing, or as
being an unlawful mixture of classed and dictionary cataloguing. But
suppose you have four or five hundred {98} titles under France. History.
Will you break them up into groups with such headings as House of
Bourbon, Revolution, Empire, Restoration, etc., with references and other
devices for those works which treat of several periods, all of which it must
be confessed is a little formidable at first glance, or will you leave them in
one undivided mass, so that he who wants to find the history of the last
half of the 15th century must read through the 500 titles, perhaps, to find
even one and certainly to find all? You would divide of course. It is true
that grouping may mislead. The inquirer must still be careful to look in
several places. The history of France during the ascendency of the House
of Valois is to be found not merely under that heading but in the
comprehensive histories of the country. The inquirer may be a little less
likely to think of this because the titles of these two groups are separated
Grammar.
History.
Particles.
Pleonasms.
Pronunciation.
Syntax.
than
Dictionaries.
Etymology.
Grammar.
Accents.
Ellipses.
Particles.
Pleonasms.
Pronunciation.
Syntax.
History.
Any subdivision of the groups under countries has been strongly
opposed as being troublesome to make, useless, and even confusing, or as
being an unlawful mixture of classed and dictionary cataloguing. But
suppose you have four or five hundred {98} titles under France. History.
Will you break them up into groups with such headings as House of
Bourbon, Revolution, Empire, Restoration, etc., with references and other
devices for those works which treat of several periods, all of which it must
be confessed is a little formidable at first glance, or will you leave them in
one undivided mass, so that he who wants to find the history of the last
half of the 15th century must read through the 500 titles, perhaps, to find
even one and certainly to find all? You would divide of course. It is true
that grouping may mislead. The inquirer must still be careful to look in
several places. The history of France during the ascendency of the House
of Valois is to be found not merely under that heading but in the
comprehensive histories of the country. The inquirer may be a little less
likely to think of this because the titles of these two groups are separated
Page 203
from the many other titles which have nothing to do specially or generally
with the House of Valois, but if he does think of it he is greatly assisted by
such segregation.
with the House of Valois, but if he does think of it he is greatly assisted by
such segregation.
Page 204
K. Etc.
259. In a supplement, catalogue the whole of a continued set, not
merely the volumes received since the first catalogue.
Ex. If v. 1–4 are in the catalogue and v. 5–10 are received later, enter
all 10 v. in the supplement. It takes no more room, and it is useless to
make the reader look in two places to ascertain how much of the work the
library has. But this should not be done when it will take up much space,
as would often be the case with periodicals, owing to details of change of
name, number of volumes missing, etc. Nor should Contents be repeated;
it is enough to refer.
260. When there are many editions of a work under any subject-
heading omit the titles and merely refer to the author-entry.
Much space may thus be saved at little inconvenience to the reader.
Ex. Gaul. C ÆSAR , C. J. Commentarii [B.C. 58–49]. See Cæsar,
C. J. (pp. 441, 442); here two lines do the work of forty.
261. Rare books.
American libraries and especially town libraries seldom have any
books sufficiently rare to deserve great particularity of description. If for
any reason it is thought necessary to give a minute account of a book or of
a collection good models may be found in Trömel’s Biblioth. amér., Lpz.,
1861, 8º, Stevens’s Historical nuggets, Lond., 1862, 2 v. 16º, Weller’s
Repertorium bibliographicum, Nördlingen, 1864, 8º, Harrisse’s Biblioth.
Amer. vetustissima, N. Y., 1866, 8º, Tiele’s Mém. bibliog. sur les journaux
des navig. néerlandaises, Amst., 1867, 8º, and the titles of the rarer books
in Sabin’s Dict. of books rel. to America, N. Y., 1868, etc. For the
convenience of those who have not these works at hand a few examples
are given here.
259. In a supplement, catalogue the whole of a continued set, not
merely the volumes received since the first catalogue.
Ex. If v. 1–4 are in the catalogue and v. 5–10 are received later, enter
all 10 v. in the supplement. It takes no more room, and it is useless to
make the reader look in two places to ascertain how much of the work the
library has. But this should not be done when it will take up much space,
as would often be the case with periodicals, owing to details of change of
name, number of volumes missing, etc. Nor should Contents be repeated;
it is enough to refer.
260. When there are many editions of a work under any subject-
heading omit the titles and merely refer to the author-entry.
Much space may thus be saved at little inconvenience to the reader.
Ex. Gaul. C ÆSAR , C. J. Commentarii [B.C. 58–49]. See Cæsar,
C. J. (pp. 441, 442); here two lines do the work of forty.
261. Rare books.
American libraries and especially town libraries seldom have any
books sufficiently rare to deserve great particularity of description. If for
any reason it is thought necessary to give a minute account of a book or of
a collection good models may be found in Trömel’s Biblioth. amér., Lpz.,
1861, 8º, Stevens’s Historical nuggets, Lond., 1862, 2 v. 16º, Weller’s
Repertorium bibliographicum, Nördlingen, 1864, 8º, Harrisse’s Biblioth.
Amer. vetustissima, N. Y., 1866, 8º, Tiele’s Mém. bibliog. sur les journaux
des navig. néerlandaises, Amst., 1867, 8º, and the titles of the rarer books
in Sabin’s Dict. of books rel. to America, N. Y., 1868, etc. For the
convenience of those who have not these works at hand a few examples
are given here.
Page 205
Leonardus de Utino or de Belluno. F1. Sermones aurei de sanctis.
[Colophon:] Expliciūt Sermones aurei | de sanctis per totū annum s |
cōpilauit magister Leonar | dus de Vtino sacre theologie | doctor . . . |
. . . Ad instantiam & cō|placentiā magnifice coītatis | Vtinensis . . . | . . .
| M. cccc. xlvi . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . | [Coloniæ per Ulr. Zell,]
M. cccc. Lxxiij. fº. Registrum (47) pp., (4) pp. blank, Tabula (1) p.,
(244) ll. In 2 coll. of 36 lines.
This copy has the leaves numbered in ms. and a Tabula prefixed to the
2d part by a contemporary hand. The work being very thick was probably
in general bound in two parts and is rarely complete; Santander describes
only the 1st part, the due de la Vallière had only the 2d. The name of the
printer, Zell, is found in only three or four of his numerous publications.
This is shown to be his by the type, which is the same as that used in the
Sermones of R. Caracciolus de Litio issued in the same year. The present
work went through 10 editions in 8 years. According to Graesse it is {99}
probably the first book printed out of Italy which contains a line of Italian
poetry, “Trenta foglie ha la rosa”, at the end of the 1st part.
Brunet v. 1022, Graesse vi. ii. 232, Hain no. 16128.
(47) pp. means 47 unnumbered pages, ll. means leaves. Italicizing
the um in Registrum signifies that those letters are expressed in the
caption by a contraction which the printer of the catalogue has no
type for.
Huon de Bordeaux. Les gestes et faictz | merueilleux du no|ble Huon
de Bor|deaulx Per de France, Duc de Guyenne. Nouuellement redige
en bon | Francoys: et Imprime nouuellement a Paris pour Jean
Bonfonds | . . . | . . . | [Woodcut] [Ending] Lequel liure & | hystoire a
este mis de rime en prose | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . lequel fut fait &
parfait le vinte | neufiesme iour de Januier. Lan | mil. cccc. liiii | . . . |
. . . | . . . | . . . | . . . Imprime a Paris pour Jan | Bonfons . . . | . . . n. d.
4º. (8), 264 ll. @ 40 lines. With 14 woodcuts in the text, and the
printer’s mark.
On the eighth leaf is written “Jehan Moynard me possidet 1557,”
which is probably not far from the date of publication. The 1st dated
[Colophon:] Expliciūt Sermones aurei | de sanctis per totū annum s |
cōpilauit magister Leonar | dus de Vtino sacre theologie | doctor . . . |
. . . Ad instantiam & cō|placentiā magnifice coītatis | Vtinensis . . . | . . .
| M. cccc. xlvi . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . | [Coloniæ per Ulr. Zell,]
M. cccc. Lxxiij. fº. Registrum (47) pp., (4) pp. blank, Tabula (1) p.,
(244) ll. In 2 coll. of 36 lines.
This copy has the leaves numbered in ms. and a Tabula prefixed to the
2d part by a contemporary hand. The work being very thick was probably
in general bound in two parts and is rarely complete; Santander describes
only the 1st part, the due de la Vallière had only the 2d. The name of the
printer, Zell, is found in only three or four of his numerous publications.
This is shown to be his by the type, which is the same as that used in the
Sermones of R. Caracciolus de Litio issued in the same year. The present
work went through 10 editions in 8 years. According to Graesse it is {99}
probably the first book printed out of Italy which contains a line of Italian
poetry, “Trenta foglie ha la rosa”, at the end of the 1st part.
Brunet v. 1022, Graesse vi. ii. 232, Hain no. 16128.
(47) pp. means 47 unnumbered pages, ll. means leaves. Italicizing
the um in Registrum signifies that those letters are expressed in the
caption by a contraction which the printer of the catalogue has no
type for.
Huon de Bordeaux. Les gestes et faictz | merueilleux du no|ble Huon
de Bor|deaulx Per de France, Duc de Guyenne. Nouuellement redige
en bon | Francoys: et Imprime nouuellement a Paris pour Jean
Bonfonds | . . . | . . . | [Woodcut] [Ending] Lequel liure & | hystoire a
este mis de rime en prose | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . lequel fut fait &
parfait le vinte | neufiesme iour de Januier. Lan | mil. cccc. liiii | . . . |
. . . | . . . | . . . | . . . Imprime a Paris pour Jan | Bonfons . . . | . . . n. d.
4º. (8), 264 ll. @ 40 lines. With 14 woodcuts in the text, and the
printer’s mark.
On the eighth leaf is written “Jehan Moynard me possidet 1557,”
which is probably not far from the date of publication. The 1st dated
Page 206
edition appeared in 1516. Brunet mentions two other editions before
recording the present, one 1556, one undated.
Sold, Essling 95 fr., Giraud 199 fr.
recording the present, one 1556, one undated.
Sold, Essling 95 fr., Giraud 199 fr.
Page 207
APPENDICES.
APPENDIX I.
CONDENSED RULES FOR AN AUTHOR AND TITLE
C ATA L O G .
P REPARED BY THE C OÖPERATION C OMMITTEE OF
THE A MERICAN L IBRARY A SSOCIATION. [ 7 0 ]
ENTRY.
Books are to be entered under the:
Surnames of authors when ascertained, the abbreviation
“Anon.” being added to the titles of anonymous works. (1a
Initials of authors’ names when these only are known, the
last initial being put first. (1b
Pseudonyms of the writers when the real names are not
ascertained. (1c
Names of editors of collections, each separate item to be at
the same time sufficiently catalogd under its own
heading. (1d
Names of countries, cities, societies, or other bodies which
are responsible for their publication. (1e
First word (not an article or serial number) of the titles of
periodicals and of anonymous books, the names of whose
APPENDIX I.
CONDENSED RULES FOR AN AUTHOR AND TITLE
C ATA L O G .
P REPARED BY THE C OÖPERATION C OMMITTEE OF
THE A MERICAN L IBRARY A SSOCIATION. [ 7 0 ]
ENTRY.
Books are to be entered under the:
Surnames of authors when ascertained, the abbreviation
“Anon.” being added to the titles of anonymous works. (1a
Initials of authors’ names when these only are known, the
last initial being put first. (1b
Pseudonyms of the writers when the real names are not
ascertained. (1c
Names of editors of collections, each separate item to be at
the same time sufficiently catalogd under its own
heading. (1d
Names of countries, cities, societies, or other bodies which
are responsible for their publication. (1e
First word (not an article or serial number) of the titles of
periodicals and of anonymous books, the names of whose
Page 208
authors are not known. And a motto or the designation of a
series may be neglected when it begins a title, and the
entry may be made under the first word of the real title
following. (1f
Commentaries accompanying a text and translations are to be
entered under the heading of the original work; but
commentaries without the text under the name of the
commentator. A book entitled “Commentary on . . . ” and
containing the text should be put under both. (1g
The Bible, or any part of it (including the Apocrypha), in any
language, is to be entered under the word Bible. (1h
The Talmud and Koran (and parts of them) are to be entered
under those words; the sacred books of other religions are to
be entered under the names by which they are generally
known; references to be given from the names of editors,
translators, etc. (1i
The respondent or defender of an academical thesis is to be
considered as the author, unless the work unequivocally
appears to be the work of the praeses. (1j
Books having more than one author to be entered under the
one first named in the title with a reference from each of the
others. (1k
Reports of civil actions are to be entered under the name of the
party to the suit which stands first on the title-page. Reports of
series may be neglected when it begins a title, and the
entry may be made under the first word of the real title
following. (1f
Commentaries accompanying a text and translations are to be
entered under the heading of the original work; but
commentaries without the text under the name of the
commentator. A book entitled “Commentary on . . . ” and
containing the text should be put under both. (1g
The Bible, or any part of it (including the Apocrypha), in any
language, is to be entered under the word Bible. (1h
The Talmud and Koran (and parts of them) are to be entered
under those words; the sacred books of other religions are to
be entered under the names by which they are generally
known; references to be given from the names of editors,
translators, etc. (1i
The respondent or defender of an academical thesis is to be
considered as the author, unless the work unequivocally
appears to be the work of the praeses. (1j
Books having more than one author to be entered under the
one first named in the title with a reference from each of the
others. (1k
Reports of civil actions are to be entered under the name of the
party to the suit which stands first on the title-page. Reports of
Page 209
crown and criminal proceedings are to be entered under the
name of the defendant. Admiralty proceedings relating to
vessels are to be put under the name of the vessel. (1l
Noblemen are to be entered under their titles, unless the family
name is decidedly better known. (1m
Ecclesiastical dignitaries, unless popes or sovereigns, are to be
entered under their surnames. (1n
Sovereigns (other than Greek or Roman), ruling princes,
Oriental writers, popes, friars, persons canonized, and all
other persons known only by their first name, are to be entered
under this first name. (1o
Married women, and other persons who have changed their
names, are to be put under the last well-known form. (1p
A pseudonym may be used instead of the surname (and only a
reference to the pseudonym made under the surname) when an
author is much more known by his false than by his real name.
In case of doubt use the real name. (1q
A society is to be entered under the first word, not an article, of
its corporate name, with references from any other name by
which it is known, especially from the name of the place
where its headquarters are established, if it is often called by
that name. (1r
name of the defendant. Admiralty proceedings relating to
vessels are to be put under the name of the vessel. (1l
Noblemen are to be entered under their titles, unless the family
name is decidedly better known. (1m
Ecclesiastical dignitaries, unless popes or sovereigns, are to be
entered under their surnames. (1n
Sovereigns (other than Greek or Roman), ruling princes,
Oriental writers, popes, friars, persons canonized, and all
other persons known only by their first name, are to be entered
under this first name. (1o
Married women, and other persons who have changed their
names, are to be put under the last well-known form. (1p
A pseudonym may be used instead of the surname (and only a
reference to the pseudonym made under the surname) when an
author is much more known by his false than by his real name.
In case of doubt use the real name. (1q
A society is to be entered under the first word, not an article, of
its corporate name, with references from any other name by
which it is known, especially from the name of the place
where its headquarters are established, if it is often called by
that name. (1r
Page 210
References.—When an author has been known by more than
one name, references should be inserted from the name or
names not to be used as headings to the one used. (1s
References are also to be made to the headings chosen:
from the titles of all novels and plays and of poems likely
to be asked for by their titles; (1t
from other striking titles; (1u
from noticeable words in anonymous titles, especially
from the names of subjects of anonymous
biographies; (1v
from the names of editors of periodicals, when the
periodicals are generally called by the editor’s name; (1w
from the names of important translators (especially
poetical translators) and commentators; (1x
from the title of an ecclesiastical dignitary, when that, and
not the family name, is used in the book catalogd; (1y
and in other cases where a reference is needed to insure the
ready finding of the book. (1z
[70] C. A. Cutter, S. H. Scudder, C. B. Tillinghast. Reprinted from the Library journal, 8:
251–254. The rules of the Library Association of the United Kingdom were printed in the
Library journal, 6: 315–316. The Bodleian cataloging rules are given in the Library journal,
8: 298–301.
HEADINGS.
In the heading of titles, the names of authors are to be given in
full, and in their vernacular form, except that the Latin form
may be used when it is more generally known, the vernacular
one name, references should be inserted from the name or
names not to be used as headings to the one used. (1s
References are also to be made to the headings chosen:
from the titles of all novels and plays and of poems likely
to be asked for by their titles; (1t
from other striking titles; (1u
from noticeable words in anonymous titles, especially
from the names of subjects of anonymous
biographies; (1v
from the names of editors of periodicals, when the
periodicals are generally called by the editor’s name; (1w
from the names of important translators (especially
poetical translators) and commentators; (1x
from the title of an ecclesiastical dignitary, when that, and
not the family name, is used in the book catalogd; (1y
and in other cases where a reference is needed to insure the
ready finding of the book. (1z
[70] C. A. Cutter, S. H. Scudder, C. B. Tillinghast. Reprinted from the Library journal, 8:
251–254. The rules of the Library Association of the United Kingdom were printed in the
Library journal, 6: 315–316. The Bodleian cataloging rules are given in the Library journal,
8: 298–301.
HEADINGS.
In the heading of titles, the names of authors are to be given in
full, and in their vernacular form, except that the Latin form
may be used when it is more generally known, the vernacular
Page 211
form being added in parentheses; except, also, that sovereigns
and popes may be given in the English form. (2a
English and French surnames beginning with a prefix (except
the French de and d’) are to be recorded under the prefix; in
other languages under the word following; (2b
English compound surnames are to be entered under the last
part of the name; foreign ones under the first part; (2c
Designations are to be added to distinguish writers of the same
name from each other; (2d
Prefixes indicating the rank or profession of writers may be
added in the heading, when they are part of the usual
designation of the writers. (2e
Names of places to be given in the English form. When both
an English and a vernacular form are used in English works,
prefer the vernacular. (2f
TITLES.
The title is to be an exact transcript of the title-page, neither
amended, translated, nor in any way altered, except that
mottoes, titles of authors, repetitious, and matter of any kind
not essential, are to be omitted. Where great accuracy is
desirable, omissions are to be indicated by three dots (...). The
titles of books especially valuable for antiquity or rarity may
be given in full, with all practicable precision. The
and popes may be given in the English form. (2a
English and French surnames beginning with a prefix (except
the French de and d’) are to be recorded under the prefix; in
other languages under the word following; (2b
English compound surnames are to be entered under the last
part of the name; foreign ones under the first part; (2c
Designations are to be added to distinguish writers of the same
name from each other; (2d
Prefixes indicating the rank or profession of writers may be
added in the heading, when they are part of the usual
designation of the writers. (2e
Names of places to be given in the English form. When both
an English and a vernacular form are used in English works,
prefer the vernacular. (2f
TITLES.
The title is to be an exact transcript of the title-page, neither
amended, translated, nor in any way altered, except that
mottoes, titles of authors, repetitious, and matter of any kind
not essential, are to be omitted. Where great accuracy is
desirable, omissions are to be indicated by three dots (...). The
titles of books especially valuable for antiquity or rarity may
be given in full, with all practicable precision. The
Page 212
phraseology and spelling, but not necessarily the punctuation,
of the title are to be exactly copied. (3a
Any additions needed to make the title clear are to be supplied
and inclosed by brackets. (3b
Initial capitals are to be given in English: (3c
to proper names of persons and personifications, places,
bodies, noted events, and periods (each separate word not
an article, conjunction, or preposition, may be capitalized
in these cases); (3d
to adjectives and other derivatives from proper names
when they have a direct reference to the person, place, etc.,
from which they are derived; (3e
to the first word of every sentence and of every quoted
title; (3f
to titles of honor when standing instead of a proper name
(e. g., the Earl of Derby, but John Stanley, earl of
Derby); (3g
In foreign languages, according to the local usage; (3h
In doubtful cases capitals are to be avoided. (3i
Foreign languages.—Titles in foreign characters may be
transliterated. The languages in which a book is written are to
be stated when there are several, and the fact is not apparent
from the title. (3j
[For the A. L. A. transliteration report, see pp. 108–114.]
IMPRINTS.
of the title are to be exactly copied. (3a
Any additions needed to make the title clear are to be supplied
and inclosed by brackets. (3b
Initial capitals are to be given in English: (3c
to proper names of persons and personifications, places,
bodies, noted events, and periods (each separate word not
an article, conjunction, or preposition, may be capitalized
in these cases); (3d
to adjectives and other derivatives from proper names
when they have a direct reference to the person, place, etc.,
from which they are derived; (3e
to the first word of every sentence and of every quoted
title; (3f
to titles of honor when standing instead of a proper name
(e. g., the Earl of Derby, but John Stanley, earl of
Derby); (3g
In foreign languages, according to the local usage; (3h
In doubtful cases capitals are to be avoided. (3i
Foreign languages.—Titles in foreign characters may be
transliterated. The languages in which a book is written are to
be stated when there are several, and the fact is not apparent
from the title. (3j
[For the A. L. A. transliteration report, see pp. 108–114.]
IMPRINTS.
Page 213
After the title are to be given, in the following order, those in
[ ] being optional:—
the edition; (4a
the place of publication; (4b
[and the publisher’s name] (these three in the language of
the title); (4c
the year as given on the title-page, but in Arabic
figures; (4d
[the year of copyright or actual publication, if known to be
different, in brackets, and preceded by c. or p. as the case
may be]; (4e
the number of volumes, or of pages if there is only one
volume; (4f
[the number of maps, portraits, or illustrations not included
in the text]; (4g
and either the approximate size designated by letter (see
Library journal, 3: 19–20), or the exact size in
centimeters; (4h
the name of the series to which the book belongs is to be
given in parentheses after the other imprint entries. (4i
After the place of publication, the place of printing maybe
given if different. This is desirable only in rare and old
books. (4j
The number of pages is to be indicated by giving the last
number of each paging, connecting the numbers by the sign +;
the addition of unpaged matter may be shown by a +, or the
[ ] being optional:—
the edition; (4a
the place of publication; (4b
[and the publisher’s name] (these three in the language of
the title); (4c
the year as given on the title-page, but in Arabic
figures; (4d
[the year of copyright or actual publication, if known to be
different, in brackets, and preceded by c. or p. as the case
may be]; (4e
the number of volumes, or of pages if there is only one
volume; (4f
[the number of maps, portraits, or illustrations not included
in the text]; (4g
and either the approximate size designated by letter (see
Library journal, 3: 19–20), or the exact size in
centimeters; (4h
the name of the series to which the book belongs is to be
given in parentheses after the other imprint entries. (4i
After the place of publication, the place of printing maybe
given if different. This is desirable only in rare and old
books. (4j
The number of pages is to be indicated by giving the last
number of each paging, connecting the numbers by the sign +;
the addition of unpaged matter may be shown by a +, or the
Page 214
number of pages ascertained by counting may be given in
brackets. When there are more than three pagings, it is better
to add them together and give the sum in brackets.
These imprint entries are to give the facts, whether ascertained
from the book or from other sources; those which are usually
taken from the title (edition, place, publisher’s name, and
series) should be in the language of the title, corrections and
additions being inclosed in brackets. It is better to give the
words, “maps,” “portraits,” etc., and the abbreviations for
“volumes” and “pages,” in English. (4k
CONTENTS, NOTES.
Notes (in English) and contents of volumes are to be given
when necessary to properly describe the works. Both notes and
lists of contents to be in a smaller type. (5a
MISCELLANEOUS.
A single dash or indent indicates the omission of the preceding
heading; a subsequent dash or indent indicates the omission of
a subordinate heading, or of a title. (6a
A dash connecting numbers signifies to and including;
following a number it signifies continuation. (6b
A ? following a word or entry signifies probably. (6c
Brackets inclose words added to titles or imprints or changed
in form. (6d
brackets. When there are more than three pagings, it is better
to add them together and give the sum in brackets.
These imprint entries are to give the facts, whether ascertained
from the book or from other sources; those which are usually
taken from the title (edition, place, publisher’s name, and
series) should be in the language of the title, corrections and
additions being inclosed in brackets. It is better to give the
words, “maps,” “portraits,” etc., and the abbreviations for
“volumes” and “pages,” in English. (4k
CONTENTS, NOTES.
Notes (in English) and contents of volumes are to be given
when necessary to properly describe the works. Both notes and
lists of contents to be in a smaller type. (5a
MISCELLANEOUS.
A single dash or indent indicates the omission of the preceding
heading; a subsequent dash or indent indicates the omission of
a subordinate heading, or of a title. (6a
A dash connecting numbers signifies to and including;
following a number it signifies continuation. (6b
A ? following a word or entry signifies probably. (6c
Brackets inclose words added to titles or imprints or changed
in form. (6d
Page 215
Arabic figures are to be used rather than Roman; but small
capitals may be used after the names of sovereigns, princes,
and popes. (6e
A list of abbreviations to be used was given in the Library
journal, 3: 16–20. (6f
ARRANGEMENT.
The surname when used alone precedes the same name used
with forenames; where the initials only of the forenames are
given, they are to precede fully written forenames beginning
with the same initials (e. g., Brown; Brown, J.; Brown, J. L.;
Brown, James). (7a
The prefixes M and Mc, S., St., Ste., Messrs., Mr., and Mrs.,
are to be arranged as if written in full, Mac, Sanctus, Saint,
Sainte, Messieurs, Mister, and Mistress. (7b
The works of an author are to be arranged in the following
order:—
1. Collected works. (7c
2. Partial collections. (7d
3. Single works, alphabetically by the first word of the
title. (7e
The order of alphabeting is to be that of the English
alphabet. (7f
capitals may be used after the names of sovereigns, princes,
and popes. (6e
A list of abbreviations to be used was given in the Library
journal, 3: 16–20. (6f
ARRANGEMENT.
The surname when used alone precedes the same name used
with forenames; where the initials only of the forenames are
given, they are to precede fully written forenames beginning
with the same initials (e. g., Brown; Brown, J.; Brown, J. L.;
Brown, James). (7a
The prefixes M and Mc, S., St., Ste., Messrs., Mr., and Mrs.,
are to be arranged as if written in full, Mac, Sanctus, Saint,
Sainte, Messieurs, Mister, and Mistress. (7b
The works of an author are to be arranged in the following
order:—
1. Collected works. (7c
2. Partial collections. (7d
3. Single works, alphabetically by the first word of the
title. (7e
The order of alphabeting is to be that of the English
alphabet. (7f
Page 216
The German ae, oe, ue, are always to be written ä, ö, ü, and
arranged as a, o, u. (7g
Names of persons are to precede similar names of places,
which in turn precede similar first words of titles. (7h
arranged as a, o, u. (7g
Names of persons are to precede similar names of places,
which in turn precede similar first words of titles. (7h
Page 217
THE RULES OF THE ENGLISH
LIBRARY ASSOCIATION.
The cataloguing rules of the Library Association of the United
Kingdom, as revised in 1883, and published in the Library
Chronicle of February, 1885, differ from the A. L. A. rules in
the following points:
1. The order of the imprint is to be: edition, number of
volumes, if only one volume, the number of pages, the number
of separate illustrations, maps, or portraits, the size, the place
of publication, the place of printing when different from that
of publication, the publisher’s name, and the year.
2. All anonymous works to have the abbreviation “Anon.”
added.
3. Entry under the chief subject-word of the titles of
anonymous books, with a cross-reference, where advisable,
under any other noticeable word.
4. Service and Prayer books used by any religious community
are to be placed under the head of Liturgies, with a subhead of
the religious community.
5. Names of translators, commentators, editors, and preface
writers, if they do not occur in the title-page, may be added
LIBRARY ASSOCIATION.
The cataloguing rules of the Library Association of the United
Kingdom, as revised in 1883, and published in the Library
Chronicle of February, 1885, differ from the A. L. A. rules in
the following points:
1. The order of the imprint is to be: edition, number of
volumes, if only one volume, the number of pages, the number
of separate illustrations, maps, or portraits, the size, the place
of publication, the place of printing when different from that
of publication, the publisher’s name, and the year.
2. All anonymous works to have the abbreviation “Anon.”
added.
3. Entry under the chief subject-word of the titles of
anonymous books, with a cross-reference, where advisable,
under any other noticeable word.
4. Service and Prayer books used by any religious community
are to be placed under the head of Liturgies, with a subhead of
the religious community.
5. Names of translators, commentators, editors, and preface
writers, if they do not occur in the title-page, may be added
Page 218
within square brackets, a cross-reference being made in each
case. {104}
6. It should be noticed that sometimes the respondent and
defender of a thesis are joint authors.
7. All persons generally known by a forename are to be so
entered, the English form being used in the case of sovereigns,
popes, ruling princes, Oriental writers, friars, and persons
canonized.
[This is like the A. L. A., but differently expressed.]
8. [References are required to be always made to the first word
under which a society is entered] from the name of the place
where its headquarters are established.
9. Individual works to be arranged under an author in
alphabetical order of titles, under the first word, not an article
or a preposition having the meaning of “concerning.”
10. The German ä, ö, ü, are to be arranged as if written out in
full—ae, oe, ue.
case. {104}
6. It should be noticed that sometimes the respondent and
defender of a thesis are joint authors.
7. All persons generally known by a forename are to be so
entered, the English form being used in the case of sovereigns,
popes, ruling princes, Oriental writers, friars, and persons
canonized.
[This is like the A. L. A., but differently expressed.]
8. [References are required to be always made to the first word
under which a society is entered] from the name of the place
where its headquarters are established.
9. Individual works to be arranged under an author in
alphabetical order of titles, under the first word, not an article
or a preposition having the meaning of “concerning.”
10. The German ä, ö, ü, are to be arranged as if written out in
full—ae, oe, ue.
Page 219
THE BODLEIAN LIBRARY RULES.
The Bodleian rules differ from the A. L. A. in the following
points [71]:
1. All omissions to be indicated by a group of three dots (...).
The name of the author or editor, if it occur on the title-page in
the same form as in the heading, may be omitted if no
ambiguity be occasioned thereby.
3. Does not capitalize titles of honor when standing instead of
a proper name.
6. Puts number of volumes before place of publication. Does
not give number of pages, maps, etc. In the case of books of
the 15th and 16th centuries or of special value or rarity, the
names of the publisher and printer are to be added after the
place.
Books are to be entered:
10. Under the surnames of authors, when stated on the
title-page or otherwise certainly known, followed by the
forename and other necessary prefixes in round brackets.
11. When only the initials or pseudonym of an author
occur in the book, it is to be regarded for the purpose of
headings as anonymous; and a cross-reference is to be
made from the initials or pseudonym to the first heading,
The Bodleian rules differ from the A. L. A. in the following
points [71]:
1. All omissions to be indicated by a group of three dots (...).
The name of the author or editor, if it occur on the title-page in
the same form as in the heading, may be omitted if no
ambiguity be occasioned thereby.
3. Does not capitalize titles of honor when standing instead of
a proper name.
6. Puts number of volumes before place of publication. Does
not give number of pages, maps, etc. In the case of books of
the 15th and 16th centuries or of special value or rarity, the
names of the publisher and printer are to be added after the
place.
Books are to be entered:
10. Under the surnames of authors, when stated on the
title-page or otherwise certainly known, followed by the
forename and other necessary prefixes in round brackets.
11. When only the initials or pseudonym of an author
occur in the book, it is to be regarded for the purpose of
headings as anonymous; and a cross-reference is to be
made from the initials or pseudonym to the first heading,
Page 220
the last initial being placed first, followed by the others in
round brackets.
12. Under the pseudonyms of the writers, unless the book
be already entered under two headings, in which case a
cross-reference is to be made from the pseudonym to the
first heading.
13. Under the names of editors of collections, and under
the catch-titles of such collections; the parts are to be at the
same time sufficiently catalogued under their own
headings.
15. Under the chief word or words of the titles of
periodicals.
16. Under the first striking word or words of the titles of
anonymous {105} works, with a cross-reference, where
advisable, from any other noticeable word or catch-title. If
the name of a writer occur in a work but not on the title-
page, the work is also to be regarded for the purpose of
headings as anonymous.
17. Commentaries with the text, editions of the text, and
translations are to be entered (1) under the heading of the
original work, and (2) under the name of the commentator,
editor, or translator; commentaries without the text are to be
entered under the same two headings, the second being placed
first.
18. Editions of the entire Bible, with or without the
Apocrypha, are to be entered under the word Bible: editions of
parts of the Bible comprising more than one book under the
round brackets.
12. Under the pseudonyms of the writers, unless the book
be already entered under two headings, in which case a
cross-reference is to be made from the pseudonym to the
first heading.
13. Under the names of editors of collections, and under
the catch-titles of such collections; the parts are to be at the
same time sufficiently catalogued under their own
headings.
15. Under the chief word or words of the titles of
periodicals.
16. Under the first striking word or words of the titles of
anonymous {105} works, with a cross-reference, where
advisable, from any other noticeable word or catch-title. If
the name of a writer occur in a work but not on the title-
page, the work is also to be regarded for the purpose of
headings as anonymous.
17. Commentaries with the text, editions of the text, and
translations are to be entered (1) under the heading of the
original work, and (2) under the name of the commentator,
editor, or translator; commentaries without the text are to be
entered under the same two headings, the second being placed
first.
18. Editions of the entire Bible, with or without the
Apocrypha, are to be entered under the word Bible: editions of
parts of the Bible comprising more than one book under the
Page 221
words Testament (Old), Apocrypha, Testament (New), or lesser
divisions such as Pentateuch, Historical books, Hagiographa,
Prophets, Gospels, Paul the apostle, Epistles (General).
21. Service and prayer books of the Church of England are to
be entered under the names by which they are commonly
known, such as Prayer (Book of Common), Baptism (Order
of), Communion (Holy), etc.: those of the Church of Rome in
like manner under Missal, Breviary, Hours, etc., with a
subheading of the use. Service-books of other religious
communities are to be entered under the head of Liturgies,
with a subheading of the religious community.
22. Separate musical compositions, accompanied by words,
are to be entered under the names of the authors and
translators of the words (unless these are taken from the Bible
or a public service-book) as well as under those of the authors
and editors of the music.
24. In the case of an academical thesis the praeses is to be
considered as the author, unless the work unequivocally
appears to be the work of the respondent or defender.
26. Catalogues are to be entered under the name of the
compiler; also, as circumstances require, under the names of
one or more of the institutions or persons now or formerly
owning the collection, and, where desirable, under the name of
the collection itself.
divisions such as Pentateuch, Historical books, Hagiographa,
Prophets, Gospels, Paul the apostle, Epistles (General).
21. Service and prayer books of the Church of England are to
be entered under the names by which they are commonly
known, such as Prayer (Book of Common), Baptism (Order
of), Communion (Holy), etc.: those of the Church of Rome in
like manner under Missal, Breviary, Hours, etc., with a
subheading of the use. Service-books of other religious
communities are to be entered under the head of Liturgies,
with a subheading of the religious community.
22. Separate musical compositions, accompanied by words,
are to be entered under the names of the authors and
translators of the words (unless these are taken from the Bible
or a public service-book) as well as under those of the authors
and editors of the music.
24. In the case of an academical thesis the praeses is to be
considered as the author, unless the work unequivocally
appears to be the work of the respondent or defender.
26. Catalogues are to be entered under the name of the
compiler; also, as circumstances require, under the names of
one or more of the institutions or persons now or formerly
owning the collection, and, where desirable, under the name of
the collection itself.
Page 222
32. English and French surnames beginning with a prefix or
prefixes are to be recorded under the first prefix, and surnames
in other languages under the word following the last prefix—
except that French names beginning with de or d’ are to be
entered under the word following de or d’.
33. English compound surnames, not connected by an hyphen,
are to be entered under the last part of the names [A. L. A.—
under first part]: foreign ones, with or without hyphens, under
the entire compound name, cross-references being given in all
instances.
35. A society is to be entered under the leading word or words
of its corporate name.
37. Dashes or asterisks in names and titles are to precede
letters of the alphabet. {106}
39. The works of an author, and other books capable of similar
treatment, are to be arranged in the following order, an index
or conspectus of the entire article being prefixed when
expedient:
(1) General cross-references.
(2) Collections of all the works of the author in the
original language, whether including or excluding
fragments, and whether with or without translations or
commentaries.
(a) Dated editions in chronological order.
prefixes are to be recorded under the first prefix, and surnames
in other languages under the word following the last prefix—
except that French names beginning with de or d’ are to be
entered under the word following de or d’.
33. English compound surnames, not connected by an hyphen,
are to be entered under the last part of the names [A. L. A.—
under first part]: foreign ones, with or without hyphens, under
the entire compound name, cross-references being given in all
instances.
35. A society is to be entered under the leading word or words
of its corporate name.
37. Dashes or asterisks in names and titles are to precede
letters of the alphabet. {106}
39. The works of an author, and other books capable of similar
treatment, are to be arranged in the following order, an index
or conspectus of the entire article being prefixed when
expedient:
(1) General cross-references.
(2) Collections of all the works of the author in the
original language, whether including or excluding
fragments, and whether with or without translations or
commentaries.
(a) Dated editions in chronological order.
Page 223
(b) Editions without date and without conjecturally
supplied date; but if known to be of the 15th century
they are to precede the dated editions.
But new editions of a work by the same editor are to
succeed the first entry of the edition.
(3) Translations without the text, of collected works, in
alphabetical order of languages, cross-references being
inserted in this series to all editions which contain the
original text as well as a translation. Polyglot editions are
to precede all others.
(4) Commentaries without the text, on collected works, in
chronological order. Scholia are to precede all other
commentaries.
(5) Selections from collected works.
(6) Collections of two or more works of the author, in
alphabetical order of the general title of the collection; or,
if there be none, of the first work of the collection. In
special cases entries which would in strictness fall under
this division may be placed in the succeeding paragraph,
with a cross-reference.
(7) Separate works, or entire parts of a separate work, in
chronological order of the first issues of the works; in any
difficult cases an alphabetical or other special arrangement
is to be made.
(8) Fragments of the author; but when a work exists only
in fragments it may be entered under preceding
paragraphs.
(9) (a) Lexicons, (b) Indexes and concordances.
supplied date; but if known to be of the 15th century
they are to precede the dated editions.
But new editions of a work by the same editor are to
succeed the first entry of the edition.
(3) Translations without the text, of collected works, in
alphabetical order of languages, cross-references being
inserted in this series to all editions which contain the
original text as well as a translation. Polyglot editions are
to precede all others.
(4) Commentaries without the text, on collected works, in
chronological order. Scholia are to precede all other
commentaries.
(5) Selections from collected works.
(6) Collections of two or more works of the author, in
alphabetical order of the general title of the collection; or,
if there be none, of the first work of the collection. In
special cases entries which would in strictness fall under
this division may be placed in the succeeding paragraph,
with a cross-reference.
(7) Separate works, or entire parts of a separate work, in
chronological order of the first issues of the works; in any
difficult cases an alphabetical or other special arrangement
is to be made.
(8) Fragments of the author; but when a work exists only
in fragments it may be entered under preceding
paragraphs.
(9) (a) Lexicons, (b) Indexes and concordances.
Page 224
(10) Dissertations, treatises, imitations, etc., which do not
fall under preceding heads, in chronological order.
(11) Biographies.
(12) Bibliographies.
N. B. The principles of arrangement in the preceding paragraphs are to
be used where applicable, in other articles.
40. Biographies are to be entered under the subjects of them,
as well as under the writers.
41. The order of alphabetization is to be that of the English
alphabet, except that, in general, I and U before a vowel are to
be arranged as J and V, and J and V before a consonant as I
and U, with such cross-references as may be necessary.
42. Headings composed of more than one separate word are
not to be regarded for purposes of arrangement as a single
word. {107}
45. The German ä, ö, ü are to be arranged as if written out in
full, ae, oe, ue.
46. Arabic figures are to used rather than Roman; but Roman
figures may be used after the names of ruling princes and
popes, or to designate the number of a volume or chapter when
followed by a page [or division] number in Arabic figures.
50. Word-books, grammars, and alphabets are to be entered
under the names of the languages to which they relate, as well
as under the names of their compilers and editors—except
fall under preceding heads, in chronological order.
(11) Biographies.
(12) Bibliographies.
N. B. The principles of arrangement in the preceding paragraphs are to
be used where applicable, in other articles.
40. Biographies are to be entered under the subjects of them,
as well as under the writers.
41. The order of alphabetization is to be that of the English
alphabet, except that, in general, I and U before a vowel are to
be arranged as J and V, and J and V before a consonant as I
and U, with such cross-references as may be necessary.
42. Headings composed of more than one separate word are
not to be regarded for purposes of arrangement as a single
word. {107}
45. The German ä, ö, ü are to be arranged as if written out in
full, ae, oe, ue.
46. Arabic figures are to used rather than Roman; but Roman
figures may be used after the names of ruling princes and
popes, or to designate the number of a volume or chapter when
followed by a page [or division] number in Arabic figures.
50. Word-books, grammars, and alphabets are to be entered
under the names of the languages to which they relate, as well
as under the names of their compilers and editors—except
Page 225
that, where a word-book relates to two languages, or dialects,
of which one is modern literary English, no separate entry
needs be made in respect of the latter.
51. Long and important articles are to have an index prefixed,
and subheadings may be added to the main heading in the
same line, for convenience of reference.
52. Gives a list of 28 abbreviations allowable in ordinary
entries.
53. The general rule regulating the use of brackets is that
round brackets include notes derived from the work itself,
while square brackets include notes of which the matter or
form is independent of the work.
54. Single sermons are to have a note of the text added.
[71] It will be seen in several cases that, unlike the A. L. A, rules, they are designed for a
library that has no subject catalogue.
of which one is modern literary English, no separate entry
needs be made in respect of the latter.
51. Long and important articles are to have an index prefixed,
and subheadings may be added to the main heading in the
same line, for convenience of reference.
52. Gives a list of 28 abbreviations allowable in ordinary
entries.
53. The general rule regulating the use of brackets is that
round brackets include notes derived from the work itself,
while square brackets include notes of which the matter or
form is independent of the work.
54. Single sermons are to have a note of the text added.
[71] It will be seen in several cases that, unlike the A. L. A, rules, they are designed for a
library that has no subject catalogue.
Page 226
MR. DEWEY’S RULES FOR A CARD
CATALOGUE.
Mr. Dewey’s Rules for a card catalogue, printed in No. 2 of
the Library notes, pp. 111–124, and reprinted as Columbia
catalog rules, Boston, 1888, and again as Library School rules,
Boston, 1889, “except for the enlargements, differ from the A.
L. A. rules,” he says, “only in the following points:
We enter always under real name, omitting the exception
that some books may go under pseudonyms. [Not Eliot, G.,
but Lewes or Cross.] (1e
We follow the rule recommended as best in Cutter’s rules
No. 40, putting under the name of the place local and
municipal societies, though the corporate name may not
begin with that word. (1s
We give cities in their vernacular form instead of in
English. [Wien, not Vienna.] (2f
We do not capitalize common nouns in German, but follow
the rule of the Library of Congress. [Wahrheit und
dichtung.] (5m
We give place and date at the end of the imprint entries
instead of after edition, thus following the L. A. U. K. and
Bodleian rules, the A. L. A. minority report, and the
Library of Congress in putting those most important items
in the most prominent place, instead of burying them back
of minor items.
CATALOGUE.
Mr. Dewey’s Rules for a card catalogue, printed in No. 2 of
the Library notes, pp. 111–124, and reprinted as Columbia
catalog rules, Boston, 1888, and again as Library School rules,
Boston, 1889, “except for the enlargements, differ from the A.
L. A. rules,” he says, “only in the following points:
We enter always under real name, omitting the exception
that some books may go under pseudonyms. [Not Eliot, G.,
but Lewes or Cross.] (1e
We follow the rule recommended as best in Cutter’s rules
No. 40, putting under the name of the place local and
municipal societies, though the corporate name may not
begin with that word. (1s
We give cities in their vernacular form instead of in
English. [Wien, not Vienna.] (2f
We do not capitalize common nouns in German, but follow
the rule of the Library of Congress. [Wahrheit und
dichtung.] (5m
We give place and date at the end of the imprint entries
instead of after edition, thus following the L. A. U. K. and
Bodleian rules, the A. L. A. minority report, and the
Library of Congress in putting those most important items
in the most prominent place, instead of burying them back
of minor items.
Page 227
We give edition in English rather than in the language of
the title, [Ed. 2, not 2e Aufl.] (4c
We use Arabic figures for all numerals, unless Roman are
used on the title after names of rulers and popes.” [Charles
1, Leo 13.] (9b
the title, [Ed. 2, not 2e Aufl.] (4c
We use Arabic figures for all numerals, unless Roman are
used on the title after names of rulers and popes.” [Charles
1, Leo 13.] (9b
Page 228
APPENDIX II.
REPORT OF THE TRANSLITERATION
COMMITTEE.
[See § 36. This Report was made to the American Library
Association in 1885, and printed in the Proceedings of the Lake
George Conference, and in the Library journal, 10: 302–8.]
In determining the principles of transliteration it must be
remembered that a catalogue is not a learned treatise intended for
special scholars, and bound to an erudite consistency, at whatever
cost of convenience. It is simply a key to open the doors of
knowledge to a partly ignorant and partly learned public, and it is
very important that such a key should turn easily. A good
catalogue, therefore, will be a compromise between the claims of
learning and logic on the one hand, and of ignorance, error, and
custom on the other. Speaking generally, that form of name must
be chosen with which people now are, and in the future will be,
most familiar. This reference to the future is important. The
catalogue must not be in advance of its age; but, on the other hand,
it will not be well that it should be behind the next generation. If,
therefore, there is an evident current of progress in any direction
the makers of the catalogue will do well to be a little before the
present practice, in the hope that the world will soon catch up with
REPORT OF THE TRANSLITERATION
COMMITTEE.
[See § 36. This Report was made to the American Library
Association in 1885, and printed in the Proceedings of the Lake
George Conference, and in the Library journal, 10: 302–8.]
In determining the principles of transliteration it must be
remembered that a catalogue is not a learned treatise intended for
special scholars, and bound to an erudite consistency, at whatever
cost of convenience. It is simply a key to open the doors of
knowledge to a partly ignorant and partly learned public, and it is
very important that such a key should turn easily. A good
catalogue, therefore, will be a compromise between the claims of
learning and logic on the one hand, and of ignorance, error, and
custom on the other. Speaking generally, that form of name must
be chosen with which people now are, and in the future will be,
most familiar. This reference to the future is important. The
catalogue must not be in advance of its age; but, on the other hand,
it will not be well that it should be behind the next generation. If,
therefore, there is an evident current of progress in any direction
the makers of the catalogue will do well to be a little before the
present practice, in the hope that the world will soon catch up with
Page 229
them, not to pass them before the catalogue itself has been
superseded by another. The larger the catalogue, therefore, and the
less likely to be soon reprinted, the more may it venture to be
ahead of the times. Nevertheless the maker will do well to
remember that the future is very uncertain.
One evident current of progress there is,—in favor of adopting
the continental value of the vowels, representing the ou sound, for
instance, not by ou nor by oo (as does Dr. Thomas), but by u;
writing, therefore, Butan, not Boutan, nor Bootan, Turgenef and
not Tourgueneff; using also a and not ah for the sound of a in
father, papa (I speak as a New Englander); using the i for the
English e sound; and giving what are unfortunately called the
corresponding short sounds by doubling the following consonant;
thus Nānā would be spelt with one n, but Nanny with two. This
tendency, which has been gathering strength for some time, has at
last received the sanction of an influential body, the Royal
Geographical Society, and can be followed with safety.
The following notes are taken mostly from Mr. Heilprin’s
articles in the Nation:
1. For ancient Greek names use the Latin forms, e. g.,
Homerus not Homeros, Plato not Platon, Philippus not Philippos.
But where two forms are in common use choose that which is
nearest the Greek.
2. For Egyptian names known to us through the Greek, both
the Greek and the Egyptian form (as Cheops and Shufu) should be
superseded by another. The larger the catalogue, therefore, and the
less likely to be soon reprinted, the more may it venture to be
ahead of the times. Nevertheless the maker will do well to
remember that the future is very uncertain.
One evident current of progress there is,—in favor of adopting
the continental value of the vowels, representing the ou sound, for
instance, not by ou nor by oo (as does Dr. Thomas), but by u;
writing, therefore, Butan, not Boutan, nor Bootan, Turgenef and
not Tourgueneff; using also a and not ah for the sound of a in
father, papa (I speak as a New Englander); using the i for the
English e sound; and giving what are unfortunately called the
corresponding short sounds by doubling the following consonant;
thus Nānā would be spelt with one n, but Nanny with two. This
tendency, which has been gathering strength for some time, has at
last received the sanction of an influential body, the Royal
Geographical Society, and can be followed with safety.
The following notes are taken mostly from Mr. Heilprin’s
articles in the Nation:
1. For ancient Greek names use the Latin forms, e. g.,
Homerus not Homeros, Plato not Platon, Philippus not Philippos.
But where two forms are in common use choose that which is
nearest the Greek.
2. For Egyptian names known to us through the Greek, both
the Greek and the Egyptian form (as Cheops and Shufu) should be
Page 230
given, with a reference from the one which is not chosen for the
main entry.
3. Biblical names are to be written as we find them in the
English Bible, and the names of post-Biblical Jews, if derived
from the Scriptures, should retain their Anglicized form. On the
other hand, a strict transliteration is demanded of rabbinical and
other more or less pure Hebrew names which are not taken from
Scriptures, and therefore have no popular English forms, to which,
again, there is an exception in the case of a few celebrated Jewish
authors, as Maimonides, where an un-Hebrew form has been fully
adopted in English literature.
East Indian names have such long accepted forms that it might
well be doubted whether it will do to use any others. Cashmere,
Mooltan, Jellaleddin, Punjaub, have taken their places in literature
and in the popular mind. Nevertheless, as the better system which
writes Kashmir, Multan, Jalal ud Din, Panjab, is now adopted in
most histories, in all official documents, among others in Hunter’s
great statistical dictionary of Bengal, it is evident that it is the
coming method, and, in accordance with the {109} principles already
laid down, we are inclined to recommend this spelling rather than
the clumsy English fashion of the last generation.
All other Asiatic and African names should be transliterated
according to the rules of the Royal Geographical Society, which
we quote here from their Proceedings for August, 1885 (pp. 535,
536).
main entry.
3. Biblical names are to be written as we find them in the
English Bible, and the names of post-Biblical Jews, if derived
from the Scriptures, should retain their Anglicized form. On the
other hand, a strict transliteration is demanded of rabbinical and
other more or less pure Hebrew names which are not taken from
Scriptures, and therefore have no popular English forms, to which,
again, there is an exception in the case of a few celebrated Jewish
authors, as Maimonides, where an un-Hebrew form has been fully
adopted in English literature.
East Indian names have such long accepted forms that it might
well be doubted whether it will do to use any others. Cashmere,
Mooltan, Jellaleddin, Punjaub, have taken their places in literature
and in the popular mind. Nevertheless, as the better system which
writes Kashmir, Multan, Jalal ud Din, Panjab, is now adopted in
most histories, in all official documents, among others in Hunter’s
great statistical dictionary of Bengal, it is evident that it is the
coming method, and, in accordance with the {109} principles already
laid down, we are inclined to recommend this spelling rather than
the clumsy English fashion of the last generation.
All other Asiatic and African names should be transliterated
according to the rules of the Royal Geographical Society, which
we quote here from their Proceedings for August, 1885 (pp. 535,
536).
Page 231
The Council of the Royal Geographical Society have adopted
the following rules for such geographical names as are not, in the
countries to which they belong, written in the Roman character.
These rules are identical with those adopted for the Admiralty
charts, and will henceforth be used in all publications of the
society:—
1. No change will be made in the orthography of foreign
names in countries which use Roman letters: thus, Spanish,
Portuguese, Dutch, etc., names will be spelt as by the respective
nations.
2. Neither will any change be made in the spelling of such
names in languages which are not written in Roman character as
have become by long usage familiar to English readers: thus,
Calcutta, Cutch, Celebes, Mecca, etc., will be retained in their
present form.
3. The true sound of the word, as locally pronounced, will be
taken as the basis of the spelling.
4. An approximation, however, to the sound is alone aimed at.
A system which would attempt to represent the more delicate
inflections of sound and accent would be so complicated as only
to defeat itself.
5. The broad features of the system are, that vowels are
pronounced as in Italian and consonants as in English.
6. One accent only is used—the acute—to denote the syllable
on which stress is laid.
the following rules for such geographical names as are not, in the
countries to which they belong, written in the Roman character.
These rules are identical with those adopted for the Admiralty
charts, and will henceforth be used in all publications of the
society:—
1. No change will be made in the orthography of foreign
names in countries which use Roman letters: thus, Spanish,
Portuguese, Dutch, etc., names will be spelt as by the respective
nations.
2. Neither will any change be made in the spelling of such
names in languages which are not written in Roman character as
have become by long usage familiar to English readers: thus,
Calcutta, Cutch, Celebes, Mecca, etc., will be retained in their
present form.
3. The true sound of the word, as locally pronounced, will be
taken as the basis of the spelling.
4. An approximation, however, to the sound is alone aimed at.
A system which would attempt to represent the more delicate
inflections of sound and accent would be so complicated as only
to defeat itself.
5. The broad features of the system are, that vowels are
pronounced as in Italian and consonants as in English.
6. One accent only is used—the acute—to denote the syllable
on which stress is laid.
Page 232
7. Every letter is pronounced. When two vowels come together
each one is sounded, though the result, when spoken quickly, is
sometimes scarcely to be distinguished from a single sound, as in
ai, au, ei.
8. Indian names are accepted as spelt in Hunter’s Gazetteer.
The amplification of the rules is given below:
Letters. Pronunciation and remarks. Examples.
a ah, a as in father Java, Banána.
e eh, e as in benefit Tel-el-Kebír, Oléleh,
Yezo, Medina,
Levúka, Peru.
i English e; i as in ravine; the
sound of ee in beet. Thus
not Feejee, but Fiji, Hindi.
o o as in mote Tokio.
u long u, as in flute; the sound
of oo in boot. Thus, not
Zooloo, but Zulu, Sumatra.
All vowels are shortened in Yarra, Tanna, Mecca,
sound by doubling the Jidda, Bonny.
following consonant.
Doubling of a vowel is only Nuulúa, Oosima.
necessary where there is a
distinct repetition of the
single sound.
ai English i as in ice Shanghai.
au ow as in how. Thus not
foochow, but Fuchau.
ao is slightly different from Macao.
above.
each one is sounded, though the result, when spoken quickly, is
sometimes scarcely to be distinguished from a single sound, as in
ai, au, ei.
8. Indian names are accepted as spelt in Hunter’s Gazetteer.
The amplification of the rules is given below:
Letters. Pronunciation and remarks. Examples.
a ah, a as in father Java, Banána.
e eh, e as in benefit Tel-el-Kebír, Oléleh,
Yezo, Medina,
Levúka, Peru.
i English e; i as in ravine; the
sound of ee in beet. Thus
not Feejee, but Fiji, Hindi.
o o as in mote Tokio.
u long u, as in flute; the sound
of oo in boot. Thus, not
Zooloo, but Zulu, Sumatra.
All vowels are shortened in Yarra, Tanna, Mecca,
sound by doubling the Jidda, Bonny.
following consonant.
Doubling of a vowel is only Nuulúa, Oosima.
necessary where there is a
distinct repetition of the
single sound.
ai English i as in ice Shanghai.
au ow as in how. Thus not
foochow, but Fuchau.
ao is slightly different from Macao.
above.
Page 233
ei is the sound of the two Beirút, Beilúl.
Italian vowels, but is
frequently slurred over,
when it is scarcely to be
distinguished from ey in
the English they.
b English b.
c is always soft, but is so Celebes.
nearly the sound of s that
it should be seldom used.
(If Celebes were not
already recognized it
would be written Selebes.)
ch is always soft as in church. Chingchin.
d English d.
f English f. ph should not be
used for the sound of f.
Thus, not Haiphong but Haifong, Nafa.
g is always hard. (Soft g is Galápagos.
given by j.)
h is always pronounced when
inserted.
j English j. Dj should never be Japan, Jinchuen.
put for this sound.
k English k. It should always
be put for the hard c.
Thus, not Corea, but Korea
kh the Oriental guttural Khan.
gh is another guttural, as in the Dagh, Ghazi.
Turkish.
l,m,n as in English.
Italian vowels, but is
frequently slurred over,
when it is scarcely to be
distinguished from ey in
the English they.
b English b.
c is always soft, but is so Celebes.
nearly the sound of s that
it should be seldom used.
(If Celebes were not
already recognized it
would be written Selebes.)
ch is always soft as in church. Chingchin.
d English d.
f English f. ph should not be
used for the sound of f.
Thus, not Haiphong but Haifong, Nafa.
g is always hard. (Soft g is Galápagos.
given by j.)
h is always pronounced when
inserted.
j English j. Dj should never be Japan, Jinchuen.
put for this sound.
k English k. It should always
be put for the hard c.
Thus, not Corea, but Korea
kh the Oriental guttural Khan.
gh is another guttural, as in the Dagh, Ghazi.
Turkish.
l,m,n as in English.
Page 234
ng has two separate sounds, the
one hard as in the English
word finger, the other as
in singer. As these two
sounds are rarely
employed in the same
locality, no attempt is
made to distinguish
between them.
p as in English.
q should never be employed; Kwangtung.
qu is given as kw.
r,s,t,v,w,x,y as in English Sawákin.
y is always a consonant, as in
yard, and therefore should
never be used as a
terminal, i or e being
substituted. Thus, not
Mikindány but Mikíndáni.
not Kwaly, but Kwale.
z English z Zulu.
Accents should not generally Tongatábu,
be used, but when there is Galápagos,
a very decided emphatic Paláwan, Saráwak.
syllable or stress, which
affects the sound of the
word, it should be marked
by an acute accent.
A few points need to be emphasized. Of course the
consonantal sound in itch should never be expressed in
transliteration by the Polish cz, nor by the German tsch. Tch has
been much used for this sound; but the t is hardly necessary if, as
one hard as in the English
word finger, the other as
in singer. As these two
sounds are rarely
employed in the same
locality, no attempt is
made to distinguish
between them.
p as in English.
q should never be employed; Kwangtung.
qu is given as kw.
r,s,t,v,w,x,y as in English Sawákin.
y is always a consonant, as in
yard, and therefore should
never be used as a
terminal, i or e being
substituted. Thus, not
Mikindány but Mikíndáni.
not Kwaly, but Kwale.
z English z Zulu.
Accents should not generally Tongatábu,
be used, but when there is Galápagos,
a very decided emphatic Paláwan, Saráwak.
syllable or stress, which
affects the sound of the
word, it should be marked
by an acute accent.
A few points need to be emphasized. Of course the
consonantal sound in itch should never be expressed in
transliteration by the Polish cz, nor by the German tsch. Tch has
been much used for this sound; but the t is hardly necessary if, as
Page 235
the Geographical Society recommend, ch is always used with this
sound only and never with the sound sh. Of course there is no
reason why ch should be used in foreign names with the sound sh
any more than j with the sound zh. All that was needed to prevent
ambiguity was for some competent authority to make a rule; and
these rules of the Geographical Society will no doubt soon be
copied into all manuals and followed by the majority. In this
connection we express our regret that a new edition of Dr.
Thomas’s excellent Dictionary of Biography continues to give his
support to what we believe is an obsolescent system of
transliteration.
Nor should the consonantal sound in judge be rendered by the
English dg, nor the French dj, nor the German dsch, but by j
alone. Likewise the consonantal sound in she is not to be written
after the French style, ch, or as the Germans do, sch. The sound
which the French transliterate by j we must express by zh (e.g.,
Nizhni Novgorod). Tz is best to use in Semitic and Slavic names,
and ts in Japanese and Chinese. For the Semitic “yod” y is the
proper equivalent, and not the German j. But after a consonant in
the same syllable it is usual to change the y to i (Biela not Byela),
and in Russian names ai, ei, oi, ui are used instead of ay, ey, oy, uy
(Alexei not Alexey). After i the y is dropped (Dobni not Dobniy).
W is to be used rather than i in Arabic names (e. g., Moawiyah).
But the Russian, Serb, Bulgarian, and Wallach contain no such
sound or letter as w, and we must write Paskevitch, Vasili, not as
sound only and never with the sound sh. Of course there is no
reason why ch should be used in foreign names with the sound sh
any more than j with the sound zh. All that was needed to prevent
ambiguity was for some competent authority to make a rule; and
these rules of the Geographical Society will no doubt soon be
copied into all manuals and followed by the majority. In this
connection we express our regret that a new edition of Dr.
Thomas’s excellent Dictionary of Biography continues to give his
support to what we believe is an obsolescent system of
transliteration.
Nor should the consonantal sound in judge be rendered by the
English dg, nor the French dj, nor the German dsch, but by j
alone. Likewise the consonantal sound in she is not to be written
after the French style, ch, or as the Germans do, sch. The sound
which the French transliterate by j we must express by zh (e.g.,
Nizhni Novgorod). Tz is best to use in Semitic and Slavic names,
and ts in Japanese and Chinese. For the Semitic “yod” y is the
proper equivalent, and not the German j. But after a consonant in
the same syllable it is usual to change the y to i (Biela not Byela),
and in Russian names ai, ei, oi, ui are used instead of ay, ey, oy, uy
(Alexei not Alexey). After i the y is dropped (Dobni not Dobniy).
W is to be used rather than i in Arabic names (e. g., Moawiyah).
But the Russian, Serb, Bulgarian, and Wallach contain no such
sound or letter as w, and we must write Paskevitch, Vasili, not as
Page 236
do the Germans, Paskewitch, Wasili. In the last syllable of names
of places (Azov, Kiev) ev and ov are to be used, because the
Russians used the corresponding letter, though they pronounce ef
and of (in the nominative cases). But in the last syllable of family
names, similarly pronounced, of and ef may be used, because the
Russians sign their names off and eff when using Roman
characters. The last f, which they use, may be omitted as being
plainly not required to express the sound, and not corresponding
to the Russian character. Kh represents the full guttural, which the
Germans make ch and the Spanish j in Slavic and Oriental names.
H answers to the softer guttural as well as to the Hebrew he. K
answers to the Semitic Kaph and Koph.
The use of ei for the sound of a in fate, ea in great, ai in trait,
is not altogether satisfactory. It is not easy to see why e was not
used to represent this sound, and {111} the short e, like the short a, i,
o, and u, indicated by doubling the following consonant, as Yeddo,
Meddina.
The general rule, then, is to use the consonants with their
English value, the vowels with their continental, or, to speak more
exactly, their German and Italian value, for the French value of u
should never be used, and the short French a requires of us a
doubled consonant after it. Their ou and our oo is quite
unnecessary to express the sound of the last syllable of Timbuctu
or Khartum.
C: A. C UTTER.
C. B. T ILLINGHAST.
of places (Azov, Kiev) ev and ov are to be used, because the
Russians used the corresponding letter, though they pronounce ef
and of (in the nominative cases). But in the last syllable of family
names, similarly pronounced, of and ef may be used, because the
Russians sign their names off and eff when using Roman
characters. The last f, which they use, may be omitted as being
plainly not required to express the sound, and not corresponding
to the Russian character. Kh represents the full guttural, which the
Germans make ch and the Spanish j in Slavic and Oriental names.
H answers to the softer guttural as well as to the Hebrew he. K
answers to the Semitic Kaph and Koph.
The use of ei for the sound of a in fate, ea in great, ai in trait,
is not altogether satisfactory. It is not easy to see why e was not
used to represent this sound, and {111} the short e, like the short a, i,
o, and u, indicated by doubling the following consonant, as Yeddo,
Meddina.
The general rule, then, is to use the consonants with their
English value, the vowels with their continental, or, to speak more
exactly, their German and Italian value, for the French value of u
should never be used, and the short French a requires of us a
doubled consonant after it. Their ou and our oo is quite
unnecessary to express the sound of the last syllable of Timbuctu
or Khartum.
C: A. C UTTER.
C. B. T ILLINGHAST.
Page 237
W: C. L ANE.
M ICHAEL H EILPRIN.
Professor Toy, of Harvard University, furnished to the
committee a transliteration table for Semitic languages, Professor
Lanman, of the same University, one for Sanskrit, and Mr.
Heilprin, of the committee, one for Russian.
Professor L ANMAN remarked on his table:
1. It will be observed that each of the five rows numbered 1 to
5 consists of five letters; the second and fourth in each, i. e., the
aspirates, are often written, especially in older works, thus, k῾, g῾,
c῾, j῾, ῾, ῾, t῾, d῾, p῾, b῾; that is, the rough breathing takes the
place of the h.
2. Write long vowels with a macron, thus, ā, ī, ū, , and not
with a circumflex.
3. Wherever you find the combination i, with a dot under the
, reduce it to simple , since it is a simple unitary sound.
4. The palatals (row 2) are often written by means of the
gutturals and an accent: thus, we find k´ k´h g´ g´h ; for
c ch j jh and in some German books c (which has the sound of
ch in church) is written tsch, and j (= j in judge) in like manner
dsch. Further, c and ch are written in some English works as ch
and cch, a useless waste of labor.
5. When the third palatal is written by , it is common among
the Germans to write the first semi-vowel by j. The last semi-
M ICHAEL H EILPRIN.
Professor Toy, of Harvard University, furnished to the
committee a transliteration table for Semitic languages, Professor
Lanman, of the same University, one for Sanskrit, and Mr.
Heilprin, of the committee, one for Russian.
Professor L ANMAN remarked on his table:
1. It will be observed that each of the five rows numbered 1 to
5 consists of five letters; the second and fourth in each, i. e., the
aspirates, are often written, especially in older works, thus, k῾, g῾,
c῾, j῾, ῾, ῾, t῾, d῾, p῾, b῾; that is, the rough breathing takes the
place of the h.
2. Write long vowels with a macron, thus, ā, ī, ū, , and not
with a circumflex.
3. Wherever you find the combination i, with a dot under the
, reduce it to simple , since it is a simple unitary sound.
4. The palatals (row 2) are often written by means of the
gutturals and an accent: thus, we find k´ k´h g´ g´h ; for
c ch j jh and in some German books c (which has the sound of
ch in church) is written tsch, and j (= j in judge) in like manner
dsch. Further, c and ch are written in some English works as ch
and cch, a useless waste of labor.
5. When the third palatal is written by , it is common among
the Germans to write the first semi-vowel by j. The last semi-
Page 238
vowel is often written w (instead of v).
6. The transliteration of the first two sibilants is very
fluctuating. My ç, is written , by Monier Williams in his
dictionary.
The second sibilant is often written sh, sometimes š, by me as
, like the other linguals.
7. Finally an s at the end of a Sanskrit word is converted into
an aspiration called risarga, and written thus : , and in
transliteration is written in this manner, . The nasality of a vowel
is marked by or which appears in the Sanskrit as a dot above
the body of the consonant.
For a brief and lucid discussion of these matters and a defense
of the system of Professor Whitney, of Yale, which is followed in
his grammar and in Lanman’s Reader, see The Proceedings of the
American Oriental Society, October, 1880, p. xvii.
6. The transliteration of the first two sibilants is very
fluctuating. My ç, is written , by Monier Williams in his
dictionary.
The second sibilant is often written sh, sometimes š, by me as
, like the other linguals.
7. Finally an s at the end of a Sanskrit word is converted into
an aspiration called risarga, and written thus : , and in
transliteration is written in this manner, . The nasality of a vowel
is marked by or which appears in the Sanskrit as a dot above
the body of the consonant.
For a brief and lucid discussion of these matters and a defense
of the system of Professor Whitney, of Yale, which is followed in
his grammar and in Lanman’s Reader, see The Proceedings of the
American Oriental Society, October, 1880, p. xvii.
Page 239
Sanskrit Transliteration Report.
Page 240
Page 241
Semitic Transliteration.
Page 242
Page 243
Page 244
Russian Transliteration.
Page 245
Page 246
APPENDIX III.
R E P O RT O N B O O K S I Z E S .
A Special Committee on Book Sizes of the American Library
Association reported (Library journal, 3: 19, 20) the following rule:
Give the outside height in centimeters, using fractions
(decimals) where extreme accuracy is desired. For books of
special forms, prefix sq., ob., or nar., to indicate square, oblong, or
narrow, or else give the actual width after the height. Add a small
“h” to the figures giving the height, except when followed by the
width. In the latter case connect height and width with the
ordinary symbol ×, always giving the height first. If fractious are
not used, give the first centimeter above, e. g., all books between
18 and 19 mark 19h, because they fall in the 19th centimeter. For
the width, measure the board from the hinge to the edge, not
including the round. If desirable to give the size of the paper or
letter-press, prefix the measurement with p(aper) or t(ype),
including in the type neither folio nor signature lines.
For those preferring to use the common designations, the
following-rule was unanimously recommended:
Designate each size by its initial letter or letters (followed, if
preferred by the cataloguer, by its final letter “o,” superior “º”)
assigning the size by the following table, and prefixing sq., ob.,
nar., if the books be square, oblong, or narrow. Give the exact
R E P O RT O N B O O K S I Z E S .
A Special Committee on Book Sizes of the American Library
Association reported (Library journal, 3: 19, 20) the following rule:
Give the outside height in centimeters, using fractions
(decimals) where extreme accuracy is desired. For books of
special forms, prefix sq., ob., or nar., to indicate square, oblong, or
narrow, or else give the actual width after the height. Add a small
“h” to the figures giving the height, except when followed by the
width. In the latter case connect height and width with the
ordinary symbol ×, always giving the height first. If fractious are
not used, give the first centimeter above, e. g., all books between
18 and 19 mark 19h, because they fall in the 19th centimeter. For
the width, measure the board from the hinge to the edge, not
including the round. If desirable to give the size of the paper or
letter-press, prefix the measurement with p(aper) or t(ype),
including in the type neither folio nor signature lines.
For those preferring to use the common designations, the
following-rule was unanimously recommended:
Designate each size by its initial letter or letters (followed, if
preferred by the cataloguer, by its final letter “o,” superior “º”)
assigning the size by the following table, and prefixing sq., ob.,
nar., if the books be square, oblong, or narrow. Give the exact
Page 247
measurement of all size-curiosities, whether very large or very
small.
Numerical Limit of outside
Abbreviation
symbol height,
to be used.
formerly used. centimeters.
48º Fe 10
32º Tt 12.5
24º T 15
16º S 17.5
12º D 20
8º O 25
4º Q 30
fº F 40
fº F⁵ 50
fº F⁶ 60
fº F⁷ 70
fº etc. etc.
Any cataloguer desiring to use the term E (18º) may do so by
calling the smaller S (16º). This causes no confusion, for either E
or S is between 15 and 17½ cm. in height. Books from 20 to 40
cm. high may be called sm. Q, Q, and l. Q when of the square
form, but O, l. O, and F, or sm. F, when of the ordinary form.
Books smaller than 20 cm., and of the quarto form, are marked sq.
D, etc. * * *
small.
Numerical Limit of outside
Abbreviation
symbol height,
to be used.
formerly used. centimeters.
48º Fe 10
32º Tt 12.5
24º T 15
16º S 17.5
12º D 20
8º O 25
4º Q 30
fº F 40
fº F⁵ 50
fº F⁶ 60
fº F⁷ 70
fº etc. etc.
Any cataloguer desiring to use the term E (18º) may do so by
calling the smaller S (16º). This causes no confusion, for either E
or S is between 15 and 17½ cm. in height. Books from 20 to 40
cm. high may be called sm. Q, Q, and l. Q when of the square
form, but O, l. O, and F, or sm. F, when of the ordinary form.
Books smaller than 20 cm., and of the quarto form, are marked sq.
D, etc. * * *
Page 248
The plan of giving the height in centimeters has the advantage
that, once stated, it will never be forgotten. By it the size is more
easily {116} determined, more quickly recorded, much more definite
in its description, and, most important of all, is understood by all
users of catalogues after the first time, while the other systems are
intelligible only to those familiar with books. The committee
therefore recommends the plan of indicating the size by giving the
size.
that, once stated, it will never be forgotten. By it the size is more
easily {116} determined, more quickly recorded, much more definite
in its description, and, most important of all, is understood by all
users of catalogues after the first time, while the other systems are
intelligible only to those familiar with books. The committee
therefore recommends the plan of indicating the size by giving the
size.
Page 249
APPENDIX IV.
MR. EDMANDS ON ALPHABETICAL ORDER.
Mr. J. Edmands, in “Rules for alfabeting,” read at the meeting of the
American Library Association in August, 1887, and published in the
Library journal, 12: 326–341, discussed the subject carefully. A
committee of the Association was directed to prepare a code of rules, to be
reported in the Library journal; for their report see 14: 273–274. Their
code coincides with mine (§§ 214–239), except (1) that they adopt my
former order, “person, place, title, subject (except person and place),
form,” and not the present rule (§ 214), “person, place, followed by
subject (except person and place), form and title,” an arrangement which
probably was not proposed to the committee; and (2) that when two or
more names are spelled exactly alike except for the umlaut in names in
which the German ä, ö, or ü may occur, the committee put all the names
having the umlaut last, e. g., all the Müllers after the Mullers. I arrange by
the forenames.
Mr. Edmands correctly states as the principle of alphabeting
“Something follows nothing; or, conversely, Nothing before something;
thus in
Art of living
Arthur
In clover
Incas
the art, in the first case, and the in, in the second, ar followed by a space,
i. e., by nothing, and so precede the single word in which the t and the n
are followed by a letter; i. e., by something.”
His Rules agree with those stated or implied in § 214 and following
sections, with three exceptions. The first is this:
“A word used independently as a subject heding should
precede the same word used in connection with another. And if
MR. EDMANDS ON ALPHABETICAL ORDER.
Mr. J. Edmands, in “Rules for alfabeting,” read at the meeting of the
American Library Association in August, 1887, and published in the
Library journal, 12: 326–341, discussed the subject carefully. A
committee of the Association was directed to prepare a code of rules, to be
reported in the Library journal; for their report see 14: 273–274. Their
code coincides with mine (§§ 214–239), except (1) that they adopt my
former order, “person, place, title, subject (except person and place),
form,” and not the present rule (§ 214), “person, place, followed by
subject (except person and place), form and title,” an arrangement which
probably was not proposed to the committee; and (2) that when two or
more names are spelled exactly alike except for the umlaut in names in
which the German ä, ö, or ü may occur, the committee put all the names
having the umlaut last, e. g., all the Müllers after the Mullers. I arrange by
the forenames.
Mr. Edmands correctly states as the principle of alphabeting
“Something follows nothing; or, conversely, Nothing before something;
thus in
Art of living
Arthur
In clover
Incas
the art, in the first case, and the in, in the second, ar followed by a space,
i. e., by nothing, and so precede the single word in which the t and the n
are followed by a letter; i. e., by something.”
His Rules agree with those stated or implied in § 214 and following
sections, with three exceptions. The first is this:
“A word used independently as a subject heding should
precede the same word used in connection with another. And if
Page 250
this word is coupled with another word to form a compound
subject heding, it should follow the simple heding. And if this
word used as a simple heding is also used a substantiv to form a
different subject heding, and is also used adjectivly before a noun,
the substantiv use should precede the adjectiv use. And so we hav
this order:
Art
Art and artists
Art of conversation
Art amateur
“The reasons for it ar clear and strong. A substantiv should
precede an adjectiv, as being the more important word, and as
being less closely connected with the following than an adjectiv.
In uttering the frases Art applied to industry, Art of conversation,
there is a perceptible suspension of the voice after the word Art,
which does not occur in the case of Art journal, art amateur.”
The reason is not strong enough to justify interfering with the
alphabetical order, which demands that amateur shall precede and. It is
needless to compel the searcher to stop and think whether the word “art”
in the phrase he is hunting for is a noun {117} or an adjective; indeed, it is
not only a useless refinement, but positively dangerous, as likely
occasionally to lead him to overlook an entry which is out of its
alphabetical order.
The same objection applies to the practice of some cataloguers of
putting the plural immediately after the singular, even when the alphabet
demands that it should precede (as Charities, Charity), or when many
entries might come between (as between Bank and Banks). This practice
Mr. Edmands condemns.
The second exception is this:
subject heding, it should follow the simple heding. And if this
word used as a simple heding is also used a substantiv to form a
different subject heding, and is also used adjectivly before a noun,
the substantiv use should precede the adjectiv use. And so we hav
this order:
Art
Art and artists
Art of conversation
Art amateur
“The reasons for it ar clear and strong. A substantiv should
precede an adjectiv, as being the more important word, and as
being less closely connected with the following than an adjectiv.
In uttering the frases Art applied to industry, Art of conversation,
there is a perceptible suspension of the voice after the word Art,
which does not occur in the case of Art journal, art amateur.”
The reason is not strong enough to justify interfering with the
alphabetical order, which demands that amateur shall precede and. It is
needless to compel the searcher to stop and think whether the word “art”
in the phrase he is hunting for is a noun {117} or an adjective; indeed, it is
not only a useless refinement, but positively dangerous, as likely
occasionally to lead him to overlook an entry which is out of its
alphabetical order.
The same objection applies to the practice of some cataloguers of
putting the plural immediately after the singular, even when the alphabet
demands that it should precede (as Charities, Charity), or when many
entries might come between (as between Bank and Banks). This practice
Mr. Edmands condemns.
The second exception is this:
Page 251
“A single ful name should precede a double initial, i. e., a
surname with one Christian name should stand before the same
surname with two Christian names; thus,
John,
J. M.,
not
J. M.
John.
This plainly contradicts the principle “nothing before something.” A
period is too trifling a matter to arrange by, and neglecting that
J followed by nothing J
should precede J followed by o, John.
The third exception is this:
A book written by a single author should precede one written
by him and another.
(See the argument in the note to § 240.)
The rules which agree are in substance as follows:
New. Titles with the initial word New used as a proper
adjective followed by a common noun, and those in which it
forms a part of a compound place name should be arranged in one
series, alfabeting by the last part. (New Amsterdam, new boat,
New Canaan, new life.) Single words beginning with new,
whether names of persons, places, or things, should be arranged in
a following alfabetical series.
The hyfen is best disregarded, words connected by it being
arranged as two words.
surname with one Christian name should stand before the same
surname with two Christian names; thus,
John,
J. M.,
not
J. M.
John.
This plainly contradicts the principle “nothing before something.” A
period is too trifling a matter to arrange by, and neglecting that
J followed by nothing J
should precede J followed by o, John.
The third exception is this:
A book written by a single author should precede one written
by him and another.
(See the argument in the note to § 240.)
The rules which agree are in substance as follows:
New. Titles with the initial word New used as a proper
adjective followed by a common noun, and those in which it
forms a part of a compound place name should be arranged in one
series, alfabeting by the last part. (New Amsterdam, new boat,
New Canaan, new life.) Single words beginning with new,
whether names of persons, places, or things, should be arranged in
a following alfabetical series.
The hyfen is best disregarded, words connected by it being
arranged as two words.
Page 252
If an article, which belongs before a word used as a heding, is
inserted after it, it is not to be taken account of in alfabeting.
The plural in s should follow the singular. The possessive case
singular should follow the singular and precede the plural in s.
The sequence, however, may not in either case be immediate.
Several entries may intervene. Plurals in ies of words ending in y
should precede the singular, tho not necessarily in immediate
connection.
Common and proper nouns. In the case of words used
sometimes as common and sometimes as proper nouns, the true
order is person, place, and thing.
Surnames. Whenever a single name. Charles, Henry, William,
is used as the sole designation of a person, this should precede the
same word used as a surname. If several ranks are represented by
one name, precedence should be given to those bearing the highest
rank in this order, pope, emperor, king, noble, saint. If these
represent different nationalities they should be groupt in the
alfabetical order of the countries; and numerically under each
country, as John I., John II. {118}
Family names that hav the same sound, but a different
spelling, must be separated, but the reader should be aided as
much as we can by a free use of cross references.
In names beginning with La, Le, and De—not French names
—written separately, it is better to disregard the separation, and
arrange these words as if they were written solidly.
inserted after it, it is not to be taken account of in alfabeting.
The plural in s should follow the singular. The possessive case
singular should follow the singular and precede the plural in s.
The sequence, however, may not in either case be immediate.
Several entries may intervene. Plurals in ies of words ending in y
should precede the singular, tho not necessarily in immediate
connection.
Common and proper nouns. In the case of words used
sometimes as common and sometimes as proper nouns, the true
order is person, place, and thing.
Surnames. Whenever a single name. Charles, Henry, William,
is used as the sole designation of a person, this should precede the
same word used as a surname. If several ranks are represented by
one name, precedence should be given to those bearing the highest
rank in this order, pope, emperor, king, noble, saint. If these
represent different nationalities they should be groupt in the
alfabetical order of the countries; and numerically under each
country, as John I., John II. {118}
Family names that hav the same sound, but a different
spelling, must be separated, but the reader should be aided as
much as we can by a free use of cross references.
In names beginning with La, Le, and De—not French names
—written separately, it is better to disregard the separation, and
arrange these words as if they were written solidly.
Page 253
Abbreviations. Names beginning with M’, Me, St, and Ste
should be arranged as if written out in ful, as Mac, Saint, and
Sainte, for the reason that they ar uniformly so pronounct, and
often so written. And for the same reason entries beginning with
Dr., M., Mme., Mlle., Mr., and Mrs. should be treated as if they
were written in ful, as Doctor, Monsieur, Madame, Mademoiselle,
Mister, and Mistress.
Forenames. When Christian names ar given in ful, the
arrangement should be in strict alfabetical order, following the
surname. And use should be made of all the helps which the
cataloger has given for distinguishing two or more persons whose
names ar identical.
Titles, such as Gen., Don., Sir, ar to be allowed to stand, but
not to affect the arrangement.
Numerals occurring as hedings should be treated as if written
out in letters. The novel “39 men for one woman” should be
entered under t.
Initials. If the cataloger has simply followed the title-page and
given only initials of Christian names, the only safe course is to
treat every initial as a name; and, on the axiom “Nothing before
something,” the initial should precede the ful name. Thus J.
precedes James even tho, as may afterwards be learned, the J.
stands for Jehoshaphat.
Dash. In order to save space in printing, and for distinctness to
the eye, it is wel to use a dash to represent a word or group of
should be arranged as if written out in ful, as Mac, Saint, and
Sainte, for the reason that they ar uniformly so pronounct, and
often so written. And for the same reason entries beginning with
Dr., M., Mme., Mlle., Mr., and Mrs. should be treated as if they
were written in ful, as Doctor, Monsieur, Madame, Mademoiselle,
Mister, and Mistress.
Forenames. When Christian names ar given in ful, the
arrangement should be in strict alfabetical order, following the
surname. And use should be made of all the helps which the
cataloger has given for distinguishing two or more persons whose
names ar identical.
Titles, such as Gen., Don., Sir, ar to be allowed to stand, but
not to affect the arrangement.
Numerals occurring as hedings should be treated as if written
out in letters. The novel “39 men for one woman” should be
entered under t.
Initials. If the cataloger has simply followed the title-page and
given only initials of Christian names, the only safe course is to
treat every initial as a name; and, on the axiom “Nothing before
something,” the initial should precede the ful name. Thus J.
precedes James even tho, as may afterwards be learned, the J.
stands for Jehoshaphat.
Dash. In order to save space in printing, and for distinctness to
the eye, it is wel to use a dash to represent a word or group of
Page 254
words that might otherwise hav to be repeated; or to inset the
words that come under the general heding. Care should be taken to
make clear what the dash stands for, and to confine its use within
proper bounds.
It may be used when we hav several books written by one
person; but it should not be used to cover another person of the
same surname.
It may be used to represent a word or group of words that
indicate a definite subject, as heat, moral science, socialists and
Fourierism, society for the diffusion of useful knowledge. But it
should not be used to represent a part of a compound subject-
heding, nor a part of a title; e. g., in the entries Historical portraits,
Historical reading, the word Historical should be spelled out in
each case.
words that come under the general heding. Care should be taken to
make clear what the dash stands for, and to confine its use within
proper bounds.
It may be used when we hav several books written by one
person; but it should not be used to cover another person of the
same surname.
It may be used to represent a word or group of words that
indicate a definite subject, as heat, moral science, socialists and
Fourierism, society for the diffusion of useful knowledge. But it
should not be used to represent a part of a compound subject-
heding, nor a part of a title; e. g., in the entries Historical portraits,
Historical reading, the word Historical should be spelled out in
each case.
Page 255
APPENDIX V.
A B B R E V I AT I O N S .
The list of abbreviations originally given on p. 57, § 116, was
enlarged in the report of the committee on catalogue rules of the
American Library Association (Library journal, 3: 16–19). It there
included the abbreviations for the most usual forenames formed
by the initial followed by a colon for men and by two periods for
women (as J:=John, M..=Mary), devised by C: A. Cutter and first
published in the Library journal, 1: 405 and 5: 176. It was
republished, classified, but with many omissions and additions, by
Melvil Dewey in Library notes, 1: 206–211, and also on a
convenient card. It is here reprinted in full with his additions.
A list of abbreviations used in describing bindings, prepared
by E. H. Woodruff, was published in the Library journal for May,
1887.
FORENAMES.
Aaron Aar.
Abraham Ab.
Adam Ad.
Adelbert Adlb.
Adolf Adf.
Adrian Adr.
Aegidius Aeg.
Albert Alb.
A B B R E V I AT I O N S .
The list of abbreviations originally given on p. 57, § 116, was
enlarged in the report of the committee on catalogue rules of the
American Library Association (Library journal, 3: 16–19). It there
included the abbreviations for the most usual forenames formed
by the initial followed by a colon for men and by two periods for
women (as J:=John, M..=Mary), devised by C: A. Cutter and first
published in the Library journal, 1: 405 and 5: 176. It was
republished, classified, but with many omissions and additions, by
Melvil Dewey in Library notes, 1: 206–211, and also on a
convenient card. It is here reprinted in full with his additions.
A list of abbreviations used in describing bindings, prepared
by E. H. Woodruff, was published in the Library journal for May,
1887.
FORENAMES.
Aaron Aar.
Abraham Ab.
Adam Ad.
Adelbert Adlb.
Adolf Adf.
Adrian Adr.
Aegidius Aeg.
Albert Alb.
Page 256
Albrecht Albr.
Alexander, Alexandre Alex.
Alfonso Alf.
Alfred Alfr.
Alphonse Alph.
Amadeus Amad.
Ambrose, Ambrosius Amb.
Anastasius Anast.
Andreas, Andrew And.
Anna A..
Anselm Ans.
Anthony, Antoine, Anton Ant.
Archibald Arch.
Arnold Arn.
Arthur Arth.
August, Augustus A:
Augusta A: a
Augustin A: in
Augustinus A: inus
Aurelius Aur.
Austin Aust.
Baldwin Bald.
Balthasar Balt.
Baptiste Bapt.
Barbara Barb.
Barnard Barn.
Bartholomäus, Bartholomew Bart.
Alexander, Alexandre Alex.
Alfonso Alf.
Alfred Alfr.
Alphonse Alph.
Amadeus Amad.
Ambrose, Ambrosius Amb.
Anastasius Anast.
Andreas, Andrew And.
Anna A..
Anselm Ans.
Anthony, Antoine, Anton Ant.
Archibald Arch.
Arnold Arn.
Arthur Arth.
August, Augustus A:
Augusta A: a
Augustin A: in
Augustinus A: inus
Aurelius Aur.
Austin Aust.
Baldwin Bald.
Balthasar Balt.
Baptiste Bapt.
Barbara Barb.
Barnard Barn.
Bartholomäus, Bartholomew Bart.
Page 257
Basilius Bas.
Beatrice B..
Beatrix Bx.
Belinda Bel.
Benedict Bened.
Benjamin B:
Bernard Bern.
Bernhard Bernh.
Barthold Brth.
Bertram Bert.
Boniface Boni.
Bruno Bru.
Burchard Bch.
Cadwallader Cadwal.
Caleb Clb.
Calvin Calv.
Camillus Cam.
Camilla Cma.
Carl, Carlo, Charles C:
Caroline Caro.
Casimir Cas.
Caspar Cap.
Catharine Cath.
Charlotte C..
Christian Chr.
Christlieb Chli.
Christoph Cp.
Beatrice B..
Beatrix Bx.
Belinda Bel.
Benedict Bened.
Benjamin B:
Bernard Bern.
Bernhard Bernh.
Barthold Brth.
Bertram Bert.
Boniface Boni.
Bruno Bru.
Burchard Bch.
Cadwallader Cadwal.
Caleb Clb.
Calvin Calv.
Camillus Cam.
Camilla Cma.
Carl, Carlo, Charles C:
Caroline Caro.
Casimir Cas.
Caspar Cap.
Catharine Cath.
Charlotte C..
Christian Chr.
Christlieb Chli.
Christoph Cp.
Page 258
Clarence Clar.
Claude Cl. {120}
Claudius Cls.
Clemens, Clement Clem.
Conrad Conr.
Constantin Const.
Cordelia Cord.
Cornelius Corn.
Crispian, Crispin, Crispus Crsp.
Daniel Dan.
David D:
Deborah Deb.
Detlev Dtl.
Delia D.
Diana Di.
Dietrich Dt.
Dominicus Dom.
Donald Don.
Dorothy Dor.
Duncan Dunc.
Ebenezer Eb.
Eberhard Ebh.
Edgar Edg.
Edmund Edm.
Edouard, Eduard, Edward E:
Edwin Edn.
Claude Cl. {120}
Claudius Cls.
Clemens, Clement Clem.
Conrad Conr.
Constantin Const.
Cordelia Cord.
Cornelius Corn.
Crispian, Crispin, Crispus Crsp.
Daniel Dan.
David D:
Deborah Deb.
Detlev Dtl.
Delia D.
Diana Di.
Dietrich Dt.
Dominicus Dom.
Donald Don.
Dorothy Dor.
Duncan Dunc.
Ebenezer Eb.
Eberhard Ebh.
Edgar Edg.
Edmund Edm.
Edouard, Eduard, Edward E:
Edwin Edn.
Page 259
Egbert Egb.
Ehrenfried Ehrfr.
Elias El.
Elijah Elij.
Elizabeth E..
Emanuel Em.
Ephraim Eph.
Erdmann Erdm.
Erhard Erh.
Eric, Erich Er.
Ernest, Ernst Ern.
Eugen, Eugene Eug.
Eusebius Eus.
Eustace, Eustachius Eust.
Evelina Evel.
Ezechiel Ezech.
Ezra Ez.
Fanny F..
Felix Fel.
Ferdinand Fd.
Fitz William Fitz W.
Flavius Flav.
Florence Flo.
Francis Fs.
Frances Fcs.
Frank Fk.
Franz Fz.
Ehrenfried Ehrfr.
Elias El.
Elijah Elij.
Elizabeth E..
Emanuel Em.
Ephraim Eph.
Erdmann Erdm.
Erhard Erh.
Eric, Erich Er.
Ernest, Ernst Ern.
Eugen, Eugene Eug.
Eusebius Eus.
Eustace, Eustachius Eust.
Evelina Evel.
Ezechiel Ezech.
Ezra Ez.
Fanny F..
Felix Fel.
Ferdinand Fd.
Fitz William Fitz W.
Flavius Flav.
Florence Flo.
Francis Fs.
Frances Fcs.
Frank Fk.
Franz Fz.
Page 260
Frederic, Friedrich F:
Fürchtegott Fchtg.
Gabriel Gbr.
Gamaliel Gam.
Gasparo Gsp.
Gaston Gast.
Gebhard Gbh.
Geoffrey Geof.
Georg, George, Georges G:
Gerald Ger.
Gerhard Gh.
Gershom Gersh.
Gertrude Gert.
Giacomo Giac.
Giam Battista Gi. bat.
Gian Giacomo Gi. Giac.
Gian Pietro Gi. P:
Gideon Gid.
Gilbert Gilb.
Giovanni Gi.
Giuseppe Giu.
Godfrey Godf.
Gottfried Gf.
Gotthard Gthd.
Gotthelf Ghf.
Gotthold Ghld.
Gottlieb Gli.
Fürchtegott Fchtg.
Gabriel Gbr.
Gamaliel Gam.
Gasparo Gsp.
Gaston Gast.
Gebhard Gbh.
Geoffrey Geof.
Georg, George, Georges G:
Gerald Ger.
Gerhard Gh.
Gershom Gersh.
Gertrude Gert.
Giacomo Giac.
Giam Battista Gi. bat.
Gian Giacomo Gi. Giac.
Gian Pietro Gi. P:
Gideon Gid.
Gilbert Gilb.
Giovanni Gi.
Giuseppe Giu.
Godfrey Godf.
Gottfried Gf.
Gotthard Gthd.
Gotthelf Ghf.
Gotthold Ghld.
Gottlieb Gli.
Page 261
Gottlob Glo.
Gottschalk Gk.
Grace G..
Gregor, Gregory Greg.
Guillaume Guil.
Günther Gth.
Gustav, Gustavus Gst.
Hannah Ha.
Hans Hs.
Harold Har.
Harriet Ht.
Hartmann Htm.
Hartwig Htw.
Hector Hect.
Hedwig Hedw.
Heinrich, Henri, Henry H:
Helen H..
Herbert Herb.
Herrmann Hm.
Hezekiah Hzk.
Hieronymus Hi.
Hippolyte Hip.
Horace Hor.
Hubert Hub.
Hugh Hu. {121}
Hugo Hg.
Humphrey Hum.
Gottschalk Gk.
Grace G..
Gregor, Gregory Greg.
Guillaume Guil.
Günther Gth.
Gustav, Gustavus Gst.
Hannah Ha.
Hans Hs.
Harold Har.
Harriet Ht.
Hartmann Htm.
Hartwig Htw.
Hector Hect.
Hedwig Hedw.
Heinrich, Henri, Henry H:
Helen H..
Herbert Herb.
Herrmann Hm.
Hezekiah Hzk.
Hieronymus Hi.
Hippolyte Hip.
Horace Hor.
Hubert Hub.
Hugh Hu. {121}
Hugo Hg.
Humphrey Hum.
Page 262
Ignatius, Ignaz Ign.
Immanuel Im.
Innocenz Inn.
Isaac I:
Isabella I..
Israel Isr.
Jacob Jac.
Jakob Jak.
James Ja.
Jane J..
Jasper Jasp.
Jedediah Jed.
Jemima Jem.
Jeremiah, Jeremias, Jeremy Jer.
Joachim Joac.
Joel Jl.
John, Johann, Jean, masc. J:
Johannes Js.
Jonathan Jona.
Joseph Jos.
Josepha Josa.
Josephine Jose.
Joshua Josh.
Jószef Jósz.
Jules, Julius Jul.
Julia Jla.
Juliet Jlt.
Immanuel Im.
Innocenz Inn.
Isaac I:
Isabella I..
Israel Isr.
Jacob Jac.
Jakob Jak.
James Ja.
Jane J..
Jasper Jasp.
Jedediah Jed.
Jemima Jem.
Jeremiah, Jeremias, Jeremy Jer.
Joachim Joac.
Joel Jl.
John, Johann, Jean, masc. J:
Johannes Js.
Jonathan Jona.
Joseph Jos.
Josepha Josa.
Josephine Jose.
Joshua Josh.
Jószef Jósz.
Jules, Julius Jul.
Julia Jla.
Juliet Jlt.
Page 263
Justin, Justus Just.
Karl K:
Kaspar Ksp.
Katharine K..
Konrad Konr.
Laurence Laur.
Lawrence Lawr.
Lazarus Laz.
Leberecht, Lebrecht Lbr.
Lemuel Lem.
Leonard Leon.
Leonhard Lh.
Leopold Lp.
Lewis Lew.
Louis, Ludwig L:
Louise L..
Lobegott Lbg.
Lorenz Lor.
Lothar Lth.
Louisa L..
Ludolf Ldf.
Malachi Mal.
Marcus Mcs.
Margaret Marg.
Maria Mar.
Marc, Mark M:
Karl K:
Kaspar Ksp.
Katharine K..
Konrad Konr.
Laurence Laur.
Lawrence Lawr.
Lazarus Laz.
Leberecht, Lebrecht Lbr.
Lemuel Lem.
Leonard Leon.
Leonhard Lh.
Leopold Lp.
Lewis Lew.
Louis, Ludwig L:
Louise L..
Lobegott Lbg.
Lorenz Lor.
Lothar Lth.
Louisa L..
Ludolf Ldf.
Malachi Mal.
Marcus Mcs.
Margaret Marg.
Maria Mar.
Marc, Mark M:
Page 264
Martin Mt.
Mary M..
Mathäus, Matthew Mat.
Matilda Mta.
Maurice Maur.
Max, Maximilian Mx.
Mehitabel Mehit.
Melchior Mlch.
Michael Mich.
Moriz Mor.
Moses Mos.
Nancy N..
Napoleon Nap.
Nathan Nat.
Nathaniel Natl.
Nehemiah Neh.
Nepomuk Np.
Nicodemus Nicod.
Nicolas, Nicolaus, Nicole N:
Noah No.
Norman Norm.
Obadiah Ob.
Octavius Oct.
Octavia Octa.
Oliver Ol.
Olivia O..
Orlando Orl.
Mary M..
Mathäus, Matthew Mat.
Matilda Mta.
Maurice Maur.
Max, Maximilian Mx.
Mehitabel Mehit.
Melchior Mlch.
Michael Mich.
Moriz Mor.
Moses Mos.
Nancy N..
Napoleon Nap.
Nathan Nat.
Nathaniel Natl.
Nehemiah Neh.
Nepomuk Np.
Nicodemus Nicod.
Nicolas, Nicolaus, Nicole N:
Noah No.
Norman Norm.
Obadiah Ob.
Octavius Oct.
Octavia Octa.
Oliver Ol.
Olivia O..
Orlando Orl.
Page 265
Oscar Osc.
Oswald Osw.
Ottmar Ottm.
Otto O:
Patrick Pat.
Paul Pl.
Pauline P..
Peter, Pierre P:
Philip Ph.
Phineas Phin.
Priscilla Pris.
Rachel Ra.
Raimund, Raymond Rmd.
Raphael Rapl.
Rebecca R..
Reginald Reg.
Reinhard Rhd.
Reinhold Rhld.
Reuben Reub. {122}
Richard R:
Robert Rob.
Rodolph Rod.
Roger Rog.
Roland Rol.
Rudolf Rud.
Rufus Ruf.
Oswald Osw.
Ottmar Ottm.
Otto O:
Patrick Pat.
Paul Pl.
Pauline P..
Peter, Pierre P:
Philip Ph.
Phineas Phin.
Priscilla Pris.
Rachel Ra.
Raimund, Raymond Rmd.
Raphael Rapl.
Rebecca R..
Reginald Reg.
Reinhard Rhd.
Reinhold Rhld.
Reuben Reub. {122}
Richard R:
Robert Rob.
Rodolph Rod.
Roger Rog.
Roland Rol.
Rudolf Rud.
Rufus Ruf.
Page 266
Rupert, Ruprecht Rup.
Salomon Sal.
Salvator Salv.
Samuel S:
Sarah S..
Severen Sev.
Sebastian Seb.
Siegfried Siegf.
Sigismund Sgsm.
Sigmund Sigm.
Simeon, Simon Sim.
Solomon Sol.
Sophia So.
Stanislas Stan.
Stephen Ste.
Susan Su.
Tabitha Tab.
Temperance Temp.
Thaddeus Thad.
Theobald Thbd.
Theodor Thdr.
Theophilus Thph.
Theresa T..
Thomas, Tomas, Tomaso T:
Tiberius Tib.
Timotheus, Timothy Tim.
Titus Tit.
Salomon Sal.
Salvator Salv.
Samuel S:
Sarah S..
Severen Sev.
Sebastian Seb.
Siegfried Siegf.
Sigismund Sgsm.
Sigmund Sigm.
Simeon, Simon Sim.
Solomon Sol.
Sophia So.
Stanislas Stan.
Stephen Ste.
Susan Su.
Tabitha Tab.
Temperance Temp.
Thaddeus Thad.
Theobald Thbd.
Theodor Thdr.
Theophilus Thph.
Theresa T..
Thomas, Tomas, Tomaso T:
Tiberius Tib.
Timotheus, Timothy Tim.
Titus Tit.
Page 267
Tobias, Tobiah Tob.
Traugott Trg.
Ulrich U:
Ursula U..
Valentine Val.
Veit Vt.
Victor Vet.
Victoria V..
Vincentius Vinc.
Virginia Virg.
Volkmar Volkm.
Waldemar Wald.
Walther, Walter Wa.
Washington Wash.
Wenzel Wz.
Werner Wr.
William, Willem, Wilhelm W:
Wilhelmina W..
Winfred Winf.
Winifred Winif.
Woldemar Wold.
Wolfgang Wolfg.
Xaver, Xavier X:
Xenophon Xen.
Xerxes Xerx.
Zacharias, Zachary Zach.
Traugott Trg.
Ulrich U:
Ursula U..
Valentine Val.
Veit Vt.
Victor Vet.
Victoria V..
Vincentius Vinc.
Virginia Virg.
Volkmar Volkm.
Waldemar Wald.
Walther, Walter Wa.
Washington Wash.
Wenzel Wz.
Werner Wr.
William, Willem, Wilhelm W:
Wilhelmina W..
Winfred Winf.
Winifred Winif.
Woldemar Wold.
Wolfgang Wolfg.
Xaver, Xavier X:
Xenophon Xen.
Xerxes Xerx.
Zacharias, Zachary Zach.
Page 268
Zebadiah, Zebedee Zeb.
Zechariah Zech.
Zenobia Z..
Zephaniah Zeph.
Zechariah Zech.
Zenobia Z..
Zephaniah Zeph.
Page 269
COLON ABBREVIATIONS FOR
FORENAMES.
A: Augustus. A.. Anna.
B: Benjamin. B.. Beatrice.
C: Charles. C.. Charlotte.
D: David. D.. Delia.
E: Edward. E.. Elizabeth.
F: Frederick. F.. Fanny.
G: George. G.. Grace.
H: Henry. H.. Helen.
I: Isaac. I.. Isabella.
J: John. J.. Jane.
K: Karl. K.. Katharine.
L: Louis. L.. Louise.
M: Matthew. M.. Mary.
N: Nicholas. N.. Nancy.
O: Otto. O.. Olivia.
P: Peter. P.. Pauline.
R: Richard. R.. Rebecca.
S: Samuel. S.. Sarah. {123}
T: Thomas. T.. Theresa.
U: Uriah. U.. Ursula.
V: Victor. V.. Victoria.
W: William. W.. Wilhelmina.
X: Xavier.
Z: Zenas. Z.. Zenobia.
FORENAMES.
A: Augustus. A.. Anna.
B: Benjamin. B.. Beatrice.
C: Charles. C.. Charlotte.
D: David. D.. Delia.
E: Edward. E.. Elizabeth.
F: Frederick. F.. Fanny.
G: George. G.. Grace.
H: Henry. H.. Helen.
I: Isaac. I.. Isabella.
J: John. J.. Jane.
K: Karl. K.. Katharine.
L: Louis. L.. Louise.
M: Matthew. M.. Mary.
N: Nicholas. N.. Nancy.
O: Otto. O.. Olivia.
P: Peter. P.. Pauline.
R: Richard. R.. Rebecca.
S: Samuel. S.. Sarah. {123}
T: Thomas. T.. Theresa.
U: Uriah. U.. Ursula.
V: Victor. V.. Victoria.
W: William. W.. Wilhelmina.
X: Xavier.
Z: Zenas. Z.. Zenobia.
Page 270
Here C: is used both for Charles and Carlo, H: for Henry,
Henri, and Heinrich, and so on. Mr. Dewey for greater distinctness
advises the following:
Where : and .. is used in English names, use ; and ., for the
German form, and ; and ,. for the French.
Henri, and Heinrich, and so on. Mr. Dewey for greater distinctness
advises the following:
Where : and .. is used in English names, use ; and ., for the
German form, and ; and ,. for the French.
Page 271
FOR HEADINGS.
abridger abr.
afterwards aftw.
annotater annot.
born b.
collector col.
company co.
commentator comment.
compiler comp.
continuer contin.
died d.
department dept.
editor ed.
Great Britain Gr. Br.
pseudonym pseud.
publisher pub.
superintendent supt.
translator tr.
United States U. S.
veuve vve.
wittwe wwe.
include maiden name of married woman. ()
include words or parts of words []
supplied.
probably, perhaps ? after a
word.
abridger abr.
afterwards aftw.
annotater annot.
born b.
collector col.
company co.
commentator comment.
compiler comp.
continuer contin.
died d.
department dept.
editor ed.
Great Britain Gr. Br.
pseudonym pseud.
publisher pub.
superintendent supt.
translator tr.
United States U. S.
veuve vve.
wittwe wwe.
include maiden name of married woman. ()
include words or parts of words []
supplied.
probably, perhaps ? after a
word.
Page 272
Use also the common abbreviations for political, military,
professional, and honorary titles.
professional, and honorary titles.
Page 273
FOR IMPRINTS AND NOTES.
Auflage, Ausgabe Aufl., Ausg.
Band Bd.
Bohn’s scientific library B. S. L.
calf cf.
cloth cl.
copyright e. g., 1882 [c. c.
’80].
edited, -ion, -or ed.
fac-similes fac-sim.
folios f.
group of portraits gr. of por.
Harper’s family library H. F. L.
illustrated, -ions il.
leaves l.
morocco mor.
mutilated mut.
no date of pub. n. d.
no place of pub. n. p.
no title-page n. t. p.
page, pages p.
pamphlet, pamphlets pam.
paper pap.
photographs phot.
portrait of group por. of gr.
portrait, portraits por.
Auflage, Ausgabe Aufl., Ausg.
Band Bd.
Bohn’s scientific library B. S. L.
calf cf.
cloth cl.
copyright e. g., 1882 [c. c.
’80].
edited, -ion, -or ed.
fac-similes fac-sim.
folios f.
group of portraits gr. of por.
Harper’s family library H. F. L.
illustrated, -ions il.
leaves l.
morocco mor.
mutilated mut.
no date of pub. n. d.
no place of pub. n. p.
no title-page n. t. p.
page, pages p.
pamphlet, pamphlets pam.
paper pap.
photographs phot.
portrait of group por. of gr.
portrait, portraits por.
Page 274
Roxburgh rxb.
sheep sh.
square sq.
tables tab.
title-page t.-p.
title-page mutilated, t. p. m., t. p. w.
wanting
unbound unbd.
unpaged unp.
vellum vel.
volume, volumes v. (in the imprint), Vol. (in the
title). [72]
with (before words) w.
wanting (after words) w.
In notes the abbreviations in all these lists may be used.
[72] I. e., Vol. 1 but 2 v.
sheep sh.
square sq.
tables tab.
title-page t.-p.
title-page mutilated, t. p. m., t. p. w.
wanting
unbound unbd.
unpaged unp.
vellum vel.
volume, volumes v. (in the imprint), Vol. (in the
title). [72]
with (before words) w.
wanting (after words) w.
In notes the abbreviations in all these lists may be used.
[72] I. e., Vol. 1 but 2 v.
Page 275
FOR BOOK TITLES.
abridged abr.
abbreviations abbr.
account acct.
additional, -ons add.
American Amer. or Am.
analysis, -tical anal.
anonymous anon.
appended, -ix app.
aus dem Lateinischen a. d. Lat.
born b.
biblical, bibliographical, bibliotheca, bibl.
etc.
biographical, -phy biog.
book bk.
Christian Chr.
chronological chron.
classical class.
collected, -ions, college, colored col.
commerce, -ial, committee com.
compiled, -er comp.
concerning conc.
containing, contents, continued cont.
copy, copyrighted cop.
corrected cor.
crown, size of book cr.
abridged abr.
abbreviations abbr.
account acct.
additional, -ons add.
American Amer. or Am.
analysis, -tical anal.
anonymous anon.
appended, -ix app.
aus dem Lateinischen a. d. Lat.
born b.
biblical, bibliographical, bibliotheca, bibl.
etc.
biographical, -phy biog.
book bk.
Christian Chr.
chronological chron.
classical class.
collected, -ions, college, colored col.
commerce, -ial, committee com.
compiled, -er comp.
concerning conc.
containing, contents, continued cont.
copy, copyrighted cop.
corrected cor.
crown, size of book cr.
Page 276
cyclopædia cyc.
Danish Dan.
died d.
department dept.
domestic dom.
elementary, -ts elem.
encyclopædia encyc.
English Eng.
engraved, -er, -ings eng.
enlarged enl.
fiction fict.
folios, i. e., leaves ff.
from fr.
French Fr.
geography geog.
geology geol.
geometry geom.
German Germ.
gesammelte, gesammt ges.
Geschichte Ges. or
Gesch.
grammar, -tical gram.
great gr.
Greek Gr.
half hf.
historical, -y hist.
homœopathic homœop.
Danish Dan.
died d.
department dept.
domestic dom.
elementary, -ts elem.
encyclopædia encyc.
English Eng.
engraved, -er, -ings eng.
enlarged enl.
fiction fict.
folios, i. e., leaves ff.
from fr.
French Fr.
geography geog.
geology geol.
geometry geom.
German Germ.
gesammelte, gesammt ges.
Geschichte Ges. or
Gesch.
grammar, -tical gram.
great gr.
Greek Gr.
half hf.
historical, -y hist.
homœopathic homœop.
Page 277
herausgegeben hrsg.
illustrated, -ions il.
imperfect imp.
improved impr.
including incl.
increased incr.
intorno int.
introduction, -ory introd.
Italian Ital.
juvenile juv.
Latin Lat.
library lib.
literary, -ture lit.
medical, -ine med.
memoir mem.
miscellaneous misc.
manuscript, -ts ms., mss.
national, natural nat.
new series n. s.
nouvelle nouv.
number, -s no., nos.
oblong obl.
preface, -ed, prefixed pref.
pseudonym, -ous ps.
part pt.
published, -er pub.
recensuit, record rec.
illustrated, -ions il.
imperfect imp.
improved impr.
including incl.
increased incr.
intorno int.
introduction, -ory introd.
Italian Ital.
juvenile juv.
Latin Lat.
library lib.
literary, -ture lit.
medical, -ine med.
memoir mem.
miscellaneous misc.
manuscript, -ts ms., mss.
national, natural nat.
new series n. s.
nouvelle nouv.
number, -s no., nos.
oblong obl.
preface, -ed, prefixed pref.
pseudonym, -ous ps.
part pt.
published, -er pub.
recensuit, record rec.
Page 278
relating, relative rel.
report rept.
review, revised, -ion rev.
Roman Rom.
Russian Rus.
sämmtlich sämm.
science, scientific sci.
selected, -ions sel.
separate sep.
series s. or ser.
small sm.
society soc.
supplement, -ary, -ing sup.
Swedish Swed.
theology theol.
transactions trans.
translated, -or, traduit, tradotto, etc. tr.
übersetzt übers,
und u.
vocabulary vocab.
von v.
van to be given in full.
in, contained in ( ) {125}
words added to title []
to and included in, or continued —
matter omitted ...
probably, perhaps ?
report rept.
review, revised, -ion rev.
Roman Rom.
Russian Rus.
sämmtlich sämm.
science, scientific sci.
selected, -ions sel.
separate sep.
series s. or ser.
small sm.
society soc.
supplement, -ary, -ing sup.
Swedish Swed.
theology theol.
transactions trans.
translated, -or, traduit, tradotto, etc. tr.
übersetzt übers,
und u.
vocabulary vocab.
von v.
van to be given in full.
in, contained in ( ) {125}
words added to title []
to and included in, or continued —
matter omitted ...
probably, perhaps ?
Page 279
end of line on title-page |
transition to another title-page ||
vo, mo, to, in octavo, duodecimo, quarto º
transition to another title-page ||
vo, mo, to, in octavo, duodecimo, quarto º
Page 280
FOR PLACES OF PUBLICATION.
Use first form on cards. In accession and all official records use
shortest form.
Albany Alb.
Amsterdam Amst.
Baltimore Balt.
Berlin Ber.
Boston B. or Bost.
Braunschweig Brns.
Cambridge Camb. or Cb.
Chicago Chic. or Ch.
Cincinnati Cin.
Copenhagen Copng.
Edinburgh Edin. or Ed.
England Eng.
Firenze Fir.
France Fr.
Germany Germ.
Glasgow Glasg. or Gl.
Gotinga Got.
Göttingen Göt.
Kjöbenhavn Kjöb.
London L. or Lond.
Leyden Ley.
Leipzig Lpz.
Lugduni Batavorum Lug. Bat.
Milano Mil.
Use first form on cards. In accession and all official records use
shortest form.
Albany Alb.
Amsterdam Amst.
Baltimore Balt.
Berlin Ber.
Boston B. or Bost.
Braunschweig Brns.
Cambridge Camb. or Cb.
Chicago Chic. or Ch.
Cincinnati Cin.
Copenhagen Copng.
Edinburgh Edin. or Ed.
England Eng.
Firenze Fir.
France Fr.
Germany Germ.
Glasgow Glasg. or Gl.
Gotinga Got.
Göttingen Göt.
Kjöbenhavn Kjöb.
London L. or Lond.
Leyden Ley.
Leipzig Lpz.
Lugduni Batavorum Lug. Bat.
Milano Mil.
Page 281
München Mün.
New Orleans N. O.
New York N. Y.
Oxford Oxf.
Paris P. or Par.
Philadelphia Ph. or Phil.
St. Louis St. L.
St. Petersburg St. Pet. or St. P.
San Francisco San Fran. or S. F.
Stuttgart Stut.
Torino Tor.
United States U. S.
Venice Ven. or V.
Washington W. or Wash.
Also the common abbreviations for the States. Use for all
languages when the equivalent name contains these letters.
New Orleans N. O.
New York N. Y.
Oxford Oxf.
Paris P. or Par.
Philadelphia Ph. or Phil.
St. Louis St. L.
St. Petersburg St. Pet. or St. P.
San Francisco San Fran. or S. F.
Stuttgart Stut.
Torino Tor.
United States U. S.
Venice Ven. or V.
Washington W. or Wash.
Also the common abbreviations for the States. Use for all
languages when the equivalent name contains these letters.
Page 282
TITLES, STATES, ETC.
bachelor of arts A. B.
archbishop abp.
year of our Lord A. D.
adjutant adjt.
admiral adm.
Alabama Ala.
Master of Arts A. M.
American Am. or Amer.
associate of the Royal A. R. A.
Academy
attorney atty.
bachelor of arts B. A.
baronet bart.
before Christ B. C.
bishop bp.
brigadier general brig. gen.
California Cal.
captain capt.
Colorado Col.
Confederate States of America C. S. A.
or C. S. army
C. S. navy C. S. N.
Connecticut Ct.
MONTHS.
bachelor of arts A. B.
archbishop abp.
year of our Lord A. D.
adjutant adjt.
admiral adm.
Alabama Ala.
Master of Arts A. M.
American Am. or Amer.
associate of the Royal A. R. A.
Academy
attorney atty.
bachelor of arts B. A.
baronet bart.
before Christ B. C.
bishop bp.
brigadier general brig. gen.
California Cal.
captain capt.
Colorado Col.
Confederate States of America C. S. A.
or C. S. army
C. S. navy C. S. N.
Connecticut Ct.
MONTHS.
Page 283
Ja. F. Mr. Ap. My. Je. Jl. Ag. S. O. N. D.
DAYS.
Su. M. Tu. W. Th. F. St. {126}
DAYS.
Su. M. Tu. W. Th. F. St. {126}
Page 284
SIZE NOTATION.
Outside
Fold symbol. Size letter.
height.
Never use for Never use for
In
size. fold.
centimeters.
48º Fe Up to 10
32º Tt 10 – 12.5
24º T 12.5 – 15
16º S 15 – 17.5
12º D 17.5 – 20
8º O 20 – 25
4º Q 25 – 30
fº F 30 – 35
F⁴ 35 – 40
F⁵ 40 – 50
Prefix nar. if width is less than height.
Prefix sq. if width is more than ¾ height.
Prefix ob. if width is more than height.
For all books over 35cm high the superior figures show in which 10cm
of height the book falls, e. g., F⁸ is between 70 and 80cm high.
Actual size method.
Give all sizes in cm (for greater accuracy adding decimals), leaving
the old symbols and names, 8º and Octavo to indicate fold only. Give
height first, followed by h, or by × and width, e. g., 23h or 23 × 14. 23h
means between 22 and 23, i. e., in 23d cm. All measures are taken outside
the cover. Width is from hinge to edge not including the round. To
measure paper or letter-press, prefix p(aper) or t(ype) to figures, including
in type neither folio nor signature lines.
Outside
Fold symbol. Size letter.
height.
Never use for Never use for
In
size. fold.
centimeters.
48º Fe Up to 10
32º Tt 10 – 12.5
24º T 12.5 – 15
16º S 15 – 17.5
12º D 17.5 – 20
8º O 20 – 25
4º Q 25 – 30
fº F 30 – 35
F⁴ 35 – 40
F⁵ 40 – 50
Prefix nar. if width is less than height.
Prefix sq. if width is more than ¾ height.
Prefix ob. if width is more than height.
For all books over 35cm high the superior figures show in which 10cm
of height the book falls, e. g., F⁸ is between 70 and 80cm high.
Actual size method.
Give all sizes in cm (for greater accuracy adding decimals), leaving
the old symbols and names, 8º and Octavo to indicate fold only. Give
height first, followed by h, or by × and width, e. g., 23h or 23 × 14. 23h
means between 22 and 23, i. e., in 23d cm. All measures are taken outside
the cover. Width is from hinge to edge not including the round. To
measure paper or letter-press, prefix p(aper) or t(ype) to figures, including
in type neither folio nor signature lines.
Page 285
APPENDIX VI.
So far we have been considering only the catalogue by which
the library communicates with the public; but a librarian needs
several others for library service: (1) The Catalogue of books
ordered; (2) The Accessions catalogue; (3) The Periodical-and
continuation-book; (4) The Shelf-list; (5) The Catalogue of books
missing; (6) The Tract-catalogue; (7) The Catalogue of duplicates
to be sold; (8) The Catalogue of duplicates sold or exchanged.
(2) and (8) are necessary for the preservation of the history of
the library and important in its financial management.
(6) is a modification of (5). It is a list of the tracts contained in
bound volumes, by which the abstraction of any particular tract
can be ascertained, or the extent of the loss if the whole volume
disappears. All this might be entered on the shelf-list, but it is
more convenient to keep the record of the tract-volumes together.
Sometimes part of a tract-list is inserted in the public catalogue.
You may see collections of pamphlets on various subjects by
various authors recorded under a made-up heading Tracts, or
Pamphlets, a style of entry that is nearly useless. The whole of
the Prince catalogue of 1846 was made in this absurd way. A
number of tracts by a single author may indeed for economy be
catalogued under him in one mass like a “contents,” and the same
may be {127} done for tracts on a single subject, though there are
So far we have been considering only the catalogue by which
the library communicates with the public; but a librarian needs
several others for library service: (1) The Catalogue of books
ordered; (2) The Accessions catalogue; (3) The Periodical-and
continuation-book; (4) The Shelf-list; (5) The Catalogue of books
missing; (6) The Tract-catalogue; (7) The Catalogue of duplicates
to be sold; (8) The Catalogue of duplicates sold or exchanged.
(2) and (8) are necessary for the preservation of the history of
the library and important in its financial management.
(6) is a modification of (5). It is a list of the tracts contained in
bound volumes, by which the abstraction of any particular tract
can be ascertained, or the extent of the loss if the whole volume
disappears. All this might be entered on the shelf-list, but it is
more convenient to keep the record of the tract-volumes together.
Sometimes part of a tract-list is inserted in the public catalogue.
You may see collections of pamphlets on various subjects by
various authors recorded under a made-up heading Tracts, or
Pamphlets, a style of entry that is nearly useless. The whole of
the Prince catalogue of 1846 was made in this absurd way. A
number of tracts by a single author may indeed for economy be
catalogued under him in one mass like a “contents,” and the same
may be {127} done for tracts on a single subject, though there are
Page 286
objections even to this; but to catalogue the writings of several
authors under an arbitrary heading (as Plays, Speeches, French
Revolution), to which references merely are made under the
authors, is to be economical at altogether too great an expense of
trouble to the public,—to say nothing of the incongruity of a form
or subject heading for an author-entry.
(4), the shelf-list, ought to be so made (a) that the entry of
each book in the catalogue can be readily found from it; (b) that
the book can be readily identified with the entry on the shelf-list;
(c) that at the annual examination or taking account of stock the
shelf-reader shall know at once what book is meant as each title is
read by the list-reader. For these reasons the list should contain the
author’s name (or first word, etc., if the book is anonymous), part
of the real title, the binder’s title (which will generally be the same
as the real), and the place and date of printing. If the author’s
name, or any part of the title, is not on the back of the book it
should be inclosed in parentheses.
Ex.
Appuleius. Metamorphoses, tr. Head. L. 1851. 1
(Reinhardt. Artist’s journey.) Bost. 1872. 1
A briefer shelf-list can be made by merely entering the book’s
number and the accessions number, so that the full title can be
found if needed by referring to the accessions-book.
(2), (3), and (8) are best kept in books; (4) and (6) on separate
sheets of paper; (1), (5), and (7) on cards. When the catalogue is
authors under an arbitrary heading (as Plays, Speeches, French
Revolution), to which references merely are made under the
authors, is to be economical at altogether too great an expense of
trouble to the public,—to say nothing of the incongruity of a form
or subject heading for an author-entry.
(4), the shelf-list, ought to be so made (a) that the entry of
each book in the catalogue can be readily found from it; (b) that
the book can be readily identified with the entry on the shelf-list;
(c) that at the annual examination or taking account of stock the
shelf-reader shall know at once what book is meant as each title is
read by the list-reader. For these reasons the list should contain the
author’s name (or first word, etc., if the book is anonymous), part
of the real title, the binder’s title (which will generally be the same
as the real), and the place and date of printing. If the author’s
name, or any part of the title, is not on the back of the book it
should be inclosed in parentheses.
Ex.
Appuleius. Metamorphoses, tr. Head. L. 1851. 1
(Reinhardt. Artist’s journey.) Bost. 1872. 1
A briefer shelf-list can be made by merely entering the book’s
number and the accessions number, so that the full title can be
found if needed by referring to the accessions-book.
(2), (3), and (8) are best kept in books; (4) and (6) on separate
sheets of paper; (1), (5), and (7) on cards. When the catalogue is
Page 287
kept on cards (5) can be made by merely separating the cards of
such books as are missing.
(1). After some experiments I have preferred the following
method of keeping the order-list. The titles of books proposed for
purchase are type-written on ruled slips of stiff paper 12½ cm.
long by 5 cm. wide. If approved by the committee a check is made
at the left of the title. A searcher then ascertains whether the
library already has the book; if it has, the card is destroyed or sent
with this information to the person who asked for the book; if not,
the searcher puts her initials and the date in the lower left-hand
corner. The cards are then sorted into parcels for the English,
French, or German agents; and an order is written, the writer first
making sure, by looking among the cards of previous orders, that
none of the books has already been sent for. In the order a running
number is given to each title and a corresponding number is put on
the card.
The name of the author is entered in a book opposite the
running number, and the date is put there against the first number
of each order. [73] The cards are then all stamped on the left with
the date, and put away in a drawer alphabetically with other cards
of books ordered. When a {128} box of books comes, the
corresponding cards are picked out and stamped on the right with
the date. They receive the accessions-number when the books are
entered on the accessions-catalogue, the class-number when the
books are placed, and are corrected when the books are
such books as are missing.
(1). After some experiments I have preferred the following
method of keeping the order-list. The titles of books proposed for
purchase are type-written on ruled slips of stiff paper 12½ cm.
long by 5 cm. wide. If approved by the committee a check is made
at the left of the title. A searcher then ascertains whether the
library already has the book; if it has, the card is destroyed or sent
with this information to the person who asked for the book; if not,
the searcher puts her initials and the date in the lower left-hand
corner. The cards are then sorted into parcels for the English,
French, or German agents; and an order is written, the writer first
making sure, by looking among the cards of previous orders, that
none of the books has already been sent for. In the order a running
number is given to each title and a corresponding number is put on
the card.
The name of the author is entered in a book opposite the
running number, and the date is put there against the first number
of each order. [73] The cards are then all stamped on the left with
the date, and put away in a drawer alphabetically with other cards
of books ordered. When a {128} box of books comes, the
corresponding cards are picked out and stamped on the right with
the date. They receive the accessions-number when the books are
entered on the accessions-catalogue, the class-number when the
books are placed, and are corrected when the books are
Page 288
catalogued; for, having usually been written from advertisements,
these cards are often incorrect. When a number have accumulated
they are sorted in the order of class-numbers and the entry on the
class-catalogue is made from them. They are then put away
alphabetically in drawers accessible only to the library-attendants,
and form the index of the accessions-book. When a duplicate
volume is exchanged or sold the date, its price, and receiver are
noted on the order card.
The system is economical. One card serves many purposes and
with little writing answers all the questions likely to come up: Has
this book been proposed to the Book Committee? (Books rejected
are kept in a separate drawer.) Has it been approved? Ordered?
When? From whom? Who is responsible for the error if it turns
out a duplicate? When was it received? Where is it entered in the
Accessions-catalogue (that we may ascertain its price and
condition)? Where was it first located? If any one of the questions
is not to be asked then the corresponding process can be dispensed
with. The list, of which an example is given in the note below, is
not necessary but convenient.
[Specimen.]
Darwin, Charles.
IXHZ Coral reefs. 2d ed. London, 1874. 8º.
.D 35
[On the back of the card is]
2915 [the order No.] [Stamp, with date of order.] [Stamp, with
date of receipt.] 39625 [the accession No.]
these cards are often incorrect. When a number have accumulated
they are sorted in the order of class-numbers and the entry on the
class-catalogue is made from them. They are then put away
alphabetically in drawers accessible only to the library-attendants,
and form the index of the accessions-book. When a duplicate
volume is exchanged or sold the date, its price, and receiver are
noted on the order card.
The system is economical. One card serves many purposes and
with little writing answers all the questions likely to come up: Has
this book been proposed to the Book Committee? (Books rejected
are kept in a separate drawer.) Has it been approved? Ordered?
When? From whom? Who is responsible for the error if it turns
out a duplicate? When was it received? Where is it entered in the
Accessions-catalogue (that we may ascertain its price and
condition)? Where was it first located? If any one of the questions
is not to be asked then the corresponding process can be dispensed
with. The list, of which an example is given in the note below, is
not necessary but convenient.
[Specimen.]
Darwin, Charles.
IXHZ Coral reefs. 2d ed. London, 1874. 8º.
.D 35
[On the back of the card is]
2915 [the order No.] [Stamp, with date of order.] [Stamp, with
date of receipt.] 39625 [the accession No.]
Page 289
[73]
Jan. 1, 1875.
1497 Black.
1498 Hammond.
1499 Grenville.
1500 Sampson.
Jan. 1, 1875.
1497 Black.
1498 Hammond.
1499 Grenville.
1500 Sampson.
Page 290
APPENDIX VII.
SOME WORKS OF REFERENCE.
I have set down here chiefly those works which I find to be of
constant use in cataloguing. One occasionally needs many more,
even for a short investigation. A complete and systematic view of
bibliographical literature is given in Petzholdt’s “Bibliotheca
bibliographica. Leipzig, 1866,” and many of the more modern
works may be found in Vallée’s Bibliographie des bibliographies,
Paris, 1883, and supplement, 1887. Powers’ “Handy-book about
books. London, 1870,” contains a useful list, which is reprinted,
with additions, in Sabin’s “American bibliopolist.” C: H. Hull’s
“Help’s for cataloguers in finding full names” in the Library
journal, Jan., 1889, gives an excellent classified list with
descriptive notes. {129}
B ALLHORN. Grammatography. Lond., 1861. O. 7s. 6d.
B RUNET. Manuel. 5e éd. Paris, 1860–65. 6 v. O. 120 fr., and
Supplement. Par Deschamps et Brunet. Paris, 1878–80. 2 v.
O.
H ŒFER. Nouvelle biographie générale. Paris, 1852–66. 46 v. O.
184 fr.
H ORNE. Introd. to bibliography. Lond., 1814. 2 v. O. Antiq. 18s.
J OECHER. Allgem. Gelehrten-Lexikon. Lpz., 1850–51. 4 v., Q.,
and Fortsetzung. Bremen, 1784–1819. 6 v. Q. Antiq. 40 fl.
L AROUSSE. Dictionnaire universel. Paris, 1866–89. 15 v. and 2 suppl.
O. 635 fr.
M EN of the time. 12th ed. Lond., 1887. D. 15s.
SOME WORKS OF REFERENCE.
I have set down here chiefly those works which I find to be of
constant use in cataloguing. One occasionally needs many more,
even for a short investigation. A complete and systematic view of
bibliographical literature is given in Petzholdt’s “Bibliotheca
bibliographica. Leipzig, 1866,” and many of the more modern
works may be found in Vallée’s Bibliographie des bibliographies,
Paris, 1883, and supplement, 1887. Powers’ “Handy-book about
books. London, 1870,” contains a useful list, which is reprinted,
with additions, in Sabin’s “American bibliopolist.” C: H. Hull’s
“Help’s for cataloguers in finding full names” in the Library
journal, Jan., 1889, gives an excellent classified list with
descriptive notes. {129}
B ALLHORN. Grammatography. Lond., 1861. O. 7s. 6d.
B RUNET. Manuel. 5e éd. Paris, 1860–65. 6 v. O. 120 fr., and
Supplement. Par Deschamps et Brunet. Paris, 1878–80. 2 v.
O.
H ŒFER. Nouvelle biographie générale. Paris, 1852–66. 46 v. O.
184 fr.
H ORNE. Introd. to bibliography. Lond., 1814. 2 v. O. Antiq. 18s.
J OECHER. Allgem. Gelehrten-Lexikon. Lpz., 1850–51. 4 v., Q.,
and Fortsetzung. Bremen, 1784–1819. 6 v. Q. Antiq. 40 fl.
L AROUSSE. Dictionnaire universel. Paris, 1866–89. 15 v. and 2 suppl.
O. 635 fr.
M EN of the time. 12th ed. Lond., 1887. D. 15s.
Page 291
M ICHAELIS. Vergleichendes Wörterbuch der gebräuchlichsten
Taufnamen. Berl., 1856. O. 15 Ngr.
O ETTINGER. Moniteur des dates. Dresde, 1866–68. 6 v. Q. 35
Thlr. Supplément. Lpz., 1873–82. 3 v. Q. 90 M.
R OSSE. Index of dates. Lond., Bohn, 1858. 2 v. O. $2.50.
S ANDERS. Celebrities of the Century. Lond., 1887. O. 21s.
T HOMAS. Universal dict. of biography and mythology. Phila., 1870.
2 v. O. $22, or 1 v. $15.
T OWNSEND. Manual of dates. 5th ed. Lond., 1877. O. 18s.
V APEREAU. Dict. des contemporains. 5e éd. Paris, 1880. O. 25 fr.
The catalogues of the following libraries: A DVOCATES’ , A STOR ,
B OSTON A THENÆUM , B RITISH M USEUM , P EABODY I NSTITUTE
(Baltimore), are the most useful.
AMERICAN.
A LLIBONE. Dict. of Eng. literature. Phila., 1858–71. 3v. O.
$22.50.
C USHING. Anonyms. Camb., 1889. 2 pts. [A–Main]. O.
C USHING. Initials and pseudonyms. N. Y., 1885. O., and 2d series.
N. Y., 1888. O.
D RAKE. Dict. of Amer. biog. Rev. ed. Bost., 1875. O. $6.
H ARRISSE. Biblioth. Amer. vetustissima; works rel. to Amer. pub.
1492–1551. N. Y., 1866. O. $20.
L EYPOLDT. American catalogue; books in print July 1, 1876. N. Y.,
1880–81. 2 v. F.—1876–84. N. Y., 1885. 2 v. F.
S ABIN. Dict. of books rel. to Amer. N. Y., 1868, etc. Q. $5 per vol.
S PRAGUE. Annals of the American pulpit. N. Y., 1857–69. 9 v. O.
$36.
T HOMAS. History of printing in America. 2d ed. Albany, 1874.
2 v. O. $8
The following may sometimes be of use: R OORBACH’S Biblioth.
Amer., 1820–61. 4 v. O., and K ELLY’S Amer. catalogue, 1861–71. N.
Taufnamen. Berl., 1856. O. 15 Ngr.
O ETTINGER. Moniteur des dates. Dresde, 1866–68. 6 v. Q. 35
Thlr. Supplément. Lpz., 1873–82. 3 v. Q. 90 M.
R OSSE. Index of dates. Lond., Bohn, 1858. 2 v. O. $2.50.
S ANDERS. Celebrities of the Century. Lond., 1887. O. 21s.
T HOMAS. Universal dict. of biography and mythology. Phila., 1870.
2 v. O. $22, or 1 v. $15.
T OWNSEND. Manual of dates. 5th ed. Lond., 1877. O. 18s.
V APEREAU. Dict. des contemporains. 5e éd. Paris, 1880. O. 25 fr.
The catalogues of the following libraries: A DVOCATES’ , A STOR ,
B OSTON A THENÆUM , B RITISH M USEUM , P EABODY I NSTITUTE
(Baltimore), are the most useful.
AMERICAN.
A LLIBONE. Dict. of Eng. literature. Phila., 1858–71. 3v. O.
$22.50.
C USHING. Anonyms. Camb., 1889. 2 pts. [A–Main]. O.
C USHING. Initials and pseudonyms. N. Y., 1885. O., and 2d series.
N. Y., 1888. O.
D RAKE. Dict. of Amer. biog. Rev. ed. Bost., 1875. O. $6.
H ARRISSE. Biblioth. Amer. vetustissima; works rel. to Amer. pub.
1492–1551. N. Y., 1866. O. $20.
L EYPOLDT. American catalogue; books in print July 1, 1876. N. Y.,
1880–81. 2 v. F.—1876–84. N. Y., 1885. 2 v. F.
S ABIN. Dict. of books rel. to Amer. N. Y., 1868, etc. Q. $5 per vol.
S PRAGUE. Annals of the American pulpit. N. Y., 1857–69. 9 v. O.
$36.
T HOMAS. History of printing in America. 2d ed. Albany, 1874.
2 v. O. $8
The following may sometimes be of use: R OORBACH’S Biblioth.
Amer., 1820–61. 4 v. O., and K ELLY’S Amer. catalogue, 1861–71. N.
Page 292
Y., 1866–71. 2 v. O; and the general catalogues of colleges. {130}
ANONYMS AND PSEUDONYMS.
The most useful books are mentioned under their respective
languages, American (C USHING ), English (H ALKETT and L AING ),
French (B ARBIER and Q UÉRARD ). A list of new discoveries is
published each month in the Library Journal.
ART.
M EYER. Allgemeines Künstler-Lexikon. 2. Aufl. von Nagler’s
Künstler-Lexikon. 1.–3. Bd.: A–Bez. Lpz., 1872–85. O.
N AGLER. Die Monogrammisten. München, 1858–79. 5 v. O.
P OLLEN. Universal catal. of books on art. Lond., 1858–77. 2 v.
and suppl. sq. O. 29s.
T HIES. Catalogue of the engravings bequeathed to Harvard College by
F. C. Gray. Camb., 1869. Q.
BELGIAN.
B RUSSELS. A CAD. R OY. DE B ELGIQUE. Biographie nationale [A-H].
Brux., 1866–87. 9 v. O.
DANISH.
B RICKA. Dansk. biog. Lex. 1. Bind [A–Bea]. Kopenh., 1887.
O.
BOTANY.
P AXTON. Botanical dictionary. New ed. London, 1868. O. 25s.
ANONYMS AND PSEUDONYMS.
The most useful books are mentioned under their respective
languages, American (C USHING ), English (H ALKETT and L AING ),
French (B ARBIER and Q UÉRARD ). A list of new discoveries is
published each month in the Library Journal.
ART.
M EYER. Allgemeines Künstler-Lexikon. 2. Aufl. von Nagler’s
Künstler-Lexikon. 1.–3. Bd.: A–Bez. Lpz., 1872–85. O.
N AGLER. Die Monogrammisten. München, 1858–79. 5 v. O.
P OLLEN. Universal catal. of books on art. Lond., 1858–77. 2 v.
and suppl. sq. O. 29s.
T HIES. Catalogue of the engravings bequeathed to Harvard College by
F. C. Gray. Camb., 1869. Q.
BELGIAN.
B RUSSELS. A CAD. R OY. DE B ELGIQUE. Biographie nationale [A-H].
Brux., 1866–87. 9 v. O.
DANISH.
B RICKA. Dansk. biog. Lex. 1. Bind [A–Bea]. Kopenh., 1887.
O.
BOTANY.
P AXTON. Botanical dictionary. New ed. London, 1868. O. 25s.
Page 293
DUTCH.
K OBUS and R IVECOURT . Biog. handwoordenboek. Zutphen, 1854–
61. 3 v. O. About $4.
Convenient; for fuller details use
A A. Biog. woordenboek. Haarlem, 1852–78. 21 v. O.
ENGLISH.
A LLIBONE. Dict. of Eng. literature. Phila., 1858–71. 3 v. O.
$22.50.
A continuation is in preparation.
B URKE. Dormant and extinct peerages. New ed. Lond., 1866. O.
42s.
B URKE. Landed gentry. 7th ed. Lond., 1886. 2 v. O.
B URKE. Peerage and baronetage. 51st ed. Lond., 1888. O. 38s.
C OLLIER. Bibliog. account of the rarest works in English. Lond.,
1868. 2 v. O., or N. Y., 1868. 2 v. O. $16.
D ARLING. Cyclopædia bibliog.: Authors. Lond., 1854. O. 52s.
6d.
Chiefly English theol. works. {131}
D OYLE. Official baronage of England. Lond., 1886. O. 8º. 105s.
H ALKETT and L AING . Dict. of the anon. and pseudon. lit. of Gr.
Britain. Edin., 1882–88. 4 v. O. 168s.
H AYDN. Book of dignities. Lond., 1851. O. 25s.
L OWNDES. Bibliog. manual of Eng. literature. New ed., enl. by H. G.
Bohn. Lond., 1857–64. 6 v. D. 33s.
N ICOLAS. Historic peerage. Lond., 1857. O. 30s.
S TEPHEN. Dict. of national biography. Vol. 1–20: A–Garner. Lond.,
1885–89. 20 v. O.
T HOMAS. Handbook of fictitious names; by Olphar Hamst [pseud.].
Lond., 1868. O. 7s. 6d.
W ALFORD. County families. New ed. Lond., 1888. O. 50s.
W ARD. Men of the reign. Lond., 1885. D. 15s.
W ATT. Bibliotheca Britannica. Edin., 1824. 4 v. Q. Antiq. £4
15s.
K OBUS and R IVECOURT . Biog. handwoordenboek. Zutphen, 1854–
61. 3 v. O. About $4.
Convenient; for fuller details use
A A. Biog. woordenboek. Haarlem, 1852–78. 21 v. O.
ENGLISH.
A LLIBONE. Dict. of Eng. literature. Phila., 1858–71. 3 v. O.
$22.50.
A continuation is in preparation.
B URKE. Dormant and extinct peerages. New ed. Lond., 1866. O.
42s.
B URKE. Landed gentry. 7th ed. Lond., 1886. 2 v. O.
B URKE. Peerage and baronetage. 51st ed. Lond., 1888. O. 38s.
C OLLIER. Bibliog. account of the rarest works in English. Lond.,
1868. 2 v. O., or N. Y., 1868. 2 v. O. $16.
D ARLING. Cyclopædia bibliog.: Authors. Lond., 1854. O. 52s.
6d.
Chiefly English theol. works. {131}
D OYLE. Official baronage of England. Lond., 1886. O. 8º. 105s.
H ALKETT and L AING . Dict. of the anon. and pseudon. lit. of Gr.
Britain. Edin., 1882–88. 4 v. O. 168s.
H AYDN. Book of dignities. Lond., 1851. O. 25s.
L OWNDES. Bibliog. manual of Eng. literature. New ed., enl. by H. G.
Bohn. Lond., 1857–64. 6 v. D. 33s.
N ICOLAS. Historic peerage. Lond., 1857. O. 30s.
S TEPHEN. Dict. of national biography. Vol. 1–20: A–Garner. Lond.,
1885–89. 20 v. O.
T HOMAS. Handbook of fictitious names; by Olphar Hamst [pseud.].
Lond., 1868. O. 7s. 6d.
W ALFORD. County families. New ed. Lond., 1888. O. 50s.
W ARD. Men of the reign. Lond., 1885. D. 15s.
W ATT. Bibliotheca Britannica. Edin., 1824. 4 v. Q. Antiq. £4
15s.
Page 294
The following may sometimes be of use: L OW’S English catalogue,
1835–80. Lond., 1864–82. 3 v. O. 117s., and L OW’S [Subject]
index to the British catalogue, 1837–80. Lond., 1858–84. 3 v. O.
86s.
Crockford’s Clerical directory, the Medical directory of Great Britain,
the Army list, and similar registers afford assistance.
FRENCH.
B ARBIER. Ouvrages anonymes. 3e éd. Paris, 1872–79. 4 v. O.
60 fr.
L ORENZ. Catal. gén. de la librairie française, depuis 1840. Paris,
1867–88. 11 v. O. 330 fr.
P OTIQUET. L’Institut National de France. Paris, 1871. O. 8 fr.
Q UÉRARD. La France littéraire. Paris, 1827–39. 10 v. O. 120 fr.
Q UÉRARD. Supercheries littéraires. 2e éd. Paris, 1869–70. 3 v. O.
60 fr.
Q UÉRARD and others. La littérature française contemporaine. Paris,
1842–57. 6 v. O. 96 fr.
GEOGRAPHY.
T HOMAS and B ALDWIN . Lippincott’s gazetteer. New ed. Phila.,
1882, l. O. $12.
GERMAN.
H EINSIUS. Allgem. Bücher-Lexikon; Verzeichniss aller von 1700 bis
1879 erschienenen Bücher. Lpz., 1812–82. 16 v. Q.
K AYSER. Vollständ. Bücher-Lexikon, 1750–1886. Lpz., 1834–87.
24 v. Q. About $60, but now reduced to 140 marks.
The following are also often useful The Brockhaus’ Konversations-
Lexikon, 13. Anfl., Lpz., 1882, etc.; Pierer’s Universal-Lexikon; the
Allgemeine deutsche Biographie, Lpz., 1875–89, which has reached R in
its 28th vol.; Zedler’s Grosses vollst. Univ.-Lex. 1732–54, 68 v. fº
1835–80. Lond., 1864–82. 3 v. O. 117s., and L OW’S [Subject]
index to the British catalogue, 1837–80. Lond., 1858–84. 3 v. O.
86s.
Crockford’s Clerical directory, the Medical directory of Great Britain,
the Army list, and similar registers afford assistance.
FRENCH.
B ARBIER. Ouvrages anonymes. 3e éd. Paris, 1872–79. 4 v. O.
60 fr.
L ORENZ. Catal. gén. de la librairie française, depuis 1840. Paris,
1867–88. 11 v. O. 330 fr.
P OTIQUET. L’Institut National de France. Paris, 1871. O. 8 fr.
Q UÉRARD. La France littéraire. Paris, 1827–39. 10 v. O. 120 fr.
Q UÉRARD. Supercheries littéraires. 2e éd. Paris, 1869–70. 3 v. O.
60 fr.
Q UÉRARD and others. La littérature française contemporaine. Paris,
1842–57. 6 v. O. 96 fr.
GEOGRAPHY.
T HOMAS and B ALDWIN . Lippincott’s gazetteer. New ed. Phila.,
1882, l. O. $12.
GERMAN.
H EINSIUS. Allgem. Bücher-Lexikon; Verzeichniss aller von 1700 bis
1879 erschienenen Bücher. Lpz., 1812–82. 16 v. Q.
K AYSER. Vollständ. Bücher-Lexikon, 1750–1886. Lpz., 1834–87.
24 v. Q. About $60, but now reduced to 140 marks.
The following are also often useful The Brockhaus’ Konversations-
Lexikon, 13. Anfl., Lpz., 1882, etc.; Pierer’s Universal-Lexikon; the
Allgemeine deutsche Biographie, Lpz., 1875–89, which has reached R in
its 28th vol.; Zedler’s Grosses vollst. Univ.-Lex. 1732–54, 68 v. fº
Page 295
(for 17th and 18th century writers); and Wurzbach’s Biog. Lexikon des
Kaiserthums Oesterreich. Wien, 1856–86. 54 v. O. {132}
GREEK AND ROMAN.
S MITH. Dict. of Gr. and Rom. biography and mythology. Lond., 1849.
3 v. O. 115s. 6d., or Bost. $30.
For subject-cataloguing, the Dictionary of the Bible, the Dict. of
Greek and Roman antiquities, and the Dict. of Greek and Roman
geography are of prime importance.
HEBREW.
B RITISH M USEUM. Catal. of Hebr. books. Lond., 1867. O. 25s.
F UERST. Biblioth. Judaica. Lpz., 1849–63. 3 v. O. 14 Thlr.
INCUNABULA.
B ERJEAU. Early German, Dutch, and English printers’ marks. Lond.,
1866. O. 10s. 6d.
H AIN. Repertorium bibliogr. Stuttg., 1826–38. 2 v. O. 20 Thlr.
P ANZER. Annales typogr., 1457–1536. Norimb., 1793–1803. 11 v.
Q. Antiq. 42 Thlr.
ITALIAN.
G UBERNATIS. Dizionario biog. degli scrittori contemp. Firenze, 1879.
l. O.
M ELZI. Diz. di opere anon. e pseud. Milano, 1848–59. 3 v. O.
30 fr.
T IRABOSCHI. Storia della lit. ital. Milano, 1822–26. 16 v. O.
LANGUAGE, PHILOLOGY.
E CKSTEIN. Nomenclator philologicus. Lpz., 1871. S.
Kaiserthums Oesterreich. Wien, 1856–86. 54 v. O. {132}
GREEK AND ROMAN.
S MITH. Dict. of Gr. and Rom. biography and mythology. Lond., 1849.
3 v. O. 115s. 6d., or Bost. $30.
For subject-cataloguing, the Dictionary of the Bible, the Dict. of
Greek and Roman antiquities, and the Dict. of Greek and Roman
geography are of prime importance.
HEBREW.
B RITISH M USEUM. Catal. of Hebr. books. Lond., 1867. O. 25s.
F UERST. Biblioth. Judaica. Lpz., 1849–63. 3 v. O. 14 Thlr.
INCUNABULA.
B ERJEAU. Early German, Dutch, and English printers’ marks. Lond.,
1866. O. 10s. 6d.
H AIN. Repertorium bibliogr. Stuttg., 1826–38. 2 v. O. 20 Thlr.
P ANZER. Annales typogr., 1457–1536. Norimb., 1793–1803. 11 v.
Q. Antiq. 42 Thlr.
ITALIAN.
G UBERNATIS. Dizionario biog. degli scrittori contemp. Firenze, 1879.
l. O.
M ELZI. Diz. di opere anon. e pseud. Milano, 1848–59. 3 v. O.
30 fr.
T IRABOSCHI. Storia della lit. ital. Milano, 1822–26. 16 v. O.
LANGUAGE, PHILOLOGY.
E CKSTEIN. Nomenclator philologicus. Lpz., 1871. S.
Page 296
V ATER. Litteratur der Grammatiken, Lexika, u.s.w. 2. Aufl. Berl.,
1847. O. 3 Thlr.
LAW.
B OUVIER. Law dictionary. 15th ed. Phila., 1884. 2 v. O.
MEDIÆVAL.
C HASSANT. Dict. des abréviations lat. et françaises. 3e éd. Paris,
1866. D. 6 fr.
C HEVALIER, C. U. J. Répertoire des sources hist. du Moyen Age.
Paris, 1877–86. O., and Suppl., 1888. O.
F RANKLIN, A. Dict. des noms, surnoms, et pseudonymes latins, 1100–
1530. Paris, 1875. O. 10 fr.
G RAESSE. Orbis Latinus; Verzeichniss d. latein. Benennungen der
Städte, u.s.w. Dresden, 1861. O. 1½ Thlr.
P OTTHAST. Biblioth. historica Medii Aevi. Berlin, 1862. O., and
supplement, 1868. O. 9 Thlr.
MEDICINE.
D UNGLISON. Medical lexicon. N. Y., 1873. O. $6.50.
U. S. S URGEON -G ENERAL. Index-catalogue of the library. Vol. 1–10:
A-Pfeutsch. Wash., 1880–89. 10 v. l. O. {133}
MUSICIANS.
F ÉTIS.Biog. univ. des musiciens. 2e éd. augm. Paris, 1860–65. 8 v.
O. 64 fr. Supplément. Paris, 1878–80. 2 v. O.
G ROVE. Dict. of music and musicians. Lond. and N. Y., 1879–87.
4 v. O.
M ENDEL. Musikalisches Conversations-Lexikon fortg. von A:
Reissman. 2e Ausg. Berl., 1880–82, 11 v. O, and
Ergäuzungsband. Berl., 1883. O.
1847. O. 3 Thlr.
LAW.
B OUVIER. Law dictionary. 15th ed. Phila., 1884. 2 v. O.
MEDIÆVAL.
C HASSANT. Dict. des abréviations lat. et françaises. 3e éd. Paris,
1866. D. 6 fr.
C HEVALIER, C. U. J. Répertoire des sources hist. du Moyen Age.
Paris, 1877–86. O., and Suppl., 1888. O.
F RANKLIN, A. Dict. des noms, surnoms, et pseudonymes latins, 1100–
1530. Paris, 1875. O. 10 fr.
G RAESSE. Orbis Latinus; Verzeichniss d. latein. Benennungen der
Städte, u.s.w. Dresden, 1861. O. 1½ Thlr.
P OTTHAST. Biblioth. historica Medii Aevi. Berlin, 1862. O., and
supplement, 1868. O. 9 Thlr.
MEDICINE.
D UNGLISON. Medical lexicon. N. Y., 1873. O. $6.50.
U. S. S URGEON -G ENERAL. Index-catalogue of the library. Vol. 1–10:
A-Pfeutsch. Wash., 1880–89. 10 v. l. O. {133}
MUSICIANS.
F ÉTIS.Biog. univ. des musiciens. 2e éd. augm. Paris, 1860–65. 8 v.
O. 64 fr. Supplément. Paris, 1878–80. 2 v. O.
G ROVE. Dict. of music and musicians. Lond. and N. Y., 1879–87.
4 v. O.
M ENDEL. Musikalisches Conversations-Lexikon fortg. von A:
Reissman. 2e Ausg. Berl., 1880–82, 11 v. O, and
Ergäuzungsband. Berl., 1883. O.
Page 297
PORTUGUESE.
B ARBOSA M ACHADO. Bibliotheca lusitana. Lisboa, 1741–59. 4 v.
F.
S ILVA. Dic. bibliog. portuguez. Lisboa, 1858–62. 7 v., and Suppl.
1867–70. 2 v. O.
QUAKERS.
S MITH. Biblioth. anti-Quakerana. Lond., 1873. O. 15s.
S MITH. Descr. catal. of Friends’ books. Lond., 1867. 2 v. O.
SCIENCE.
P OGGENDORF. Biog.-literar. Handwörterbuch zur Gesch. d. exacten
Wissenschaften. Lpz., 1863. 2 v. O. 10⅔ Thlr.
R OYAL S OCIETY OF L ONDON. Catal. of scientific papers, 1800–63.
Lond., 1867–72. 6 v. Q. £6.
SPANISH.
A NTONIO. Bibliotheca Hispana vetus, ad a. C. MD. Matriti, 1788.
2 v. F. Antiq. 40 à 50 fr.
A NTONIO. Same. Bibliotheca Hispana nova, 1500–1684. Matriti,
1783–88. 2 v. F. Antiq. 40 à 50 fr.
B ARRERA. Catal. bibliog. y biog. del teatro ant. esp. hasta med. del
siglo 18. Madrid, 1860. l. O.
B OSTON P UBLIC L IBRARY. Catalogue of the Spanish and Portuguese
books bequeathed by G. Ticknor; by J. L. Whitney. Boston,
1879. Q.
L ATASSA Y O RTIN. Bibl. ant. de los escritores aragoneses. Zaragoza,
1796. 2 v. Q.
L ATASSA Y O RTIN. Bib. nova, 1500–[1802]. Pamplona, 1798–1802.
6 v. Q.
T ICKNOR. Hist. of Span. lit. 4th ed. Bost., 1872. 3 v. l. O. $10.
B ARBOSA M ACHADO. Bibliotheca lusitana. Lisboa, 1741–59. 4 v.
F.
S ILVA. Dic. bibliog. portuguez. Lisboa, 1858–62. 7 v., and Suppl.
1867–70. 2 v. O.
QUAKERS.
S MITH. Biblioth. anti-Quakerana. Lond., 1873. O. 15s.
S MITH. Descr. catal. of Friends’ books. Lond., 1867. 2 v. O.
SCIENCE.
P OGGENDORF. Biog.-literar. Handwörterbuch zur Gesch. d. exacten
Wissenschaften. Lpz., 1863. 2 v. O. 10⅔ Thlr.
R OYAL S OCIETY OF L ONDON. Catal. of scientific papers, 1800–63.
Lond., 1867–72. 6 v. Q. £6.
SPANISH.
A NTONIO. Bibliotheca Hispana vetus, ad a. C. MD. Matriti, 1788.
2 v. F. Antiq. 40 à 50 fr.
A NTONIO. Same. Bibliotheca Hispana nova, 1500–1684. Matriti,
1783–88. 2 v. F. Antiq. 40 à 50 fr.
B ARRERA. Catal. bibliog. y biog. del teatro ant. esp. hasta med. del
siglo 18. Madrid, 1860. l. O.
B OSTON P UBLIC L IBRARY. Catalogue of the Spanish and Portuguese
books bequeathed by G. Ticknor; by J. L. Whitney. Boston,
1879. Q.
L ATASSA Y O RTIN. Bibl. ant. de los escritores aragoneses. Zaragoza,
1796. 2 v. Q.
L ATASSA Y O RTIN. Bib. nova, 1500–[1802]. Pamplona, 1798–1802.
6 v. Q.
T ICKNOR. Hist. of Span. lit. 4th ed. Bost., 1872. 3 v. l. O. $10.
Page 298
WOMEN.
H ALE. Woman’s record. N. Y., 1853. l. O. $5.
N. B.—An INDEX, in which the foregoing rules are given in full in an
alphabetical arrangement, is in preparation.
H ALE. Woman’s record. N. Y., 1853. l. O. $5.
N. B.—An INDEX, in which the foregoing rules are given in full in an
alphabetical arrangement, is in preparation.
Page 299
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
A’, Ap. See Prefixes.
Ä, pp. 103, 104, 107.
Abbott, Ezra, p. 3.
Abbreviations, §§ 156, 180, pp. 103, 107.
— list of, pp. 118–119.
— arrangement of, § 239.
Abridgment, §§ 150–160, p. 101.
Academies, § 56.
Accents, § 208.
Accessions book, pp. 126, 127, 128.
Acts of legislative bodies, § 41.
Adaptations. See Epitomes.
Additions, p. 101.
Admiralty proceedings, p. 100.
African names, p. 109.
Almanacs, §§ 73, 109109.
Alphabeting, pp. 103, 106.
— J: Edmands’s rules for, p. 116.
Alphabets, p. 107.
Alternative titles, §§ 161, 205.
Alumni. See Colleges.
Ambiguity, p. 104.
American, used for U.S., p. 54.
American Library Assoc. catalog rules, p. 99.
American reference books, p. 129.
Analytical references, § 203; p. 14.
— when to be made, §§ 65, 110, 125–128, 164.
— arrangement of, § 248.
A’, Ap. See Prefixes.
Ä, pp. 103, 104, 107.
Abbott, Ezra, p. 3.
Abbreviations, §§ 156, 180, pp. 103, 107.
— list of, pp. 118–119.
— arrangement of, § 239.
Abridgment, §§ 150–160, p. 101.
Academies, § 56.
Accents, § 208.
Accessions book, pp. 126, 127, 128.
Acts of legislative bodies, § 41.
Adaptations. See Epitomes.
Additions, p. 101.
Admiralty proceedings, p. 100.
African names, p. 109.
Almanacs, §§ 73, 109109.
Alphabeting, pp. 103, 106.
— J: Edmands’s rules for, p. 116.
Alphabets, p. 107.
Alternative titles, §§ 161, 205.
Alumni. See Colleges.
Ambiguity, p. 104.
American, used for U.S., p. 54.
American Library Assoc. catalog rules, p. 99.
American reference books, p. 129.
Analytical references, § 203; p. 14.
— when to be made, §§ 65, 110, 125–128, 164.
— arrangement of, § 248.
Page 300
— date of, § 194.
Annuals, § 73.
Anonymous, defined, p. 9.
Anonymous biographies, subject-word entry for, § 87.
Anonymous works, §§ 2, 55, 68–72, 86 a, 87, 88 a, 170–
173, p. 103.
— author’s name in title entry of, § 173.
— changed titles of, § 82, 83.
— forming parts of others, § 71.
— when considered so, p. 104.
— reference books for, p. 130.
Anthologies. See Collections, form entry.
Apocrypha, p. 100.
Appended, § 195.
Apprentices’ Library, N. Y., p. 3.
Arabic numerals, §§ 117, 187, 191, pp. 103, 107.
Arabic writers, § 19 e.
— transliteration of Arabic names, § 36.
Arrangement, § 213–258, pp. 103, 106.
Art, reference books on, p. 130.
Articles, §§ 76, 151, 152.
— place of, when transposed, § 170.
— not noticed in arrangement, §§ 241, p. 117.
“Articles to be inquired of,” § 47.
Assemblies, §§ 52, 53.
Associations, § 56.
Asterisks, p. 105.
Asyndetic, defined, p. 9.
Attributed books, § 2.
Auctioneers, § 10.
Author defined, p. 9.
Author entry, p. 12, §§ 1–67, 126 c.
Author name, arrangement of works under, p. 103.
— when omitted, p. 104.
Authors having the same name, how to distinguish, §§ 139,
141, p. 101.
Annuals, § 73.
Anonymous, defined, p. 9.
Anonymous biographies, subject-word entry for, § 87.
Anonymous works, §§ 2, 55, 68–72, 86 a, 87, 88 a, 170–
173, p. 103.
— author’s name in title entry of, § 173.
— changed titles of, § 82, 83.
— forming parts of others, § 71.
— when considered so, p. 104.
— reference books for, p. 130.
Anthologies. See Collections, form entry.
Apocrypha, p. 100.
Appended, § 195.
Apprentices’ Library, N. Y., p. 3.
Arabic numerals, §§ 117, 187, 191, pp. 103, 107.
Arabic writers, § 19 e.
— transliteration of Arabic names, § 36.
Arrangement, § 213–258, pp. 103, 106.
Art, reference books on, p. 130.
Articles, §§ 76, 151, 152.
— place of, when transposed, § 170.
— not noticed in arrangement, §§ 241, p. 117.
“Articles to be inquired of,” § 47.
Assemblies, §§ 52, 53.
Associations, § 56.
Asterisks, p. 105.
Asyndetic, defined, p. 9.
Attributed books, § 2.
Auctioneers, § 10.
Author defined, p. 9.
Author entry, p. 12, §§ 1–67, 126 c.
Author name, arrangement of works under, p. 103.
— when omitted, p. 104.
Authors having the same name, how to distinguish, §§ 139,
141, p. 101.
Page 301
— uncertain, § 2.
Banks, § 56 c.
Baronet, title, § 144.
Belgian reference books, p. 130.
Benevolent societies, § 56.
Bible, § 68, pp. 100, 105.
— arrangement of titles under, § 252.
Biblical names, p. 108.
Bibliographies, p. 106.
Bibliography, § 116.
Binder’s title, p. 14.
Biographical reference from fiction, § 87.
Biographies, economy in entry of, § 67.
— anonymous, §§ 68, 87.
— of kings, etc., § 94.
— in collected works, 126 d.
— arrangement of, § 246, p. 106.
— when separated from criticisms, §§ 246, 247.
Bishops, entry of, § 20 b.
— charges, § 47.
Bodleian Library, catalog rules, p. 104.
Book sizes, A. L. A. committee on, p. 115.
Booksellers, § 10.
Boston Athenæum, p. 7.
Boston Mercantile Library, p. 7.
Boston Public Library, p. 7.
Botany, reference books on, p. 130.
Brackets, §§ 165, 166, 171–173, 209, 210, pp. 102, 103,
104, 107.
Breviaries, § 51, p. 105.
British Museum, p. 3.
British noblemen, § 21.
Buildings, § 56 g.
Bureaus. See Government publications.
Banks, § 56 c.
Baronet, title, § 144.
Belgian reference books, p. 130.
Benevolent societies, § 56.
Bible, § 68, pp. 100, 105.
— arrangement of titles under, § 252.
Biblical names, p. 108.
Bibliographies, p. 106.
Bibliography, § 116.
Binder’s title, p. 14.
Biographical reference from fiction, § 87.
Biographies, economy in entry of, § 67.
— anonymous, §§ 68, 87.
— of kings, etc., § 94.
— in collected works, 126 d.
— arrangement of, § 246, p. 106.
— when separated from criticisms, §§ 246, 247.
Bishops, entry of, § 20 b.
— charges, § 47.
Bodleian Library, catalog rules, p. 104.
Book sizes, A. L. A. committee on, p. 115.
Booksellers, § 10.
Boston Athenæum, p. 7.
Boston Mercantile Library, p. 7.
Boston Public Library, p. 7.
Botany, reference books on, p. 130.
Brackets, §§ 165, 166, 171–173, 209, 210, pp. 102, 103,
104, 107.
Breviaries, § 51, p. 105.
British Museum, p. 3.
British noblemen, § 21.
Buildings, § 56 g.
Bureaus. See Government publications.
Page 302
Calendars of documents, § 43.
Canons omit forenames, § 20 b.
Canonized persons. See Saints.
Capes, § 29.
Capitals, §§ 205, 206, pp. 101, 104.
— in German, p. 107.
Caption, p. 14.
Cardinals. See Eccles. dignitaries.
Cartographers, § 8.
Cases, oblique, in titles, § 80.
Catalog of accessions, books ordered, missing, etc., pp.
126, 127.
Catalog rules, Amer. Lib. Assoc., p. 99.
— Bodleian Library, p. 104.
— English Lib. Assoc., p. 103.
— Mr. Dewey’s, p. 107.
Cataloging, list of books useful in, pp. 128–133.
Catalogs, p. 105.
— how entered, §§ 10, 11, 39.
— table of different kinds of, pp. 11, 12.
Catch-word entry, p. 13.
— reference, p. 14, §§ 86, 89.
Catechisms, § 51.
Cathedrals. See Churches.
Centimeters, size of book in, pp. 102, 115.
Century, not given in early books, § 185.
Changed names, §§ 22, 60.
Changed titles of anonymous works, §§ 82, 83.
Charges, episcopal, § 47.
Chrestomathies, § 16.
Christian name. See Forename.
Chronograms, § 187.
Chronological arrangement of subjects, § 256.
Church of England, p. 105.
Churches, §§ 51, 56.
Cities, § 40, pp. 99, 107.
Canons omit forenames, § 20 b.
Canonized persons. See Saints.
Capes, § 29.
Capitals, §§ 205, 206, pp. 101, 104.
— in German, p. 107.
Caption, p. 14.
Cardinals. See Eccles. dignitaries.
Cartographers, § 8.
Cases, oblique, in titles, § 80.
Catalog of accessions, books ordered, missing, etc., pp.
126, 127.
Catalog rules, Amer. Lib. Assoc., p. 99.
— Bodleian Library, p. 104.
— English Lib. Assoc., p. 103.
— Mr. Dewey’s, p. 107.
Cataloging, list of books useful in, pp. 128–133.
Catalogs, p. 105.
— how entered, §§ 10, 11, 39.
— table of different kinds of, pp. 11, 12.
Catch-word entry, p. 13.
— reference, p. 14, §§ 86, 89.
Catechisms, § 51.
Cathedrals. See Churches.
Centimeters, size of book in, pp. 102, 115.
Century, not given in early books, § 185.
Changed names, §§ 22, 60.
Changed titles of anonymous works, §§ 82, 83.
Charges, episcopal, § 47.
Chrestomathies, § 16.
Christian name. See Forename.
Chronograms, § 187.
Chronological arrangement of subjects, § 256.
Church of England, p. 105.
Churches, §§ 51, 56.
Cities, § 40, pp. 99, 107.
Page 303
— cross-references from, § 119.
Civil actions, § 114, p. 100.
Class, defined, p. 9.
— its relation to subject, p. 11.
Class entry, p. 11.
Classed catalogs, pp. 11, 12.
Classes of citizens, § 55.
— of persons, cross-refs. from, § 119.
Classical names, §§ 36, 226, p. 108.
Classification, pp. 3, 9–12, § 118.
Collections, §§ 59, 68, p. 104.
— arrangement of, § 149.
— form entry for, § 122.
— subject entry for, § 92.
— of an author’s works, arrangement of, p. 106.
Collective titles, § 59 c.
Collectors, § 59.
College societies, § 56.
Colleges, § 56.
Colon names, p. 122.
Colophon, § 184.
Columbia College catalog rules, p. 107.
Commentaries, §§ 12, 60, pp. 99, 105;
— arrangement of, p. 106.
Commentators, pp. 103, 105.
Comments, § 115.
Committees and commissions, § 54.
Compilers. See Editors.
Composers of music, § 9, p. 105.
Compound entries. §§ 106, 107.
Compound names, §§ 23, 60, 106, 107, 227–232, pp. 101,
105.
Compound subject-names, inversion of, § 107.
Compound words, arrangement of, § 232.
Concordances, § 17, p. 106.
Conferences, § 52.
Civil actions, § 114, p. 100.
Class, defined, p. 9.
— its relation to subject, p. 11.
Class entry, p. 11.
Classed catalogs, pp. 11, 12.
Classes of citizens, § 55.
— of persons, cross-refs. from, § 119.
Classical names, §§ 36, 226, p. 108.
Classification, pp. 3, 9–12, § 118.
Collections, §§ 59, 68, p. 104.
— arrangement of, § 149.
— form entry for, § 122.
— subject entry for, § 92.
— of an author’s works, arrangement of, p. 106.
Collective titles, § 59 c.
Collectors, § 59.
College societies, § 56.
Colleges, § 56.
Colon names, p. 122.
Colophon, § 184.
Columbia College catalog rules, p. 107.
Commentaries, §§ 12, 60, pp. 99, 105;
— arrangement of, p. 106.
Commentators, pp. 103, 105.
Comments, § 115.
Committees and commissions, § 54.
Compilers. See Editors.
Composers of music, § 9, p. 105.
Compound entries. §§ 106, 107.
Compound names, §§ 23, 60, 106, 107, 227–232, pp. 101,
105.
Compound subject-names, inversion of, § 107.
Compound words, arrangement of, § 232.
Concordances, § 17, p. 106.
Conferences, § 52.
Page 304
Confessions of faith, § 51.
Congress, § 41.
Congresses, §§ 49, 60.
Contents, §§ 198–200, p. 102.
— arrangement of, § 253.
Continuations, §§ 13, 60.
— denoted by dashes, p. 103.
Contractions. See Elisions.
Conventions, §§ 52, 60.
Coöperation committee, A. L. A., p. 99.
Copyright, date of, p. 102.
Corporate entry, §§ 39–56, p. 99.
Corporations, entered under name or place, § 56.
Correspondence, writers of a, § 3.
Councils, ecclesiastical, §§ 53, 60.
Countries, p. 99.
— as joint authors, § 3.
— cross refs. from, § 119.
— arrangement under, § 250–252, 258.
Country and person, choice between, § 94.
Country and event, § 95.
Country and subject, § 96, 97.
Courtesy titles. See Titles of honor.
Courts, § 40.
Creeds, § 51.
Criminal trials, p. 100.
Criticisms of anon. works, § 72.
Criticisms, when to be separated from biographies, §§ 240,
246, 247.
Cross reference, p. 14, §§ 117, 119, 257.
Cyclopædias. See Encyclopædias.
D’, de, § 24, p. 105.
Daily, § 78.
Danish names, § 36.
Danish reference books, p. 130.
Congress, § 41.
Congresses, §§ 49, 60.
Contents, §§ 198–200, p. 102.
— arrangement of, § 253.
Continuations, §§ 13, 60.
— denoted by dashes, p. 103.
Contractions. See Elisions.
Conventions, §§ 52, 60.
Coöperation committee, A. L. A., p. 99.
Copyright, date of, p. 102.
Corporate entry, §§ 39–56, p. 99.
Corporations, entered under name or place, § 56.
Correspondence, writers of a, § 3.
Councils, ecclesiastical, §§ 53, 60.
Countries, p. 99.
— as joint authors, § 3.
— cross refs. from, § 119.
— arrangement under, § 250–252, 258.
Country and person, choice between, § 94.
Country and event, § 95.
Country and subject, § 96, 97.
Courtesy titles. See Titles of honor.
Courts, § 40.
Creeds, § 51.
Criminal trials, p. 100.
Criticisms of anon. works, § 72.
Criticisms, when to be separated from biographies, §§ 240,
246, 247.
Cross reference, p. 14, §§ 117, 119, 257.
Cyclopædias. See Encyclopædias.
D’, de, § 24, p. 105.
Daily, § 78.
Danish names, § 36.
Danish reference books, p. 130.
Page 305
Dashes, § 146, pp. 102, 103, 105, 118.
Date of publication, §§ 184–194, p. 102.
Dates in title, § 154.
Days, abbreviations for names of, p. 125.
De, de la, § 24, p. 105.
Debate, participants in a, § 3.
Defender of a thesis, §§ 5, 60, pp. 104, 105.
Definitions of terms, pp. 8–15.
Denominations, religious, § 51.
Des, § 24, p. 105.
Designers, §§ 7, 8, 60.
Dewey, Melvil, his catalog rules, p. 107.
Dialects, p. 107.
Dictionaries, § 124.
Dictionary catalog defined, p. 12.
Dictionary and systematic catalogs, § 118.
Digests of laws, § 42.
Dignitaries, §§ 19, 20, p. 100.
Directories, § 63.
Dissertations. See Theses.
Distinctive epithets, language of, § 143.
Divisions, under headings, §§ 255, 256, 258.
Documents, calendars of, § 43.
Dots, omissions indicated by, pp. 101, 104.
Double entry, under subjects §§ 93–96, 108.
Double title pages, § 91.
Drama, §§ 84, 122.
Du, § 24, p. 105.
Duplicate list, p. 126.
Dutch names, § 36.
Dutch reference books, p. 130.
Dziatzko, K: § 5.
East Indian names, § 19 e, p. 108.
Ecclesiastical councils, §§ 53, 60.
Ecclesiastical dignitaries, §§ 20 b, 60, p. 100.
Date of publication, §§ 184–194, p. 102.
Dates in title, § 154.
Days, abbreviations for names of, p. 125.
De, de la, § 24, p. 105.
Debate, participants in a, § 3.
Defender of a thesis, §§ 5, 60, pp. 104, 105.
Definitions of terms, pp. 8–15.
Denominations, religious, § 51.
Des, § 24, p. 105.
Designers, §§ 7, 8, 60.
Dewey, Melvil, his catalog rules, p. 107.
Dialects, p. 107.
Dictionaries, § 124.
Dictionary catalog defined, p. 12.
Dictionary and systematic catalogs, § 118.
Digests of laws, § 42.
Dignitaries, §§ 19, 20, p. 100.
Directories, § 63.
Dissertations. See Theses.
Distinctive epithets, language of, § 143.
Divisions, under headings, §§ 255, 256, 258.
Documents, calendars of, § 43.
Dots, omissions indicated by, pp. 101, 104.
Double entry, under subjects §§ 93–96, 108.
Double title pages, § 91.
Drama, §§ 84, 122.
Du, § 24, p. 105.
Duplicate list, p. 126.
Dutch names, § 36.
Dutch reference books, p. 130.
Dziatzko, K: § 5.
East Indian names, § 19 e, p. 108.
Ecclesiastical councils, §§ 53, 60.
Ecclesiastical dignitaries, §§ 20 b, 60, p. 100.
Page 306
Ecclesiastical districts, § 40.
Economies in author entry, § 62–67.
— in subject entry, §§ 94, 96, 97, 108, 110–112, 118, 260.
Editions, §§ 159, 176, 177, p. 102.
— arrangement of, §§ 242, 243, 260, p. 106.
— language of, p. 107.
Editors, §§ 18, 137, pp. 9, 99, 103, 104, 105.
— of periodicals, § 59 a.
Elisions, § 239.
Edmands, J:, rules for alphabeting, p. 116.
Egyptian names, p. 108.
Encyclopædias, p. 13, § 124.
English, use of capitals in, p. 101.
English reference books, p. 130.
Engravings, §§ 7, 8, 60.
Entry, defined, p. 12.
— where to enter, §§ 1–128.
— how to enter, §§ 129–261.
Episcopal charges, § 47.
Epitomes, § 14.
Eschatology, § 117.
Essays, § 126 d.
Evening, § 78.
Events, § 95.
Exact copying, § 165, p. 101.
Excerpts, § 16.
Extracts, §§ 74, 240.
False dates, § 188.
False place of publication, § 188.
Family names. See Surnames.
Fiction, §§ 75, 122.
— subject entry under, § 87.
Firms, § 56 c.
First word, what it is, §§ 76–79.
— entry, §§ 75–80, pp. 12, 99.
Economies in author entry, § 62–67.
— in subject entry, §§ 94, 96, 97, 108, 110–112, 118, 260.
Editions, §§ 159, 176, 177, p. 102.
— arrangement of, §§ 242, 243, 260, p. 106.
— language of, p. 107.
Editors, §§ 18, 137, pp. 9, 99, 103, 104, 105.
— of periodicals, § 59 a.
Elisions, § 239.
Edmands, J:, rules for alphabeting, p. 116.
Egyptian names, p. 108.
Encyclopædias, p. 13, § 124.
English, use of capitals in, p. 101.
English reference books, p. 130.
Engravings, §§ 7, 8, 60.
Entry, defined, p. 12.
— where to enter, §§ 1–128.
— how to enter, §§ 129–261.
Episcopal charges, § 47.
Epitomes, § 14.
Eschatology, § 117.
Essays, § 126 d.
Evening, § 78.
Events, § 95.
Exact copying, § 165, p. 101.
Excerpts, § 16.
Extracts, §§ 74, 240.
False dates, § 188.
False place of publication, § 188.
Family names. See Surnames.
Fiction, §§ 75, 122.
— subject entry under, § 87.
Firms, § 56 c.
First word, what it is, §§ 76–79.
— entry, §§ 75–80, pp. 12, 99.
Page 307
— reference, p. 14, §§ 84, 85.
First words of a title to be retained, §§ 134, 162.
Foreign languages, transliteration in, p. 102.
— rules for capitals in, § 205, p. 102.
Foreign names, §§ 23 b, c, 24, p. 105, 109.
Foreign phrases as titles, § 77.
Forenames, §§ 19, 130, 139–141, 155, 215, 216, 219–223.
— abbreviations of, p. 119.
— arrangement of, p. 118.
— in parentheses, p. 104.
— persons known by, p. 104.
Form, p. 13.
Form, typographical. See Size.
Form entry, p. 13, §§ 122–124.
— classification by, p. 10.
Forts, § 26.
Fragments, p. 106.
French reference books, p. 131.
Friars, §§ 19 c, 60, pp. 100, 104.
Friends, Society of, reference books for, p. 133.
Full, defined, p. 7.
Future life, § 117.
Galleries, § 56.
Gazetteers, § 63.
Geography, reference books on, p. 131.
German names, § 36.
German reference books, p. 131.
Government publications, §§ 41, 44–46, 251.
— references from, § 89.
Governors’ messages, § 46.
Grammars, § 124, p. 107.
Greek and Roman reference books, p. 132.
Greek names, §§ 36, 226, p. 108.
— of deities, § 100.
Grouping of subject-headings, §§ 255, 256.
First words of a title to be retained, §§ 134, 162.
Foreign languages, transliteration in, p. 102.
— rules for capitals in, § 205, p. 102.
Foreign names, §§ 23 b, c, 24, p. 105, 109.
Foreign phrases as titles, § 77.
Forenames, §§ 19, 130, 139–141, 155, 215, 216, 219–223.
— abbreviations of, p. 119.
— arrangement of, p. 118.
— in parentheses, p. 104.
— persons known by, p. 104.
Form, p. 13.
Form, typographical. See Size.
Form entry, p. 13, §§ 122–124.
— classification by, p. 10.
Forts, § 26.
Fragments, p. 106.
French reference books, p. 131.
Friars, §§ 19 c, 60, pp. 100, 104.
Friends, Society of, reference books for, p. 133.
Full, defined, p. 7.
Future life, § 117.
Galleries, § 56.
Gazetteers, § 63.
Geography, reference books on, p. 131.
German names, § 36.
German reference books, p. 131.
Government publications, §§ 41, 44–46, 251.
— references from, § 89.
Governors’ messages, § 46.
Grammars, § 124, p. 107.
Greek and Roman reference books, p. 132.
Greek names, §§ 36, 226, p. 108.
— of deities, § 100.
Grouping of subject-headings, §§ 255, 256.
Page 308
Guilds, § 56.
Half-titles, p. 14.
Harris, W: T., p. 3.
Harvard College Library, p. 3.
Heading reference, p. 14.
Headings, defined, p. 13.
— abbreviations of, p. 123.
— arrangement of, §§ 214–239.
— compound, p. 106.
— style of, §§ 130–147.
— after See or In, type for, § 147.
Hebrew names, p. 108.
— reference books, p. 132.
— words, transliteration, pp. 108, 113.
— writers, § 19 c.
Heilprin, M., p. 111.
Historical fiction, subject entry for, § 84.
Historical grouping of titles under countries, § 258 (end of
note).
Historical societies, § 56.
Homonyms, §§ 105, 254.
Hungarian names, §§ 36, 219.
Huon de Bordeaux, § 261.
Hymns, § 109.
Hyphened words, § 233, p. 117.
Illustrations, p. 102.
Imprints, pp. 13, 102, §§ 178–197.
— abbreviations of, p. 123.
— object in giving, p. 102.
— order of, pp. 103, 104.
Incomplete names, arrangement of, § 235.
Incunabula, § 261.
— reference books for, p. 132.
Indention, § 146.
Half-titles, p. 14.
Harris, W: T., p. 3.
Harvard College Library, p. 3.
Heading reference, p. 14.
Headings, defined, p. 13.
— abbreviations of, p. 123.
— arrangement of, §§ 214–239.
— compound, p. 106.
— style of, §§ 130–147.
— after See or In, type for, § 147.
Hebrew names, p. 108.
— reference books, p. 132.
— words, transliteration, pp. 108, 113.
— writers, § 19 c.
Heilprin, M., p. 111.
Historical fiction, subject entry for, § 84.
Historical grouping of titles under countries, § 258 (end of
note).
Historical societies, § 56.
Homonyms, §§ 105, 254.
Hungarian names, §§ 36, 219.
Huon de Bordeaux, § 261.
Hymns, § 109.
Hyphened words, § 233, p. 117.
Illustrations, p. 102.
Imprints, pp. 13, 102, §§ 178–197.
— abbreviations of, p. 123.
— object in giving, p. 102.
— order of, pp. 103, 104.
Incomplete names, arrangement of, § 235.
Incunabula, § 261.
— reference books for, p. 132.
Indention, § 146.
Page 309
Indexes, §§ 13, 60, 124, pp. 106, 107.
Indian names, p. 109.
Individual subjects, p. 11.
Individual works of an author, arrangement of, p. 104.
Initials, entry under, §§ 57, 60, pp. 99, 104.
— for forenames, § 139.
— for subject heading, § 158.
— arrangement of, pp. 117, 118.
Inscription, single, § 69.
Interrogation marks, p. 103.
Introductions, § 60 (13–16).
Inversion of subject names, § 107.
Italian reference books, p. 132.
Italics, §§ 131, 174, 211, 212.
Jewett, C. C., p. 3.
Jewish. See Hebrew.
Joint authors, §§ 3, 4, 60, 127, 240, p. 100.
— arrangement of works by, § 240.
Journals, of legislative bodies, § 41.
— of conventions, § 52.
— of societies, § 56.
Kings, works written by, §§ 40, 44.
— works about, § 94.
Knighthood, orders of, §§ 51, 56.
Koran, p. 100.
L’, la, entry of § 24 a.
Lakes, § 26.
Lady, as title, § 142.
Lane, W: C., p. 111.
Language, classification by, p. 9.
— of a catalog, § 204.
— of a book, to be stated in the title, §§ 167, 168, p. 102.
— of subject names, § 100.
Indian names, p. 109.
Individual subjects, p. 11.
Individual works of an author, arrangement of, p. 104.
Initials, entry under, §§ 57, 60, pp. 99, 104.
— for forenames, § 139.
— for subject heading, § 158.
— arrangement of, pp. 117, 118.
Inscription, single, § 69.
Interrogation marks, p. 103.
Introductions, § 60 (13–16).
Inversion of subject names, § 107.
Italian reference books, p. 132.
Italics, §§ 131, 174, 211, 212.
Jewett, C. C., p. 3.
Jewish. See Hebrew.
Joint authors, §§ 3, 4, 60, 127, 240, p. 100.
— arrangement of works by, § 240.
Journals, of legislative bodies, § 41.
— of conventions, § 52.
— of societies, § 56.
Kings, works written by, §§ 40, 44.
— works about, § 94.
Knighthood, orders of, §§ 51, 56.
Koran, p. 100.
L’, la, entry of § 24 a.
Lakes, § 26.
Lady, as title, § 142.
Lane, W: C., p. 111.
Language, classification by, p. 9.
— of a catalog, § 204.
— of a book, to be stated in the title, §§ 167, 168, p. 102.
— of subject names, § 100.
Page 310
— reference books for, p. 132.
Lanman, C. R., p. 111.
Latin appellatives, § 144.
Latin names, §§ 25, 272, 60, 226.
— of Greek deities, § 100.
Latinized form of Greek names, § 36.
Law, reference books for, p. 132.
Laws, §§ 41, 42.
— digests of, § 42.
Le, entry of, § 24 a.
Leonardus de Utino, § 261.
Lexicons. See Dictionaries.
Libraries, § 56 d.
Library Assoc. of the United Kingdom, catalog rules, p.
103.
Library catalogs, p. 105.
Library school catalog rules, p. 107.
Literary form, p. 13.
Literary history, § 116.
Liturgies, § 51, pp. 103, 105.
Lord, as title, § 144.
M’, Mc., etc., § 217.
Manifestoes, § 51.
Maps, p. 102.
— authors of, § 8.
— how to identify, § 197.
— mentioned in imprint, § 178.
— measurement of, § 197.
Married women, §§ 20 c, 60, p. 100.
— titles of, § 142.
Masonic dates, § 186.
Mediæval works, § 68.
Medicine, reference books for, p. 132.
Medium, defined, p. 7.
Memoirs of societies, §§ 56, 73.
Lanman, C. R., p. 111.
Latin appellatives, § 144.
Latin names, §§ 25, 272, 60, 226.
— of Greek deities, § 100.
Latinized form of Greek names, § 36.
Law, reference books for, p. 132.
Laws, §§ 41, 42.
— digests of, § 42.
Le, entry of, § 24 a.
Leonardus de Utino, § 261.
Lexicons. See Dictionaries.
Libraries, § 56 d.
Library Assoc. of the United Kingdom, catalog rules, p.
103.
Library catalogs, p. 105.
Library school catalog rules, p. 107.
Literary form, p. 13.
Literary history, § 116.
Liturgies, § 51, pp. 103, 105.
Lord, as title, § 144.
M’, Mc., etc., § 217.
Manifestoes, § 51.
Maps, p. 102.
— authors of, § 8.
— how to identify, § 197.
— mentioned in imprint, § 178.
— measurement of, § 197.
Married women, §§ 20 c, 60, p. 100.
— titles of, § 142.
Masonic dates, § 186.
Mediæval works, § 68.
Medicine, reference books for, p. 132.
Medium, defined, p. 7.
Memoirs of societies, §§ 56, 73.
Page 311
— their subject entry, § 92.
Mercantile library associations, § 56.
Messages, Presidents’ or governors’, § 46.
Middle ages, reference books for, p. 132.
Military noblemen, § 212.
Minutes of legislative bodies, § 41.
— of conventions, § 52.
Missals, § 51, p. 105.
Missing-book list, pp. 126, 127.
Months, abbreviations or names of, p. 125.
Morning, § 78.
Mottoes, § 162, p. 99.
Mountains, § 26.
Museums, § 56.
Musical works, § 9, p. 105.
Musicians, reference books for, p. 133.
Name, under what part of, to enter, §§ 19–26.
— under what form of, to enter, §§ 27–38.
— entry under parts of, §§ 57, 60.
Names, assumed, § 135.
— changed, § 22.
— foreign, §§ 23 b, c, 24.
— local, as headings, § 39.
— naturalized, § 24 d.
— personal, §§ 3–38.
— to be given in full in headings, p. 101.
— of subjects, §§ 99–111.
— variety of spelling in, §§ 30, 31.
— transliteration of. See Transliteration.
Naturalized names, § 24 d.
New, place of word in arranging, p. 117.
Newspapers, §§ 73, 78.
Nichols, Th., p. 3.
Noblemen, §§ 21, 60, p. 100.
Notes, § 201, p. 102.
Mercantile library associations, § 56.
Messages, Presidents’ or governors’, § 46.
Middle ages, reference books for, p. 132.
Military noblemen, § 212.
Minutes of legislative bodies, § 41.
— of conventions, § 52.
Missals, § 51, p. 105.
Missing-book list, pp. 126, 127.
Months, abbreviations or names of, p. 125.
Morning, § 78.
Mottoes, § 162, p. 99.
Mountains, § 26.
Museums, § 56.
Musical works, § 9, p. 105.
Musicians, reference books for, p. 133.
Name, under what part of, to enter, §§ 19–26.
— under what form of, to enter, §§ 27–38.
— entry under parts of, §§ 57, 60.
Names, assumed, § 135.
— changed, § 22.
— foreign, §§ 23 b, c, 24.
— local, as headings, § 39.
— naturalized, § 24 d.
— personal, §§ 3–38.
— to be given in full in headings, p. 101.
— of subjects, §§ 99–111.
— variety of spelling in, §§ 30, 31.
— transliteration of. See Transliteration.
Naturalized names, § 24 d.
New, place of word in arranging, p. 117.
Newspapers, §§ 73, 78.
Nichols, Th., p. 3.
Noblemen, §§ 21, 60, p. 100.
Notes, § 201, p. 102.
Page 312
— abbreviations of, p. 123.
Novels. See Fiction.
Numbers. See Numerals.
Numerals, § 157, p. 118.
— arranged as if written out, § 238.
— at the beginning of titles, § 78.
— initial, disregarded in arrangement, § 244.
O’, § 24.
Objects of a dictionary catalog, p. 8.
Oblique cases in titles, § 80.
Official writings, entry of, § 44.
Omissions. See Abridgment.
Order of the parts of an entry, § 207.
— of the parts of an imprint, § 178.
— of place and date in imprint, § 191.
— of the title to be preserved, § 148.
Order list, pp. 126, 127.
Orders, military and religious, §§ 51, 56.
Oriental authors, §§ 19 e, 60, pp. 100, 104.
— names, p. 109.
Pages, number of, §§ 178, 194, p. 102.
Pamphlets, p. 126.
Parentheses, §§ 176, 209, 210, pp. 104, 107.
Parliament, § 41.
Parties, political, § 51.
Patronymic phrases, § 144.
Periodical list, p. 126.
Periodicals, § 73, pp. 99, 104.
Periods in history, § 95.
Perkins, F: B., p. 3, § 63.
Person and country, choice between, for subject entry, § 94.
Personal name, §§ 3–38.
Persons and places, relative position in arrangement, p. 103.
Phrases, used as subject entry, §§ 93, 106.
Novels. See Fiction.
Numbers. See Numerals.
Numerals, § 157, p. 118.
— arranged as if written out, § 238.
— at the beginning of titles, § 78.
— initial, disregarded in arrangement, § 244.
O’, § 24.
Objects of a dictionary catalog, p. 8.
Oblique cases in titles, § 80.
Official writings, entry of, § 44.
Omissions. See Abridgment.
Order of the parts of an entry, § 207.
— of the parts of an imprint, § 178.
— of place and date in imprint, § 191.
— of the title to be preserved, § 148.
Order list, pp. 126, 127.
Orders, military and religious, §§ 51, 56.
Oriental authors, §§ 19 e, 60, pp. 100, 104.
— names, p. 109.
Pages, number of, §§ 178, 194, p. 102.
Pamphlets, p. 126.
Parentheses, §§ 176, 209, 210, pp. 104, 107.
Parliament, § 41.
Parties, political, § 51.
Patronymic phrases, § 144.
Periodical list, p. 126.
Periodicals, § 73, pp. 99, 104.
Periods in history, § 95.
Perkins, F: B., p. 3, § 63.
Person and country, choice between, for subject entry, § 94.
Personal name, §§ 3–38.
Persons and places, relative position in arrangement, p. 103.
Phrases, used as subject entry, §§ 93, 106.
Page 313
Place, entry of that part of a body which belongs to a, § 51.
Place and date, position of, p. 107.
Place of publication, §§ 179, 182, 184, 188, 189, p. 102.
Place of publication, abbreviations of, p. 125.
Places, names of, §§ 33–35, p. 101.
— entry under, §§ 40, 56.
— compound names of, § 230.
Plans, authors of, § 7.
Plates, mentioned in imprints, § 178.
Platforms, § 51.
Plays, §§ 84, 122.
Plural number, p. 117.
Poems, §§ 84, 122.
Polygraphic, p. 13.
Polytopical, p. 13.
Popes, § 19 a, p. 104.
Portraits, p. 102.
Portuguese reference books, p. 133.
Position, § 158.
Possessive case, § 225.
— place of, p. 117.
Practical form, p. 13.
Præses, §§ 5, 60, p. 105.
Prayer books, § 51, pp. 103, 105.
Preface writers, p. 103.
Prefixes to names, §§ 24, 60, 144, 217, 219, 227, pp. 101,
105, 118.
— arrangement of, p. 103.
Prepositions, § 76.
Presidential conventions, § 52.
President’s messages, § 46.
Princes, §§ 19 a, 60, pp. 100, 104.
Printing, place of, p. 102.
— style of, for headings § 147.
Proceedings, §§ 56, 73.
— their subject entry, § 92.
Place and date, position of, p. 107.
Place of publication, §§ 179, 182, 184, 188, 189, p. 102.
Place of publication, abbreviations of, p. 125.
Places, names of, §§ 33–35, p. 101.
— entry under, §§ 40, 56.
— compound names of, § 230.
Plans, authors of, § 7.
Plates, mentioned in imprints, § 178.
Platforms, § 51.
Plays, §§ 84, 122.
Plural number, p. 117.
Poems, §§ 84, 122.
Polygraphic, p. 13.
Polytopical, p. 13.
Popes, § 19 a, p. 104.
Portraits, p. 102.
Portuguese reference books, p. 133.
Position, § 158.
Possessive case, § 225.
— place of, p. 117.
Practical form, p. 13.
Præses, §§ 5, 60, p. 105.
Prayer books, § 51, pp. 103, 105.
Preface writers, p. 103.
Prefixes to names, §§ 24, 60, 144, 217, 219, 227, pp. 101,
105, 118.
— arrangement of, p. 103.
Prepositions, § 76.
Presidential conventions, § 52.
President’s messages, § 46.
Princes, §§ 19 a, 60, pp. 100, 104.
Printing, place of, p. 102.
— style of, for headings § 147.
Proceedings, §§ 56, 73.
— their subject entry, § 92.
Page 314
Profession, designation of, p. 101.
Proper names, §§ 205, 206.
Pseudonyms, entry under, §§ 6, 58, 60, pp. 99, 100, 104,
107.
— arrangement of, § 234.
— reference books for, p. 130.
— use of pseud., §§ 135, 136.
Publication, place of, §§ 179–182, 184, 188, 189, p. 102.
Publishers’ names, § 183, p. 102.
Publishing societies, § 59 e.
Punctuation, § 207.
Rank, designations of, p. 101.
Rare books, § 261.
“Red-tape,” indispensable in some cases, § 68.
Reference defined, p. 13.
Reference books, list of, p. 128.
References, §§ 147, 202, 203, p. 100.
— author, §§ 60, 62.
Regesta, § 43.
Registers, § 63.
Reigns, histories of, § 94.
Religious bodies, § 51, p. 105.
Repetition of titles, how avoided, § 146.
Replies to a work. See Comments.
Reporters, §§ 18, 64.
Reports, governmental, §§ 41, 46, 48.
— law, p. 100.
— of committees, § 54.
— of conventions, conferences, etc., § 52.
Reprints, § 193.
Respondent of a thesis, §§ 5, 60, pp. 104, 105.
Reviews, §§ 115, 126 d.
Revisions, §§ 15, 242.
Rivers, § 26.
Romaic names, § 36.
Proper names, §§ 205, 206.
Pseudonyms, entry under, §§ 6, 58, 60, pp. 99, 100, 104,
107.
— arrangement of, § 234.
— reference books for, p. 130.
— use of pseud., §§ 135, 136.
Publication, place of, §§ 179–182, 184, 188, 189, p. 102.
Publishers’ names, § 183, p. 102.
Publishing societies, § 59 e.
Punctuation, § 207.
Rank, designations of, p. 101.
Rare books, § 261.
“Red-tape,” indispensable in some cases, § 68.
Reference defined, p. 13.
Reference books, list of, p. 128.
References, §§ 147, 202, 203, p. 100.
— author, §§ 60, 62.
Regesta, § 43.
Registers, § 63.
Reigns, histories of, § 94.
Religious bodies, § 51, p. 105.
Repetition of titles, how avoided, § 146.
Replies to a work. See Comments.
Reporters, §§ 18, 64.
Reports, governmental, §§ 41, 46, 48.
— law, p. 100.
— of committees, § 54.
— of conventions, conferences, etc., § 52.
Reprints, § 193.
Respondent of a thesis, §§ 5, 60, pp. 104, 105.
Reviews, §§ 115, 126 d.
Revisions, §§ 15, 242.
Rivers, § 26.
Romaic names, § 36.
Page 315
Roman Catholic Church, p. 105.
Roman numerals, § 157, pp. 103, 107.
Rome, reference books for, p. 132.
Royal Geographical Society, p. 109.
Russian words, transliteration of, pp. 110, 114.
Sacred books, p. 100.
St. Louis Public School Library, p. 3.
Saints, §§ 19 b, 60, pp. 100, 104.
Same, § 159.
Sanscrit language, p. 111.
Scholia, p. 106.
Schools, § 56.
Schwartz, J., p. 3.
Science, reference books for, p. 133.
See and See also, §§ 202, 211.
Selections, p. 106.
Semitic languages, p. 111.
Serials, not to be confounded with periodicals, § 73.
Series entry, § 59 d.
— for calendars, § 43.
Series name, transposition of, § 149.
Sermons, p. 107.
Service books, p. 103, 105.
Sets of works, §§ 125, 126.
Seven Sages, history of, § 68.
Shah of Persia, § 60 (21 b).
Shelf lists, pp. 126, 127.
Ships, §§ 64, 113.
Short, defined, p. 7.
Sic, use of, § 165.
Signatures, § 196 (note).
Signs used as headings, § 57.
— arrangement of, § 236.
Size or typographical form, § 196, pp. 102, 115.
— A. L. A. rules for, § 196 (note).
Roman numerals, § 157, pp. 103, 107.
Rome, reference books for, p. 132.
Royal Geographical Society, p. 109.
Russian words, transliteration of, pp. 110, 114.
Sacred books, p. 100.
St. Louis Public School Library, p. 3.
Saints, §§ 19 b, 60, pp. 100, 104.
Same, § 159.
Sanscrit language, p. 111.
Scholia, p. 106.
Schools, § 56.
Schwartz, J., p. 3.
Science, reference books for, p. 133.
See and See also, §§ 202, 211.
Selections, p. 106.
Semitic languages, p. 111.
Serials, not to be confounded with periodicals, § 73.
Series entry, § 59 d.
— for calendars, § 43.
Series name, transposition of, § 149.
Sermons, p. 107.
Service books, p. 103, 105.
Sets of works, §§ 125, 126.
Seven Sages, history of, § 68.
Shah of Persia, § 60 (21 b).
Shelf lists, pp. 126, 127.
Ships, §§ 64, 113.
Short, defined, p. 7.
Sic, use of, § 165.
Signatures, § 196 (note).
Signs used as headings, § 57.
— arrangement of, § 236.
Size or typographical form, § 196, pp. 102, 115.
— A. L. A. rules for, § 196 (note).
Page 316
— notation for, p. 126.
Slavic languages, transliteration of, p. 110.
Societies, §§ 56, 125, 126, pp. 99, 100, 105, 107.
— publishing, § 59 e.
— references to works under the names of, § 89.
— references to, from places, p. 104.
— names of, how arranged, § 231.
Sovereigns, §§ 19 a, 60, pp. 100, 104.
Spanish names, § 36.
Spanish reference books, p. 133.
Specific entry, pp. 11, 12, 14, § 93.
Spelling, variety of, §§ 30, 31, 60, 79.
— of foreign names, p. 109.
Spurious works, § 240.
States, abbreviations for names of, p. 125.
Style of entry, §§ 130–261.
Subarrangement, chronological, § 256.
Subdivisions under countries, §§ 97, 107 (end of note), 251,
258.
— under other subjects, §§ 255–258.
Subject, defined, p. 14.
— classification by, p. 10.
— its relation to class, p. 11.
— and country, choice between, §§ 96, 97.
Subject entry, p. 13, §§ 92–121, 126 d.
— choice between general and specific, § 93.
— object of, wrongly stated, § 160 (note).
Subject entry, references between specific and general, §§
119, 120.
Subject headings spelled alike, how distinguished, § 145.
— arrangement of, p. 116.
Subject word and subject, § 104.
— not occurring in title, § 104.
— entry, p. 13, § 87.
— reference, p. 15, § 63.
— for anonymous works, p. 103.
Slavic languages, transliteration of, p. 110.
Societies, §§ 56, 125, 126, pp. 99, 100, 105, 107.
— publishing, § 59 e.
— references to works under the names of, § 89.
— references to, from places, p. 104.
— names of, how arranged, § 231.
Sovereigns, §§ 19 a, 60, pp. 100, 104.
Spanish names, § 36.
Spanish reference books, p. 133.
Specific entry, pp. 11, 12, 14, § 93.
Spelling, variety of, §§ 30, 31, 60, 79.
— of foreign names, p. 109.
Spurious works, § 240.
States, abbreviations for names of, p. 125.
Style of entry, §§ 130–261.
Subarrangement, chronological, § 256.
Subdivisions under countries, §§ 97, 107 (end of note), 251,
258.
— under other subjects, §§ 255–258.
Subject, defined, p. 14.
— classification by, p. 10.
— its relation to class, p. 11.
— and country, choice between, §§ 96, 97.
Subject entry, p. 13, §§ 92–121, 126 d.
— choice between general and specific, § 93.
— object of, wrongly stated, § 160 (note).
Subject entry, references between specific and general, §§
119, 120.
Subject headings spelled alike, how distinguished, § 145.
— arrangement of, p. 116.
Subject word and subject, § 104.
— not occurring in title, § 104.
— entry, p. 13, § 87.
— reference, p. 15, § 63.
— for anonymous works, p. 103.
Page 317
Subject words, inversion of compound, § 107.
— rules governing determination of, § 107.
Subjects, arrangement of, §§ 254–258.
— case of overlapping, § 98.
— opposite, § 103.
— synonymous, §§ 101–103.
Substitute for author’s name, §§ 57–59.
Supplements, § 259.
Surnames, §§ 20, 138, 139, p. 99, 101, 104.
— masculine and feminine forms of, § 29.
— and forenames, place of, in arranging, p. 117.
— with a prefix, pp. 105, 118.
Swedish names, § 36.
Syndetic, p. 14.
Synonymous subject names, §§ 101–103.
Synoptical table, § 121.
Synopsis of arrangement, when to be given, § 252.
Syriac words, transliteration of, p. 113.
Systematic and dictionary catalogs, p. 57.
Talmud, p. 100.
Theological libraries, subject headings in, § 117.
Theses, §§ 5, 60, pp. 100, 104, 105.
Tillinghast, C. B., p. 111.
Title, defined, p. 14.
— its influence on entry, p. 15, §§ 1, 3, 104.
Title editions, § 177.
Title entries, arrangement of, § 237.
Title entry, p. 12, §§ 68–83.
Title page, loss of, § 68.
Title pages, double, § 91.
— bibliographers’ cult of, p. 15.
Title references, §§ 81–91.
— analytical, § 127.
Titles, abbreviations in, p. 124.
— alternative, §§ 161, 205.
— rules governing determination of, § 107.
Subjects, arrangement of, §§ 254–258.
— case of overlapping, § 98.
— opposite, § 103.
— synonymous, §§ 101–103.
Substitute for author’s name, §§ 57–59.
Supplements, § 259.
Surnames, §§ 20, 138, 139, p. 99, 101, 104.
— masculine and feminine forms of, § 29.
— and forenames, place of, in arranging, p. 117.
— with a prefix, pp. 105, 118.
Swedish names, § 36.
Syndetic, p. 14.
Synonymous subject names, §§ 101–103.
Synoptical table, § 121.
Synopsis of arrangement, when to be given, § 252.
Syriac words, transliteration of, p. 113.
Systematic and dictionary catalogs, p. 57.
Talmud, p. 100.
Theological libraries, subject headings in, § 117.
Theses, §§ 5, 60, pp. 100, 104, 105.
Tillinghast, C. B., p. 111.
Title, defined, p. 14.
— its influence on entry, p. 15, §§ 1, 3, 104.
Title editions, § 177.
Title entries, arrangement of, § 237.
Title entry, p. 12, §§ 68–83.
Title page, loss of, § 68.
Title pages, double, § 91.
— bibliographers’ cult of, p. 15.
Title references, §§ 81–91.
— analytical, § 127.
Titles, abbreviations in, p. 124.
— alternative, §§ 161, 205.
Page 318
— arrangement of, §§ 240–252.
— exact copying of, § 165, p. 101.
— first words of, to be retained, § 162
— how to supply missing, § 68.
Titles, not to be taken for names, § 19 e.
— style of, §§ 148–175.
Titles of honor, p. 104, 125.
— arrangement of, § 224, p. 118.
— capitals for, §§ 205, 206, p. 101.
— italicised in headings, § 131.
— not italicised in titles, § 174.
Towns, § 40.
Toy, C. H., p. 111.
Tract catalog, p. 126.
Transactions of societies, §§ 56, 73.
— their subject entry, § 92.
Translations, §§ 168, 169, pp. 99, 105.
— arrangement of, § 245, p. 106.
— of anonymous works, § 72.
Translators, §§ 18, 60, pp. 103, 105.
Transliteration, §§ 36, 37, 38, 175, 179, p. 102.
Transliteration committee of A. L. A., report of, p. 108.
Treaties, § 50.
Trials, §§ 64, 113, 114, p. 100.
Type, §§ 130–134.
Typographical form. See Size.
Ü. See Umlaut.
Umlaut, German, pp. 103, 104, 107.
Undated editions, arrangement of, § 243.
Uniformity, importance and unimportance of, § 129.
— want of, in catalogs, § 97.
Universities, § 56.
Unmarried women, titles of, § 142 f, g.
Unnecessary words, to be omitted, §§ 152, 153.
— exact copying of, § 165, p. 101.
— first words of, to be retained, § 162
— how to supply missing, § 68.
Titles, not to be taken for names, § 19 e.
— style of, §§ 148–175.
Titles of honor, p. 104, 125.
— arrangement of, § 224, p. 118.
— capitals for, §§ 205, 206, p. 101.
— italicised in headings, § 131.
— not italicised in titles, § 174.
Towns, § 40.
Toy, C. H., p. 111.
Tract catalog, p. 126.
Transactions of societies, §§ 56, 73.
— their subject entry, § 92.
Translations, §§ 168, 169, pp. 99, 105.
— arrangement of, § 245, p. 106.
— of anonymous works, § 72.
Translators, §§ 18, 60, pp. 103, 105.
Transliteration, §§ 36, 37, 38, 175, 179, p. 102.
Transliteration committee of A. L. A., report of, p. 108.
Treaties, § 50.
Trials, §§ 64, 113, 114, p. 100.
Type, §§ 130–134.
Typographical form. See Size.
Ü. See Umlaut.
Umlaut, German, pp. 103, 104, 107.
Undated editions, arrangement of, § 243.
Uniformity, importance and unimportance of, § 129.
— want of, in catalogs, § 97.
Universities, § 56.
Unmarried women, titles of, § 142 f, g.
Unnecessary words, to be omitted, §§ 152, 153.
Page 319
Van, § 24 b, c.
Vernacular, to be used in spelling, § 27, p. 101.
Vessels. See Ships.
Volume, defined, p. 15.
Volumes, number of, § 195, p. 102.
Von, § 24 b, c.
Water lines, § 196 (note).
Weekly, § 78.
Whitney, W: D., p. 111.
Williams, Monier, p. 111.
Wister, Mrs. A. L., her translations, § 60 (18).
Women, reference books on, p. 133.
— married, §§ 20 c, 60, 142, p. 100.
— unmarried, titles of, § 142 f, g.
Word books, p. 107.
Young Men’s Christian Associations, § 56.
Vernacular, to be used in spelling, § 27, p. 101.
Vessels. See Ships.
Volume, defined, p. 15.
Volumes, number of, § 195, p. 102.
Von, § 24 b, c.
Water lines, § 196 (note).
Weekly, § 78.
Whitney, W: D., p. 111.
Williams, Monier, p. 111.
Wister, Mrs. A. L., her translations, § 60 (18).
Women, reference books on, p. 133.
— married, §§ 20 c, 60, 142, p. 100.
— unmarried, titles of, § 142 f, g.
Word books, p. 107.
Young Men’s Christian Associations, § 56.
Page 320
TRANSCRIBER’S NOTE
Original spelling and grammar have been generally retained, with some
exceptions noted below. Original printed page numbers are shown like this:
{52}. Footnotes and other anchored notes have been relabeled 1–73, and
moved from within paragraphs to nearby locations between paragraphs. I
produced the cover image and hereby assign it to the public domain.
Large curly brackets that graphically indicate combination of information
on two or more lines of text have been removed. The text was modified, if
necessary, to retain the original meaning. In most cases, as on page 8, this was
trivial. However, the task was not trivial for the chart beginning at the bottom
of page 11, so errors of interpretation are not impossible. For reference, the
original image is shown below.
The original Table of Contents failed to connect reliably with the text. The
original has been severely overhauled, without further comment here.
Precise horizontal spacing of words is essential in this book. But precise
horizontal spacing is difficult to attain in an ebook, given the constraints
necessarily imposed upon us. Browser support of html and css varies
considerably; support for specialized Unicode space characters varies; the
ebook product must be readable on many different devices with widely varying
screen sizes; and users may choose from many widely different fonts. The
following example of a catalogue entry is taken from page 90.
— Same. Erkl. von O. Heine. Berlin, 1857. 8º.
It should not look like the following, from which the required spacing has been
removed:
— Same. Erkl. von O. Heine. Berlin, 1857. 8º.
If these two examples look alike, or if strange characters appear in the first
example, then a different choice of browser or device is recommended.
Page 12. The word ‹unsorbordinated› was changed to ‹unsubordinated›.
Page 15. During the process of producing an ebook, headings are coded in
HTML as h1–h6 elements, with h1 representing the highest level in an
Original spelling and grammar have been generally retained, with some
exceptions noted below. Original printed page numbers are shown like this:
{52}. Footnotes and other anchored notes have been relabeled 1–73, and
moved from within paragraphs to nearby locations between paragraphs. I
produced the cover image and hereby assign it to the public domain.
Large curly brackets that graphically indicate combination of information
on two or more lines of text have been removed. The text was modified, if
necessary, to retain the original meaning. In most cases, as on page 8, this was
trivial. However, the task was not trivial for the chart beginning at the bottom
of page 11, so errors of interpretation are not impossible. For reference, the
original image is shown below.
The original Table of Contents failed to connect reliably with the text. The
original has been severely overhauled, without further comment here.
Precise horizontal spacing of words is essential in this book. But precise
horizontal spacing is difficult to attain in an ebook, given the constraints
necessarily imposed upon us. Browser support of html and css varies
considerably; support for specialized Unicode space characters varies; the
ebook product must be readable on many different devices with widely varying
screen sizes; and users may choose from many widely different fonts. The
following example of a catalogue entry is taken from page 90.
— Same. Erkl. von O. Heine. Berlin, 1857. 8º.
It should not look like the following, from which the required spacing has been
removed:
— Same. Erkl. von O. Heine. Berlin, 1857. 8º.
If these two examples look alike, or if strange characters appear in the first
example, then a different choice of browser or device is recommended.
Page 12. The word ‹unsorbordinated› was changed to ‹unsubordinated›.
Page 15. During the process of producing an ebook, headings are coded in
HTML as h1–h6 elements, with h1 representing the highest level in an
Page 321
outline. A new h2 level heading, ‹ENTRY.›, was inserted on page 15. A new
h4 level heading, ‹CATALOGUE.›, was inserted after the existing h3
heading ‹I. AUTHOR-ENTRY.›.
Page 16. The existing h4 heading ‹AUTHORS.› was changed to ‹A.
AUTHORS.›.
Page 17. The h5 level heading ‹1. P ERSONAL.› was changed to ‹(a.)
P ERSONAL.›. The h6 heading ‹a. Under whom as author.› was changed
to ‹(i.) Under whom as author.›. Subsequent entries in these lists were
enumerated similarly, e.g. on page 20 where ‹b.› was changed to ‹(ii.)›.
Page 21. The phrase ‹Grässe’s ‘Lehrbuch› was changed to ‹Grässe’s
“Lehrbuch›.
Page 27. The phrase ‹Tilsley’s ‘Digest› was changed to ‹Tilsley’s “Digest›.
Page 32. The phrase ‹the Christain name› was changed to ‹the Christian name›.
Page 37. The word ‹vesssels› was changed to ‹vessels›.
Page 38. A new h4 heading was inserted: ‹CATALOGUE.›.
Page 45. The h3 heading ‹III. SUBJECTS.› was changed to ‹III. SUBJECT-
ENTRY.› A new h4 level heading ‹CATALOGUE.› was inserted before the
catalogue.
Page 46. The h5 level heading ‹A. E NTRIES CONSIDERED
SEPARATELY.› was changed to ‹(a.) E NTRIES CONSIDERED
SEPARATELY.›, and the h5 level heading on page 57 was changed
similarly. The h6 level heading ‹1. C HOICE BETWEEN DIFFERENT
SUBJECTS.› was changed to ‹(i.) C HOICE BETWEEN DIFFERENT
SUBJECTS.›.
Page 51. The phrase ‹as Moral philosophy to Ethics or to Morals,
Intellectual or Mental philosophy to Intellect or Mind, Natural
philosophy to Physics, Sanitary science to Hygiene, Scientific men to
Scientists, Social science to Sociology;› was changed to ‹as Moral
philosophy to Ethics or to Morals, Intellectual; or Mental philosophy to
Intellect; or Mind, Natural philosophy to Physics, Sanitary science; or
Hygiene, Scientific men to Scientists; or Social science to Sociology;›.
Specifically, semicolons have been introduced to improve the syntax of this
complicated phrase.
Page 54. The word ‹slighest› was changed to ‹slightest›.
Pages 58–117. Several instances of originally gesperrt text, in which the
spacing between letters has been increased, have been changed to bold.
Gesperrt text—the HTML/CSS attribute letter-spacing—is not yet
supported by many epub reader browsers. Two instances of gesperrt text
have been preserved. On page 64, the name ‹Guizot, François Pierre
Guillaume› has been rendered herein with a clumsy artificial gesperrt,
namely by adding explicit spaces [u202f narrow no-break space] between
the letters of ‹F r a n ç o i s P i e r r e›. On page 84, the name ‹Franklin,
John D a v i d› has been rendered herein with similar artificial gesperrt.
h4 level heading, ‹CATALOGUE.›, was inserted after the existing h3
heading ‹I. AUTHOR-ENTRY.›.
Page 16. The existing h4 heading ‹AUTHORS.› was changed to ‹A.
AUTHORS.›.
Page 17. The h5 level heading ‹1. P ERSONAL.› was changed to ‹(a.)
P ERSONAL.›. The h6 heading ‹a. Under whom as author.› was changed
to ‹(i.) Under whom as author.›. Subsequent entries in these lists were
enumerated similarly, e.g. on page 20 where ‹b.› was changed to ‹(ii.)›.
Page 21. The phrase ‹Grässe’s ‘Lehrbuch› was changed to ‹Grässe’s
“Lehrbuch›.
Page 27. The phrase ‹Tilsley’s ‘Digest› was changed to ‹Tilsley’s “Digest›.
Page 32. The phrase ‹the Christain name› was changed to ‹the Christian name›.
Page 37. The word ‹vesssels› was changed to ‹vessels›.
Page 38. A new h4 heading was inserted: ‹CATALOGUE.›.
Page 45. The h3 heading ‹III. SUBJECTS.› was changed to ‹III. SUBJECT-
ENTRY.› A new h4 level heading ‹CATALOGUE.› was inserted before the
catalogue.
Page 46. The h5 level heading ‹A. E NTRIES CONSIDERED
SEPARATELY.› was changed to ‹(a.) E NTRIES CONSIDERED
SEPARATELY.›, and the h5 level heading on page 57 was changed
similarly. The h6 level heading ‹1. C HOICE BETWEEN DIFFERENT
SUBJECTS.› was changed to ‹(i.) C HOICE BETWEEN DIFFERENT
SUBJECTS.›.
Page 51. The phrase ‹as Moral philosophy to Ethics or to Morals,
Intellectual or Mental philosophy to Intellect or Mind, Natural
philosophy to Physics, Sanitary science to Hygiene, Scientific men to
Scientists, Social science to Sociology;› was changed to ‹as Moral
philosophy to Ethics or to Morals, Intellectual; or Mental philosophy to
Intellect; or Mind, Natural philosophy to Physics, Sanitary science; or
Hygiene, Scientific men to Scientists; or Social science to Sociology;›.
Specifically, semicolons have been introduced to improve the syntax of this
complicated phrase.
Page 54. The word ‹slighest› was changed to ‹slightest›.
Pages 58–117. Several instances of originally gesperrt text, in which the
spacing between letters has been increased, have been changed to bold.
Gesperrt text—the HTML/CSS attribute letter-spacing—is not yet
supported by many epub reader browsers. Two instances of gesperrt text
have been preserved. On page 64, the name ‹Guizot, François Pierre
Guillaume› has been rendered herein with a clumsy artificial gesperrt,
namely by adding explicit spaces [u202f narrow no-break space] between
the letters of ‹F r a n ç o i s P i e r r e›. On page 84, the name ‹Franklin,
John D a v i d› has been rendered herein with similar artificial gesperrt.
Page 322
Page 61. The h2 level heading ‹VI. STYLE.› was changed to ‹STYLE.›. A new
h3 heading was inserted: ‹CATALOGUE.›.
Page 62. The h3 level heading ‹STYLE.› was changed to ‹VI. STYLE.›.
Page 81. The h4 heading ‹H. P UNCTUATION, ETC.› was changed to ‹I.
P UNCTUATION, ETC.›.
Page 83. The h4 heading ‹I. A RRANGEMENT.› was changed to ‹J.
A RRANGEMENT.›.
Pages 94–96. In § 258, the two example catalogues were originally printed side
by side: (1.) dictionary catalogue with a “bit of classification”, on the left,
and (2.) dictionary catalogue, “pure and simple”, on the right. Semantically,
these are two independent lists, which do not comprise a table. Catalogue 2
has been moved after catalogue 1, and new headings have been inserted. In
catalogue 1, the three subjects ‹Satire.›, ‹Sonnets.›, and ‹Wit and humor.›
were subordinated under ‹Literature.›, correcting an evident error in the
original.
Page 98. The h4 heading ‹J. Etc.› was changed to ‹K. Etc.›.
Page 103. The word ‹noticeable› was originally printed on two lines as ‹notice,›
‹able›.
Page 106. The word ‹arrranged› was changed to ‹arranged›.
Pages 109–110. The table is semantically three columns but was printed in two
columns, so appears in the original to have six columns. Herein the table
has been restored to three columns. On page 109, first column, seventh
entry ‹an› is changed to ‹au›.
Page 117. The quotation mark in ‹“A single ful name› has no mate; its mate
possibly belongs after ‹John.›.
h3 heading was inserted: ‹CATALOGUE.›.
Page 62. The h3 level heading ‹STYLE.› was changed to ‹VI. STYLE.›.
Page 81. The h4 heading ‹H. P UNCTUATION, ETC.› was changed to ‹I.
P UNCTUATION, ETC.›.
Page 83. The h4 heading ‹I. A RRANGEMENT.› was changed to ‹J.
A RRANGEMENT.›.
Pages 94–96. In § 258, the two example catalogues were originally printed side
by side: (1.) dictionary catalogue with a “bit of classification”, on the left,
and (2.) dictionary catalogue, “pure and simple”, on the right. Semantically,
these are two independent lists, which do not comprise a table. Catalogue 2
has been moved after catalogue 1, and new headings have been inserted. In
catalogue 1, the three subjects ‹Satire.›, ‹Sonnets.›, and ‹Wit and humor.›
were subordinated under ‹Literature.›, correcting an evident error in the
original.
Page 98. The h4 heading ‹J. Etc.› was changed to ‹K. Etc.›.
Page 103. The word ‹noticeable› was originally printed on two lines as ‹notice,›
‹able›.
Page 106. The word ‹arrranged› was changed to ‹arranged›.
Pages 109–110. The table is semantically three columns but was printed in two
columns, so appears in the original to have six columns. Herein the table
has been restored to three columns. On page 109, first column, seventh
entry ‹an› is changed to ‹au›.
Page 117. The quotation mark in ‹“A single ful name› has no mate; its mate
possibly belongs after ‹John.›.
Page 323
*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK RULES
FOR A DICTIONARY CATALOGUE ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old
editions will be renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S.
copyright law means that no one owns a United States
copyright in these works, so the Foundation (and you!) can
copy and distribute it in the United States without permission
and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth
in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
copying and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic
works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and
trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and
may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by
following the terms of the trademark license, including paying
royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do
not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with
the trademark license is very easy. You may use this eBook for
nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works,
reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg eBooks
may be modified and printed and given away—you may do
FOR A DICTIONARY CATALOGUE ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old
editions will be renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S.
copyright law means that no one owns a United States
copyright in these works, so the Foundation (and you!) can
copy and distribute it in the United States without permission
and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth
in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
copying and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic
works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and
trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and
may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by
following the terms of the trademark license, including paying
royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do
not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with
the trademark license is very easy. You may use this eBook for
nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works,
reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg eBooks
may be modified and printed and given away—you may do
Page 324
practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not
protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to
the trademark license, especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to
the trademark license, especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
Page 325
THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG™ LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS
WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the
free distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing
this work (or any other work associated in any way with the
phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the
terms of the Full Project Gutenberg License available with this
file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and
Redistributing Project Gutenberg electronic
works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg
electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand,
agree to and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual
property (trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree
to abide by all the terms of this agreement, you must cease
using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg
electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for
obtaining a copy of or access to a Project Gutenberg electronic
work and you do not agree to be bound by the terms of this
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS
WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the
free distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing
this work (or any other work associated in any way with the
phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the
terms of the Full Project Gutenberg License available with this
file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and
Redistributing Project Gutenberg electronic
works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg
electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand,
agree to and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual
property (trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree
to abide by all the terms of this agreement, you must cease
using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg
electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for
obtaining a copy of or access to a Project Gutenberg electronic
work and you do not agree to be bound by the terms of this
Page 326
agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or entity
to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may
only be used on or associated in any way with an electronic
work by people who agree to be bound by the terms of this
agreement. There are a few things that you can do with most
Project Gutenberg electronic works even without complying
with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C
below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg electronic works if you follow the terms of this
agreement and help preserve free future access to Project
Gutenberg electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the
Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the
collection of Project Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all
the individual works in the collection are in the public domain
in the United States. If an individual work is unprotected by
copyright law in the United States and you are located in the
United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating
derivative works based on the work as long as all references to
Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope that you
will support the Project Gutenberg mission of promoting free
access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg
to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may
only be used on or associated in any way with an electronic
work by people who agree to be bound by the terms of this
agreement. There are a few things that you can do with most
Project Gutenberg electronic works even without complying
with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C
below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg electronic works if you follow the terms of this
agreement and help preserve free future access to Project
Gutenberg electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the
Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the
collection of Project Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all
the individual works in the collection are in the public domain
in the United States. If an individual work is unprotected by
copyright law in the United States and you are located in the
United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating
derivative works based on the work as long as all references to
Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope that you
will support the Project Gutenberg mission of promoting free
access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg
Page 327
works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for
keeping the Project Gutenberg name associated with the work.
You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
keeping this work in the same format with its attached full
Project Gutenberg License when you share it without charge
with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located
also govern what you can do with this work. Copyright laws
in most countries are in a constant state of change. If you are
outside the United States, check the laws of your country in
addition to the terms of this agreement before downloading,
copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating
derivative works based on this work or any other Project
Gutenberg work. The Foundation makes no representations
concerning the copyright status of any work in any country
other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project
Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must
appear prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg
work (any work on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg”
appears, or with which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” is
keeping the Project Gutenberg name associated with the work.
You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
keeping this work in the same format with its attached full
Project Gutenberg License when you share it without charge
with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located
also govern what you can do with this work. Copyright laws
in most countries are in a constant state of change. If you are
outside the United States, check the laws of your country in
addition to the terms of this agreement before downloading,
copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating
derivative works based on this work or any other Project
Gutenberg work. The Foundation makes no representations
concerning the copyright status of any work in any country
other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project
Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must
appear prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg
work (any work on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg”
appears, or with which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” is
Page 328
associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied
or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the
United States and most other parts of the world at no cost
and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may
copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the
Project Gutenberg™ License included with this eBook or
online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in
the United States, you will have to check the laws of the
country where you are located before using this eBook.
1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is
derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does
not contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission
of the copyright holder), the work can be copied and
distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any
fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to
a work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or
appearing on the work, you must comply either with the
requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain
permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg
trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is
posted with the permission of the copyright holder, your use
or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the
United States and most other parts of the world at no cost
and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may
copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the
Project Gutenberg™ License included with this eBook or
online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in
the United States, you will have to check the laws of the
country where you are located before using this eBook.
1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is
derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does
not contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission
of the copyright holder), the work can be copied and
distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any
fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to
a work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or
appearing on the work, you must comply either with the
requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain
permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg
trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is
posted with the permission of the copyright holder, your use
Page 329
and distribution must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1
through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed by the
copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project
Gutenberg License for all works posted with the permission of
the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project
Gutenberg License terms from this work, or any files
containing a part of this work or any other work associated
with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute
this electronic work, or any part of this electronic work,
without prominently displaying the sentence set forth in
paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or immediate access to the
full terms of the Project Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any
binary, compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary
form, including any word processing or hypertext form.
However, if you provide access to or distribute copies of a
Project Gutenberg work in a format other than “Plain Vanilla
ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on
the official Project Gutenberg website (www.gutenberg.org),
you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user,
provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of
through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed by the
copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project
Gutenberg License for all works posted with the permission of
the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project
Gutenberg License terms from this work, or any files
containing a part of this work or any other work associated
with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute
this electronic work, or any part of this electronic work,
without prominently displaying the sentence set forth in
paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or immediate access to the
full terms of the Project Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any
binary, compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary
form, including any word processing or hypertext form.
However, if you provide access to or distribute copies of a
Project Gutenberg work in a format other than “Plain Vanilla
ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on
the official Project Gutenberg website (www.gutenberg.org),
you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user,
provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of
Page 330
obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original
“Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format
must include the full Project Gutenberg License as specified in
paragraph 1.E.1.
1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg
works unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or
providing access to or distributing Project Gutenberg
electronic works provided that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
the use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method
you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
to the owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed
to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License.
You must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the
works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of
and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.
“Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format
must include the full Project Gutenberg License as specified in
paragraph 1.E.1.
1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg
works unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or
providing access to or distributing Project Gutenberg
electronic works provided that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
the use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method
you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
to the owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed
to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License.
You must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the
works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of
and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.
Page 331
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different
terms than are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain
permission in writing from the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project Gutenberg™
trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3
below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend
considerable effort to identify, do copyright research on,
transcribe and proofread works not protected by U.S.
copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™ collection.
Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works,
and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
“Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged
any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different
terms than are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain
permission in writing from the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project Gutenberg™
trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3
below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend
considerable effort to identify, do copyright research on,
transcribe and proofread works not protected by U.S.
copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™ collection.
Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works,
and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
“Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged
Page 332
disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes
that damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF
DAMAGES - Except for the “Right of Replacement or
Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a
Project Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement,
disclaim all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses,
including legal fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO
REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY,
BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT
EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU
AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK
OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS
AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU
GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND
- If you discover a defect in this electronic work within 90
days of receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if
any) you paid for it by sending a written explanation to the
that damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF
DAMAGES - Except for the “Right of Replacement or
Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a
Project Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement,
disclaim all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses,
including legal fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO
REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY,
BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT
EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU
AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK
OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS
AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU
GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND
- If you discover a defect in this electronic work within 90
days of receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if
any) you paid for it by sending a written explanation to the
Page 333
person you received the work from. If you received the work
on a physical medium, you must return the medium with your
written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement
copy in lieu of a refund. If you received the work
electronically, the person or entity providing it to you may
choose to give you a second opportunity to receive the work
electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also
defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
opportunities to fix the problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set
forth in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’,
WITH NO OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this
agreement violates the law of the state applicable to this
agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the
maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable
state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any provision
of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
on a physical medium, you must return the medium with your
written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement
copy in lieu of a refund. If you received the work
electronically, the person or entity providing it to you may
choose to give you a second opportunity to receive the work
electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also
defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
opportunities to fix the problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set
forth in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’,
WITH NO OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this
agreement violates the law of the state applicable to this
agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the
maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable
state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any provision
of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
Page 334
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the
Foundation, the trademark owner, any agent or employee of
the Foundation, anyone providing copies of Project
Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance with this
agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic
works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any
of the following which you do or cause to occur: (a)
distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b)
alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
Project Gutenberg work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of
Project Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new
computers. It exists because of the efforts of hundreds of
volunteers and donations from people in all walks of life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with
the assistance they need are critical to reaching Project
Gutenberg’s goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg
Foundation, the trademark owner, any agent or employee of
the Foundation, anyone providing copies of Project
Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance with this
agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic
works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any
of the following which you do or cause to occur: (a)
distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b)
alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
Project Gutenberg work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of
Project Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new
computers. It exists because of the efforts of hundreds of
volunteers and donations from people in all walks of life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with
the assistance they need are critical to reaching Project
Gutenberg’s goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg
Page 335
collection will remain freely available for generations to
come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent
future for Project Gutenberg and future generations. To learn
more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-
profit 501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the
laws of the state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status
by the Internal Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or
federal tax identification number is 64-6221541. Contributions
to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax
deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws
and your state’s laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung
Plaza #516, Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288.
Email contact links and up to date contact information can be
come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent
future for Project Gutenberg and future generations. To learn
more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-
profit 501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the
laws of the state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status
by the Internal Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or
federal tax identification number is 64-6221541. Contributions
to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax
deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws
and your state’s laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung
Plaza #516, Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288.
Email contact links and up to date contact information can be
Page 336
found at the Foundation’s website and official page at
www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive
without widespread public support and donations to carry out
its mission of increasing the number of public domain and
licensed works that can be freely distributed in machine-
readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment
including outdated equipment. Many small donations ($1 to
$5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws
regulating charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of
the United States. Compliance requirements are not uniform
and it takes a considerable effort, much paperwork and many
fees to meet and keep up with these requirements. We do not
solicit donations in locations where we have not received
written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS
or determine the status of compliance for any particular state
visit www.gutenberg.org/donate.
www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive
without widespread public support and donations to carry out
its mission of increasing the number of public domain and
licensed works that can be freely distributed in machine-
readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment
including outdated equipment. Many small donations ($1 to
$5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws
regulating charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of
the United States. Compliance requirements are not uniform
and it takes a considerable effort, much paperwork and many
fees to meet and keep up with these requirements. We do not
solicit donations in locations where we have not received
written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS
or determine the status of compliance for any particular state
visit www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Page 337
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states
where we have not met the solicitation requirements, we know
of no prohibition against accepting unsolicited donations from
donors in such states who approach us with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot
make any statements concerning tax treatment of donations
received from outside the United States. U.S. laws alone
swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current
donation methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a
number of other ways including checks, online payments and
credit card donations. To donate, please visit:
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Section 5. General Information About Project
Gutenberg electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
Gutenberg concept of a library of electronic works that could
be freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
distributed Project Gutenberg eBooks with only a loose
network of volunteer support.
where we have not met the solicitation requirements, we know
of no prohibition against accepting unsolicited donations from
donors in such states who approach us with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot
make any statements concerning tax treatment of donations
received from outside the United States. U.S. laws alone
swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current
donation methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a
number of other ways including checks, online payments and
credit card donations. To donate, please visit:
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Section 5. General Information About Project
Gutenberg electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
Gutenberg concept of a library of electronic works that could
be freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
distributed Project Gutenberg eBooks with only a loose
network of volunteer support.
Page 338
Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several
printed editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected
by copyright in the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included.
Thus, we do not necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with
any particular paper edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search
facility: www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg,
including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new
eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter to hear
about new eBooks.
printed editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected
by copyright in the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included.
Thus, we do not necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with
any particular paper edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search
facility: www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg,
including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new
eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter to hear
about new eBooks.